JP7268912B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachislot machines and pachinko machines.

In a conventional game machine, an attendant uses a setting key to turn on a setting key-type switch (setting key switch) and then turns on the power, or an attendant uses the setting key while the power is turned on. There is a game machine in which a maintenance menu screen related to maintenance that can be performed in the game machine is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in conjunction with turning on a setting key-type switch (setting key switch). (See Patent Document 1, for example).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-183205 (for example, paragraphs 0997 to 1059, FIGS. 132 to 137, etc.)

By the way, there is a wide variety of maintenance that can be performed in a game machine, and considering the efficiency of maintenance, etc., there is room for improvement in the current processing control of maintenance.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine with improved processing control of maintenance that can be performed in the gaming machine.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment is
In gaming machines,
display means;
A door mechanism attached to the main body of the game machine so that it can be opened and closed,
open/close detection means for detecting an open/closed state of the door mechanism;
a setting key switch,
an operation means provided in the door mechanism and operable from the front side of the game machine;
maintenance processing means for performing maintenance processing related to maintenance that can be performed in the game machine;
a speaker;
a production button for receiving a player's production operation;
with
The maintenance processing means
In the maintenance process, a maintenance menu screen is displayed on the display means in the amusement machine based on the establishment of a predetermined condition that the door mechanism is in an open state and the setting key-type switch is on when the power is turned on. Predetermined maintenance that is part of a plurality of types of maintenance that can be performed and that includes at least a first predetermined maintenance regarding confirmation of the output of the speaker and a second predetermined maintenance regarding confirmation of the operation of the production button. performing a predetermined maintenance process for displaying a predetermined maintenance menu screen corresponding to maintenance,
In the maintenance process, the maintenance menu screen is displayed on the display means based on the establishment of a specific condition that the setting key-type switch is changed from off to on after the power is turned on and the door mechanism is in an open state. as a part of a plurality of types of maintenance that can be performed in the game machine, and performing specific maintenance processing including processing for displaying a specific maintenance menu screen corresponding to specific maintenance different from the predetermined maintenance , terminating the specific maintenance process when a condition is satisfied that the setting key-shaped switch is turned off during execution of the specific maintenance process;
In the change in the opening/closing state of the door mechanism, there is no change in the process from the display of the specific maintenance menu screen to the end of the specific maintenance process in the specific maintenance process,
There is no overlapping maintenance between the predetermined maintenance menu screen and the specific maintenance menu screen,
In the predetermined maintenance process, even if the predetermined condition is satisfied, after the predetermined condition is satisfied, the detection result by the opening/closing detection means does not indicate the closed state of the door mechanism, and the door mechanism is opened. if it remains in the state, the predetermined maintenance menu screen is not displayed on the display means;
In the predetermined maintenance process, the predetermined condition is satisfied, and after the predetermined condition is satisfied, the detection result by the opening/closing detection means indicates that the door mechanism is closed while the setting key-type switch is kept on. When it becomes , the predetermined maintenance menu screen is displayed on the display means,
When the predetermined maintenance menu screen is displayed, the predetermined maintenance can be executed according to an operation on the operation means,
The maintenance processing means is capable of executing the second predetermined maintenance during execution of the first predetermined maintenance.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the maintenance menu screen displayed on the display means corresponds to predetermined maintenance, which is a part of a plurality of types of maintenance that can be performed in the gaming machine, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. Since the predetermined maintenance menu screen is displayed, it is possible to reduce the displayed information and make the maintenance menu screen easier to see. In addition, based on the establishment of a specific condition, a maintenance menu screen is displayed on the display means, which is a part of a plurality of types of maintenance that can be performed in the game machine, and which is different from the predetermined maintenance and corresponds to the specific maintenance. Since the maintenance menu screen is displayed, it is possible to reduce the displayed information and make the maintenance menu screen easier to see. Further, even if the maintenance processing means recognizes that the predetermined condition is satisfied due to some trouble or fraud, if it recognizes that the door mechanism is in the open state, the predetermined maintenance menu screen is displayed by the display means. can be prevented from being displayed on In addition, by performing the first predetermined maintenance regarding the output confirmation of the speaker and the second predetermined maintenance regarding the operation confirmation of the performance button in parallel, the work time for the predetermined maintenance by the staff can be shortened.

It is a figure which shows the external structure of the gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a game machine according to this embodiment; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the function flow of the gaming machine based on this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the playability of the 1st gaming machine based on this embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining the mode of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the various tables of the 1st gaming machine based on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the various tables of the 1st gaming machine based on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement table of the 1st gaming machine based on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table of the 1st gaming machine based on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table of the 1st gaming machine based on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table of the 1st gaming machine based on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table of the 1st gaming machine based on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table of the 1st gaming machine based on this embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a correspondence relationship between an internal winning combination, a stop operation mode, a display combination, etc., of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment; It is a figure for demonstrating the limit process of the 1st gaming machine based on this embodiment. It is a diagram showing the configuration of the winning flag storage area, winning operation flag storage area, and symbol code storage area of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the carryover combination storage area|region of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the configuration of a game state flag storage area of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment; It is a diagram showing the configuration of the mode flag storage area of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the operation|movement stop button storage area|region of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a diagram showing the configuration of the pressing order storage area of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing power-on processing executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing medal acceptance/start check processing executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing internal lottery processing executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing a game start state control process executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment; It is a flow chart showing processing at the start of a game during an advantageous section, which is executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing reel stop control processing executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing a game end state control process executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing at the end of a game during an advantageous section, which is executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing regular interruption processing executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing an overview of sub-side control processing executed by the sub-control circuit of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment; It is a diagram showing a configuration example of a medalless gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the main-control board of the game machine which concerns on this embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an outline of the speaker device of the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment, and (b) is an explanation of opening portions for outputting sound waves to the outside of the first speaker unit and the second speaker unit. FIG. 2C is a diagram showing an outline of a speaker unit included in the speaker device; FIG. (a) is a diagram for explaining an outline of the directivity of convergence among the directivities realized by the speaker device of the second game machine according to the present embodiment; (b) is an outline of the directivity of diffusion; and (c) is a diagram for explaining an outline of normal directivity. It is a figure for demonstrating interference of the upper side 1st sound wave and the lower side 2nd sound wave in the 1st game which concerns on this embodiment. (a) is a diagram for explaining convergence directivity control according to the present embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example for explaining the relationship with the sound output timing of the second sound wave by the speaker unit; (a) is a diagram for explaining diffusion directivity control according to the present embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example for explaining the relationship with the sound output timing of the second sound wave by the speaker unit; It is a diagram showing an example of a circuit related to control of directivity in the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing Modification 1 of the circuit involved in directivity control in the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification 2 of the circuit involved in directivity control in the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment; It is a figure which shows the structure of the initialization command transmitted to a sub-control circuit from the main-control circuit of the 3rd gaming machine based on this embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing the configuration of a periodic command (no-operation command) transmitted from the main control circuit to the sub-control circuit of the third gaming machine according to the present embodiment, and (b) is an input of (a). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a port allocation table; FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing command transmission timings for explaining command transmission from the main control circuit to the sub-control circuit of the third gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 10 is a timing chart for explaining the state (on state or off state) of the setting key-type switch in the third gaming machine according to the present embodiment; 13 is a flow chart showing setting change processing (no door opening/closing condition) executed by the main control circuit of the third gaming machine according to the present embodiment; 13 is a flow chart showing setting confirmation processing (no door opening/closing condition) executed by the main control circuit of the third gaming machine according to the present embodiment; 13 is a flow chart showing setting change processing (with door opening/closing condition) executed by the main control circuit of the third gaming machine according to the present embodiment; 14 is a flow chart showing setting confirmation processing (with door opening/closing condition) executed by the main control circuit of the third gaming machine according to the present embodiment; 13 is a flowchart showing setting change/confirmation processing (with door opening/closing condition) executed by the main control circuit of the third gaming machine according to the present embodiment; 13 is a flowchart showing maintenance processing (no door opening/closing condition) executed by the sub-control circuit of the third gaming machine according to the present embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing maintenance processing (with door opening/closing condition) executed by the sub-control circuit of the third gaming machine according to the present embodiment; FIG. It is an example of the screen displayed on the sub display device of the third gaming machine according to the present embodiment, (a) is a maintenance menu top screen, (b) is a total medal information screen, (c) is a setting It is a change/confirmation history screen, and (d) is an error information history screen. 14 is a flowchart showing setting change/confirmation error detection processing executed by the sub-control circuit of the third gaming machine according to the present embodiment; FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing setting key information creation processing of FIG. 56; 57 is a flowchart showing setting error notification processing of FIG. 56; It is an example of a screen displayed on the sub-display device of the third gaming machine according to the present embodiment, and is an error screen for a setting operation error. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a gaming machine that is a modification of the third gaming machine according to the present embodiment, and (b) shows one of the selection buttons and effect buttons in (a). It is a figure which shows the structural example. 13 is a flow chart showing setting change processing executed by the main control circuit of a gaming machine which is a modification of the third gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing setting confirmation processing executed by a main control circuit of a gaming machine that is a modification of the third gaming machine according to the present embodiment; 13 is a flowchart showing maintenance processing during setting change executed by a sub-control circuit of a gaming machine which is a modified example of the third gaming machine according to the present embodiment; FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing maintenance processing during setting confirmation executed by a sub-control circuit of a gaming machine which is a modification of the third gaming machine according to the present embodiment; FIG. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a specific example of a setting changing screen displayed in the setting changing maintenance process of FIG. 63 ; FIG. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a specific example of a maintenance menu screen during setting change for explaining the processing contents of steps S1106 to S1109 in the maintenance processing during setting change in FIG. 63; FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a specific example (Part 1) of a setting-confirming maintenance menu screen and a setting-confirming maintenance screen for explaining the processing contents of steps S1152 to S1155 in the setting-confirming maintenance process of FIG. 64; 65 is a diagram showing a specific example (part 2) of the setting-confirming maintenance menu screen and the setting-confirming maintenance screen for explaining the processing contents of steps S1152 to S1155 in the setting-confirming maintenance process of FIG. 64; FIG. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a specific example (part 3) of the setting-confirming maintenance menu screen and the setting-confirming maintenance screen for explaining the processing contents of steps S1152 to S1155 in the setting-confirming maintenance process of FIG. 64; 65 is a diagram showing a specific example (part 4) of the setting-confirming maintenance menu screen and the setting-confirming maintenance screen for explaining the processing contents of steps S1152 to S1155 in the setting-confirming maintenance process of FIG. 64; FIG. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a specific example (No. 5) of the setting-confirming maintenance menu screen and the setting-confirming maintenance screen for explaining the processing contents of steps S1152 to S1155 in the setting-confirming maintenance process of FIG. 64; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing specific examples of a user menu screen and a volume adjustment screen in a gaming machine that is a modification of the third gaming machine according to the present embodiment;

A gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described below with reference to the drawings. In this embodiment, a pachislot machine will be described as an example of a game machine.

[1. Structure of pachislot machine]
First, the structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 shows the external structure of the pachi-slot machine 1, and FIG. 2 shows the internal structure of the pachi-slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. Also, for convenience of explanation, the following description of the external structure may include a portion of the internal structure, and the description of the internal structure may include a portion of the external structure.

[1-1. External structure]
[1-1-1. Housing]
A pachi-slot machine 1 is composed of a rectangular box-shaped housing 2 . The housing 2 includes a metal cabinet G having a rectangular opening on the front side as a game machine main body, an upper door mechanism UD arranged in the upper front part of the cabinet G, and a lower front part of the cabinet G. and a lower door mechanism DD.

The cabinet G has an intermediate support plate G1, a pair of left and right side walls G2, a rear wall G3, a top wall G4, and a bottom wall G5. In addition, in FIG.1 and FIG.2, illustration of the back wall G3 and the bottom wall G5 is abbreviate|omitted. In addition, two openings G4a are formed in the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G so as to penetrate in the vertical direction at a predetermined interval in the horizontal direction. A wooden plate member G4b is attached to the top wall G4 so as to block the two openings G4a.

The plate member G4b is used to fix the pachi-slot machine 1 to a game island (not shown) when it is installed in the amusement arcade. or integrally formed with the top wall G4. Moreover, as long as a certain strength is ensured for the cabinet G, a part or all of each component can be made of wood or resin material.

Inside the cabinet G, an upper opening G101 is formed that opens forward with the intermediate support plate G1 interposed therebetween. A side opening G102 is formed. That is, the interior of the cabinet G is partitioned into an upper space and a lower space with an intermediate support plate G1 interposed therebetween, and the intermediate support plate G1 functions as a partition plate that partitions the interior of the cabinet G into the upper space and the lower space. there is The upper space is a space on the rear side of the upper door mechanism UD inside the cabinet G, and accommodates a main display device 210 and the like, which will be described later. The lower space is a space on the rear side of the lower door mechanism DD inside the cabinet G, and accommodates a reel unit RU, a main control board 71, and the like, which will be described later.

Note that the cabinet G does not necessarily have to include the intermediate support plate G1. That is, as long as each device and the like can be properly accommodated in the cabinet G, the upper space and the lower space may not be partitioned. Further, the cabinet G can be simply referred to as a "box" or "main body", and functions as a frame for supporting or fixing the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD. It can also be referred to as a "support", "support frame", or "fixed frame".

[1-1-2. front door]
The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are formed so as to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet G, and are provided so as to be able to block the upper and lower spaces of the opening in the cabinet G. As shown in FIG. That is, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD function as front doors provided on the front side of the pachi-slot machine 1 .

Each of the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD is attached to the cabinet G so as to be openable and closable, for example, by an opening/closing mechanism (not shown) such as a hinge provided on the left side wall G2. Either one of the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD can be opened and closed by the opening/closing mechanism described above, and the other can be attached and detached only when one of the door mechanisms is in an open state. can also

The upper door mechanism UD has an effect display window UD1 provided at its center and an upper lamp 23 provided above the effect display window UD1. The effect display window UD1 is configured as, for example, a transparent panel made of resin, and enables visual recognition of the effect image displayed on the screen device C constituting the main display device 210, which will be described later, provided on the rear side thereof. Note that, in this embodiment, the main display device 210 that performs the effect display through the effect display window UD1 may be described as the main effect display section 21 in some cases.

The lower door mechanism DD has a main display window 4 provided substantially in the center of its upper portion, and a reel unit RU attached to the inside of the cabinet G behind the main display window 4. there is

The reel unit RU is mainly composed of three reels 3L (left reel), 3C (middle reel), and 3R (right reel). Each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is composed of, for example, a cylindrically formed reel body and a translucent reel band attached to the peripheral surface of the reel body. ) are drawn at predetermined intervals along the direction of rotation of the reel. The reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are arranged in parallel (in a horizontal row) so that they can rotate vertically at a constant speed. The main display window 4 is configured as, for example, a transparent panel made of resin, and allows at least a portion (for example, three) of the symbols on the peripheral surfaces of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R to be visible. Further, inside each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, a light source (a reel lamp included in lamps and LEDs, which will be described later) is provided at a position where the pattern can be viewed at least through the main display window 4. At least each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R When 3C and 3R are rotating, they are illuminated from the inside with a constant luminance to ensure the visibility of the pattern.

Further, the lower door mechanism DD has a sub effect display section 22 provided on the left side of the main display window 4 and a effect button 10b provided on the right side of the main display window 4 . The sub effect display section 22 displays the effect image displayed on the sub display device 220 which will be described later. It should be noted that the sub-rendering display section 22 can be configured as a touch panel so that it functions not only as a function of displaying a performance, but also as one of the buttons for performance. The effect button 10b is an operation unit that receives a player's operation for effect (effect operation).

In addition, the lower door mechanism DD is provided substantially in the center of the substantially horizontal pedestal formed below the main display window 4, with the MAX bet button 6a, the 1 bet button 6b, and the checkout button 9 provided on the left side. and a medal slot 5 provided on the right side.

The MAX bet button 6a and the 1 bet button 6b are the player's game operations (betting operations, "insertion operations" and "betting operations") for using the medals deposited (credited) inside the pachislot machine 1. ”, etc.). When the MAX bet button 6a is operated, if the current bet number is less than the maximum bet number (for example, 3) and the number of credited medals is equal to or greater than the difference, the maximum bet number of medals is bet. be. On the other hand, if the credited medals are less than the difference, no medals are bet. Further, when the 1 bet button 6b is operated, if the current bet number is less than the maximum bet number and there is one or more credited medals, one medal is bet.

The settlement button 9 is an operation unit that receives a game operation (settlement operation) of the player for returning credited medals (settlement). If the payment button 9 is operated while there are no credited medals, the medals to be inserted or paid out will be credited within the creditable number (for example, 50). A player's game operation (C/P mode selection operation) for enabling selection of either mode (C mode) or a pay mode (P mode) in which the medals are not credited may be accepted. That is, the settlement button 9 can also function as a so-called C/P button. The effect button 10a is an operation unit that receives a player's operation for effect (effect operation).

The medal slot 5 accepts medals that are thrown into the pachi-slot machine 1 from the outside by a player. The received medals are detected by the selector 31, which will be described later, and it is determined whether or not they are proper medals. If the one received medal is not proper, the received medal is returned from a medal payout port 11, which will be described later. Also, if the accepted one medal is correct, and if the current bet number is less than the maximum bet number, one medal is bet. If the current number of bets is the maximum number of bets and the credited medals have not reached the creditable number, one medal is credited. On the other hand, when the credited medals have reached the creditable number, the received medals are returned from the medal payout port 11, which will be described later.

Further, the lower door mechanism DD has an information display device 14 provided between the main display window 4 and the above-described pedestal. The information display device 14 includes a plurality of lamps (LEDs) and 7-segment LEDs, and displays information about the game according to lighting modes thereof.

Further, the lower door mechanism DD includes a start lever 7 provided on the left side, three stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R provided substantially in the center and a and a locking mechanism 15 . The start lever 7 is an operation unit which is attached so as to be tiltable within a predetermined angle range and receives a game operation (start operation) by the player for starting a game. Each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R is provided corresponding to each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and is an operation unit that receives a game operation (stop operation) by the player for stopping the rotation of each reel.

The locking mechanism 15 is composed of, for example, a key cylinder lock, and when the lower door mechanism DD is in the closed state, a manager on the amusement arcade side (for example, an amusement arcade clerk, etc.; the same shall apply hereinafter) inserts a door key (not shown) into the keyhole. ) is inserted and turned to the right to unlock, and the lower door mechanism DD is opened. Note that the locking mechanism 15 may have a function as a reset switch as well as a function to manage opening and closing of the door mechanism. For example, when an amusement arcade manager inserts a door key into a keyhole and turns it to the left, it may be possible to detect a reset operation similar to the reset switch 53 described later. Further, in this embodiment, when the lower door mechanism DD is opened, the upper door mechanism UD can also be opened in conjunction therewith. A separate mechanism may be provided so that the opening and closing can be managed independently.

In addition, the lower door mechanism DD includes a waist panel 13 provided in the center of its lower portion, a medal receiving tray 12 provided below the waist panel 13, and a medal dispensing opening 11 provided above the medal receiving tray 12. , and sound transmission holes 24 a and 24 b provided on the left and right sides of the medal payout port 11 .

The waist panel 13 includes, for example, a decorative panel on which model information such as a logo representing the name of the model or a character representing a motif is drawn, and a light source for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side (such as lamps and LEDs, which will be described later). lumbar ramp included). The medal tray 12 stores medals paid out from the medal payout port 11. - 特許庁The medal pay-out port 11 discharges medals paid out (or returned) from the inside of the pachi-slot machine 1 to the outside. The medals discharged from the medal pay-out port 11 include those paid out from a hopper device 32 described below and those returned from a selector 31 described later through a cancel chute (not shown). The sound transmission holes 24a and 24b are located on the back sides of the respective speakers 35a and 35b (the speaker 35a is omitted in FIG. 2) mounted inside the cabinet G. is transmitted toward the front side of the pachi-slot machine 1.

In this embodiment, an upper door mechanism UD and a lower door mechanism DD are provided in correspondence with the fact that the inside of the cabinet G is divided into an upper space and a lower space. As long as it can be opened and closed, it can be configured as a single door mechanism, or it can be configured as three or more door mechanisms. Moreover, it can also be configured as a double door mechanism (for example, an outer door and an inner door) in the front-rear direction. Further, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD can be simply referred to as "doors" or "doors", and since they function as members capable of opening and closing the opening in the cabinet G, they can be referred to as "opening/closing members" or "doors." It can also be called a "member", or a "door member" or the like.

[1-1-3. Fluctuation display]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 has the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the main display window 4. As shown in FIG. When the start lever 7 is operated (when the player performs a start operation), the reels 3L, 3C and 3R start rotating by driving and controlling stepping motors 51L, 51C and 51R, which will be described later. As a result, the pattern displayed on the main display window 4 is displayed in a variable manner. When the respective stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R are operated (when the player performs a stop operation), stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R, which will be described later, are driven and controlled for the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. to stop each rotation. As a result, the symbols displayed in the main display window 4 are stopped and displayed.

That is, each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the main display window 4 has a variable display section (means) capable of variably displaying (and stopping) a plurality of symbols in a plurality of rows, or a variable displaying (and stopping) display of a plurality of symbols. ) constitute a possible plurality of variable display units (means). The variable display section (means) can also be referred to as a "symbol display section (means)" or a "variable display section (means)". The pattern can also be referred to as a "picture" or "pattern", or as long as it is information visually identifiable by the player, it can also be referred to as "identification information" in that sense.

Further, the main display window 4 is constructed so that when the rotation of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is stopped, three symbols arranged consecutively are displayed within the frame. That is, the main display window 4 displays one pattern (three in total) in each of the upper, middle, and lower regions of each column (the frame of the main display window 4 displays 3 rows x 3 columns). The pattern is displayed in the form of ). Note that the main display window 4 is sometimes referred to as a "design display area", a "window", or the like.

A valid line is defined in the main display window 4 . The effective line is a line for determining whether or not a prescribed combination of symbols is displayed when symbols of all rows are stopped and displayed in response to a player's stop operation. In that sense, the activated line can also be referred to as a "win line" or a "decision line". Also, the effective line is configured as a line connecting any of the regions of each column. That is, when the main display window 4 is configured to display patterns in the form of 3 rows×3 columns, it is possible to define a maximum of 27 effective lines. However, in practice, one or more of the lines can be defined as valid lines, and the other lines can be defined as invalid lines that are not valid lines.

For example, the line connecting the middle area of the reel 3L, the middle area of the reel 3C, and the middle area of the reel 3R is the "center line", the upper area of the reel 3L, the upper area of the reel 3C, and the upper area of the reel 3R. The connecting line is the "top line", the line connecting the lower area of the reel 3L, the lower area of the reel 3C, and the lower area of the reel 3R is the "bottom line", the lower area of the reel 3L, the middle area of the reel 3C, and the reel 3R. A line connecting the upper area is called a "cross-up line", and a line connecting the upper area of the reel 3L, the middle area of the reel 3C, and the lower area of the reel 3R is called a "cross-down line". One or more of these lines are often defined as effective lines because they are lines that connect each area in a straight line. However, as described above, a so-called irregular line that connects each region of each column with a polygonal line can also be defined as an effective line.

In addition, in order for the activated line to be activated, it is necessary to bet the required amount of medals for the current game (the number of medals that can be used to start the game) prior to the player's start operation. The number of activated lines to be converted may be the same regardless of the number of bets, or may vary according to the number of bets. For example, assuming that the above-mentioned three lines of "center line", "top line", and "bottom line" are defined as active lines, in the case of the former, the number of bets is any of 1 to 3. Even if the 'center line', 'top line', and 'bottom line' are enabled. On the other hand, in the latter case, if the number of bets is 1, only "center line" is activated, and if the number of bets is 2, "center line" and "top line" are activated, and the number of bets is 3. If (maximum number of bets), "center line", "top line" and "bottom line" are enabled.

In this embodiment, the variable display section has three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and a main display window 4 capable of displaying three symbols in each column. Although the symbols are displayed in the form of columns, the pattern display form in the variable display section is not limited to this. For example, the number of reels is set to 1, 2, or 4 or more, and, for example, the number of symbols displayed in each row is set to 1, 2, or 4 or more. You can also display the pattern with . In this case, the number of valid lines that can be defined also increases or decreases as appropriate.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display section variably displays the symbols by rotating the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, but the configuration of the variable display section is not limited to this. For example, a configuration using an image display device similar to the main display device 210 and the sub-display device 220, which will be described later, may be used, or a configuration using other display devices (eg, organic EL, 7-segment LED, etc.) may be used. . Also, for example, a configuration using other physical devices (for example, a belt or the like) may be used. Also, the arrangement, size, etc. of the variable display section can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display section functions as a main side display section that is directly related to the game and is controlled by the main control circuit 100, which will be described later. A variable display section may be provided as a sub-side display section related to an effect not directly related to the game, which is controlled by the game. Note that the sub-side display section can be configured using the main display device 210 and the sub-display device 220, for example. That is, a variable display unit that variably displays symbols in accordance with a player's start operation (or other start conditions are met), and stops and displays symbols in response to a player's stop operation (or other stop conditions are met). As such, not only the main side display section but also the sub side display section may be provided. In this case, in order to allow the player to identify whether or not the variable display section is directly related to the game, characters such as "pachislot" or "main reel" are displayed near the main side display section. It is sufficient that an identification mark indicating is attached so that it is possible to identify that the variable display portion is the main side display portion. Note that such an identification display may be displayed on the main display device 210 or the sub display device 220 .

[1-1-4. Medal slot]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes the medal slot 5 for receiving medals inserted into the pachi-slot machine 1 from the outside by the player. Note that the medal slot 5 and a selector 31, which will be described later, have the function of betting the number of medals required for one game, like the MAX bet button 6a and the 1 bet button 6b. , for example, can be rephrased as a bet operation. Therefore, it can be said that the medal slot 5 is a betting operation detection unit (means) capable of detecting the player's betting operation. The shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal slot can be changed as appropriate. Also, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless game machine, which will be described later, this configuration is not necessarily essential.

In the present embodiment, as an example of the game value that is used in the game or given according to the game result, medals are used as game media. It is not limited to this. For example, coins, game balls, game point data or tokens, etc. may be used. Also, the game value can be simply referred to as "value" or "game value".

[1-1-5. Operation part]
The pachi-slot machine 1 includes, for example, the following operation units as operation units that can be operated by the player. It should be noted that each operation unit shown below is merely an example, and may be configured to include an operation unit different from these, or may be configured not to include an operation unit that is not necessarily essential among these. .

[1-1-5-1. bet button]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is provided with the MAX bet button 6a and the 1 bet button 6b for receiving a player's bet operation for using medals deposited (credited) therein. Also, such a bet operation is detected by a bet switch 6S, which will be described later. Therefore, the MAX bet button 6a, the 1 bet button 6b, and the bet switch 6S constitute a bet operation detection section (means) capable of detecting the player's bet operation. Note that the bet button only needs to be able to detect the player's betting operation, and its shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be changed as appropriate. Further, although the MAX bet button 6a and the 1-bet button 6b are provided in this embodiment, only the MAX bet button 6a may be provided without providing the 1-bet button 6b. Also, a 2-bet button for betting two medals may be provided separately.

[1-1-5-2. start lever]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a start lever 7 for receiving a player's start operation for starting a game. Also, such a start operation is detected by a start switch 7S, which will be described later. Therefore, the start lever 7 and the start switch 7S constitute a start operation detection section (means) capable of detecting the player's start operation. It should be noted that the start lever only needs to be able to detect the player's start operation, and its shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-5-3. stop button]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is provided with respective stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R which are provided corresponding to the respective reels 3L, 3C, 3R and which receive a player's stop operation for stopping the respective rotations. Moreover, such a start operation is detected by a stop switch 8S, which will be described later. Therefore, the respective stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R and the stop switch 8S constitute a stop operation detection section (means) capable of detecting the player's stop operation. It should be noted that the stop button only needs to be able to detect the player's stop operation, and its shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-5-4. Settlement button]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes the checkout button 9 for accepting the player's checkout operation (return operation) for returning (checkout) credited medals. Further, such a settlement operation is detected by a settlement switch 9S, which will be described later. Therefore, the checkout button 9 and the checkout switch 9S constitute a checkout operation detection section (means) capable of detecting the checkout operation of the player. It should be noted that the checkout button only needs to be able to detect the checkout operation of the player, and its shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-5-5. production button]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is provided with effect buttons 10a and 10b for receiving the player's effect operations. Incidentally, such an effect operation is detected by a detection switch (not shown) provided corresponding to each effect button. Therefore, the effect buttons 10a and 10b and the detection switch constitute a effect operation detection section (means) capable of detecting the effect operation of the player. It should be noted that the effect button only needs to be able to detect the player's effect operation, and its shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be changed as appropriate. In addition, in this embodiment, two production buttons 10a and 10b are provided, but it is possible to configure without providing either of them, or to provide only one of them. can. Also, it can be configured to provide three or more production buttons.

The main uses of the production buttons are to change the production mode when executing a specific production (for example, an operation-linked production described later), and to perform a selection/decision operation in the user menu described later. Therefore, it is also possible to configure so as to provide a presentation button according to the application. For example, for the former purpose, the production buttons 10a and 10b are used, and for the latter purpose, the above-described touch panel may be used. For use in the latter application, a jog dial, a cross key, or the like that can accept selection/decision operations can be provided as separate effect buttons.

[1-1-6. medal outlet]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 has the medal payout port 11 for discharging medals paid out (or returned) from inside the pachi-slot machine 1 to the outside. When a prize is won and medals are paid out, the medal payout port 11 gives the player the medals paid out from the hopper device 32, which will be described later. It can be said that it is part of the means. Also, the shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal payout port can be changed as appropriate. Also, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless game machine, which will be described later, this configuration is not necessarily essential.

[1-1-7. Medal tray]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes the medal receiving tray 12 for storing medals paid out from the medal payout port 11 . That is, the medal receiving tray 12 constitutes a storage section (means) capable of storing the given game value. Note that the shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal receiving tray can be changed as appropriate. Also, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless game machine, which will be described later, this configuration is not necessarily essential.

[1-1-8. waist panel]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes, for example, a decorative panel on which model information is drawn and a waist panel 13 composed of a waist lamp for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side. The waist panel 13 basically indicates to the player what kind of model the pachislot machine 1 is. can also be configured as one of the effect executing means capable of executing the effect by configuring with an image display device or the like.

[1-1-9. Information display]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is provided with the information display device 14 that displays game-related information by its lighting mode. In other words, the information display device 14 constitutes an information display section (means) capable of displaying information about games.

The information display device 14 includes, for example, an insert lamp, a start lamp, a replay lamp, a bet number lamp, a credit lamp, a payout number lamp, an instruction monitor, a limit lamp, and the like.

The insert lamp lights up to indicate that medals can be inserted. The start lamp indicates that the game can be started by operating the start lever 7 by turning on the start lamp. The replay lamp lights to indicate that medals have been automatically inserted due to the operation of the replay. The bet number lamp lights up to display the number of medals bet. The credit lamp displays the number of credited medals according to its lighting mode. The number-of-payouts lamp displays the number of medals (number of payouts) paid out according to the game result by its lighting mode.

Further, the instruction monitor includes a notification lamp (stop operation display section) and a section lamp (state display section). The notification lamp lights up in a manner uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation to be notified under a situation (for example, AT state) in which the information of the stop operation is notified to the player, so that the information of the stop operation is displayed. display. It should be noted that the "mode uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation to be notified" is, for example, the pressing order (in the present embodiment, this may be described as the "batting order"), the 1st (the first stop operation is In the case of announcing "2nd (perform the first stop operation to the reel 3C)", the numerical value "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor. displays the numerical value "2" on the instruction monitor, and displays the numerical value "3" on the instruction monitor when notifying the pushing order "3rd (performing the first stop operation to the reel 3R)". It's about. Note that the notification lamp may not necessarily be provided separately from the credit lamp and the payout number lamp. For example, either a credit lamp or a payout lamp may be used to display stop operation information.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in a situation where the information of the stop operation is notified to the player, the sub-side notification means (for example, the main effect display section 21) controlled by the sub-control circuit 200, which will be described later. In addition, the information of the stop operation is notified also by the instruction monitor as the main side notification means controlled by the main control circuit 100 which will be described later. The manner of notification by the main-side notification means and the manner of notification by the sub-side notification means may be different from each other. That is, the main-side notification means may perform notification in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information on the stop operation to be notified, and does not necessarily need to directly notify the information on the stop operation. For example, in the case of announcing the pressing order "1st", even if the indication monitor displays the numerical value "1", there is a possibility that the content of the notification cannot be specified depending on the player. On the other hand, the sub-side notification means may directly notify the information of the stop operation. For example, when informing the pressing order "1st", the main effect display section 21 may directly inform the instruction information for performing the first stop operation on the reel 3L.

In addition, the section lamp indicates that the current state is in an advantageous section, which will be described later, by turning on. For example, when transitioning from a non-advantageous section described later to an advantageous section, the section lamp lights up at an arbitrary timing until the game in the advantageous section starts, and the advantageous section ends and shifts to the non-advantageous section. , the lights are turned off at an arbitrary timing until the game in the non-advantageous section is started. Note that the lighting timing of the section lamp is not limited to this. For example, when the production section (normal advantageous section) described later in the non-advantageous section or the advantageous section first shifts to the increased section (AT state) described later in the advantageous section, any time until the game in the increased section is started It is good also as what lights up at timing. That is, the section lamp may indicate that it is in an advantageous section regardless of whether it is a production section or an increase section, or at least the advantageous section including this from the start of the first increase section It may be one that informs the period until the end of.

In addition, the limit lamp indicates that the limit processing described later has been executed or the possibility thereof, depending on its lighting mode. For example, when the limit process is executed, the lighting informs the player that a state advantageous to the player (for example, the AT state) has been forcibly terminated by the execution of the limit process. In addition, for example, when the execution of the limit process is near, by blinking, it is reported that there is a high possibility that the advantageous state will be forcibly terminated by the execution of the limit process. In addition to these, other information related to the limit processing can be appropriately notified by providing a trigger for lighting, blinking, or extinguishing.

[1-1-10. Effect display section]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes the main effect display section 21 and the sub-effect display section 22 that display effect images. The main effect display portion 21 and the sub effect display portion 22 constitute a effect display portion (means) capable of performing effect display. Also, it is configured as one of the effect executing means capable of executing a visual effect for the player.

The main effect display unit 21 includes a main display device 210 that displays effects through the effect display window UD1. The main display device 210 includes a display unit A replaceably mounted on an intermediate support plate G1 in the cabinet G, an irradiation unit B for emitting irradiation light for image display, and irradiation from the irradiation unit B. It is configured as a so-called projection mapping device having a screen device C that makes an image appear by being irradiated with light. In the present embodiment, by configuring the main display device 210 in this way, it is possible to display an advanced and powerful effect, but the configuration of the main display device 210 is not limited to this. In other words, it is only necessary to be able to execute a visual effect for the player, and it can be configured as an image display device such as a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL device, a display device such as a 7-segment LED device, or a sub-reel device. It can also be configured as a variable display device or a dot display device. Moreover, from such a point of view, the shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be changed as appropriate. In addition, if the pachi-slot machine 1 is, for example, a type of game mainly focused on entertaining players with so-called winning numbers, the main effect display section 21 may not be provided (the sub-effect display section 22 as well).

The sub effect display section 22 is configured including a sub display device 220 . Also, the sub-display device 220 is configured as a liquid crystal display device. The sub-display device 220 can also be configured as another image display device or display device like the main display device 210, or can be configured as a variable display device or a dot display device. Moreover, from such a point of view, the shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be changed as appropriate. In addition, since the main effect display section 21 is composed of a large screen, it mainly displays effects closely related to the current game such as notification of pressing order, notification of winning, continuous effects, etc., and a sub-effect display section. 22 is composed of a small screen, it is possible to divide the display content according to the purpose, such as mainly displaying effects that are not so closely related to the current game, such as game history. It is possible. Further, in the present embodiment, the main effect display portion 21 and the sub effect display portion 22 are provided. It is also possible to configure so as to provide only one of them. Moreover, it is also possible to configure so as to provide three or more effect display units.

[1-1-11. lamp]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1, like the upper lamp 23 given as an example, includes its light emission mode (lighting, blinking, or light-off, as well as its brightness and emission color when configured as a full-color LED). ), one or more lamps (light emitting means) are provided. Further, such a light emitting means is configured as one of the effect executing means capable of executing a visual effect for the player. From this point of view, the number, shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be changed as appropriate.

Other lamps included in lamps and LEDs to be described later include, for example, side lamps provided on both side end surfaces of the upper door mechanism UD and both side end surfaces of the lower door mechanism DD, and operation units provided in each operation unit. A lamp etc. can be mentioned. The latter includes a function to notify the player whether or not each operation unit can be operated. , can be controlled to emit light according to a unique lighting mode.

[1-1-12. speaker]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes speakers 35a and 35b for outputting sounds such as sound effects and BGM. The speakers 35a and 35b constitute audio output means capable of producing effects by outputting audio. In addition, it is configured as one of the effect execution means capable of executing the effect from an auditory point of view for the player. From this point of view, the number, shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-13. Other production equipment]
Incidentally, the pachi-slot machine 1 may be provided with an effect device other than the various effect devices (effect execution means) described above. For example, it is possible to provide effects such as a movable production device such as a so-called accessory, a vibration production device that produces production by vibration, or an air production device that produces production by injecting air. That is, an effect device capable of executing an effect that can appeal to any of the player's five senses (visual, auditory, tactile, taste, and olfactory) (allowing the player to recognize that the effect is being performed) Either of them can be used. Therefore, in the present embodiment, unless otherwise specified, "executing a production" means that one or more of the various production devices (production execution means) described above is used to produce a production. indicates that it is permissible to execute

[1-2. Internal structure]
[1-2-1. selector]
The selector 31 (not numbered in FIG. 2) is a downstream passage for medals inserted from the medal slot 5, and is provided on the back side of the lower door mechanism DD. The selector 31 has, for example, a medal sensor 31S, which will be described later, and a sorting device.

The medal sensor 31S detects medals inserted from the medal slot 5 and determines whether or not the detected medals are appropriate medals. When the medal sensor 31S determines that the detected medal is an appropriate medal, and the medal can be accepted, the sorting device sends the medal to the hopper device 32, which will be described later. It is driven and controlled so as to be guided. In this case, 1 is added to the number of bets or the number of credits. On the other hand, when the medal sensor 31S determines that the detected medal is not an appropriate medal, or when the medal is not ready to be accepted, the sorting device passes the medal through the cancel chute to the medal payout opening 11. is driven and controlled to be returned from A selector error occurs when an abnormality occurs in medal detection by the medal sensor 31S. In this case, the error state is canceled when the reset operation is performed after eliminating the cause of the abnormality (for example, medal jam).

That is, the selector 31 constitutes a game medium detection unit (means) capable of detecting the inserted game medium. In addition, the selector 31 constitutes a judgment means capable of judging whether or not the inserted game medium is proper. Further, the selector 31 constitutes a sorting means for storing inside when the inserted game media are correct, and discharging them to the outside when the inserted game media are not correct. Also, the configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the selector 31 can be changed as appropriate. Also, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless game machine, which will be described later, this configuration is not necessarily essential.

[1-2-2. Hopper device]
The hopper device 32 is provided in the lower space inside the cabinet G. As shown in FIG. The hopper device 32 includes, for example, a bucket section for storing medals inserted from the medal slot 5 and guided by the selector 31, and a bottom section of the bucket section for agitating the medals stored in the bucket section. It has a disc portion that guides the medals to the discharge portion one by one, a discharge portion that discharges the medals guided by the disc portion one by one, and a count sensor that counts the medals discharged from the discharge portion.

The bucket section is configured to be able to store a fixed number of medals. Medals exceeding a certain number are guided to a medal auxiliary storage box 33, which will be described later, through a guide passage provided on the upper surface side. A hopper empty error occurs when the medals stored in the bucket become empty. In this case, after replenishing medals, the error state is released when the reset operation is performed.

The disc portion has a plurality of medal-shaped cutouts radially formed from the center, and the central shaft is rotated according to a drive signal to guide the medals fitted in the cutouts to the discharge portion one by one. Note that the medals stored in the bucket section are agitated by the rotation of the disk section. Also, when an abnormality occurs in the rotation of the disk portion, a hopper jam error occurs. In this case, the error state is canceled when the reset operation is performed after eliminating the cause of the abnormality (for example, medal jam).

The count sensor detects the medals discharged from the discharge section and counts the number of medals. For example, when one medal is to be paid out, the disk portion starts rotating, and then the disk portion stops rotating when the count sensor counts one medal payout. In this manner, an appropriate number of medals are paid out.

That is, the hopper device 32 constitutes a game medium payout section (means) capable of paying out game media. Also, as described above, it can be said that it is a part of privilege giving means for giving a privilege to the player. Also, the configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the hopper device 32 can be changed as appropriate. Also, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless game machine, which will be described later, this configuration is not necessarily essential.

[1-2-3. Auxiliary storage for medals]
The medal auxiliary storage box 33 is provided in the lower space inside the cabinet G. The medal auxiliary storage box 33 is, for example, a storage unit for storing medals guided from the bucket unit of the hopper device 32, and a medal auxiliary storage unit provided near the storage unit for detecting the capacity of the medals stored in the storage unit. It has a storage switch 33S.

The storage section is configured to be able to store a certain number of medals. When it is determined by the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S that the predetermined number or more of medals have been stored, an auxiliary medal storage error occurs. In this case, the error state is released when the reset operation is performed after reducing the number of medals stored in the storage section to at least less than a certain number.

That is, the auxiliary medal storage box 33 constitutes a surplus game medium storage section (means) capable of storing surplus game media. The configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal auxiliary storage box 33 can be changed as appropriate. Also, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless game machine, which will be described later, this configuration is not necessarily essential.

[1-2-4. power supply]
The power supply device 34 is provided in the lower space inside the cabinet G. As shown in FIG. The power supply device 34 has, for example, a power board 34a and a power switch 34b, and supplies power to the pachi-slot machine 1 when the power switch 34b is turned on. The power supply device 34 converts AC voltage power of 100 V supplied from a power cable (not shown) into power of DC voltage required for each part, and supplies the converted power to each part. do. That is, the power supply device 34 constitutes a power supply unit (means) capable of supplying necessary power to the gaming machine. Note that the configuration, arrangement, size, and the like of the power supply device 34 can be changed as appropriate.

In this embodiment, the setting key-type switch 52 and the reset switch 53, which will be described later, are provided on the main control board 71 (more specifically, on the main control board case, which will be described later). A switch can also be configured to be provided on the power supply 34 .

[1-2-5. substrate]
The pachi-slot machine 1 includes, for example, the following boards as boards required for various controls. Note that each substrate shown below is merely an example, and a configuration in which substrates different from these are provided may be employed, or a configuration in which non-essential substrates among these are not necessarily provided may be employed.

[1-2-5-1. Main control board]
The main control board 71 is mounted inside the cabinet G on the rear side of the reel unit RU. In addition, the main control board 71 is a game control board that performs control related to the game. are housed in The electrical configuration of the main control board 71 will be described later.

There are various restrictions on the specifications of the main control board 71, and basically various electronic components are DIP-mounted. implemented). Also, in this case, a test point may be provided for checking the operation using a tester or an oscilloscope. In addition, small electronic parts not exceeding 6 mm square may be used for some or all of the various electronic parts. Moreover, the board surface of the main control board 71 may be configured to have multiple layers.

[1-2-5-2. Sub control board]
The sub-control board 72 is mounted inside the cabinet G on the back side of the intermediate support plate G1. In addition, the sub-control board 72 is an effect control board that controls effects, and is housed in a sub-control board case (not shown) made of resin. The sub control board case can be configured as a transparent (or substantially transparent) resin case similar to the main control board case, or can be made of other materials that are opaque (or substantially opaque). can also be configured as a case using The electrical configuration of the sub control board 72 will be described later.

[1-2-5-3. Other substrates]
(main relay board)
The main relay board 73 (reference numerals omitted in FIG. 2) is attached to a specific position (for example, the back side of the lower door mechanism DD) in the cabinet G, and various devices connected to the main relay board 73 and the main control board 73 are connected to the main relay board 73. It is an intermediate control board for relaying between the board 71 and between the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 . Note that the main relay board 73 is configured as a board separate from the main control board 71 for convenience of control efficiency and wiring efficiency. A configuration in which the main relay board 73 is not provided can also be adopted. From this point of view, the main relay board 73 may be further divided into a plurality of relay boards to improve control efficiency and wiring efficiency. That is, a plurality of substrates may be provided as the main relay substrate.

(Secondary relay board)
The sub-relay board 74 is mounted at a specific position in the cabinet G (for example, on the back side of the lower door mechanism DD), between various devices connected to the sub-relay board 74 and the sub-control board 72, and It is an intermediate control board for relaying between the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 . The sub-relay board 74 is configured as a board separate from the sub-control board 72 for convenience of control efficiency and wiring efficiency. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the sub-relay substrate 74 is not provided while the sub-relay substrate 74 is provided. From this point of view, the sub relay board 74 may be further divided into a plurality of relay boards to improve control efficiency and wiring efficiency. That is, a plurality of substrates may be provided as sub-relay substrates.

(External collective terminal board)
The external centralized terminal plate 55 is attached at a specific position (for example, the back side of the lower space) in the cabinet G, and receives signals such as medal insertion signals, medal payout signals, external signals 1 to 4, and security signals. Output to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1. The output start conditions and output end conditions of the external signals 1 to 4 can be appropriately set, and the transition of the internal state of the pachi-slot machine 1 (for example, bonus state or AT state) can be externally controlled according to the game characteristics. Allows you to report. Since the external centralized terminal board 55 is normally connected to an external data display device or a hall computer, these devices can be used not only for inserting/paying out medals and error occurrences in the pachi-slot machine 1, but also for detecting errors. , such internal state transition situations are recognizable.

(Interface board for testing machine)
The first interface board for testing machine 301 and the second interface board for testing machine 302 are both relay boards used for outputting various game-related signals to the testing machine in the certification test (trial test) of the pachi-slot machine 1. (In addition, since these relay boards are not mounted on the pachi-slot machine 1 as a released product for sale, the main control board 71 for sale includes the first interface board 301 for testing machine and the second interface board 301 for testing machine. Various electronic components required to connect to the interface board 302 are also not mounted). For example, a test signal for controlling the main operations related to the game (for example, internal lottery, reel stop control, etc.) is output via the tester first interface board 301, and is determined by the main control board 71. The test signal or the like related to the push order navigation thus obtained is output via the second interface board 302 for testing machine.

[2. Electrical Configuration of Pachislot Machine]
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1. As shown in FIG.

As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a main control board 71, a sub-control board 72, a main relay board 73, and a sub-relay board 74. The main control board 71 and the main relay board 73, the main relay board 73 and the sub-relay board 74, and the sub-relay board 74 and the sub-control board 72 are electrically connected. In addition, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 are electrically connected via the main relay board 73 and the sub relay board 74 so that one-way serial communication from the main control board 71 to the sub control board 72 is possible. properly connected.

The main control circuit board 71 is mounted with a main control circuit 100 as a game control unit that controls games. The main control circuit 100 includes, for example, a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, a clock pulse generation circuit (not shown), a random number circuit (not shown), and the like. The main ROM 102 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 101, various data tables, data for transmitting various control instructions (commands) to the sub control circuit 200, and the like. The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing the control program. The clock pulse generation circuit generates a clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU 101 . The random number circuit generates random numbers within a predetermined range (eg, 0-65535 or 0-255, etc.). The main CPU 101 executes various control programs based on the generated clock pulse signal. Also, one or more values are extracted as random numbers from the generated random numbers as needed. In this way, control relating to game operations in general is performed.

A sub-control circuit 200 is mounted on the sub-control board 72 as a production control unit that controls production. The sub-control circuit 200 includes, for example, a sub-CPU 201, a sub-RAM 203, and the like. A ROM cartridge board 202 is connected to the sub control board 72 . The ROM cartridge substrate 202 contains various control programs executed by the sub CPU 201, various data tables, various effect data (for example, video data and driving data for the main display device 210, video data for the sub display device 220, lamp/ lamp data related to the LED group, sound data related to the speaker group, etc.) are stored. The sub-RAM 203 has a storage area for registering performance contents and various performance data determined by executing the control program, a storage area for storing data related to various control instructions (commands) transmitted from the main control board 71, and the like. be provided. It should be noted that the random number value for effect relating to the effect may be generated and extracted within the sub CPU 201 from within a predetermined range of random numbers (for example, 0 to 32767), or the main control The generation and extraction may be performed by providing a random number circuit similar to the circuit 100 . Alternatively, a sub ROM may be included in the sub control circuit 200 instead of the ROM cartridge board 202, and various control programs and the like may be stored in the sub ROM. Further, the ROM cartridge substrate 202 may store various performance data, and the sub ROM in the sub control circuit 200 may store various control programs and various data tables. In addition, the sub-control circuit 200 includes an image-dedicated microprocessor such as a GPU (for example, also referred to as "VDP"). may be configured to generate (edit) the

The main control board 71 includes stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R, a setting key switch 52, a reset switch 53, a role ratio monitor device 54, an external centralized terminal plate 55, a hopper device 32, an auxiliary medal storage switch 33S, and a power supply. Device 34 is electrically connected. In addition, the main control board 71 is electrically connected to the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56, the medal sensor 31S, the bet switch 6S, the start switch 7S, the stop switch 8S, the checkout switch 9S, and the information display device 14 via the main relay board 73. It is connected to the. If the tester first interface board 301 and the tester second interface board 302 are mounted, they are electrically connected to the main control board 71 via the main relay board 73, for example.

In addition, the external collective terminal plate 55, the hopper device 32, the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S, the power supply device 34, the medal sensor 31S, the bet switch 6S, the start switch 7S, the stop switch 8S, the settlement switch 9S, the information display device 14, the testing machine. Since the first interface board 301 for the tester and the second interface board 302 for the tester have already been described, description thereof will be omitted here.

Each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R is connected to each reel 3L, 3C, 3R via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio, and is driven to rotate and stop each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. Since each reel 3L, 3C, 3R rotates at a constant angle each time one pulse is output to each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R, the main CPU 101 controls each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R. The number of times pulses are output to 51C and 51R is counted, and the symbol positions of the respective reels 3L, 3C and 3R are managed based on this count result. Each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is provided with a reel index (not shown) that determines an initial position for such management, and an index sensor (not shown) for detecting the position of the reel index. .

The setting key-type switch 52 is used when changing the setting values of the pachi-slot machine 1 (for example, setting 1 to setting 6 in six stages) (setting change), or when checking the setting of the pachi-slot machine 1 (setting confirmation). used for Here, the set value indicates the degree of the player's advantage in the game, and normally, the lower the set value (for example, the closer to the setting 1) the relatively the degree of the player's advantage. The higher the set value (for example, closer to setting 6), the higher the player's degree of advantage. The setting key-type switch 52 is turned on when, for example, the manager of the amusement arcade inserts a setting key (not shown) into the keyhole and turns it to the left from the initial position, and returns it to the initial position after turning it to the left. and turn off. When the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is turned off, the settings can be changed by turning on the setting key-type switch 52 and then turning on the power. When the key-shaped switch 52 is turned on, the setting can be confirmed.

The reset switch 53 is capable of detecting a reset operation by an administrator on the amusement arcade side. A reset operation is an operation for canceling various error states. In addition, the reset switch 53 can detect a setting value determination operation by the manager of the game parlor in a state in which the setting can be changed. When the reset switch 53 is operated in a state in which the setting can be changed, the setting value is incremented by 1 each time the reset switch 53 is operated (when reaching setting 6, the setting returns to setting 1). In this manner, setting value determination operation can be performed. Further, the set value determined in this manner is fixed when the start lever 7 is operated once thereafter. That is, the start switch 7S is capable of detecting setting value confirmation operation by the manager of the game parlor. In this way, when the setting is to be changed, the setting key-shaped switch 52 is turned on, the reset switch 53 is operated to select a set value, and the start lever 7 is operated to confirm the selected set value. After that, it is necessary to perform a setting change operation such as turning off the setting key-type switch 52 . It should be noted that this is an example of the setting change operation, and the configuration can be such that the setting can be changed by another operation. Also, when changing settings or confirming settings, for example, the current set values may be displayed in the credit lamp or payout number lamp described above.

The role ratio monitor device 54 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED, and is provided inside the main control board case. The role ratio monitor device 54 sequentially displays various kinds of ratio information related to the game aggregated and calculated by the main CPU 101 . These ratio information are used when the administrator of the gaming parlor confirms whether or not the pachislot machine 1 is illegally remodeled. Note that the role ratio monitor device 54 may be mounted on the main control board 71, or may be mounted on another board (for example, a ratio display board) connected to the main control board 71. may Moreover, as long as it is inside the cabinet G, it may be provided in another place. For example, it may be provided on the main control board case. Also, a management switch for starting the display on the role ratio monitor device 54 or switching the contents thereof may be provided in the cabinet G, and when this switch is operated, the above-described various ratio information may be displayed. good. On the premise of using such management switches, for example, the information display device 14 may also be used as the role ratio monitor device 54 . In addition, immediately after the power is turned on or after a predetermined time (for example, about 10 seconds. A buffer time considering the time required to start up the main control circuit 100 and the sub control circuit 200) after the power is turned on, the role ratio monitor device 54 In order to be able to confirm that the 4-digit 7-segment LED is functioning normally, for example, a test pattern (a pattern in which all seg and decimal LEDs light up) such as "8.8." It is desirable to have a configuration in which the light is lit (or blinked) for a period of time.

In the role ratio monitor device 54, for example, the upper two digits display the type of the ratio information, and the lower two digits display the value (%) indicating the ratio information. Here, the various ratio information displayed on the role ratio monitor device 54 includes, for example, cumulative specific section ratio information, continuous role ratio information and role ratio information for the most recent 6000 games, and cumulative continuous role ratio information. and role item ratio information.

The specific section ratio information refers to a stop operation that is advantageous to the player among the game sections of the target number of games played (for example, 175,000 games for "total"; 6,000 games for "last 6,000 games"; the same applies hereinafter). Information indicating the ratio of the number of games played in the game section (for example, AT state) (or simply the number of games in the advantageous section may be used) in which the information of . In addition, the continuous role ratio information means that among the number of medals paid out in the game section of the number of games to be played, the first type special role (RB) is in operation It is information indicating the ratio of the number of medals paid out (including during operation of the first class special bonus (RB) in the state where the operating device (BB) is operating). In addition, the accessory ratio information is the number of medals paid out in the game section of the target number of games, the first type special accessory (RB), the second type special accessory (CB), and the normal accessory (SB ) is information indicating the ratio of the number of medals paid out during the operation of the first class special bonus (RB). BB) is in operation and the first class special bonus (RB) is in operation, and the second class special bonus (CB) is in operation It is a concept that includes the operation of the second type special role product (CB) in the state where the role product continuous operation device (MB) is operating.

In addition, the game section (for example, AT state) in which the information of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player is performed is regarded as the operation of the accessory or the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, and in the respective ratio information It can also be subject to aggregation/calculation. That is, the role ratio monitor device 54 may appropriately display the necessary ratio information, and various kinds of ratio information that can be displayed are not limited to these. Also, for example, when displaying continuous accessory ratio information on a model that is not equipped with a first class special accessory (RB), or when displaying specific section ratio information on a model that is not equipped with an advantageous section function (AT function) For models that do not have corresponding numerical information (corresponding information), such as when displaying, the last two digits of the numerical information (% information indicating the ratio) out of the 4-digit 7-segment LED are displayed when the item is displayed. In the 7-segment LED, for example, by lighting up the two vertical bars in the center, such as "--", by performing an identification display for non-compatible information, it is confirmed that the model does not have compatible information. It is desirable to make it recognizable at a glance by a person.

The door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is provided, for example, on the opening/closing side (right side) of the lower door mechanism DD. In addition, it may be configured to be provided on the back side of the lower door mechanism DD, or may be configured to be provided on the cabinet G side. Further, the upper door mechanism UD may also be provided with a similar door opening/closing monitoring switch. The door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is turned on when the lower door mechanism DD is open, and is turned off when the lower door mechanism DD is closed, thereby monitoring the opening/closing of the lower door mechanism DD. A door opening error occurs when the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is turned on. In this case, the error state is canceled when the lower door mechanism DD is closed.

The ROM cartridge board 202 , the main display device 210 and the sub display device 220 are electrically connected to the sub control board 72 . Further, the sub control board 72 is provided with, via the sub relay board 74, a 24h door monitoring unit 61, a group of effect buttons such as the effect buttons 10a and 10b, lamps and LEDs such as the upper lamp 23, and speakers 35a and 35b. etc. are electrically connected.

Since the ROM cartridge board 202, the main display device 210, the sub-display device 220, the effect button group, the lamps/LEDs, and the speaker group have already been described, description thereof will be omitted here.

The 24h door monitoring unit 61, like the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56, is provided, for example, on the opening/closing side (right side) of the lower door mechanism DD. It is the same as the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 in that it has a function of monitoring opening/closing of the lower door mechanism DD. The opening/closing history of the door mechanism DD can be saved for a certain period of time. This open/close history can be checked from the hall menu, which will be described later. Therefore, for example, if there is a history of opening after the manager of the amusement arcade has left outside business hours, or if there is a history of opening and closing for a long period of time during business hours, this may result in fraud. It is possible to recognize that there is a high possibility that the act has been committed.

[3. Function Flow of Pachislot Machine]
Next, a functional flow of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the function flow of the pachi-slot machine 1. As shown in FIG.

When the player inserts medals into the pachi-slot machine 1 (performs a bet operation) and operates the start lever 7 (performs a start operation), random numbers are generated from a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). One random number (in this embodiment, this may be described as an "internal lottery random number") is extracted.

The internal lottery means (the main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process, which will be described later) performs lottery based on the extracted random number value to determine an internal lottery combination. By determining the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols permitted to be displayed on the active line is determined in advance. As for the types of symbol combinations, there are two types of combinations: medal payouts, replay activation, bonus activation, etc. and related items are provided. In addition, a win related to the payout of medals is called a "small win", a win related to replay is called a "replay win", and a win related to the activation of a bonus (bonus state) is called a "bonus win". called. Also, a winning combination that can be internally won (that is, a combination of symbols permitted to be established) is sometimes simply referred to as a "winning combination." Also, the internal winning combination may be referred to as a “winning combination”, a “predetermined result”, or a “derivation permissible condition”. In addition, the internal lottery means may be referred to as a ``winning combination determination means'', a ``winning combination determination means'', a ``prior determination means'', or a ``derivation allowable condition determination means''.

Further, when the start lever 7 is operated (start operation is performed), a plurality of reels are rotated. After that, when the player operates the stop buttons (respective stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R) corresponding to the reels (respective reels 3L, 3C, 3R) (stop operation is performed), reel stop control means (described later) The main CPU 101, which performs reel stop control processing, performs control to stop rotation of the relevant reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing at which the stop button was pressed (or the order of pressing thereof). Note that the operation means for performing the start operation is not limited to a lever-shaped one such as the start lever 7, and any operation means can be used as long as the player can perform the start operation. good. Further, the operation means for performing the stop operation is not limited to button-shaped ones such as the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R, and any operation can be performed as long as the player can perform the stop operation. It can be a means.

In the pachi-slot machine 1, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the relevant reel within a specified time (190 msec) from when the stop button is pressed. In this embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reels within the specified time is referred to as "the number of sliding symbols". In this embodiment, when the prescribed period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding symbols (maximum number of sliding symbols) is set to four symbols.

When an internal winning combination that permits the display of a winning combination of symbols is determined, the reel stop control means normally displays the combination of symbols on the effective line within a specified time of 190 msec (for 4 symbols). Stop the rotation of the reel so that it is displayed at the top as much as possible. Further, the reel stop control means stops the rotation of the reels by using the specified time so that the combination of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination is not displayed on the effective line. The symbols displayed when the rotation of the reels is stopped are sometimes referred to as "stop display" or "display result". Also, the display of symbols when the rotation of the reels stops is sometimes referred to as "derivation of stop display" or "derivation of display result".

Further, the reel stop control means automatically stops each reel when a predetermined automatic stop time has passed since the reels are rotated, even if the player does not perform a stop operation. Stop control may be performed. In this case, since the reels are stopped without intervention of the player's stop operation, even if any internal winning combination is determined, any winning combination of symbols is valid. It is desirable to stop spinning the reels so that they are not displayed along the line.

In this way, when all of the plurality of reels stop rotating, the winning determination means (the main CPU 101 that performs a winning operation determination process, which will be described later) determines that the combination of symbols displayed on the activated line is a winning combination. (or other predetermined ones) is determined. That is, it is determined whether or not a winning combination of symbols (or other predetermined combination of symbols) has been established. Then, the combination of the displayed symbols is the one related to the winning (or other predetermined combination) by the winning determination means (that is, the combination of the symbols related to the winning (or other predetermined combination of symbols) ) is established), a privilege such as payout of medals is given to the player, or various controls are performed with this as a trigger. In the pachi-slot machine 1, as an example, a series of the above-described flow is performed as one game (unit game).

Note that the winning judgment means judges whether or not the combination of symbols displayed on the activated line corresponds to any combination of symbols among a plurality of predetermined combinations of symbols. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponds to the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery means. That is, in the former, it may be determined whether or not there is a winning combination of symbols separately from the internal winning combination. In this case, as long as the stop control is appropriately performed by the reel stop control means, it is possible to sufficiently ensure the prevention of the occurrence of false winnings, so it is possible to reduce the control load related to false winning detection. On the other hand, in the latter, by making it possible to determine whether or not the combination of symbols related to winning is a combination of symbols for which winning was permitted, even if an erroneous winning occurs due to a problem with the reels, etc. can be detected, security can be improved.

In addition, in pachislot, in the flow of the series of game operations described above, images are displayed by the display device (for example, the main display device 210, the sub display device 220, etc.), various lamps (for example, the upper lamp 23, etc.) , sound output by speakers (for example, speakers 35a, 35b, etc.), or a combination thereof, various effects are performed. That is, these are the effect executing means for executing the effect. The content of the effect executed by the effect executing means may be determined on the main control circuit 100 side (main side) or may be determined on the sub control circuit 200 side (sub side). That is, any one of them can be the effect content determining means.

For example, when the start lever 7 is operated (a start operation is performed), a random number for effect is extracted in addition to the random number for internal lottery. When the random number value for effect is extracted, the effect content determination means selects the effect to be executed this time from a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination by lottery (or according to predetermined determination conditions). decide.

Next, when the effect content is determined by the effect content determining means, the effect executing means performs a corresponding effect in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the reels start rotating, when each reel stops rotating, and when it is determined whether or not a prize is awarded. to run. In this way, in the pachi-slot machine 1, for example, by executing the effect contents associated with the internal winning combination, the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be targeted, the pressing order to be operated, etc.) The player is provided with an opportunity to know or anticipate what is possible, and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

[4. Basic specifications related to playability of pachislot machines]
Next, the basic specifications of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be explained.

[4-1. Pattern arrangement]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is designed such that a game is played by displaying a plurality of symbols variably and statically. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 must be configured so as to be able to grasp which symbol is arranged at which position on each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. For this reason, the main ROM 102 stores at least data for identifying the type of symbol at each symbol position on each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. As long as such a purpose can be achieved, various data configurations can be adopted, and in this embodiment, as an example thereof, a pattern arrangement table (see FIG. 9), which will be described later, is used.

The symbol arrangement table defines symbol position data (for example, "0" to "19") indicating each symbol position in the rotation direction of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. Further, data (for example, a pattern code) for specifying the type of pattern is associated with each pattern position data. Further, in the symbol arrangement table, the position of the symbol located in the middle area of each reel within the frame of the main display window 4 when the reel index is detected is defined as "0". It should be noted that the number of symbols in each row, the number of types of symbols, the maximum number of sliding symbols, etc. can be appropriately changed and stipulated.

[4-2. Pattern combination]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is designed so that the combination of displayed symbols affects the game result. That is, the pachi-slot machine 1 gives various benefits, shifts the current state to a relatively advantageous state, or shifts the current state to a relatively disadvantageous state according to the combination of displayed symbols. It makes it possible to migrate. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 must be configured to be able to grasp such a combination of symbols. Therefore, the main ROM 102 defines data for specifying such a combination of symbols. As long as such a purpose is achieved, various configurations can be adopted for the data configuration. ing.

The symbol combination table defines data (for example, "display combination" or "winning operation flag") indicating the type of combination of a plurality of predetermined symbols among the combinations of symbols that can be displayed on the activated line. ing. It should be noted that the symbols forming each combination of symbols can be specified using, for example, the above-described symbol code or the like. In addition, data indicating the type of privilege (for example, "payout etc.") is associated with each combination of symbols. The symbol combination table basically has a data structure corresponding to a winning flag storage area, a winning operation flag storage area, and a symbol code storage area (see FIG. 17), which will be described later. It should be noted that the number of types of combinations of symbols, the content of benefits to be provided, and the like can be appropriately changed and stipulated.

[4-3. Internal winning role]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is designed such that which combination of symbols is allowed to be displayed (determined in advance) affects the game result. That is, the pachi-slot machine 1 determines the internal winning combination (that is, the type of combination of symbols that can be displayed (or the type of privilege that can be given)) prior to the player's stop operation (in advance). It is possible. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 must be configured to be able to grasp such internal winning combinations. Therefore, data for specifying such an internal winning combination is defined in the main ROM 102 . As long as this purpose is achieved, various data configurations can be employed. In this embodiment, an internal lottery table (see FIG. 10), which will be described later, is used as an example.

The internal lottery table contains data indicating the types of a plurality of predetermined internal winning combinations (for example, "No." or "winning number"), and lottery values for determining each internal winning combination in each gaming state. is defined. Note that the lottery value may also vary depending on the set value. In addition, each internal winning combination is associated with a type of symbol combination permitted (corresponding) to be displayed. In the pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible to associate a plurality of symbol combinations with one internal winning combination. When such an internal winning combination is determined, which symbol combination is displayed? is determined by stop control.

Here, for example, in the later-described internal lottery process (see FIG. 26; more specifically, the internal winning combination determination process in S64) of the present embodiment, first, a numerical range predetermined by a random number circuit (for example, 0 65535) is sequentially added and updated with a lottery value defined for each internal winning combination. Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result (lottery value+random number) exceeds 65535 (whether or not the lottery result overflows). Then, in a predetermined internal winning combination, when the result of the determination exceeds 65535, the internal winning combination is won (the internal winning combination is determined). However, if none of the internal winning combinations exceeds 65535 even after the determination is performed for all the internal winning combinations, the internal winning combination in the current game is "lost". Note that this is just an example of internal lottery processing, and various methods can be employed for the lottery processing as long as an appropriate lottery is performed according to the lottery value (winning probability). For example, the extracted random numbers are sequentially subtracted and updated with the lottery values specified for each internal winning combination, and then whether or not the subtraction result (lottery result) is less than 0 (lottery result underflows). or not) to determine an internal winning combination.

In this way, in the internal lottery table, the probability (winning probability) of an internal winning combination having a larger defined lottery value is higher. The winning probability of each internal winning combination can be represented by "the lottery value defined for each winning number/the number of all possible random numbers to be extracted (random number denominator: 65536)".

[4-4. stop control]
As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, among the combination of symbols permitted to be displayed by the determination of the internal winning combination, which combination of symbols is finally displayed by the player's stop operation is the game result. It is a specification that affects the That is, the pachi-slot machine 1 finally displays not only the type of the determined internal winning combination, but also the player's stop operation timing and pressing order (also referred to as "stop operation mode" or "stop operation procedure"). It is possible to perform control (stop control) to vary (determine) the type of combination of symbols to be played. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to be configured to be able to grasp in what manner the stop control is to be performed for each internal winning combination according to the player's stop operation manner. For this reason, the main ROM 102 defines data for specifying such a mode of stop control. As long as such a purpose is achieved, various configurations can be adopted for the data configuration. there is

In the stop table, data indicating the amount of symbol movement (for example, "number of sliding symbols") is defined for each symbol position data of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. For example, assume that a predetermined stop table is selected in a game in which a predetermined internal winning combination is determined. Next, it is assumed that a stop operation is performed on the rotating reel 3L. At this time, it is assumed that the stop start position (symbol position data in the middle area of the reel 3L when the stop operation is performed) is "0". Assume that the number of sliding symbols defined in the symbol position data "0" is "4" in the predetermined stop table. Then, the main control circuit 100 performs control so that the reel 3L is stopped at the symbol position moved by four symbols (position of symbol position data "4") (predicted stop position becomes "4"). In this way, the stop table defines data (the number of sliding symbols) that enables direct determination of the stop position. Note that such a data configuration is also just an example. Further, performing stop control using such a stop table is generally called "table control".

In the attraction priority table, when there are multiple combinations of symbols permitted to be displayed, data indicating which combination of symbols should be preferentially displayed (whether to attract) (for example, "attraction priority ”) is stipulated. For example, assume that a predetermined attraction priority table is selected in a game in which a predetermined internal winning combination is determined. Here, it is assumed that the predetermined internal winning combination permits the display of the symbol combination A and the symbol combination B, and the predetermined pull-in priority table is such that the symbol combination B is preferentially displayed over the symbol combination A. An order of priority shall be specified. Next, it is assumed that a stop operation is performed on the rotating reel 3L. Assume that the stop start position is "0" at this time.

Then, the main control circuit 100 determines that the symbols constituting the symbol combination A and the symbols constituting the symbol combination B are different for each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols (for example, "4") including the stop start position. search to see if there is If neither pattern is available, the stop position is determined according to a predetermined rule (for example, stop at a closer position, stop at a farther position, etc.). If there are only the symbols forming the symbol combination A, it is decided to stop at the position corresponding to the symbols. If there are only the symbols constituting the symbol combination B, it is decided to stop at the position corresponding to the symbols. If there are both symbols, the symbol combination B is preferentially displayed over the symbol combination A, so it is decided to stop at the position corresponding to the symbols constituting the symbol combination B. The attraction priority may be stored for all symbol positions during the rotation of the target reel according to the selected attraction priority table, or the target reel may be stopped. Each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols including the stop start position may be stored. Also, such a data configuration is merely an example. Moreover, performing stop control using such a pull-in priority table is generally called "control control."

In this embodiment, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which stop control is executed by performing only "table control", or a configuration in which stop control is executed by performing only "control control". Alternatively, first perform "table control" to tentatively determine the stop position, then perform "control control" to search for a more appropriate stop position, and change the stop position depending on the search results. It is also possible to adopt a configuration that executes stop control that enables

Thus, in the pachi-slot machine 1, which symbol combination is finally displayed on the activated line is determined based on, for example, the following three factors.

The first element is the determined internal winning combination (lottery result of internal lottery processing). For example, if the result of the internal lottery process is "lost", any combination of symbols related to the replay hand, the combination of symbols related to the small hand, or the combination of symbols related to the bonus hand will finally be on the active line. It is never displayed. Note that "lose" can be regarded as one of the internal winning combinations, or can be regarded as a lottery result in which no internal winning combination is determined.

The second factor is the timing of the player's stop operation (the position of the symbol (depression position) when the player operates one of the stop buttons). For example, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of sliding symbols is set to 4 symbols, so display is permitted even if one of the internal winning combinations is won as a result of the internal lottery process. If the symbols constituting the combination of symbols are arranged in excess of 4 symbols on the effective line (each effective line if there are more than one), the combination of the relevant symbols depends on the timing of the player's stop operation. may not be displayed. This is so-called "dropping".

The third element is the player's pressing order (the order in which the player operates the stop buttons). For example, in this embodiment, there is a case where an internal winning combination associated with a combination of multiple symbols is determined, and in this case, it is finally displayed on the activated line according to the player's pressing order. The combination of symbols to be played may change. Such an internal winning combination is called a "push-order combination", and if it is a replay combination, it is sometimes called a "push-order replay", and if it is a small combination, it is called a "push-order small combination". It is sometimes called

[4-5. game state]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible to provide various game states as states in which the game is played in order to vary the degree of advantage of the player or to achieve the intended game characteristics. An example of the game state will be described below.

[4-5-1. Bonus state]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a bonus combination is won and a combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed on the effective line, it is possible to shift to the bonus state (activate the bonus state). It should be noted that it is also possible to configure so that such a bonus state is not provided. Also, by providing a plurality of types of bonus combinations, it is possible to provide a plurality of bonus states. When the bonus combination is won, a state (carry-over state) occurs in which the bonus combination is carried over as an internal winning combination over a plurality of games until the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed on the activated line. Such a bonus combination is sometimes referred to as a "carryover combination". In addition, such carry-over state is sometimes referred to as "between (bonus) flags", "(bonus) inside", and the like.

In the bonus state, it is possible to change the lottery mode (including the winning probability and its contents, or the mode of stop control, etc.; the same shall apply hereinafter) of the minor combination with respect to the state in which the bonus state is not activated (non-bonus state). (Because it is also possible to change the lottery mode of the replay combination, the bonus state can be regarded as one mode of the RT state described later). Therefore, when such a lottery mode becomes a relatively advantageous lottery mode for the player, the bonus state becomes a more advantageous game state than the non-bonus state. On the other hand, if such a lottery mode becomes a relatively disadvantageous lottery mode for the player, the bonus state becomes a game state more disadvantageous than the non-bonus state.

As a bonus role, for example, the first class special role (RB), the first class special role continuous operation device (BB), the second kind special role (CB) (but not the carryover role) , Accessory continuous operation device (MB) related to the second type special accessory, and ordinary accessory (SB) (but not carryover role), etc. can be mentioned. Also, for example, the bonus state corresponding to each bonus combination is configured as follows. The RB state is a game state that ends when a predetermined number of winnings (for example, the upper limit is 8 times) or a predetermined number of games (for example, the upper limit is 12 times) are played. Configured. The BB state is configured as a game state in which the game ends when the payout of medals exceeds an arbitrary predetermined payout number (for example, the upper limit is 285).

The CB state is configured as a game state that ends when one game is played. The MB state is configured as a game state that ends when the payout of medals exceeds an arbitrary predetermined payout number (for example, the upper limit is 153), or when RB or SB is won during the MB state. be. The SB state is configured as a game state that ends when one game is played.

Note that the operating condition of the bonus state is not limited to the fact that the combination of symbols for the bonus combination is displayed on the active line. For example, during the operation of the accessory continuous operation device (BB) related to the first class special accessory, at the start of operation of the accessory continuous operation device (BB) related to the first class special accessory, the first type special role It is also possible to configure such that the first class special role (RB) is automatically activated at the start of the game when the object is not in action, or at the end of the operation of the first class special role. That is, it is possible to perform control so that RB is always in operation while BB is in operation without defining the combination of symbols related to RB. Here, the RB during BB operation is sometimes referred to as "JAC" or the like, and such a specification in which the RB during BB operation automatically operates is sometimes referred to as "auto JAC" or the like. Also, during the operation of the BB, it is possible to perform control so that the RB is in operation when a specified combination of symbols related to the RB is displayed on the activated line. A specification in which RB operates based on the display of a combination of corresponding symbols is sometimes referred to as "manual JAC" or the like. The same applies to the relationship between the accessory continuous operating device (MB) relating to the second type special accessory and the second type special accessory (CB). That is, without specifying the combination of symbols related to the CB, it is possible to control so that the CB is always in operation during the operation of the MB, and during the operation of the MB, the specified symbols related to the CB It is also possible to control so that the CB is in operation when the combination is displayed on the effective line.

[4-5-2. RT state]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible to shift to the RT state (activate the RT state) when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied. It should be noted that it is also possible to configure so that such an RT state is not provided. It can also be configured to provide a plurality of RT states. The RT state is a state in which the lottery mode of the replay combination can be varied with respect to the state in which the RT state is not activated (non-RT state). Therefore, when such a lottery mode becomes a relatively advantageous lottery mode for the player, the RT state becomes a more advantageous game state than the non-RT state. On the other hand, if such a lottery mode becomes a relatively disadvantageous lottery mode for the player, the RT state becomes a game state more disadvantageous than the non-RT state. Moreover, when a plurality of RT states are provided, the same applies to between the plurality of RT states. In this case, the RT state in which the lottery mode of the replay combination (in particular, the winning probability) is relatively advantageous to the player is called a "high RT state" or a "high probability replay state". The RT state in which the aspect (particularly, the winning probability) is relatively disadvantageous to the player is sometimes referred to as "low RT state", "low probability replay state", or the like.

The RT state can be transitioned to, for example, when any of the following transition conditions are satisfied. Moreover, when a plurality of RT states are provided, the same applies to between the plurality of RT states.
(1) When RB, BB or MB is won (2) When a combination of symbols related to RB, BB or MB is displayed (3) When RB state, BB state or MB state ends (4) RB, (5) (3) or (4) when a specific combination of symbols is displayed when BB or MB has not been won (not carried over) and neither RB, BB or MB has been won. When a predetermined number of games have been played after the transition condition is established

[4-5-3. AT state]
The pachi-slot machine 1 is capable of shifting to the AT state (activating the AT state) when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied. It should be noted that it is also possible to configure so that such an AT state is not provided. It can also be configured to provide a plurality of AT states. The AT state is more advantageous than the state in which the AT state is not activated (non-AT state), for example, by informing the player of the information of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player when the above-described push win is won. It is a game state configured as a state.

In the case where multiple AT states are provided, the game period of each AT state (including the ease of extension, etc., if the period can be extended (or "additional"; the same applies hereinafter)), The degree of advantage of the player can be varied by varying the type of the notification target combination for which the stop operation information is notified, or the probability of occurrence of the notification of the stop operation information. Also, the conditions for transitioning to the AT state and the conditions for ending the game can be appropriately set according to game characteristics (however, the end due to the execution of limit processing, which will be described later, is excluded). Also, the AT state may be handled in the same way as the bonus state described above, and in this case may be referred to as a "pseudo-bonus state" or the like.

In addition, the AT state game period may be managed by the number of games (number of games played) as long as the period is appropriately managed (game number management). may be managed by (set number management). In addition, it may be managed by the number of payouts or the number of net increase (number of difference) during the AT state (number of payouts management, difference number management). In addition, it may be managed by the number of times (navigation count) that notification (for example, push order navigation at the time of winning a push order minor role) that affects the payout of medals in the AT state is performed (navigation count management). The same applies when the AT state is extended. Also, the game period given when shifting to the AT state and the game period given when the AT state is extended may be managed by different management methods. Moreover, when a plurality of AT states are provided, they may be managed by the same management method, or may be managed by different management methods.

[4-5-4. ART state]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined transition condition is established, it is possible to shift to the ART state (activate the ART state) by combining the high RT state and the AT state described above. That is, since the ART state means the AT state performed in the high RT state, at least the low RT state and the high RT state are provided as the RT state, and the state is shifted to the high RT state (or to the low RT state). Although it is different from the AT state in that control is performed (avoiding transition), the basic control is the same as the AT state (a high RT state as a result of notifying the information of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player). If the transition to the state (or the transition to the low RT state is avoided), it can be said to be synonymous with the AT state). In addition, when the transition condition of the ART state is satisfied, the state may be shifted to the AT state first, and then shifted to the high RT state to shift to the ART state. Alternatively, the high RT state and the AT state may be simultaneously ( Alternatively, the state may be shifted to the ART state by shifting at approximately the same time.

[4-5-5. Other game state]
It should be noted that the pachi-slot machine 1 can be provided with game states other than the various game states described above. For example, each mode (see FIG. 5 and FIG. 6) in an advantageous section to be described later is also a state in which a player plays a game, and is advantageous in determining whether or not to shift to an AT state as a pseudo-bonus state. Since the degree can be changed, these can be regarded as game states. Also, from the same point of view, for example, it is possible to provide a game state in which the degree of advantage of whether or not to shift to a bonus state can be varied. For example, when a bonus hand is won (carried over), the game state in which the combination of symbols related to the bonus hand is likely to be displayed by the stop control, and the combination of symbols related to the bonus hand are relative to this. By providing a game state that is difficult to be displayed on the screen, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player. Further, for example, a game state in which a bonus combination is won with a predetermined probability (easy to win) and a game state in which the bonus combination is won with a probability lower than the predetermined probability (relatively difficult to win) are provided. By doing so, it is possible to configure such that the degree of advantage of the player can be varied.

In addition, as a method for changing the degree of advantage of whether or not to shift to the AT state (including whether to extend the game period of the AT state in the AT state, the same applies hereinafter), the following method is adopted. You can also For example, a "special combination" can be determined as an internal winning combination. For the specific combination, the number of medals to be awarded varies depending on the player's stop operation mode (stop operation timing, pressing order, or a combination thereof). (For example, if the stop operation mode is appropriate (correct answer), 8 coins will be paid out, and if inappropriate (wrong answer), 1 coin will be paid out or no payout will be made).

Then, when the specific combination is won in a specific game state, and when 8 coins are paid out, it is determined whether or not the advantage degree of whether or not to shift to the AT state in the current game is changed to an advantageous one. decision (whether or not to directly shift to the AT state, or whether or not to directly extend the game period of the AT state, which will be described as "advantageous decision" hereinafter) is not performed. On the other hand, if 8 coins are not paid out, the advantageous decision is made in the current game. Alternatively, if the specific combination is won in the above-described specific game state, and 8 coins are paid out, the advantageous decision is made in the current game. On the other hand, if 8 coins are not paid out, the advantageous decision is not made in the current game.

In this way, when a player plays a game in a specific game method, there are cases where an advantageous decision is made in the current game as a result of the game, and where the advantageous decision is not made (the advantageous decision is restricted). It can also be configured so that there is a case where the In addition, the player may change between the current game and the next game, and if such restrictions continue after the next game, the (next) player may suffer a significant disadvantage. Therefore, it is desirable that such restrictions be limited to the current game and not to continue after the next game. Such restrictions are also sometimes referred to as "penalties."

[4-6. Game section]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, in order to prevent gambling from becoming excessively high, it is possible to provide various game intervals as states in which the game is played with a concept different from the game state described above. An example of the game section will be described below. The game section is roughly divided into a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section.

(Non-advantageous section)
The non-advantageous section is configured as a game period in which it is not possible to notify the player of a stop operation mode that is advantageous to the player, and has the following requirements. The following requirements are only examples, and if at least one of the requirements is relaxed or tightened, it can be changed accordingly.

(1) It is not possible to notify the player of advantageous stop operation modes (for example, push order navigation, etc.). Therefore, it is not possible to control to the AT state or ART state described above.
(2) When the set value is changed (changed in setting), or when an initialization condition such as "RAM abnormality" described later is met, a non-advantageous interval is set as an initial state.
(3) When the limit process described later is executed in the advantageous interval (that is, a predetermined value updated as the game progresses during the advantageous interval (for example, the advantageous interval game number counter and the advantageous interval payout counter described later) value) reaches a specified value (for example, 1500 games or 2400 sheets), a non-advantageous section is set as an initial state. Note that the predetermined value may be referred to, and if the predetermined value reaches a specific update value even before the predetermined value reaches the specified value, the non-advantageous section may be set on that condition. In addition, if a predetermined end condition is satisfied during the advantageous section and the end is determined (for example, if the configuration is such that a lottery for the end of the advantageous section is performed and the lottery is won, etc.), that condition will be used. A non-advantageous section may be set.
(4) In a non-advantageous section, processing related to an advantageous section (for example, processing for determining whether to transition to an advantageous section) can only refer to the determined internal winning combination. It is not possible to perform processing referring to various parameters other than the internal winning combination, such as result display (combination of symbols) and the number of games in the non-advantageous section (or the advantageous section before transition). To determine which internal winning combination has been determined, it is possible to refer to data directly indicating the internal winning combination, such as the winning number, or sub-flag (multiple roles) generated or converted from the data of the internal winning combination. as one piece of determination target data), it is also possible to indirectly refer to data indicating an internal winning combination.
(5) A non-advantageous section basically has one state, and multiple states cannot be set within the non-advantageous section. For example, it is not possible to set different states such that the non-advantageous section A after the end of the advantageous section is the non-advantageous section A, and the non-advantageous section B is the non-advantageous section after the setting change.

(advantageous section)
The advantageous section is configured as a game period in which it is possible to notify the player of a stop operation mode that is advantageous to the player, and has the following requirements. The following requirements are only examples, and if at least one of the requirements is relaxed or tightened, it can be changed accordingly.

(1) It is possible to notify the player of advantageous stop operation modes (for example, push order navigation, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to control to the above-described AT state or ART state.
(2) When the set value is changed (changed in setting), or when an initialization condition such as "RAM abnormality" described later is met, the advantageous section cannot be set as the initial state.
(3) When the limit process described later is executed in an advantageous section, it is necessary to terminate the advantageous section.
(4) In the advantageous section, processing related to the advantageous section (for example, determination processing of whether to shift the game state (mode) during the advantageous section, or whether to extend a specific game state (mode), etc.) , not only processing referring to the determined internal winning combination, but also processing referring to various parameters other than the internal winning combination, such as the derived result display (combination of symbols) and the number of games in the advantageous interval. . Other examples of the various parameters that can be referred to include, for example, privilege information such as points that can be given according to the various parameters described above, the type of bonus state, the type of RT state, and the stop operation timing of one of the reels. , or the order of pressing.
(5) A plurality of states can be set within the advantageous section. For example, it is possible to set a state such as a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player, a CZ state that easily shifts to the AT state, or an AT state in which the expected value of increased medals is positive when a stop operation is performed according to the notification. Further, for example, in response to the decision to shift to the CZ state in the normal state, the CZ precursor may be set as a standby state until the transition to the CZ state actually occurs, and a precursor effect suggesting a transition to the CZ state may be performed. In response to the decision to shift to the AT state in the state, normal state or CZ state, the state is set as a waiting state until the actual shift to the AT state, and an indication effect suggesting the shift to the AT state can be performed. A state such as an AT precursor state can also be set according to game characteristics.
(6) It is possible to notify that the area is in an advantageous section by turning on the section lamp (status display unit) that can notify whether it is a non-advantageous section or an advantageous section (the section lamp is not lit). If you do, you can notify that you are in a non-advantageous section). It should be noted that the lighting start timing of the section lamp can be set to some arbitrary timing as described above. Basically, lighting may be started when a non-advantageous section transitions to an advantageous section, and lighting may continue until the transition to a non-advantageous section. However, if the transitioned advantageous section is in the normal state, the lighting may not be started, and the lighting may be started when the AT state is first entered. If the transitioned advantageous section is in the AT state, lighting may be started from that time.

[4-7. limiter]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, an upper limit (restriction) is set for the period in which the advantageous section continues continuously in order to prevent gambling from becoming excessively high due to the advantageous section continuing too long. is possible. Such an upper limit is called a "limiter". Also, in the present embodiment, the termination of the advantageous section by such a limiter is described as execution of limit processing or actuation of the limiter. An example of the limiter will be described below.

(game number limiter)
The number-of-games limiter is configured as a limiter that executes limit processing when the number of games (the number of games played) in the advantageous interval reaches "1500". For example, the advantageous interval game number counter, which will be described later, starts counting when the advantageous interval starts, and increments the count by one each time one game is completed. Then, based on the value of the advantageous interval game number counter reaching a specified value (for example, "1500" or more), the advantageous interval is forcibly played (for example, even if the AT state gaming period remains). Terminate it and move to a non-advantageous section. It should be noted that the number of games for which the game number limiter is activated can be set to any number of games up to the upper limit of "1500". Also, if the requirement for such a game number limiter is relaxed or tightened, it can be changed accordingly. Also, the gambling aspect may be suppressed step by step according to the number of games in the advantageous section.

(Payout number limiter)
The payout number limiter is configured as a limiter that executes limit processing when the number of payout medals in the advantageous section reaches "2400". For example, the advantageous section payout counter, which will be described later, starts counting from the start of the advantageous section, and each time medals are paid out, the corresponding number of medals (more specifically, the number of payouts minus the number of bets) a few minutes) add up the count. Then, based on the fact that the value of the advantageous section payout number counter reaches a specified value (for example, "2400" or more), the advantageous section is forced (for example, even if the AT state game period remains). Terminate it and move to a non-advantageous section. The number of payouts for which the number-of-payouts limiter operates can be set to an arbitrary number of payouts as long as the number of payouts is equal to or less than the upper limit of "2400". Also, if the requirements for such a payout number limiter are relaxed or tightened, it can be changed accordingly. Alternatively, the gambling aspect may be suppressed in stages according to the number of medals paid out during the advantageous section.

Also, for example, the advantageous section payout number counter, which will be described later, counts the positive amount from the most recent lowest point, with the lowest point (starting point) at which the absolute value of the number of medals has decreased the most since the start of the advantageous section. (That is, if there is no payout, the count is decremented, etc.). In other words, the payout number limiter executes limit processing when a maximum of "2400" medals are paid out from when the number of medals increases during the advantageous section (for example, when the AT state is started). It can also be configured as a limiter that Further, for example, the advantageous section payout number counter, which will be described later, may simply count the actual payout number (that is, the payout number without subtracting the bet number) instead of the above-described net increase.

The pachi-slot machine 1 may execute limit processing in the advantageous section using only the number-of-games limiter, or limit processing in the advantageous section using only the number-of-payout limiter. Both of the number limiters may be used to limit the advantageous section. When both limiters are used, it is desirable that the advantageous interval is terminated when the operation condition of one of the limiters is satisfied after the advantageous interval starts.

Also, the types of limiters are not limited to the game number limiter and payout number limiter described above. For example, the number of times of navigating the push-order minor combination during the AT state (that is, the number of times the information of the stop operation advantageous to the player regarding the combination related to the payout of medals has been notified) is a predetermined number (for example, "400" times). A navigation count limiter may be provided for executing limit processing when the number of times of navigation is reached. That is, as long as the gambling nature can be appropriately suppressed, it is possible to execute limit processing using various conditions related to the game.

[4-8. External signal]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is designed to output a plurality of types of external signals to the outside. For example, if the external signal 1 is turned on when the bonus state is started, and is turned off when the bonus state is terminated, the external data display device will also follow this. It is possible to perform an effect during the linked bonus state. Further, for example, the external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of the BB state, the external signal 1 is turned off based on the termination of the BB state, and the external signal 1 is turned off based on the start of the MB state. If the external signal 2 is turned on in response to the termination of the MB state, and the external data display machine is turned off, not only the effect during the bonus state but also the bonus state is performed on the external data display machine. The number of times can be counted by type.

Further, for example, if the external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of the AT state and turned off based on the termination of the AT state, the external data display device can In conjunction with this, an effect during the AT state can be performed. Further, for example, the external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of a predetermined AT state, and the external signal 1 is turned off based on the end of the predetermined AT state, and the specific AT state is turned on. If the external signal 2 is turned on when the AT state is started, and turned off when the specific AT state is finished, the external data display device can also be set to the above-mentioned AT state. It is possible not only to perform effects but also to count the number of ATs for each type.

Also, for example, the AT state is configured as an AT state for managing the number of sets, and when the AT state of the first set is started, the external signal 1 is turned on, and the second and subsequent sets are started. If the external signal 2 is turned on every time the game is played, the number of initial wins in the AT state and the number of extensions in the AT state can also be counted on the external data display. It should be noted that the timing to turn on and the timing to turn off each external signal can be set as appropriate. That is, as long as the situation can be appropriately recognized by an external data display device, hall computer, or the like, the output mode of each external signal can be appropriately set. For example, the period from the OFF state to the ON state and then to the OFF state again can adopt various conditions such as a predetermined time, one game, or until the state changes.

[4-9. command]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is designed so that a plurality of types of commands can be transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 . In the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control circuit 100 and the sub-control circuit 200 cannot communicate with each other, and communication must be performed only in one direction from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200. ing. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to timely transmit information (commands) for reporting changes in the state of the pachi-slot machine 1 to the sub-control circuit 200 . An example of such a command is described below.

The main control circuit 100 transmits an initialization command to the sub control circuit 200, for example, when a setting change operation is performed. The initialization command includes parameters specifying setting values, game states, and the like. Also, for example, when a bet operation is performed, a medal insertion command is transmitted. The medal insertion command includes parameters for specifying the number of bets and the like. Also, for example, when a start operation is performed, a start command is transmitted. The start command includes parameters specifying internal winning combinations, game states, and the like. Also, for example, when a lock effect is performed, a lock command is transmitted. The lock command includes parameters specifying the contents of the lock effect. Also, for example, when the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R start to rotate, a reel rotation start command is transmitted. The reel rotation start command includes parameters specifying that the rotation of the reels has started.

Also, for example, when a stop operation is performed, a reel stop command is transmitted. The reel stop command includes parameters specifying the reel to be stopped, the position at which the reel is to be stopped, and the like. Further, for example, when all the reels are stopped and the display combination (winning operation flag) is determined, the winning operation command is transmitted. The winning operation command includes parameters specifying the type of display combination, the content of the privilege to be given, and the like. Also, for example, when starting an advantageous interval, an advantageous interval start command is transmitted. The advantageous interval start command includes parameters for specifying the start of the advantageous interval, the mode (game state), and the like. Also, for example, when ending the advantageous section, an advantageous section end command is transmitted. The advantageous section end command includes parameters for specifying the termination of the advantageous section, the cause of the termination, and the like. Further, for example, when a settlement operation is performed, a settlement command is transmitted. The settlement command includes parameters for specifying the number of returned items and the like. Note that these are merely examples, and commands other than these can be transmitted as necessary, and unnecessary commands among these can be prevented from being transmitted.

[4-10. staging]
As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, various effects are executed using various effect devices in order to increase the interest in the game, to inform the player of useful information, or to achieve the desired game characteristics. It is possible. An example of such effects will be described below.

[4-10-1. Main side production]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, for example, the following effects can be performed under the control of the main control circuit 100 side (main side). As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is capable of informing information about the stop operation by means of the instruction monitor, which is also included in production in a broad sense.

(Rock production)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, an effect of stopping the progress of the game for a predetermined period (invalidating the game operation of the player for a predetermined period) can be performed. Such an effect is called a “lock effect” (or simply “lock”), and is also called a “freeze effect” (or simply “freeze”). It should be noted that it is possible to configure such that such a lock effect is not performed, and it is also possible to configure so that a plurality of types of lock effects can be performed.

Also, the game operation to be invalidated may be, for example, a start operation, a stop operation, or any other operation. For example, when the start operation is disabled for a predetermined period of time, the progress of the game is stopped for a predetermined period of time after all stop operations have been performed. Further, for example, when the stop operation is disabled for a predetermined period of time, the progress of the game is stopped for a predetermined period of time after the start operation is performed. In addition, when multiple types of lock effects are provided, the period during which the progress of the game is stopped (the period during which the player's game operation is disabled), the type of game operation to be disabled, etc. are set for each lock effect. You can do so.

(reel production)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, the effect display mode of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (not only the variable display mode but also the combination with the stop display mode) during the execution of the above lock effect. including) can be performed. Such an effect is called a "reel effect", and is also called a "symbol effect" or the like. It should be noted that it is possible to configure such that such reel effects are not performed, and it is also possible to configure so that a plurality of types of reel effects can be performed. In addition, the case of "executing (executing) a lock effect" includes both cases in which reel effects are performed and cases in which reel effects are not performed.

The reel effect is, in short, to rotate or stop (temporarily stop) each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R regardless of the game operation of the player during the period in which the game operation of the player is invalidated. The performance is performed in Therefore, it is possible to set an operation pattern for performing such an effect operation without considering the rotation speed, the maximum number of sliding symbols, and the like. Also, by setting a plurality of operation patterns, it is possible to provide a plurality of types of reel effects. Also, by combining multiple types of reel effects and multiple types of lock effects, a wider variety of effects patterns can be set. It should be noted that any one of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R may be used for the reel effect, two of them may be used, or all three of them may be used.

(pseudo game)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, an effect of performing a pseudo game can be performed during the execution of the lock effect. Such an effect is called a "pseudo game". It should be noted that it is possible to configure such a pseudo-game so as not to be performed, it is also possible to configure so as to be able to perform a plurality of types of pseudo-game. In addition, in the case of "executing (executing) the lock effect", it includes both cases in which pseudo-games are performed and cases in which they are not performed.

In short, the pseudo game accepts the player's game operation in a pseudo manner during the period in which the player's game operation is invalidated, thereby rotating or stopping (temporarily stopping) the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. It is a thing that directs by doing. In other words, the above-described reel effect is further effected by intervening the player's game operation. For example, the MAX bet button 6a, the 1 bet button 6b, the start lever 7, the respective stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R, and the checkout button 9 are basically provided for the purpose of being used for game operations. Therefore, it is inherently undesirable to use it for purposes other than this. However, in the pseudo-game, it is possible to accept these operations on the premise that measures are taken so that the player does not misunderstand that the actual game is being played.

Here, an example is given and demonstrated about the flow of a pseudo-game. Pseudo-games, for example, are performed in the following flow.
(1) The player's actual start operation (where the execution condition is established and the pseudo-game starts)
(2) Pseudo-rotation of each reel (during pseudo-game)
(3) Receiving a pseudo stop operation, thereby temporarily stopping each reel (during pseudo game)
(4) After random delay processing, each reel actually starts spinning (actual game starts after simulated game ends)

Note that the random delay process is, for example, a state in which specific symbols are displayed side by side in the above situation (3), and when each reel starts rotating normally in the above situation (4), the player can make it easier to stop using a specific symbol as a mark (it may help the so-called "eye-pressing"), so to correct this, a random delay period is set for each reel. This is a process for starting the rotation after generating it (such a delay period is also called a "rearrangement period"). In addition, when each reel is temporarily stopped in the situations (3) and (4) described above, the phase signal in the excitation control of each stepping motor must always be a predetermined value so as not to misunderstand that it is completely stopped. It is desirable to alternate the reels forward and reverse for less than a period of time (eg, 500 ms).

As one of the measures described above, for example, when any combination of symbols is temporarily stopped in the above situation (3) (when the third reel is temporarily stopped and all the reels are temporarily stopped), Until the random delay process is started in the above situation (4), each reel may be slightly vibrated (swayed) up and down. As long as the phase signal changes in less than the above-mentioned predetermined time, when the first reel is temporarily stopped and when the second reel is temporarily stopped, such swinging is not performed. can be

In addition, as one of the above-mentioned measures, for example, a pseudo-game lamp is provided to notify that a pseudo-game is in progress, and after the pseudo-game is started in the above-mentioned (1) situation, the above-mentioned (4 ) until the random delay process is started in the situation, the pseudo-game lamp is lit. In addition, the pseudo-game lamp is preferably installed above the operation unit that receives the game operation of the player and at a position that can be visually recognized during the game. Also, the pseudo-game lamp is an independent lamp that is not used for other purposes, and it is desirable that the entire display portion of the pseudo-game lamp is covered with a monochromatic border. In addition, it is desirable that the pseudo-game lamp has a certain surface area (for example, one side exceeds 10 mm and the surface area exceeds 642 square mm, etc.) including the explanation part of the pseudo-game lamp. In addition, the description part of the pseudo-game lamp is a description that can be recognized as a lamp for notifying that the pseudo-game lamp is in the pseudo-game (for example, "FREEPLAY", "pseudo-game effect", or " It is desirable that such a description portion occupies ⅓ or more of the surface area. It should be noted that the pseudo-game lamp may be controlled by the main control circuit 100 or by the sub-control circuit 200 .

In addition, as one of the above-mentioned measures, for example, after the pseudo-game is started in the above-mentioned (1) situation, the above-mentioned (4 ), the main display device 210 or the sub display device 220 (or both) may be used until the random delay process is started. In addition, it is desirable that the pseudo-game display is displayed above the operation unit that receives the game operation of the player and at a position that can be seen during the game (in this embodiment, the main display device 210 and the sub display device 220 are above the operation unit, so either can be used). In addition, the pseudo-game display has a certain surface area including the explanation part (for example, one side exceeds 10 mm, and if the display screen is less than 7 inches, the surface area exceeds 642 square mm) , if the display screen is 7 inches or more, the surface area is 8.2% or more of the entire screen, etc.). In addition, the description part of the pseudo-game display is a description that can be recognized as a display for notifying that the pseudo-game display is in the middle of a pseudo-game (for example, "FREEPLAY", "pseudo-game effect", Alternatively, it is desirable to have a description such as "reel automatic rendering", etc.), and it is desirable to have a size that can be read by the player without being concealed.

Also, for example, during the pseudo-game (for example, after the pseudo-game is started in the above-described (1) situation until the random delay process is started in the above-described (4) situation), the instruction monitor It is desirable to configure so that the information of the stop operation is not reported (if it is necessary to display the information of the stop operation on the instruction monitor in the game, the display is started at the timing when the random delay process is started). In this way, it is possible to further prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the actual game is being played during the pseudo-game. It should be noted that, if any of the above measures are taken, during the pseudo-game, even if the sub-side effect device (for example, the main display device 210 or the sub display device 220) is notified of the stop operation information good. Similarly, during the pseudo-game, the sub-side effect device may perform an effect (interlocked with the pseudo-game operation) according to the game result of the pseudo-game.

In addition, in an actual game, a test signal corresponding to the game operation of the player or the state in which the game operation becomes possible is output via the first interface board 301 for testing machine. , no test signal corresponding to the player's pseudo game operation or the state in which the pseudo game operation is possible is output. Therefore, during the pseudo-game, a test signal (pseudo-game signal) may be output so that the test machine can recognize that the pseudo-game is in progress. In addition, when the first interface board 301 for the testing machine receives a pseudo-game signal from the main control board 71, it outputs a signal for pseudo-game progress control to the main control board 71, so that the main control board 71 side simulates A game may progress (that is, the first test machine interface board 301 may have a pseudo-game progress function). In addition, when the first interface board 301 for testing machine is provided with such a pseudo-game progress function, a changeover switch capable of switching on/off of the function may be provided. As a result, it is possible to arbitrarily set whether or not to confirm the performance contents of the pseudo-game in the certification test (test shooting test) of the pachi-slot machine 1 .

[4-10-2. Sub side production]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, for example, the following effects can be performed under the control of the sub-control circuit 200 side (sub-side). As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible to notify the stop operation information by the main display device 210 or the like, but this is also included in the production in a broad sense.

(Normal performance)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, an effect that the current game is completed (that is, one game ends) can be performed. Such an effect is called a "normal effect", and is also called a "single effect" or the like. It should be noted that it is possible to configure such that such a normal effect is not performed, and it is also possible to configure so that a plurality of types of normal effect can be performed.

(Continuous production)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is established, an effect that continues over a plurality of games (that is, continues for a plurality of games) can be performed. Such an effect is called a “continuous effect”, as well as a “continuous effect”. It should be noted that it is possible to configure such that such continuous effects are not performed, and it is also possible to configure so that a plurality of types of continuous effects can be performed.

(Operation linked production)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, an effect can be performed in which the content of the effect can be changed according to the player's operation. Such an effect is called an "operation-linked effect", and is also called a "button effect" or the like. It should be noted that it is possible to construct such an operation-linked effect not to be performed, or to perform a plurality of types of operation-linked effect. Also, the operation-linked effect can be configured as a normal effect, or can be configured as a continuous effect. Also, the effect operation can include not only the operation to the effect button group but also various game operations.

Note that the various effects described above can be used for various purposes. For example, it can be used to suggest or notify a set value, an internal winning combination, a game state, a game section, details of awarding of a privilege, a period until the awarding of a privilege, and the like. Also, it can be used to suggest or notify the degree of advantage. Moreover, these applications are only examples.

(Other performances)
The pachi-slot machine 1 can perform effects other than the various effects described above. For example, various notifications to the player or the game parlor (for example, addiction prevention notification, forgotten item prevention notification, error state notification, demonstration state notification, etc.) are also included in the production in a broad sense as what is used for purposes other than the above. . As for the immersion prevention notification, for example, when the advantageous section ends, a warning or the like to that effect can be notified. In addition, for example, when an advantageous section ends or when a checkout operation is performed, a warning or the like indicating that fact can be notified. Further, the error state notification may be such that a warning or the like indicating the error is notified from the occurrence of the error until the error is resolved. In addition, the demonstration state notification can be made such that an empty machine or the like is notified when the period during which no game has been played reaches a predetermined period or when a settlement operation is performed.

[5. First gaming machine]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 22, a specific example of the specifications relating to game characteristics of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described as a "first game machine". It should be noted that various specifications, functions, etc., described as the first game machine in this embodiment can be partially or wholly applied to other game machines described as other game machines in this embodiment. Various specifications, functions, and the like, which are described as other gaming machines in this embodiment, can be partially or wholly applied to the first gaming machine as described in this embodiment. In other words, an appropriate combination of these can be used as the invention according to the present embodiment.

First, in the first gaming machine, the activated line is defined as only one line of the above-mentioned "center line". In the first gaming machine, a non-bonus state and a bonus state are provided as game states. In addition, the non-bonus state is between 2BB flags in which "F_2BB" (a bonus combination that can be won only when two cards are bet. Hereinafter, it may be simply referred to as "2BB") described later, and between 2BB flags described later. Between the 3BB flags in which "F_3BB" (a bonus combination that can be won only in a 3-card bet state; hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "3BB") is carried over not flagged). Also, the bonus state includes a 2BB state that shifts when a combination of 2BB symbols is displayed, and a 3BB state that shifts when a combination of 3BB symbols is displayed. be.

Further, in the first gaming machine, it is possible to play a game with two medals bet (2 medals bet state) and with three medals bet (3 medals bet state). there is Note that "bet" means that the player inserts two or three medals into the medal insertion slot 5 for use in the game, or that the player operates the MAX bet button 6a or the 1 bet button 6b. 2 or 3 medals are placed from the credits, and 2 or 3 medals are automatically placed by winning a replay role.

[5-1. Game Features of the First Gaming Machine]
Next, the game flow in the first gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 8. FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of a game state transition flow in a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section in the first gaming machine, and FIG. 6 is for explaining an example of each mode in the first gaming machine. FIG. 7 and FIG. 8 are diagrams showing examples of various tables in the first gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 5, in the first gaming machine, the state in which a player plays a game is roughly divided into a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section. Increased sections (advantageous sections/pseudo bonuses) are provided. The non-advantageous section is a game state (non-AT state) in which information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is not notified, and is a game state that is disadvantageous to the player. The performance section is a game state (non-AT state) in which information on the stop operation that is advantageous to the player is not notified, and is similar to the non-advantageous section in that it is a game state that is disadvantageous to the player. , differs from the non-advantageous section in that mode transition is performed.

That is, the non-advantageous section is the initial state that is controlled when the game in the advantageous section is completed, when a setting change operation is performed, when other initialization conditions are satisfied, or when the factory is shipped. The effect section is a control state as a normal state in which the player can play a normal game by changing the expectation level of the increase section transition (given) by mode transition or the like.

On the other hand, the increasing section is a game state (AT state) in which information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified, and is a game state that is advantageous to the player. That is, the increase interval is a control state as an advantageous state in which the player can increase medals. Note that both the performance section and the increase section are advantageous sections, and a series of advantageous sections are formed by mutually shifting between these sections.

In the first gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 7(a), in the non-advantageous section, a non-advantageous section sub-flag as secondary information (sub-flag) corresponding to the internal winning combination (see FIG. 10 described later) is determined. It should be noted that the sub-flag indicates an internal winning combination that plays a similar role (whether or not it is a lottery target combination, its winning probability, etc.) in various lotteries (various processes related to advantageous sections) related to game characteristics by the main control circuit 100. By grouping and allocating the same information, this is information for making the group identifiable. Since this eliminates the need to provide various data tables for each internal winning combination, the amount of data can be compressed, and pressure on the capacity of the main ROM 102 can be avoided. In the non-advantageous section, lottery using this non-advantageous section sub-flag is performed.

The non-advantageous section sub-flag “Ripbell” has internal winning combinations of “F_Replay A” (No. “3”), “F_Replay B” (No. “4”), and “F_Bell 123A1” to “F_Bell 321B2”. ” (No. “10” to No. “33”). The non-advantageous section sub-flag “Weak Che” is determined when the internal winning combination is “F_Cherry” (No. “5”). The non-advantageous section sub-flag “Watermelon” is determined when the internal winning combination is “F_Watermelon” (No. “9”). The non-advantageous section sub-flag “definite combination” is determined when the internal winning combination is either “F_definite cherry” (No. “6”) or “F_reach” (No. “8”). The non-advantageous interval sub-flag “Medium Che” is determined when the internal winning combination is “F_Middle Cherry” (No. “7”). It should be noted that, in the non-advantageous section, as in the advantageous section, the winning sub-flag and the winning sub-flag can be determined. Moreover, these correspondence relationships are not limited to those described above.

Further, in the first gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 7(a), in the advantageous section, an advantageous section winning sub-flag as secondary information (sub-flag) corresponding to an internal winning combination (see FIG. 10 described later) is determined. Further, in the advantageous section, an advantageous section winning time sub-flag is determined as secondary information (sub-flag) according to the combination of displayed symbols. In the advantageous section, a lottery is performed using these sub-flags for winning an advantageous section and sub-flags for winning an advantageous section.

The sub-flag “Bell” at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined when the internal winning combination is any one of “F_Bell 123A1” to “F_Bell 321B2” (No. “10” to No. “33”). The sub-flag “Weak Che” at the time of winning an advantageous section is determined when the internal winning combination is “F_Cherry” (No. “5”). The sub-flag “Watermelon” at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined when the internal winning combination is “F_Watermelon” (No. “9”). The sub-flag “fixed combination” at the time of advantageous section winning is determined when the internal winning combination is either “F_fixed cherry” (No. “6”) or “F_reach” (No. “8”). . The sub-flag “middle che” at the time of advantageous section winning is determined when the internal winning combination is “F_middle cherry” (No. “7”).

Advantageous section winning sub-flag “Tsutaribu 1” is set to “Right” when the internal winning combination is either “F_Replay A” (No. It is determined when the symbol combination of "Rising Lip" is displayed (that is, when the winning combination is "Right Rising Lip"). Advantageous section winning sub-flag ``Common replay 2'' is set to ``Parallel It is determined when the symbol combination of "LIP" is displayed (that is, when the winning combination is "Parallel LIP").

Here, in the first gaming machine, as will be described later, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), the symbol combination of "rising to the right" is between the 3BB flags. Between the 2BB flags and between the non-flags, a combination of "parallel lips" symbols is displayed.

That is, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), "Common Replay 1" is determined as a sub-flag at the winning of the advantageous section between the 3BB flags, and is advantageous between the 2BB flags and between the non-flags. As a sub-flag at the time of winning the section, "Tsutaribu 2" is determined. In the first gaming machine, when the sub-flags at the time of winning the advantageous zone are different in this way, various lotteries (for example, a pseudo-bonus transition lottery using a pseudo-bonus transition lottery table shown in FIG. The degree of advantage in the mode transition lottery using the mode transition lottery table shown in 8(f) is varied.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, for example, depending on whether it is between 3BB flags or between 2BB flags, "F_Replay A" (No. ) has been described as an example, but the manner in which the sub-flags fluctuate at the time of winning the advantageous section is not limited to this. For example, as will be described later, when the internal winning combination is "F_Bell 123B1" (No. "12"), the stop control is made different between the 3BB flag period and the 2BB flag period. Therefore, when such a winning combination is won, the number of medals to be paid out is not changed (or may be changed), and the combination of displayed symbols is made different. A sub-flag may be determined. Then, the degree of advantage in various lotteries, which will be described later, may be changed in accordance with the difference in the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section.

Further, for example, as will be described later, when the internal winning combination is "F_watermelon" (No. "9"), regardless of which flag (between non-flags) the pressed position (stop operation timing) ) is appropriate, the combination of "watermelon" symbols is displayed. When a winning combination is won, different advantageous section winning time sub-flags may be determined depending on whether a prize can be won without any omissions or when omissions occur. Then, the degree of advantage in various lotteries, which will be described later, may be changed in accordance with the difference in the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section.

Further, for example, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), between the 3BB flags, the stop operation is in a specific manner (this particular It may be performed in any manner, such as a manner in which the hitting order (correct pressing order) is performed, a manner in which the pressing position (timing of the stop operation) is appropriate, and a manner in which these are combined), " A combination of symbols of "parallel lips" is displayed, and if it is not performed in a specific manner, a combination of symbols of "rising to the right" is displayed, thereby determining a sub-flag at the time of winning a different advantageous section You may do so. Then, the degree of advantage in various lotteries, which will be described later, may be changed in accordance with the difference in the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section.

That is, in the first gaming machine, it is possible that the final stop display mode may differ depending on the number of bets, the game state, the mode of the stop operation, or a combination of any of these regarding the specific combination, It is possible to apply all modes that make it possible to determine different secondary information according to different stop display modes, thereby making it possible to vary the degree of advantage.

Returning to the description of the game characteristics of the first gaming machine. In the non-advantageous section, an advantageous section transition lottery is performed for each game. Specifically, the advantageous section transition lottery table shown in (b) of FIG. At a predetermined timing, a transition destination mode or the like is determined according to the non-game section sub-flag. In addition, when making this decision, if only the type of mode when shifting to the advantageous section is determined (in FIG. 5, "advantageous section start"), not only the type of the mode but also the pseudo bonus can be selected. There is a case where it is determined (in FIG. 5, “advantageous section start+pseudo bonus start”). However, in the non-advantageous section, it is also possible to have a specification in which it is not decided to shift to the pseudo bonus.

Here, with reference to FIG. 6, each mode in the first game machine will be described. In the first gaming machine, the mode is control information (which may be called a game state or a control state) for varying the degree of expectation of transition (granting) to an increase section (pseudo bonus) in the performance section (normal game). Yes, in the production section (normal game), according to this mode, it is decided whether or not to transition to a pseudo bonus, to maintain the advantageous section, or to end the advantageous section and move to the non-advantageous section It is designed to

The start mode is a relatively disadvantageous mode because it is easy to stay when transitioning from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section (production section), and the expectation of shifting to a pseudo-bonus is relatively low (Fig. 7 (c)), and the likelihood of shifting to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see FIG. 8 (f), which will be described later). Although not shown, the number of ceiling games is set to "965 games" in the start mode. The number of ceiling games is used to forcibly shift to the pseudo bonus when the period during which the transition to the pseudo bonus is not made reaches a certain period. Therefore, the smaller the number of ceiling games, the more advantageous the player, and the larger the number of ceiling games, the more disadvantageous the player.

The normal A mode is the easiest mode for a player to stay in the game, and is a relatively disadvantageous mode. (see FIG. 8(f)), and the likelihood of shifting to a more advantageous mode is relatively low (see FIG. 8(f) described later). In the normal A mode, the number of ceiling games is set to "965 games". In FIG. 6, "approximately 999G after the pseudo-bonus" means that after the pseudo-bonus is over, the game is shifted to an end A mode or an end-B mode, which will be described later, and 32 games are played in this mode without transitioning to the pseudo-bonus. After a game has been played and the normal A mode is selected when shifting from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section after the game is played, the apparent ceiling number of games is "965 games" + end A. This is expressed because it is the game period "32 games" in the mode or the end B mode + the number of games required to shift from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section. The same applies to the normal B mode, heaven preparation mode, and chance mode.

The normal B mode is relatively easy for the player to stay in the game and is a relatively disadvantageous mode, but it is more advantageous than the normal A mode. It is relatively low (see (c) of FIG. 7 described later), and the degree of expectation of shifting to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see (f) of FIG. 8 described later). In the normal B mode, the number of ceiling games is set to "965 games".

In the heaven preparation mode, although the expectation of shifting to the pseudo-bonus is relatively low (see (c) of FIG. 7 described later), the number of ceiling games is set to "466 games", and when shifting to the pseudo-bonus , and after that, it is determined that the mode will shift to heaven mode (see (f) in FIG. 8, which will be described later), so in that sense, the mode is relatively advantageous.

Chance mode has a relatively high degree of expectation for shifting to a pseudo-bonus (see (c) of FIG. 7 described below), and the ceiling number of games is set to "222 games", so in that sense it is relatively advantageous. mode. However, the degree of expectation for shifting to heaven mode is not high (see (f) of FIG. 8 described later).

End A mode is a relatively disadvantageous mode because it is easy to stay if you do not transition to heaven mode (including heaven preparation mode) after transitioning to a pseudo bonus, and it is expected to transition to a pseudo bonus. is the lowest (see (c) of FIG. 7 described later), and the expectation of shifting to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see (f) of FIG. 8 described later). In the end A mode, when 32 games are played without transitioning to the pseudo bonus after the pseudo bonus ends, the advantageous section itself ends and the game shifts to the non-advantageous section.

End B mode is a relatively disadvantageous mode, but it is more advantageous than End A mode because it is relatively unfavorable because it is easy to stay if you do not shift to Heaven mode (including Heaven preparation mode) after transitioning to a pseudo-bonus. mode, the expectation of shifting to a pseudo-bonus is relatively low (see (c) in FIG. 7 below), and the expectation of shifting to a more advantageous mode is relatively low (see the diagram below 8 (f)). In the end B mode, as in the end A mode, when 32 games are played without shifting to the pseudo bonus after the end of the pseudo bonus, the advantageous section itself ends and shifts to the non-advantageous section. Note that the end A mode and the end B mode can also be collectively referred to as "end mode".

The security mode is a mode in which the player stays when Heaven C mode ends, and the degree of expectation for shifting to the pseudo-bonus is relatively high (see (c) of FIG. 7 described later), and the number of ceiling games is "32 games." , so it is a relatively advantageous mode in that sense. However, the degree of expectation for shifting to heaven mode is not high (see (f) in FIG. 8 described later). That is, when Heaven C mode ends, it is positioned as a mode for maintaining (guaranteeing) a relatively advantageous state for a certain period of time in order to prevent a decline in interest due to this.

Heaven A mode can also include the extension (addition) in the case of the specification that the pseudo bonus continues (AT state continues by determining extension (addition) during AT state. The same applies hereinafter), the degree of expectation to shift to a pseudo bonus is relatively high (see (c) of FIG. 7 described later), the number of ceiling games is set to "32 games", and the ceiling It is a relatively advantageous mode in which the probability of maintaining the mode (heaven mode loop rate) is set to a medium level. Although not shown in FIG. 6, for example, the ceiling mode loop rate may have a set difference. For example, when the set values are odd numbers (1, 3, 5), the ceiling mode loop rate is about 75%, and when the set values are even numbers (2, 4, 6), the ceiling mode loop rate is about 67%. The lottery value can also be set such that the higher the set value, the higher the ceiling mode loop rate. The same applies to Heaven B mode and Heaven C mode, which will be described later, and it is possible to provide a set difference in the ceiling mode loop rate.

Heaven B mode is a mode in which a series of pseudo-bonuses can be expected. , and the probability that the ceiling mode is maintained (heaven mode loop rate) is set high, making it a relatively advantageous mode. That is, in terms of ceiling mode loop rate, this mode is more advantageous than Heaven A mode.

Heaven C mode is a mode in which a series of pseudo bonuses can be expected. ”, and the probability of maintaining the ceiling mode (heaven mode loop rate) is set to be relatively high, making it a relatively advantageous mode. That is, in terms of the ceiling mode loop rate, this mode is more advantageous than Heaven A mode and Heaven B mode. The heaven A mode, the heaven B mode, and the heaven C mode can be generically called "heaven mode".

Each of the modes described above is merely an example, and the configuration of the mode is not limited to this. Modes other than the above-described modes can be set, and some of the above-described modes can be set not to be set.

Further, although the non-advantageous section has been described as being relatively less advantageous than the advantageous section, the relationship between the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section is not limited to such a mode. For example, when it is a non-advantageous section, the transition rate to the increased section is higher than when at least one or more modes are set in the advantageous section, or the average number of games required to transition to the increased section is shorter. It is also possible to set a specification such as that the non-advantageous section is most likely to be an increase section. By doing so, an incentive to play a game is generated even in a state where the non-advantageous section is confirmed after a setting change or the like. In addition, even if the lighting of the section lamp ends when 32 games have passed after the end of the pseudo-bonus, the most unfavorable state is not confirmed, so even in such a case, there is a motivation to continue the game. becomes. Also, so far, the presentation section has been described as a game state in which the information of the stop operation that is advantageous for the player is not notified, but compared to the increase section, a disadvantageous aspect (for example, reducing the frequency of notification or ), it is also possible to set the game state in which the information of the stop operation is notified.

Returning to the description of the game characteristics of the first gaming machine. In the performance section (normal game), first, a pseudo-bonus shift lottery (at the time of winning) is performed with reference to the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section for each game. Specifically, the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table shown in (c) of FIG. 7 is referred to, the internal winning combination is determined, and during the game after the advantageous zone winning sub-flag is determined according to the internal winning combination. At a predetermined timing, it is determined whether or not to shift to a pseudo bonus according to the sub-flag at the time of advantageous section winning. In addition, in (c) of FIG. 7, "non-winning" means not to shift to the pseudo bonus, "winning (current game)" means to shift to the pseudo bonus from the current game, and " "Winning (next game)" means shifting to a pseudo bonus from the next game.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when "winning (current game)" is determined, the game is started at the start of the current game, and when "winning (next game)" is determined, the game is started at the start of the next game. After the operation (stopping operation) is disabled for a certain period of time, and during the disabled period, a reel effect (“red 7 matching” effect) is performed in which all “red 7” symbols are displayed in the main display window 4. , in a game in which a pseudo-bonus is started and a "red 7 matching" effect is performed, if it is necessary to notify the information of the stop operation, at least the invalid period ends and the game operation (stop operation) is valid. When (before that, but not before the start of the random delay process described above), the stop operation information is notified.

In the performance section (normal game), as a result of the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), when it is determined to shift to the pseudo-bonus, a mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in (f) of FIG. 8 is referred to, and the transition destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the advantageous section winning sub-flag. Note that this transition destination mode may be a mode including during the pseudo bonus, or may be a mode after the pseudo bonus is finished. Also, as a result of the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), it is decided to shift to the pseudo-bonus, and if the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed, the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) and the mode transition lottery described later. (at the time of winning) and mode transition lottery (at the ceiling) are not performed.

In the production section (normal game), as a result of the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), if it is not decided to move to the pseudo-bonus, for each game (more specifically, "F_replay A" or "F_replay B”), a pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed with reference to the sub-flag at the time of winning in the advantageous section. Specifically, the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table shown in FIG. At a predetermined timing (before the start of the game), it is determined whether or not to shift to a pseudo-bonus according to the advantageous section winning time sub-flag.

In the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table shown in (c) of FIG. 7, the sub-flag at the time of winning in the advantageous section "Tsut-rep 1" is decided rather than the sub-flag at the time of winning in the advantageous section at "Tsut-rep 1". The percentage of decisions to shift to a pseudo-bonus is higher in the case of However, the mode of giving preferential treatment to "Telephone 2" over "Telephone 1" is not limited to this. For example, when "Common 2" is determined as the sub-flag when winning an advantageous section, it may be decided to shift to a pseudo bonus with a predetermined probability, but "1" is determined as the sub-flag when winning an advantageous section. In this case, the transition to the pseudo-bonus may not be decided.

In the performance section (normal game), as a result of the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), when it is determined to shift to the pseudo-bonus, a mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in (f) of FIG. 8 is referred to, and the transition destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the advantageous zone winning sub-flag. Note that this transition destination mode may be a mode including a pseudo-bonus, or a mode after the pseudo-bonus is finished. As a result of the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), it is decided to shift to the pseudo-bonus, and when the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed, the later-described mode transition lottery (at the ceiling) is not performed.

In addition, in the mode transition lottery table shown in (f) of FIG. 8, "Tsutaribu 2" was determined as the sub-flag when winning the advantageous section rather than when "Tsutaribu 1" was determined as the sub-flag when winning the advantageous section. In this case, the rate at which it is decided to shift to a mode that is relatively advantageous to the player is high. However, the mode of giving preferential treatment to "Telephone 2" over "Telephone 1" is not limited to this. For example, when the sub-flag at the time of advantageous section winning is set to "2", it can be determined to shift to a relatively advantageous mode for the player with a predetermined probability. It may be arranged such that, when "pass 1" is determined, it cannot be determined to shift to a mode that is relatively advantageous to the player.

In the effect section (normal game), as a result of the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), if it is not decided to move to the pseudo-bonus, the number of ceiling games is updated (additional method or subtraction method), and the ceiling game When the number reaches the number of ceiling games associated with the current mode (or previously determined at the time of transition to an advantageous section, etc.), it is decided to shift to a pseudo-bonus. In this case, it is possible to make sure that the "win (current game)" is determined, or that the "win (next game)" is always determined. Alternatively, any one of these may be determined by lottery.

When it is determined to shift to a pseudo bonus due to the number of ceiling games being reached in the performance section (normal game), a mode transition lottery (at the ceiling) is performed. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in (f) of FIG. 8 is referred to, and the transition destination mode is determined according to the current mode. Note that this transition destination mode may be a mode including during the pseudo bonus, or may be a mode after the pseudo bonus is finished.

It should be noted that the processing related to the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) and the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) differ only in the type of sub-flag, and the rest is the same processing content, so the same lottery table and control flow can be controlled using In addition, the processing related to the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) and the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) differ only in the type of sub-flag, and the rest is the same processing content, so the same lottery table and control flow are used. can be controlled by

Further, if "winning (current game)" is not provided as the type of winning of the pseudo-bonus, at the timing when the advantageous zone winning sub-flag is determined, the advantageous zone winning sub-flag has already been determined, Since the number of ceiling games can also be updated, the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), and the pseudo-bonus transition process when reaching the ceiling can be performed together in one process. can. Similarly, the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning), the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning), and the mode transition lottery (at the ceiling) can be collectively performed in one process.

Returning to the description of the game characteristics of the first gaming machine. As described above, in the production section (normal game), it is decided to shift to the pseudo bonus, and when the pseudo bonus is started ("pseudo bonus start" in FIG. 5), the shift to the increase section (pseudo bonus) . Also, as described above, in the effect section (normal game), if the end A mode or the end B mode is controlled and 32 games are completed without transitioning to the pseudo bonus (in FIG. 5, "advantageous section end (Via end A/B)”) and move to a non-advantageous section. Further, when the conditions for the limit processing shown in FIG. 16, which will be described later, are met, the advantageous section is forcibly ended ("End of advantageous section (limit processing)" in FIG. 5), and as a result, Move to a non-advantageous section.

In the increase section (pseudo-bonus), when the pseudo-bonus is started, a ceiling reduction lottery is performed. Specifically, the ceiling reduction lottery table shown in (e) of FIG. 8 is referred to, and whether or not to reduce the number of ceiling games after the end of the pseudo-bonus is determined according to the current mode. In (e) of FIG. 8, "non-winning" means that the ceiling game number is not shortened, and "winning (ceiling game number = 0 update)" means that after the pseudo bonus ends, regardless of the mode , means that the ceiling game number to be set is set to "0" (reduced). Note that the ceiling shortening lottery can be performed not only when the pseudo bonus is started, but also every game during the pseudo bonus.

As a result of the ceiling reduction lottery, if it is decided not to shorten the number of ceiling games, when the pseudo bonus ends, if you do not have the 1G consecutive stock described later, the number of ceiling games will be reduced according to the current mode. is set (in the end mode, it is not set because the advantageous section ends after 32 games have elapsed (it is cleared accordingly), but the number of ceiling games may be temporarily set here) , the pseudo-bonus ends ("pseudo-bonus ends" in FIG. 5), and the game shifts to the production section (normal game). On the other hand, if it is decided to reduce the number of ceiling games as a result of the ceiling reduction lottery, "0 games" is set as the number of ceiling games when the pseudo-bonus ends. As a result, the pseudo bonus is started again from the next game after the pseudo bonus is finished. In this case, since the pseudo bonus is started when the ceiling game number is reached, the mode transition lottery (at the ceiling) is performed.

In the increase section (pseudo bonus), a mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed for each game (more specifically, in a game in which "fixed hand" or "medium check" is determined as a sub-flag at the time of advantageous section winning). . Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in (f) of FIG. 8 is referred to, and the transition destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the advantageous section winning sub-flag. It should be noted that the transition destination mode may also be determined when a sub-flag at the time of winning an advantageous section other than the above is determined, but in this case, in principle, a relatively disadvantageous mode than the current mode will be transitioned. In order not to be determined as the first mode, another mode transition lottery table having a lottery value different from the mode transition lottery table shown in (f) of FIG. 8 may be referred to.

In the increase section (pseudo bonus), a mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed for each game (more specifically, in the game in which "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is won). Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in (f) of FIG. 8 is referred to, and the transition destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the advantageous zone winning sub-flag. In this case, similarly to the above, in principle, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. A different mode transition lottery table may be referred to.

In the increase section (pseudo bonus), 1G consecutive lottery is performed for each game. Specifically, the 1G-run lottery table shown in (d) of FIG. 7 is referred to, and whether or not to generate a 1G-run is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flag at the time of advantageous section winning or the sub-flag at the time of advantageous section winning. be done. In (d) of FIG. 7, "non-winning" means that 1G-runs are not generated, and "winning (1G-runs + 1)" means that the right to generate 1G-runs (1G-run stock) is one. It means that it is granted (the 1G ream stock counter is incremented by 1). A plurality of 1G ream stocks (maximum 255) can be stocked (stored) by a 1G ream stock counter. Therefore, a plurality of 1G ream stocks may be granted during one pseudo-bonus. The 1G-run lottery table can also be configured so that a plurality of 1G-run stocks can be awarded in one 1G-run lottery.

When the pseudo bonus ends, if the value of the 1G-run stock counter is 1 or more (that is, if you have 1G-run stock), one 1G-run stock is consumed (1G-run stock counter is 1 is subtracted), and the pseudo bonus is started again from the next game after the pseudo bonus is finished. In this case, since the pseudo bonus corresponding to the right of 1G ream stock starts, the mode transition lottery described above is not performed. On the other hand, when the pseudo-bonus ends, if the value of the 1G-run stock counter is not 1 or more (that is, if you do not own 1G-run stock), and if you have not won the above-mentioned ceiling reduction lottery, The ceiling game number is set according to the current mode (in the end mode, the advantageous section ends after 32 games have passed (and is cleared accordingly), so it is not set, but here the ceiling game number is assumed to be may be set), the pseudo-bonus ends (“pseudo-bonus ends” in FIG. 5), and the production section (normal game) is entered.

In addition, if you win the ceiling shortening lottery and you also have 1G consecutive stock, the result of the ceiling shortening lottery will be prioritized, and after the pseudo bonus according to the ceiling shortening is executed, the pseudo bonus according to the 1G consecutive stock will be given. Alternatively, the 1G ream stock may be given priority, and after the pseudo bonus corresponding to the 1G ream stock is executed, the pseudo bonus corresponding to the ceiling reduction may be executed. In the latter case, it is sufficient to separately store information that can carry over the fact that the ceiling is shortened.

In the first game machine, as an example of the configuration of the increase section (pseudo-bonus), it is possible to obtain a maximum of 275 cards by continuing for "55 games", but the configuration of the pseudo-bonus is limited to this. do not have. For example, the pseudo-bonus is configured as a "pseudo BB (big bonus)", and a "pseudo-RB (regular bonus)", which is a pseudo-bonus that continues for "22 games" and allows up to 110 cards to be obtained, is installed. You may do so. In this case, in the above-mentioned pseudo-bonus transition lottery, when reaching the ceiling, and 1G consecutive lottery, when it is decided to move to a pseudo-bonus (to grant rights), the type (for example, "pseudo BB" and or "pseudo RB") is determined with a predetermined probability (for example, each 50%). It should be noted that the value of the "pseudo RB" differs from that of the "pseudo BB" (more specifically, the value of the "pseudo BB" is lower than that of the "pseudo BB"). BB", but by lowering the bernavi rate (probability of notification of stop operation information), it is possible to make a difference in the maximum obtainable number of sheets and to make the value different. Further, when the "pseudo RB" is started, a reel effect in which "BAR" symbols are displayed together in the main display window 4, or a reel effect in which "red 7-red 7-BAR" is displayed is performed. You can do it like this. Furthermore, the increasing section is not limited to being configured as a pseudo bonus. For example, it can be configured as an AT state or an ART state in which the number of games to be continued (game period) can be changed.

Also, during the pseudo-bonus, if the conditions for executing limit processing shown in FIG. ), and as a result, it shifts to a non-advantageous section.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the above-described game flow is based on the premise that the game is basically played in a three-coin bet state. Therefore, when a game is played with two bets, various lotteries using, for example, (a) to (d) of FIG. 7, (e) and (f) of FIG. The number of ceiling games is not updated either. In addition, when a game is played with two coins bet during the pseudo bonus, since the number of medals is not increased in the state of two bets, the interval during the pseudo bonus is not increased. In other words, the first gaming machine is configured such that the player is basically at a disadvantage when playing a game in a two-coin bet state.

Here, when the game is played with two bets, lotteries related to the advantageous section (AT) (for example, (a) to (d) in FIG. 7, (e) and (f) in FIG. 8, etc. are used). Although various lotteries and processing (for example, updating the ceiling game number, etc.) are not performed, the advantageous section game number counter for the above-mentioned game number limiter and the advantageous section payout number counter for the above-mentioned payout number limiter are updated. should be carried out. These limiters have the function of appropriately suppressing gambling by limiting the upper limit of the number of games you can stay in the advantageous section and the number of winning cards, so if you bet two cards, these counters will not be updated. As a result, there may be cases where the upper limit of the number of staying games or the number of winning cards in the set advantageous section is exceeded due to the intervening game with two bets, and as a result, the gambling aspect cannot be suppressed appropriately. in order to obtain Therefore, the limiter counter is desirably configured so that it can be updated every game regardless of the number of bets.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the above-described game flow is basically based on the premise that the game is played in the non-bonus state. Therefore, when a game is played in the bonus state (2BB state and 3BB state), for example, various lotteries using (a) to (d) in FIG. 7, (e) and (f) in FIG. It is not performed, and the number of ceiling games is not updated. In addition, when the bonus state occurs during the pseudo-bonus, the bonus state is configured as a state in which the expected increase in medals is lower than in the non-bonus state (more specifically, in the non-bonus state with three bets). , In some cases, the pseudo bonus does not become an increase section. That is, the first gaming machine is constructed so that the player may be at a disadvantage if he/she plays the game in the bonus state.

Therefore, in the first gaming machine, it is recommended to play a game with a 3-card bet state between 2BB flags (in this embodiment, the 3-card bet state between 2BB flags is referred to as a "recommended game state”, and other states may be described as “non-recommended gaming states”). That is, in the first gaming machine, 2BB is a bonus combination that is won only when 2 symbols are bet, and between the 2BB flags, the combination of symbols related to 2BB wins only when 2 symbols are bet, and wins when 3 symbols are bet. It is configured not to Also, 3BB is a bonus combination that is won only when 3 symbols are bet, and between the 3BB flags, the combination of symbols related to 3BB wins only when 3 symbols are bet, and does not win when 2 symbols are bet. In addition, there is no case where 3BB wins between 2BB flags, and there is no case where 2BB wins between 3BB flags.

Then, in the first gaming machine, using these configurations, for example, 2BB is won in the 2-card bet state between non-flags (2BB is not won), and then 3-card bet state after 2BB flags are won. , the game can be played in the above-described recommended game state without worrying about whether or not the bonus combination is won.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, the ceiling reduction lottery is performed during the pseudo bonus. Here, looking at the ceiling shortening lottery table shown in FIG. While the ceiling reduction lottery is won with a probability of /8 (32/256), the ceiling reduction lottery is not won in other modes. That is, in the case of a mode with a ceiling number of games of "32 games", the "32 games" may be shortened to "0 games", and in the case of a mode with a ceiling number of games greater than that, There is no case where the number of ceiling games is shortened.

Even in a mode with a ceiling number of games greater than "32 games", the number of ceiling games is lower than in a mode with a ceiling number of games of "32 games" may be determined to be shortened.

Also, the manner in which the number of ceiling games is shortened is not limited to that described above. For example, if the "32 games" are shortened to a smaller predetermined number of games (0 to 31 games), the same action and effect can be achieved. Alternatively, in the ceiling reduction lottery, the number of games to be shortened may be determined in advance.

Further, the trigger for performing the ceiling reduction lottery is not limited to the above. For example, during the pseudo-bonus, a ceiling-shortening lottery may be performed for each game. Also, in the advantageous section (normal game), when the current mode is one of the security mode, heaven A mode, heaven B mode, and heaven C mode, a ceiling shortening lottery will be performed for each game. can be In these cases, the sub-flag for advantageous section winning and the sub-flag for advantageous section winning may be referenced to determine whether or not the ceiling reduction lottery is won.

Further, as described above, in the first gaming machine, a 1G consecutive lottery is performed during the pseudo bonus. Here, looking at the 1G run lottery table shown in (d) of FIG. 7, 1G run stock may be granted regardless of the current mode. That is, the right to continue the pseudo-bonus can be granted regardless of whether the mode is the ceiling game number of "32 games" or not.

Note that the mode of granting the right is not limited to the one described above. For example, when the number of ceiling games is "32 games", the 1G consecutive lottery is not performed in consideration of the fact that the ceiling short lottery is performed, and the number of ceiling games is greater than that of "32 games". By performing the 1G consecutive lottery when , it is possible to prevent the gambling aspect of the game from becoming excessively high.

Further, the trigger for performing the 1G consecutive lottery is not limited to the one described above. For example, a 1G run lottery may be performed even in an advantageous section (performance section) other than the pseudo bonus, and the 1G run stock stocked as a result may be consumed in the next pseudo bonus.

Although illustration is omitted in FIGS. 5 to 8, in the first gaming machine, when the current mode is heaven mode at the start of the pseudo-bonus or during the pseudo-bonus, it is in an advantageous state. A special bonus mid-effect for suggesting something is executed with a predetermined probability. Therefore, when the special bonus middle effect is executed, it is possible to expect that the ceiling reduction lottery will be executed. In addition, the effect during the special bonus may be executed with a probability of 100% when the ceiling reduction lottery is won. In this way, for example, when the special bonus mid-effect is executed at the start of the pseudo-bonus, it is suggested that the player is staying in the heaven mode at least, and furthermore, it is expected that the player may have won the ceiling reduction lottery. can make you feel. Further, the effect during the special bonus may be executed at a predetermined probability or at a probability of 100% even when the 1G consecutive lottery is won during the pseudo bonus. In this way, (1) heaven mode only, (2) heaven mode + ceiling short lottery, (3) heaven mode + 1G consecutive lottery, (4) heaven mode + ceiling short lottery + 1G consecutive lottery, (5) 1G consecutive lottery Various possibilities, such as winning only, can be suggested, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Thus, in the first gaming machine, when it is confirmed that the advantageous state (for example, pseudo-bonus) will be controlled again within a predetermined period (for example, 32 games) after the end of the advantageous state (for example, , heaven mode), the period can be further shortened, so even if the game period of a series of advantageous intervals is limited (for example, when limit processing is executed), the player can It is possible to prevent the loss of interest in the game by allowing the game to be played in a state where the degree of advantage is as high as possible.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, even if it is not confirmed that the advantageous state will be controlled again within a predetermined period after the advantageous state ends (for example, in the end mode), the right (for example, , 1G ream stock) may start the advantageous state again, so the expectation of the player can be heightened and the interest in the game can be improved.

Also, although not shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, in the first gaming machine, when a “fixed combination” is determined as a sub-flag at the time of winning an advantageous section (that is, “F_fixed cherry” or “F_ If "reach" is determined as an internal winning combination), and as a result of the above mode transition lottery, if it is determined to shift to heaven C mode, the probability is 1/2 (this probability is arbitrary ), a special lock effect can be executed. It should be noted that even when the advantageous section winning sub-flag "Medium Che" is determined (that is, when "F_Middle Cherry" is determined as the internal winning combination), the player can set the advantageous section winning sub-flag "Fixed hand". ” is determined, so if the sub-flag “Medium Che” is determined when winning the advantageous section, it is possible to receive the same benefits as when “fixed hand” is determined as the sub-flag when winning the advantageous section. Similarly, a special lock effect may be made executable.

Here, since the "fixed combination" is a combination that also confirms the transition to the pseudo-bonus (see (c) in FIG. 7), when the special lock effect is executed, the player can transition to the pseudo-bonus and heaven C mode. It is possible to recognize that there was a problem, and the interest of the player is greatly increased. The special lock effect is configured as, for example, an effect in which the game operation (stop operation) is disabled for about 20 seconds at the start of the game. During this period, a special reel effect may be performed in which each reel vibrates or rotates in the reverse direction, or a special image or the like that is not normally displayed may be displayed on the main effect display section 21. can be Also, a special piece of music that is not normally output may be output. Of course, it is also possible to produce an effect by combining these. In addition, although the game operation is not invalidated, these effects can be performed until the player performs the next game operation (that is, the effect can be executed to the end or canceled in the middle). The player may be allowed to decide whether to proceed with the game).

However, in the first gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 16, which will be described later, for example, even if the user stays in Heaven C mode, the execution of limit processing may force the advantageous section to end. , it may not be desirable to perform the above special lock effect many times.

Therefore, in the first gaming machine, the special lock effect is executed only once within the same series of advantageous sections. Specifically, in a series of advantageous sections, when it is decided to execute a special lock effect first, the special lock effect is executed, but after that, within the same series of advantageous sections, the same conditions are applied. To control so that a special lock performance is not executed even when it is established. In addition, as a method, when the special lock effect is executed once, information indicating that is stored, and after that, if the information is stored in the same series of advantageous sections, the special lock effect is performed in the first place. The decision as to whether or not to execute the effect may not be made, or the decision may be made, but if the information is stored, the result of the decision indicates that the effect will be executed. may be rewritten to indicate that it is not executed. Then, the stored information may be cleared when the advantageous section ends.

Note that the manner in which execution of the special lock effect is restricted is not limited to the above. For example, the upper limit number of times that the execution of the special lock effect is restricted may be set as "two times" or "three times" instead of "one time". That is, the execution of the special lock effect is limited, but the upper limit may be set as multiple times. This can be appropriately set according to the expected value of the number of balls to be released per special lock effect.

Further, the conditions for determining whether or not the special lock effect is to be executed are not limited to those described above. That is, in the above, the mode transition is performed with the winning of the "fixed combination" as a trigger, and on the condition that the mode is Heaven C mode, it is determined whether or not the special lock effect is to be executed. However, for example, there are cases where the transition to heaven C mode is triggered by a trigger other than the winning of the "fixed hand" (see (f) in FIG. 8), so the special lock effect is executed in these cases as well. A special lock effect is executed with a predetermined probability (the probability may be the same as in the case of winning a “fixed hand”, or the probability may be different). It may be determined that

Further, for example, it is assumed that, with the winning of the "fixed combination" as a trigger, first, whether or not the special lock effect is to be executed is determined, and when it is determined that the special lock effect is to be executed, the heaven You may make it transfer to C mode. That is, the special lock effect may be executed in response to the determination to shift to the heaven C mode, or the heaven C mode may be executed in response to the determination to perform the special lock effect. You may make it shift to .

Further, for example, the degree of progress of the game during the advantageous section may be employed as the condition for determining whether or not the special lock effect is to be executed. For example, when the value of the advantageous section game number counter or the control game number counter described later is less than "750", or when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter or the control game number counter described later is less than "1201". , as described above, it is determined whether or not the special lock effect is to be executed, and when the value of the advantageous section game number counter or the control game number counter, which will be described later, becomes "750" or more, or when the advantageous game number counter, which will be described later, When the value of the section payout number counter or the payout number counter for control reaches '1201' or more, it is not determined whether or not the special lock performance is to be executed in the same series of advantageous sections thereafter. can also

Thus, in the first gaming machine, the game period of the series of advantageous sections is limited to a fixed period (see FIG. 16 described later). In the same series of advantageous sections, even if control information with a high degree of advantage for the player (for example, Heaven C mode) is set multiple times, a special effect (for example, a special lock effect) is provided each time. is controlled so that it will not occur. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting while preventing the gambling aspect of the game from becoming excessively high.

Further, in the first gaming machine, in a series of advantageous intervals, it is determined that control is performed in an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo-bonus) triggered by the winning of a specific combination (for example, a "fixed combination"). , control information that is highly advantageous to the player (for example, Heaven C mode) may be set. In the same series of advantageous sections, even if such cases occur multiple times, control is performed so that the special effect (for example, the special lock effect) is not performed each time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting while preventing the gambling aspect of the game from becoming excessively high.

Further, in the first gaming machine, it is possible to determine secondary information (for example, a sub-flag at the time of advantageous section winning) according to the determined internal winning combination, and secondary information according to the combination of displayed symbols ( For example, it is possible to determine an advantageous zone winning sub-flag), and whether or not to give an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus) in which information about the player's stop operation is notified according to the determined secondary information It is determinable.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, not only when the internal winning combination is determined, but also when the combination of symbols is displayed, it is possible to give a sense of expectation regarding the provision of an advantageous state. It is possible to diversify the playability related to giving.

Further, in the first gaming machine, information corresponding to the determined internal winning combination and information corresponding to the combination of displayed symbols are both managed as common secondary information. It is possible to suppress an increase in the control load and the amount of information regarding provision.

Further, in the first gaming machine, when the gaming value bet is the first amount (for example, 3 coins), the first special role (for example, 3BB) can be won, while the second special role (for example, , 2BB) are not allowed to be won. Further, when the gaming value bet is the second amount (for example, 2), the second special combination is allowed to be won, but the first special combination is not allowed to be won. Further, when a specific combination (for example, "F_replay A") is won, if the first special permission state (for example, between 3BB flags) is displayed, a combination of predetermined symbols (for example, "rising right") is displayed. If there are two special permission states (for example, between two BB flags), it is possible to display a combination of specific symbols (for example, "parallel lips") (see FIG. 15, which will be described later).

In the first gaming machine, different secondary information can be determined depending on whether a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed or a combination of specific symbols is displayed. That is, in the first gaming machine, even if the same special role is determined, the content of the decision regarding the granting of the advantageous state can be changed according to which special permission state it is in. It is possible to further diversify the playability while suppressing an increase in the control load and the amount of information regarding the provision of states.

Further, in the first gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not to provide an advantageous state at least when a specific combination is won and a combination of specific symbols is displayed.

Here, in the first gaming machine, since both the combination of the predetermined symbols and the combination of the specific symbols are combinations of symbols related to replay, even if either one is displayed, it is called an operation of replay. The same benefits will be granted.

Note that the manner in which the same privilege is granted is not limited to the one described above. For example, the specific winning combination is configured as a specific small winning combination for giving a game value. Then, when a specific minor combination is won, for example, in the first special permission state, one coin (this value is arbitrary, and may be another value equal to or lower than the bet gaming value, or bet display a combination of predetermined symbols (combination of symbols pertaining to the granting of game value corresponding to "rising to the right") to which a game value is awarded (which may be a value exceeding the game value of the second special permission); If so, the combination of specific symbols (combination of symbols related to the granting of game value equivalent to "parallel lip") that gives the same number of game values as when the combination of predetermined symbols is displayed is displayed. may

In addition, both the combination of predetermined symbols and the combination of specific symbols are combinations of “lost” symbols (however, since it is possible to determine whether or not to give an advantageous state, a different symbol from the case of pure “losing”) A combination of identifiable symbols may be used). Even in this case, the value remains the same.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, even when the same special combination is determined, depending on which special permission state it is in, the content of determination regarding the provision of an advantageous state can be varied. , it is possible to diversify the playability while suppressing an increase in the control load and the amount of information regarding the provision of the advantageous state. In addition, in a game in which a specific combination is determined, the same privilege is granted regardless of the special permission state, so even if the game characteristics are changed, the player will not be directly disadvantaged. It is possible to prevent it from being covered.

Further, in the first gaming machine, when the specific combination is won, when the second special permission state is established, when the stop operation is performed in the specific mode, the combination of the specific symbols can be displayed. It may be configured so as not to allow the combination of specific symbols to be displayed when the stop operation is not performed in the mode.

Then, it may be possible to decide whether or not to give an advantageous state at least when a specific combination is won and a combination of specific symbols is displayed. If the specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination, even if it is possible to make the degree of advantage in giving an advantageous state different between when the combination of specific symbols is displayed and when the combination of specific symbols is not displayed. good.

Further, when a specific combination is won, if the first special permission state is established, a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and if the second special permission state is established, the stop operation is performed in a specific mode. is performed, a combination of specific symbols may be displayed, and when a stop operation is not performed in a specific mode, a combination of predetermined symbols may be displayed.

In this case, the specific combination is determined when the timing of the stop operation is appropriate for at least one reel (in this embodiment, this may be described as "pressed position ○" or "correct pressed position"). When a combination of specific symbols is displayed and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate (in this embodiment, this may be described as "pressed position x" or "incorrect pressed position"), the combination of predetermined symbols is displayed. Can be configured as displayed. As a result, the degree of advantage in giving an advantageous state can be varied due to (the timing of) the player's stop operation, so the player can concentrate more on the game, and the interest in the game can be improved. can.

Further, as described above, the specific combination can also be configured as a specific small combination. In this case, when the timing of the stop operation is appropriate for at least one reel (in the case of the pressed position ◯), the specific symbol is displayed. A combination is displayed and a predetermined number of game values are awarded, and when the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate (in the case of the pressed position x), a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed and a specific number of game values are awarded. can do. In this case, the predetermined number may be the same as the specific number (that is, the same privilege). Also, a predetermined number of game values may be awarded that is greater than the specific number. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game values may be awarded that is smaller than the specific number. Also, at least one of the combination of the specific symbols and the combination of the predetermined symbols may be used as the combination of symbols when a failure occurs. That is, either the predetermined number or the specific number may be set to "0". As a result, it is possible not only to change the degree of advantage related to the provision of an advantageous state due to (the timing of) the player's stop operation, but also to directly change the content of the privilege, so that the player can The player can concentrate more on the game, further diversify the playability, and improve the amusement of the game.

Also, if there is only one type of specific combination, the timing at which the stop operation is appropriate is limited, so it is desirable to provide a plurality of specific combinations with different timings at which the stop operation is appropriate. For example, in one reel, when the timing of the stop operation is the first timing, an appropriate stop operation is performed and a combination of specific symbols is displayed, and when the timing is other than the first timing, the appropriate stop operation is performed. When the timing of the stop operation is the second timing different from the first timing, the proper stop operation is performed and the combination of the specific symbols is displayed. When the timing is other than the second timing, there is no proper stop operation and the combination of specific symbols is not displayed, and the timing of the stop operation is the first timing and the second timing. When the third timing is different, an appropriate stop operation is performed and the combination of the specific symbols is displayed, and when the timing is other than the third timing, the appropriate stop operation is not performed and the combination of the specific symbols is not displayed. A third special combination may be provided, and these may be won with the same winning probability.

Also, in this case, for the specific combination, a combination of specific symbols is displayed when the batting order is appropriate (in the case of correct pressing order), and a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed when the batting order is not appropriate (in the case of incorrect pressing order). Can be configured as displayed. As a result, the degree of advantage for giving an advantageous state can be changed due to the player's stop operation (procedure), so the player can concentrate more on the game, and the interest in the game can be improved. can.

Further, the specific combination can be configured as a specific small combination as described above. In this case, when the batting order is appropriate (in the case of the correct pressing order), a combination of specific symbols is displayed and a predetermined number of games are played. Values are given, and when the batting order is not appropriate (in the case of incorrect answer pressing order), a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed and a specific number of game values are given. In this case, the predetermined number may be the same as the specific number (that is, the same privilege). Also, a predetermined number of game values may be awarded that is greater than the specific number. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game values may be awarded that is smaller than the specific number. Also, at least one of the combination of the specific symbols and the combination of the predetermined symbols may be used as the combination of symbols when the omission occurs. That is, either the predetermined number or the specific number may be set to "0". As a result, it is possible not only to change the degree of advantage related to the provision of an advantageous state due to the player's stop operation (procedure), but also to directly change the content of the privilege, so that the player can The player can concentrate more on the game, further diversify the playability, and improve the amusement of the game.

Also, if there is only one specific combination, the appropriate batting order is also limited, so it is desirable to provide a plurality of specific combinations with different appropriate batting orders. For example, when it is the first stop on the left, an appropriate stop operation is performed and a combination of specific symbols is displayed, and when it is the first stop on the center and right, an appropriate stop operation is not performed and the combination of specific symbols is not displayed. When it is the first specific combination and the middle first stop, the combination of specific symbols is displayed as an appropriate stop operation, and when it is the left/right first stop, the specific symbols are displayed without an appropriate stop operation. The second special combination is not displayed, and when it is the first stop on the right, it is an appropriate stop operation and the combination of specific symbols is displayed, and when it is the first stop on the left and middle, it is not an appropriate stop operation. A third specific combination in which a combination of specific symbols is not displayed is provided in the third combination, and these can be won with the same winning probability.

Up to this point, in the unit game in which the specific role is won, due to the stop operation mode (at least one or both of the timing of the stop operation and the batting order), the transition determination process to the advantageous section in the non-advantageous section, and the advantageous section (Including pseudo-bonus transition lottery, mode transition lottery, and other processing for changing the advantage of the gaming situation in the advantageous section) regarding the granting of an advantageous state. Of these, changes that are relatively disadvantageous to the player (which may be disadvantageous as a result) can be regarded as the aforementioned penalty. Therefore, when such a change occurs, the configuration may be such that an arbitrary effect (warning notification) for calling attention can be generated.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when a specific combination is won, the possibility of being given an advantageous state is higher when a combination of specific symbols is displayed than when a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed. It's becoming That is, assuming that three cards are bet, the second special permission state (for example, between 2BB flags) is a state in which an advantageous state is given more preferentially than the first special permission state (for example, between 3BB flags). is.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when a predetermined combination (for example, "push order bell B" described later) is won, if the first special permission state is met, the combination of given symbols (for example, 8 payouts) regardless of the batting order While the combination of symbols to become) is displayed, in the second special permission state, if the hitting order is the predefined correct answer pressing order, the combination of the given symbols is displayed, but the hitting order is predefined If it is not in the given correct order of pressing, the combination of given symbols is not displayed, and the game value is not given, or only a smaller amount of game value is given than when the combination of given symbols is displayed. It is configured to display a combination of symbols (for example, a combination of symbols that results in one payout). That is, if the operation of the advantageous state is not taken into consideration, the first special permission state is a state in which the provision of game value is given more preferentially than the second special permission state.

That is, even if the player is in the non-recommended gaming state, if the player plays the game with three bets between the 3BB flags, the probability of giving the advantageous state is not favored, but the game value when the advantageous state is not activated is increased. Since the award probability is given preferential treatment, the game can be played in a state in which the difference in slope value between when the advantageous state is activated and when it is not activated is relatively small. In this way, a state in which the player's game value is less likely to decrease, although the possibility of the player's game value being able to increase rapidly decreases, can be defined as, for example, a "stable state".

On the other hand, if the player plays the game in the recommended game state, the probability of giving the advantageous state is preferential, but the probability of giving the game value when the advantageous state is not activated is not favored, so the advantageous state is activated. The game can be played in a state in which the difference in the tilt value between when it is activated and when it is not activated is relatively large. In this way, a state in which the player is likely to be able to rapidly increase the game value, but the game value of the player is likely to decrease can be defined as, for example, a “stormy state”.

Here, the method for creating the two states of the stable state and the rough sea state is not limited to the one described above. For example, in the "stable state", in the above-mentioned pseudo-bonus transition lottery, while raising the probability of transition of the pseudo-bonus more than "rough sea state", in the above-mentioned mode transition lottery, the probability of transition to heaven mode is higher than "rough sea state" Lower. In addition, in the "rough sea state", in the above-mentioned pseudo-bonus transition lottery, while lowering the transition probability of the pseudo-bonus than in the "stable state", in the above-mentioned mode transition lottery, the transition probability of heaven mode Increase. In this way, it is possible to create a state in which it is easy to hit the pseudo-bonus at the beginning in the "stable state" but it is difficult to make a succession. state can be created. As described above, the predetermined combination stop control may vary between the 2BB flags and the 3BB flags, or may be different (that is, no preferential treatment between the 3BB flags).

[5-2. Symbol arrangement configuration of the first gaming machine]
Next, referring to FIG. 9, the symbol arrangement configuration of the first gaming machine will be described. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of the symbol arrangement table of the first gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 9, in the first gaming machine, "red 7", "BAR", "replay", "bell", "watermelon", "cherry", "red blank", "yellow blank", " 10 kinds of patterns of "white blank 1" and "white blank 2" are arranged at the positions shown in FIG. 9 on each of the reels 3L, 3C and 3R. Further, as shown in the symbol code table, symbol codes 1 to 10 are assigned to each symbol.

[5-3. Internal Winning Combination Configuration of First Gaming Machine]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 10 to 15, the internal winning combination configuration of the first gaming machine will be described. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the internal lottery table of the first gaming machine. 11 to 14 are diagrams showing an example of the symbol combination table of the first gaming machine. Also, FIG. 15 is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, the stop operation mode, the display combination, etc., of the first gaming machine. That is, hereinafter, which symbol is selected according to the type of internal winning combination that is drawn by lottery in the first gaming machine, and the stop operation mode (that is, the batting order, stop operation timing, etc.) when each internal winning combination is won. (which can also be rephrased as a display combination, a winning combination, a stop display mode, a display result, etc.) will be displayed.

First, in the first gaming machine, in the internal lottery process (see FIG. 26) described later, each internal winning combination shown in FIG. 10 is won with the probability shown in FIG. Combinations of symbols permitted to be displayed when each internal winning combination is won are as shown in "corresponding symbol combination" in FIG. In FIGS. 11 to 14, "BB" indicates a combination of symbols for a bonus hand, "REP" indicates a combination of symbols for a replay hand, and "FRU" indicates a combination of symbols for a small hand. is shown.

"F_2BB" can be determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played in a non-bonus state (more specifically, between non-flags) in a 2-coin bet state, while a game is played in a 3-coin bet state. It is configured not to be determined as an internal winning combination when the winning combination is determined. In a game in which "F_2BB" is won in a two-bet state, or in a game in which "losing" between 2BB flags, "BB01" is displayed if the pressed position is ○ for each reel, and a 2BB state (based on 2BB) is displayed. bonus state). On the other hand, even between two BB flags, "BB01" is not displayed when three cards are bet.

"F_3BB" can be determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played in a non-bonus state (more specifically, between non-flags) in a 3-coin bet state, while a game is played in a 2-coin bet state. It is configured not to be determined as an internal winning combination when the winning combination is determined. In a game in which "F_3BB" is won in a three-bet state, or in a game in which "lost" between 3BB flags, "BB02" is displayed if the pressed position is ○ for each reel, and a 3BB state (based on 3BB) is displayed. bonus state). On the other hand, even between the 3BB flags, "BB02" is not displayed when two cards are bet.

In the 2BB state and the 3BB state, the lottery value in the "bonus state" column in FIG. 10 is referred to determine the internal winning combination (the number of possible coins to start the game is only 3 bets). During the 2BB state and the 3BB state, it is always controlled to the state (RB state) in which the RB, which is the first class special item, is in operation. In addition, in the RB state, control is repeated such that when winning occurs twice or the game is played twice after activation, the control is once terminated and then activated again. In addition, in the first gaming machine, the condition for ending the 2BB state is that more than one medal has been paid out in the 2BB state, and the condition for ending the 3BB state is that more than 176 medals have been paid out in the 3BB state. has been paid out.

Here, when the 2BB state or the 3BB state ends, special mode transition processing is performed. For example, when transitioning to the bonus state (during the bonus state, the mode transition is not performed, so it is synonymous with when the bonus state ends), that is, if the current mode is the "start mode", the transition destination mode is "start mode". Also, if the current mode is one of the "normal A mode", "normal B mode", "paradise preparation mode", and "chance mode", the transition destination mode is the "normal A mode". Also, if the current mode is either "end A mode" or "end B mode", the transition destination mode is "end A mode". Also, if the current mode is any one of "guaranteed mode", "heaven A mode", "heaven B mode", and "heaven C mode", the destination mode will be "guaranteed mode".

"F_Replay A" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, between non-flags and between 2BB flags, regardless of the stop operation mode, one of "REP64" to "REP72" Since these are to be displayed, they can be collectively called “parallel lips.” Also, “REP64” to “REP71” can be collectively called “lower stage lips.” ) is displayed and replay is awarded. On the other hand, between the 3BB flags, regardless of the stop operation mode, "REP73" (because this is to display the "Replay" symbol in an upward-sloping manner, this can be called an "upward-sloping lip"). It is displayed and replay is granted.

"F_Replay B" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. It should be noted that the internal winning combination can be determined in the 3-coin bet state, but it can be configured so that the internal winning combination is not determined in the 2-coin bet state. When the internal winning combination is determined, "parallel replay" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode in any state, and a replay is awarded.

"F_Cherry" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. It should be noted that the internal winning combination can be determined in the 3-coin bet state, but it can be configured so that the internal winning combination is not determined in the 2-coin bet state. When the internal winning combination is determined, in the double-bet state, the "middle stage reply" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded. In the 3-card bet state, any one of "REP28", "REP60" to "REP63" if the pressed position is ○ for at least the left reel 3L (these are for displaying the "cherry" symbol on the lower row of the left reel 3L). Therefore, these can be collectively referred to as "cherry lips") are displayed, and replay is granted. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, other replies (for example, "REP57" to "REP59") are displayed and a replay is granted.

"F_definite cherry" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. It should be noted that the internal winning combination can be determined in the 3-coin bet state, but it can be configured so that the internal winning combination is not determined in the 2-coin bet state. When the internal winning combination is determined, in the double-bet state, the "middle stage reply" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded. In the 3-card bet state, if the pressing order is any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", at least for the left reel 3L, if the pressing position is ○, any of "REP42" to "REP56" (these are The symbol "Cherry" is displayed in the lower part of the left reel 3L. For example, symbols such as "REP42" are also displayed on the other reels to increase the expectation of the player. (which can be collectively referred to as "determined cherry slip") is displayed, and a replay is granted. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, other replies (for example, the above-mentioned "Cherry Lip" or "REP29" to "REP41") are displayed, and a replay is awarded. In addition, when the pressing order is either "Battering order 5" or "Battering order 6", the "middle stage reply" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded.

"F_middle cherry" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. It should be noted that the internal winning combination can be determined in the 3-coin bet state, but it can be configured so that the internal winning combination is not determined in the 2-coin bet state. When the internal winning combination is determined, in the double-bet state, the "middle stage reply" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded. In the 3-card bet state, if the pressing order is any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", at least for the left reel 3L, if the pressing position is ○, any of "REP15" to "REP19" (these are Since the "cherry" symbol is displayed in the middle row of the left reel 3L, these can be generically called "middle stage cherry lips") are displayed, and a replay is awarded. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, other replies (for example, "REP20" to "REP27") are displayed, and a replay is granted. In addition, when the pressing order is either "Battering order 5" or "Battering order 6", the "middle stage reply" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded.

"F_Reach" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. It should be noted that the internal winning combination can be determined in the 3-coin bet state, but it can be configured so that the internal winning combination is not determined in the 2-coin bet state. When the internal winning combination is determined, in the double-bet state, the "middle stage reply" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded. In the 3-bet state, if the pressing order is any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", regardless of the stop operation mode, any of "REP01" to "REP14" (these are customarily used by players It is configured as a combination of symbols that can confirm (or suggest) a transition to a state that is advantageous to the player, and these can be collectively referred to as "reach eyes") is displayed, and replay is possible. Granted. In addition, when the pressing order is either "Battering order 5" or "Battering order 6", the "middle stage reply" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded.

"F_Watermelon" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, if the pressed position is ◯ for each reel, one of “FRU10” to “FRU12” (since these are displayed side by side with “watermelon” symbols, these are selected). "watermelon") is displayed, and three medals are paid out if three medals are bet, and two medals are paid out if two medals are bet. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, either "FRU08" or "FRU09" (because these are not displayed with "watermelon" symbols side by side, they can be collectively called "watermelon spill"). is displayed and one medal is paid out. In addition, in the case of the pressed position x, it is also possible to cause a dropout to occur so that no medals are paid out.

"F_bell 123A1", "F_bell 123A2", "F_bell 132A1", "F_bell 132A2", "F_bell 213A1", "F_bell 213A2", "F_bell 231A1", "F_bell 231A2", "F_ "Bell 312A1", "F_Bell 312A2", "F_Bell 321A1", and "F_Bell 321A2" can be determined as internal winning combinations regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. It should be noted that these can be collectively referred to as "push order bell A".

As shown in FIG. 15, "push order bell A" is a small push order combination with 6 choices (any one of "hitting order 1" to "hitting order 6" is the correct hitting order). , and when it is determined as an internal winning combination, when the stop operation is performed in the corresponding correct order of pressing, "Right falling bell" ("FRU03"), "Upper bell" ("FRU01" and "FRU02") ), "middle bell" ("FRU04"), "right rising bell" ("FRU05"), "mountain bell" ("FRU06"), and "lower bell" ("FRU07") is displayed, and 8 medals are paid out if 3 coins are bet, and 2 coins are paid out if 2 coins are bet. On the other hand, when the stop operation is not performed in the corresponding correct order of pressing, if the first stop operation is correct, the rest of the stop operations have a probability of 1/2 at the pressed position ◯, and at the pressed position ◯. If there is, one of the winning "one-coin" ("FRU13" to "FRU116") is displayed, and one medal is paid out. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, a drop occurs and medals are not paid out. Also, if the first stop operation is not correct, the rest of the stop operations have a probability of 1/8 that the pressed position will be ◯, and if the pressed position is ◯, which one of the winning “one-card roles” will be displayed. , one medal is paid out. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, a drop occurs and medals are not paid out.

"F_bell 123B1", "F_bell 123B2", "F_bell 132B1", "F_bell 132B2", "F_bell 213B1", "F_bell 213B2", "F_bell 231B1", "F_bell 231B2", "F_ "Bell 312B1", "F_Bell 312B2", "F_Bell 321B1", and "F_Bell 321B2" can be determined as internal winning combinations regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. It should be noted that these can be collectively referred to as "push order bell B".

As shown in FIG. 15, the "push order bell B" does not have a small push order win between the 3BB flags in the 2-bet state and the 3-bet state. When an internal winning combination is determined, one of the above-described "bells" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and if 3 medals are bet, 8 medals are paid out, and if 2 medals are bet, 2 medals are paid out. medals are paid out.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15, the "push order bell B" is pressed in states other than between the 3BB flags in the 3-bet state (between the non-flags in the 3-bet state and between the 2BB flags in the 3-bet state). If it is determined as an internal winning combination, and if the stop operation is performed in the corresponding correct order, one of the above-described "bells" will be displayed and eight medals will be awarded. paid out. On the other hand, when the stop operation is not performed in the corresponding correct order of pressing, if the first stop operation is correct, the rest of the stop operations have a probability of 1/2 at the pressed position ◯, and at the pressed position ◯. If there is, one of the winning "one-coin roles" is displayed, and one medal is paid out. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, a drop occurs and medals are not paid out. Also, if the first stop operation is not correct, the rest of the stop operations have a probability of 1/8 that the pressed position will be ◯, and if the pressed position is ◯, any of the winning “one-card roles” will be displayed. , one medal is paid out. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, a drop occurs and medals are not paid out.

"F_RB combination 8 cards" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination in the bonus state. When the internal winning combination is determined, one of the above-described "bells" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and 8 medals are paid out.

"One F_RB combination" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination in the bonus state. When it is determined as an internal winning combination, one of the above-mentioned "one-card combinations" (more specifically, "FRU117" to "FRU120" are added) is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and one card is displayed. medals are paid out.

The internal lottery table shown in FIG. 10, the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 11 to 14, and the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, the stop operation mode, and the display combination shown in FIG. It is not limited to the embodiment.

For example, in the first gaming machine, in a 2-bet state in which ``BB01'' can be displayed when ``losing'', ``BB02'' can be displayed when ``BB01'' is missed and ``losing''. In the 3-bet state, when ``BB02'' is missed and ``losing'' occurs, and when ``losing'' occurs due to 3-betting between 2BB flags, it is 2-betting between 3BB flags. "Loss" may occur in various situations, such as when "losing" due to an event, or "losing" due to missing a "lower winning combination". Therefore, in order to make the combinations of symbols displayed as "lost" different in some or all of these cases, combinations of these different symbols are defined in advance in the symbol combination table, and the determined internal winning combinations are determined. By allowing these to be displayed as ``combination of corresponding symbols'' depending on the condition, the combination of symbols related to ``missing'' to be displayed according to the state or the like can be changed.

[5-4. Limit processing configuration of the first gaming machine]
Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the limit processing configuration of the first gaming machine will be described. FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining an example of each limit process in the first gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 16, in the first gaming machine, normal limit processing (number of games), normal limit processing (number of payouts), special limit processing (number of games), special limit processing (number of payouts), semi-limit processing ( Number of games) and semi-limit processing (number of payouts) are executed. Note that this is an example of executable limit processing, and limit processing other than each of these limit processing can be executed. You can also prevent it from happening.

The normal limit process (the number of games) is executed when the value of the advantageous section game number counter reaches "1500" or more (that is, when the game in the advantageous section is played 1500 times in succession). In addition, the advantageous section game number counter starts counting the number of games played when the advantageous section (including the effect section) starts, and when the advantageous section ends (including the end due to the operation of the limit process) The count is finished and cleared (initialized). In addition, the advantageous section game number counter counts the number of bets regardless of whether the number of bets is 2 or 3. In addition, the advantageous section game number counter performs the counting even in the 2BB state and the 3BB state.

When the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed (activated), regardless of whether it is during the production section or during the increase section (pseudo bonus), the advantageous section is forcibly ended, and the non-advantageous section move to Also, at this time, information about the advantageous section (for example, information for controlling the effect section or the increase section, information regarding the current mode, information regarding the game period of the pseudo bonus, information regarding the number of ceiling games and whether or not the ceiling is shortened) Information, various information obtained during the advantageous interval such as the value of the 1G ream stock counter, and various information necessary for controlling the advantageous interval) are all cleared (initialized).

The normal limit process (number of payouts) is executed when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter becomes "2401" or more (that is, when the number of medals paid out during the advantageous section exceeds 2400). The advantageous section payout number counter starts counting the number of medals paid out (here, for example, "net increase (difference number)") from the start of the advantageous section (including the performance section). When the interval ends (including the end due to the operation of the limit processing), the count is ended and cleared (initialized). Also, the advantageous section payout number counter counts both when the number of bets is 2 and 3. In addition, the advantageous section payout number counter performs the counting even in the 2BB state and the 3BB state. In addition, the advantageous section payout number counter counts appropriately according to the actual number of payouts (for example, "-2" or "-3") when, for example, "lose" or "dropout" occurs during the advantageous section. value is subtracted. Therefore, if the number of medals does not increase and decreases after the advantageous section starts, the value may be negative (or if the value is negative, "0" is always maintained). can also be configured to be That is, the advantageous section payout number counter can count the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section from the lowest point to the defined highest point (difference number: 2400 medals).

When the normal limit processing (number of payouts) is executed (actuated), regardless of whether it is in the production section or in the increase section (pseudo bonus), the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, and the non-advantageous section move to Also, at this time, all the information about the above-mentioned advantageous section is cleared (initialized).

The special limit process (the number of games) is executed when the value of the control game number counter becomes "1445" or more (that is, when the games in the advantageous section are played 1445 times in succession). In addition, the control game number counter starts counting the number of games played when the advantageous section (including the performance section) starts, and when the advantageous section ends (including the end due to the operation of the limit process) It is designed to be cleared (initialized) after completing the counting. Also, the control game number counter counts when the number of bets is three, and does not count when the number of bets is two. In addition, the control game number counter performs the counting in the non-bonus state, and does not perform the counting in the 2BB state and 3BB state. Of course, the control game number counter may have the same configuration as the advantageous section game number counter.

When the special limit processing (the number of games) is executed (activated), if it is during the pseudo bonus (that is, if it is during the increase section), the pseudo bonus is performed without forcibly ending the pseudo bonus in the middle. is terminated, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated and shifted to the non-advantageous section. Also, at this time, all the information about the above-mentioned advantageous section is cleared (initialized).

On the other hand, if it is not during the pseudo bonus (that is, if it is during the performance section), first, the game is forcibly shifted to the pseudo bonus. That is, even if the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery is not won, the special limit process (the number of games) is executed to transfer to the pseudo-bonus. Then, when the transferred pseudo-bonus is finished, the advantageous section is forcibly ended and transferred to the non-advantageous section. At this time, all the information about the above-mentioned advantageous section is also cleared (initialized).

Here, the value of the advantageous section game number counter for which the normal limit process (number of games) is executed (activated) is "1500", whereas the special limit process (number of games) is executed (activated). Focusing on the point that the value of the control game number counter is "1445", the maximum number of games (continuable period) during the pseudo-bonus is "55 games" in the first gaming machine (Fig. 5), this difference takes into consideration the playable period during the pseudo-bonus.

That is, the normal limit processing (the number of games) is executed when the game is played for a predetermined regulation period in the advantageous section in order to suppress the gambling nature of the game from becoming excessively high. However, for example, if this normal limit processing (the number of games) is executed immediately after or during the start of the pseudo-bonus, the player will have a sense of distrust and loss, and the interest in the game will decrease. Sometimes. Therefore, in the first gaming machine, the special limit processing (the number of games) is performed in the game that is before the game in which the normal limit processing (the number of games) is executed by the continuation possible period (55 games) per increase section. By executing this, it is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of distrust or a sense of loss due to the fact that the pseudo bonus ends in the middle.

From this point of view, the timing at which the special limit process (the number of games) is executed (activated) is not limited to the above. For example, the special limit processing (number of games) is executed in the game that is before the normal limit processing (number of games) by the continuation possible period (55 games x 2 sets = 110 games) per two increases. may be made. In addition, for example, in order to give a slight grace period, the continuation possible period (55 games) + grace period (2 games) per increase section is before the game in which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed. Special limit processing (the number of games) may be executed in the game of . Also, for example, in the case of specifications such as passing through a precursor state before transitioning to a pseudo bonus, and if the maximum number of games in this precursor state is "4 games", normal limit processing (number of games) is executed. The special limit process (the number of games) may be executed in a game that is before the game in which the continuation possible period (55 games) per increase section + the maximum sign period (4 games) is before the game. That is, the timing at which the special limit processing (number of games) is executed (actuated) may be any timing before the timing at which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed. It is assumed that it can be set as appropriate according to the game specifications.

The special limit process (number of payouts) is executed when the value of the number-of-payouts counter for control becomes "2126" or more (that is, when the number of medals paid out during the advantageous interval exceeds 2125). Note that the payout number counter for control starts counting the number of medals paid out (here, for example, "net increase (difference number)") from the start of the advantageous section (including the performance section). When the interval ends (including the end due to the operation of the limit processing), the count is ended and cleared (initialized). Also, the control payout counter counts when the number of bets is 3, and does not count when the number of bets is 2. Also, the control payout number counter performs the counting in the non-bonus state, and does not perform the counting in the 2BB state and 3BB state.

In addition, the control payout number counter is decremented by a value that is appropriately counted according to the actual payout number (for example, "-3", etc.) when a "loss" occurs during the advantageous interval. However, the control payout number counter does not cause a "dropout" (or a difference) when a "dropout" occurs during the advantageous section (at least when a difference occurs from the maximum value of the medal payout number). count the number of medals paid out. Specifically, for example, in a game in which "push order bell A" is won with a three-bet, if the batting order is appropriate, the payout number (maximum value) of medals is "8" (the difference is "8"). +5”), while if the batting order is not appropriate, if the pressing position is appropriate, the number of medals paid out will be “1” (“-2” as the difference), and if the pressing position is not appropriate. The number of medals to be paid out will be "0" ("-3" as the difference number) due to the occurrence of a dropout, but the control payout counter will indicate the difference number " + 5 sheets" are counted.

Further, for example, when the value of the advantageous section payout counter becomes larger than the value of the control payout counter due to the activation of the 2BB state or the 3BB state, etc., the value of the control payout counter becomes the advantageous section payout counter. Corrected to the value of the section payout number counter. It should be noted that the control payout number counter may have the same configuration as the advantageous section payout number counter.

When the special limit processing (the number of payouts) is executed (actuated), if it is during the pseudo bonus (that is, if it is during the increase section), the pseudo bonus is not forcibly terminated in the middle. is terminated, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated and shifted to the non-advantageous section. Also, at this time, all the information about the above-mentioned advantageous section is cleared (initialized).

On the other hand, if it is not during the pseudo bonus (that is, if it is during the performance section), first, the game is forcibly shifted to the pseudo bonus. That is, even if the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery is not won, the special limit process (the number of payouts) is executed to transfer to the pseudo-bonus. Then, when the transferred pseudo-bonus is finished, the advantageous section is forcibly ended and transferred to the non-advantageous section. At this time, all the information about the above-mentioned advantageous section is also cleared (initialized).

Here, the value of the advantageous section payout number counter for which the normal limit process (payout number) is executed (operated) is "2401", whereas the special limit process (payout number) is executed (operated). Focusing on the fact that the value of the number-of-games-for-control counter is "2126", the maximum number of coins to be obtained in the pseudo bonus (amount of game value that can be given) is "275" in the first gaming machine. (Refer to FIG. 5), this difference takes into consideration the amount of game value that can be given in the pseudo bonus.

That is, the normal limit processing (the number of payouts) is performed when a predetermined amount of game value is granted in the advantageous section in order to suppress the gambling nature of the game from becoming excessively high. However, for example, if this normal limit processing (payout amount) is executed immediately after the start of the pseudo-bonus or during it, the player will have a sense of distrust and loss, and the interest in the game will decrease. may be lost. Therefore, in the first gaming machine, a game value amount that is less than the game value amount for which the normal limit processing (payout number) is executed is given by the amount of game value that can be given per increase section (275 coins). By executing special limit processing (the number of payouts) at times, it is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of distrust or loss due to the pseudo bonus ending in the middle.

From this point of view, the timing at which the special limit process (number of payouts) is executed (actuated) is not limited to the above. For example, when a game value amount that is less than the game value amount for which normal limit processing (payout number) is executed is given by the amount of game value that can be granted per two increases (275 coins x 2 sets = 550 coins) A special limit process (number of payouts) may be executed. Also, for example, in order to give a slight grace period, the amount of game value that can be granted per increase section (275 coins) + grace period is greater than the amount of game value for which normal limit processing (number of payouts) is executed. The special limit process (the number of games) may be executed when a game value amount that is less than the game value amount (8 cards) to be played is awarded. That is, the timing at which the special limit processing (payout amount) is executed (operated) may be any timing before the timing at which the normal limit processing (payout amount) is executed. It is assumed that it can be set as appropriate according to the game specifications.

In semi-limit processing (number of games), the value of the control game number counter is added to the value of the 1G consecutive counter (if the ceiling reduction lottery is won and the result is ``with ceiling reduction'', ``1'' is added) ) is multiplied by “55” (that is, the period during which the pseudo bonus can be continued), and the result is “1390” or more. For example, if the value of the 1G run counter is "1" and "with ceiling shortening", the value of the latter is "55×2=110", so the value of the control game number counter is "1280". , semi-limit processing (number of games) is executed (activated).

In the semi-limit process (number of payouts), the value of the control payout counter is added to the value of the 1G counter (if the ceiling reduction lottery is won and the result is "with ceiling reduction", "1" is added ) is multiplied by “275” (that is, the amount of gaming value that can be imparted with the pseudo bonus), and is executed when the result of the addition becomes “1851” or more. For example, if the value of the 1G counter is ``1'' and ``with ceiling reduction'', the value of the latter is ``275×2=550'', so the value of the payout number counter for control is ``1301''. ”, the quasi-limit process (the number of payouts) is executed (actuated). In addition, since the semi-limit process (number of games) and the semi-limit process (number of payouts) both regulate the same content, after one operating condition is satisfied and activated, the other operating condition Even if is established, it is not necessary to operate redundantly.

When semi-limit processing (number of games) or preparation limit processing (number of payouts) is executed (activated), the above-mentioned 1G consecutive lottery and ceiling reduction lottery are executed during the pseudo bonus in a series of subsequent advantageous sections. will no longer be. That is, the extension of the game period in the increasing section is suppressed. Note that the method of suppressing the extension of the game period in the increasing interval is not limited to this. For example, in the above-mentioned 1G run lottery, the winning probability of the 1G run may be lower than usual, and in the above-mentioned ceiling reduction lottery, the winning probability of the ceiling reduction may be lower than usual. . That is, although the above-described 1G consecutive lottery and ceiling reduction lottery itself are executed, it may be made difficult to win these lotteries. Further, for example, in the performance section after execution of the semi-limit process (the number of games), the lottery value to be won in the pseudo-bonus transition lottery may be lowered to make it difficult to shift to the pseudo-bonus. Alternatively, the lottery value for determining a mode transition advantageous to the player in the mode transition lottery may be lowered to make it difficult for the pseudo bonuses to continue.

In addition, when semi-limit processing (number of games) or semi-limit processing (payout number) is executed (operated), in a series of subsequent advantageous sections, during the production section, the "fixed hand" (( Special processing is performed when a) is won. In the following, this special processing will be described by taking as an example a case where the "fixed hand" is "F_fixed cherry" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "fixed cherry").

When neither the semi-limit process (number of games) nor the semi-limit process (number of payouts) is activated, if the "fixed cherry" is won during the production section (may be during the increase section), a pseudo-bonus transition lottery At , "win (next game)" is determined (see (c) in FIG. 7). In addition, in the first gaming machine, since the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 3L is a symbol that the player has a high degree of expectation for, in a game in which the information of the stop operation is not reported, the player is left first. It is a general procedure to perform a stop operation with one stop and aiming at a "cherry" symbol (aiming at a "BAR" symbol as a guideline). Therefore, when a game is played according to a general procedure, when a "fixed cherry" is won, first, the "cherry" symbol is stopped on the lower stage of the left reel 3L at the left first stop. In addition, when neither the semi-limit process (number of games) nor the semi-limit process (number of payouts) is activated, if the "fixed cherry" is won, the left first stop ("batting order 1" and "batting order 2") ”) may be notified. Further, "win (next game)" is not limited to the pseudo bonus starting from the next game, but may be the pseudo bonus starting from the next game.

Here, a skillful player stops aiming at the "BAR" symbol also on the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R, for example, in order to further discriminate whether it is a "weak che" or a "determined cherry". perform an operation. As a result, the "BAR" symbols are aligned in the middle of each reel, and it can be recognized that the "definite cherry" has been won (see, for example, "REP42" in FIG. 11). On the other hand, an unskilled player, for example, does not perform the stop operation aiming at the "BAR" symbols on the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R, or is unable to perform the stop operation, and is thus "weak" from the stop display mode. In some cases, it may not be possible to determine whether it is a "fixed cherry" (see, for example, "REP28" in FIG. 11).

In the first gaming machine, when neither the semi-limit processing (number of games) nor the semi-limit processing (payout number) is in operation, the "fixed cherry" is won and the "fixed cherry" is won. symbol combination is displayed, a special winning sound is output. In addition, when "Definite Cherry" was won, the combination of "Definite Cherry Lip" symbols was not displayed, but even if the combination of "Cherry Lip" symbols was displayed, the special winning sound It is designed to be output. Note that the special winning sound may be output with a probability of 100%, or may be output with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 50%).

In any case, when neither semi-limit processing (number of games) nor semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is in operation, if a "fixed cherry" is won, "red 7 matching" will be performed at the start of the next game. ' effect is performed to inform that the pseudo bonus is to be started, and the pseudo bonus is to be started.

On the other hand, after either the semi-limit process (number of games) or the semi-limit process (payout number) has been activated, if the "fixed cherry" is won during the production section (may be during the increase section), the pseudo-bonus transition Although "winning (next game)" is determined once in the lottery (see (c) in FIG. 7), this determination result is rewritten to "winning (current game)" by executing special processing. Then, at the start of the game this time, it is notified that the pseudo bonus is started by performing the "red 7 matching" effect, and the pseudo bonus is started.

At this time, in this game, the stop operation for displaying the symbol combination of "middle stage" without displaying the combination of "determined cherry lips" (including the combination of "cherry lips"). Information notification (special notification) is performed. For example, in the first gaming machine, a special notice to the effect that the right first stop ("batting order 5" and "batting order 6") should be made (see FIG. 15). As a result, when neither semi-limit processing (number of games) nor semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is in operation, the flow of the game such as "Determined Cherry Lip" is displayed → Pseudo bonus starts from the next game. After either the quasi-limit process (number of games) or the quasi-limit process (number of payouts) has been activated, a pseudo-bonus will start from the current game → a stop operation will be performed according to the special notification, resulting in a game called "middle rep" display. is changed to the flow of Note that the special notification may be performed under the control of the main (main control board 71) side. It may be controlled only by the sub (sub control board 72) side.

In addition, after either the semi-limit process (number of games) or the semi-limit process (number of payouts) has been activated, even if the "fixed cherry" is won, the "fixed cherry" is issued despite the special notification. When the symbol combination of "cherry lips" is displayed, no special winning sound is output.

Further, in the first gaming machine, when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as an internal winning combination, basically, the stop operation procedure is not reported. For this reason, assuming that the stop operation procedure is notified and the "middle comment" is displayed only when the above-mentioned special notification is performed, if such a state occurs, one of the The player clearly recognizes that the quasi-limit processing has been activated, and as a result, there is a possibility that the interest in the game is reduced. Therefore, during the advantageous section, regardless of whether any semi-limit process is in operation (or after any semi-limit process has been activated), "F_replay A" or When "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, the same notification as the special notification may be made with a predetermined probability. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling unnatural about the special notification. Also, when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as an internal winning combination, the notification similar to the special notification may be performed when the pseudo-bonus transition lottery is won. Further, in this case, in the pseudo-bonus transition lottery when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, even if "winning (current game)" can be determined with a predetermined probability. good.

So far, in order to activate the normal limit process, the special limit process, and the semi-limit process, the example of monitoring the game period of the advantageous section using the "number of games" and the "number of payouts" has been explained. Conditions for executing each limit process are not limited to those described above, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the value of the advantageous section game number counter, the value of the advantageous section payout number counter, the value of the control game number counter, the value of the control payout number counter, and the value of the 1G run counter when each limit process is executed. And whether or not to shorten the ceiling (that is, variables for activating the semi-limit process) can be appropriately changed according to game specifications, market trends, and the like.

Also, the method for monitoring the game period of the advantageous section is not limited to the one described above. For example, if the "navigation count" is used to monitor the game period of the advantageous section, normal limit processing (navigation count), special limit processing (navigation count), or semi-limit processing (navigation count) number of times) can also be executed. That is, any element (parameter) can be adopted as long as it is an element (parameter) whose value can be counted in order to monitor the gaming period of the advantageous section, and the adopted element is the value for which normal limit processing is performed. , a value for which special limit processing is executed, and a value for which semi-limit processing is executed, each limit processing can be executed in the same manner as described above.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous state (for example, pseudo-bonus) and the specific state (for example, production section) are controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and the game period in this series of advantageous sections is a predetermined period (for example, , the value of the advantageous interval game number counter is "1500" or more), or the gaming value given in the series of advantageous intervals reaches a predetermined amount (for example, the value of the advantageous interval payout number counter is "2401" or more). ), this series of advantageous intervals is forcibly ended, but the game period in this series of advantageous intervals is a specific period shorter than a predetermined period (for example, the value of the control game number counter is "1445"). or more), or when the amount of gaming value given in this series of advantageous intervals becomes a specific amount smaller than a predetermined amount (for example, the value of the control payout number counter is "2126" or more), In the case of being in an advantageous state, the series of advantageous intervals is terminated when shifting to a specific state.

That is, in the first game machine, the series of advantageous intervals is not forcibly ended in the middle of the advantageous state, and the series of advantageous intervals is ended within a certain period of time in a natural flow upon termination of the advantageous state. It is possible to let As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of distrust or loss while suppressing the gambling nature from becoming excessively high, so it is possible to consider the player's emotions. and

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous state (for example, pseudo-bonus) and the specific state (for example, production section) are controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and the game period in this series of advantageous sections lasts for a predetermined period (for example, advantageous When the value of the section game number counter is "1500" or more), or when the amount of gaming value awarded in the series of advantageous sections is a predetermined amount (for example, the value of the advantageous section payout number counter is "2401" or more). When this occurs, the series of advantageous intervals is forcibly terminated, but the game period in the series of advantageous intervals is a specific period shorter than a predetermined period (for example, the value of the control game number counter is "1445" or more). , or when the amount of game value awarded in this series of advantageous intervals reaches a specific amount smaller than a predetermined amount (for example, the value of the control payout number counter is "2126" or more), the advantageous state is reached. If not, it is shifted to an advantageous state, and when the shifted advantageous state ends and shifts to a specific state, the series of advantageous sections is terminated.

That is, in the first game machine, the series of advantageous intervals is not forcibly ended in the middle of the advantageous state, and the series of advantageous intervals is ended within a certain period of time in a natural flow upon termination of the advantageous state. It is possible to let In addition, when ending a series of advantageous sections in this way, if it is not in an advantageous state, it is ended after shifting to an advantageous state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of distrust or loss while suppressing the gambling nature from becoming excessively high, so it is possible to consider the player's emotions. and

Further, in the first gaming machine, the specific period or specific amount is set in consideration of the period during which the advantageous state can be continued (for example, "55 games") or the amount of game value that can be given (for example, "275 cards"). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the amount of game value given to the player from being extremely restricted while considering the player's emotion.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous state may be extended by granted rights (for example, "1G consecutive stock" and "ceiling reduction"), but the game period in a series of advantageous sections is limited to a specific period When a special period set according to the number of granted rights is reached (for example, when the value of the control game number counter reaches a value at which semi-limit processing (number of games) is executed), Or when the amount of gaming value granted in a series of advantageous sections is less than a specific amount and becomes a special amount set according to the number of rights granted (for example, the value of the payout number counter for control is a semi-limit When the processing (the number of payouts) reaches a value to be executed), granting of rights is suppressed in a series of subsequent advantageous intervals. As a result, for example, the player is given more rights than they can consume, and as a result of the forced termination of a series of advantageous sections in such a state, the player feels distrust and loss. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling nature from becoming excessively high and to consider the emotions of the player.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, in counting the above-mentioned "specific amount" and "special amount", for example, due to the player's operation error or ignoring the instruction, etc. Even if there is a difference between the amount of game value that was actually given and the amount of game value that was actually given, the calculation is based on the amount of game value that was originally supposed to be given without considering this difference. It is supposed to be done. As a result, a series of advantageous intervals may be extended more than necessary due to such behavior of the player, and unfairness may arise between the player who has performed such behavior and the player who has not. Since it is possible to prevent the game from being put away, it is possible to consider the emotions of the player while suppressing the gambling nature from becoming excessively high.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, a winning combination (for example, "certain cherry") in which the transition to an advantageous state is confirmed in a state where granting of rights is suppressed (for example, after semi-limit processing is activated) is won. When the player does, a special notification is made so as not to display a combination of special symbols (for example, "Determined Cherry Lip") that clearly recognizes the winning of the determined combination. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the winning of the fixed combination was a useless win, for example. That is, by preventing the player from clearly recognizing the opportunity to start the advantageous state in a state where the granting of rights is suppressed, it is possible to prevent the gambling nature from becoming excessively high. It also makes it possible to consider people's emotions. Note that any effect executing means may be used to perform the special notification.

Further, in the first game machine, when the special notification is performed, the advantageous state that should have been originally started from the next game is started from the current game. As a result, it is possible for the player to perform the stop operation according to the special notification in a natural flow, thereby preventing the player from having a sense of incongruity, etc., even when performing such a special notification. can.

Further, in the first gaming machine, when a winning combination of special symbols is displayed in a state in which granting of rights is not suppressed, a special notification (e.g., output of a special winning sound) is performed. On the other hand, in a state in which the granting of the right is suppressed, it is not possible to make a special notification when a winning combination is won and a combination of special symbols is displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the winning of the fixed combination was a useless win, for example. That is, by preventing the player from clearly recognizing the opportunity to start the advantageous state in a state where the granting of rights is suppressed, it is possible to prevent the gambling nature from becoming excessively high. It also makes it possible to consider people's emotions. Note that any effect execution means may be used to perform the special notification.

Further, in the first gaming machine, it is determined whether or not a special notification is to be carried out according to whether or not a winning combination has been won, whether or not a combination of special symbols has been displayed, and whether or not a special notification has been made. I am trying to decide. This makes it possible to more appropriately manage the situation in which the special notification is made.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous interval game number counter and the advantageous interval payout number counter perform counting regardless of the amount of gaming value betted. Normal limit processing (number of games) and normal limit processing (payout number) can be executed.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the control game number counter and the control payout number counter perform counting in the 3-coin bet state, but do not count in the 2-coin betting state. Therefore, in the three-bet state, special limit processing (number of games) and special limit processing (payout number) can be executed, but in the two-bet state, special limit processing (number of games) and special limit It does not allow the transaction (payout number) to be performed. Therefore, in a two-coin bet state, the execution of the normal limit process (number of games) or the normal limit process (number of payouts) may forcibly end a series of advantageous intervals even during the pseudo bonus.

In the first gaming machine, the probability of winning a small combination and the number of medals to be paid out are different between the 3-bet state and the 2-bet state (see FIGS. 10 to 15). Playing a game with two bets is more disadvantageous to the player than playing a game with . However, the method in which the player is more disadvantaged when playing the game with two bets is not limited to this. For example, when a game is played with two bets during the pseudo bonus, the procedure for the stop operation may not be reported, thereby disadvantageous to the player.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, when a game is played with a first amount (for example, "three") of game value betted, a series of advantageous intervals is forced in the middle of an advantageous state. A series of advantageous intervals can be ended within a certain period of time in a natural flow following the end of an advantageous state without being terminated automatically. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of distrust or loss while suppressing the gambling nature from becoming excessively high, so it is possible to consider the player's emotions. and On the other hand, when a game is played with a second amount of gaming value (for example, "two") betted, a series of advantageous intervals may be forcibly terminated in the middle of an advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player realize that he or she did not play the game in the intended game method, so that the player can be urged to play the game in the intended game method.

It should be noted that, in the series of advantageous intervals, the case where the game is played with the second amount of game value betted is more disadvantageous to the player than the case where the game is played with the first amount of game value betted. Therefore, by enabling such a warning, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game in a more advantageous state, and to prevent the player from playing in a game method not intended by the player. It is possible to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing due to

[5-5. Storage area configuration of the first gaming machine]
Next, referring to FIGS. 17 to 22, the storage area configuration of the first game machine will be described. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of a winning flag storage area, a winning operation flag storage area, and a symbol code storage area of the first gaming machine. Also, FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of the carryover combination storing area of the first gaming machine. Also, FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of the game state flag storage area of the first gaming machine. Also, FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of the mode flag storage area of the first gaming machine. Also, FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of the operation stop button storage area of the first gaming machine. Also, FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of the pressing order storage area of the first gaming machine.

(Winning flag storage area, winning operation flag storage area, and pattern code storage area)
First, with reference to FIG. 17, configurations of a winning flag storage area (internal winning combination storage area), a prize operation flag storage area (display combination storage area), and a symbol code storage area will be described. In addition, in the first game machine, the winning flag storage area, the winning operation flag storage area, and the symbol code storage area have the same data structure.

Each storage area described above is composed of storage areas 1 to 26 each represented by 1-byte data. The data stored in each storage area is only 1-byte data in the "data" column in FIG. 17, but for convenience of explanation, in FIG. (In FIG. 17, the symbols of the reel 3L, the symbols of the reel 3C, and the symbols of the reel 3R are described in this order) and the contents thereof (see FIGS. 11 to 14) are also described.

The data stored in the winning flag storage area allows the main CPU 101 to identify the type of symbol combination corresponding to the internal winning combination (that is, the type of symbol combination permitted to be displayed in the current game). is used to For example, when 2BB is won in the current game (when it is carried over), bit 0 of the storage area 1 is stored with "1".

The data stored in the winning operation flag storage area allows the main CPU 101 to identify the type of combination of symbols corresponding to the display combination (that is, the type of combination of symbols displayed on the activated line in the current game). used to For example, when a combination of symbols related to 2BB is displayed on the active line in the current game, bit 0 of the storage area 1 is stored with "1".

The data stored in the symbol code storage area enables the main CPU 101 to identify the types of symbol combinations that can still be displayed on the active line in the current game, at least while any of the reels is spinning. used for For example, when at least one of the reels is spinning in the current game, if a combination of symbols related to 2BB can be displayed on the active line, bit 0 of the storage area 1 is set to "1". is stored.

(Storage area for carryover combination)
Next, referring to FIG. 18, the configuration of the carryover combination storing area will be described. The carryover combination storage area is composed of a storage area represented by 1-byte data.

As a result of the internal lottery process, when a bonus combination of "F_2BB" (2BB) or "F_3BB" (3BB) is determined as an internal winning combination, these bonus combinations are stored as carryover combinations in the carryover combination storage area ( "1" is stored in the corresponding bit). The carryover combination stored in the carryover combination storage area is held without being cleared until the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the activated line. Further, while the carryover combination is stored in the carryover combination storage area, the carryover combination (bonus combination) is stored in the winning flag storage area in addition to the internal winning combination (small combination/replay combination) determined by the internal lottery process. be done.

(Game state flag storage area)
Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the configuration of the game state flag storage area will be described. The game state flag storage area is composed of a storage area represented by 1-byte data. For example, if the current gaming state is the 2BB state, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the storage area.

In addition, since the RT state is not provided in the first gaming machine, the area indicating the type of the RT state is not provided in the game state flag storage area shown in FIG. If so, "1" is stored in the bit of the storage area corresponding to the current RT state. In the first game machine, data indicating the type of game state (mode) during the advantageous section is separately stored in a mode flag storage area described later, and is stored and managed in this game state flag storage area. You can also The same applies to the non-advantageous and advantageous game sections. It can be managed by providing an advantageous section flag storage area (not shown), or it can be stored and managed in this game state flag storage area. The same applies to game states such as AT state and ART state. An AT state (ART state) flag storage area (not shown) may be provided for management, or may be stored and managed in this game state flag storage area.

(mode flag storage area)
Next, the configuration of the mode flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The mode flag storage area is composed of a storage area 1 and a storage area 2 each represented by 1-byte data. For example, if the current mode is the start mode, "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 1; Also, for example, if the current mode is the heaven A mode, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the storage area 2. FIG. In the first gaming machine, the pseudo-bonus state is also managed as one of the modes.

(operation stop button storage area)
Next, referring to FIG. 21, the configuration of the operation stop button storage area will be described. The operation stop button storage area is composed of a storage area represented by 1-byte data. Bits 0 to 2 of the operation stop button storage area store data indicating the type of stop button that has already been operated (type of reel that has stopped), and bits 4 to 6 store data indicating the type of stop button that has not yet been operated. Stores data indicating the type (type of spinning reel).

For example, if the stop button 8L is the stop button pressed this time, ie, the operation stop button, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area. Further, for example, if the stop button 8L is a stop button that has not been pressed yet, that is, if it is a valid stop button, bit 4 stores "1". The main CPU 101 identifies the stop button that has been pushed this time and the stop button that has not been pushed yet based on the data stored in the operation stop button storage area.

(Press order storage area)
Next, referring to FIG. 22, the configuration of the pressing order storage area will be described. The pressing order storage area is composed of a storage area represented by 1-byte data. The pressing order indicates the pressing order of the stop buttons, that is, the pressing order (hitting order).

For example, when all the reels are rotating, "1" is stored in bits 0 to 5 of the pressing order storage area. Then, when the stop button 8L is pressed (because it is the "left" first stop), bits 0 and 1 will still contain "1", but bits 2-5 will contain "0". will be stored. Next, when the stop button 8C is pressed (because of the "left" first stop and the "middle" second stop), bit 0 remains "1", but bit 1 "0" is stored. The main CPU 101 identifies the pressing order of the current game based on the data stored in the pressing order storage area.

[6. Processing by main control circuit]
Next, contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 using each program will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 32. FIG. In addition, in the explanation of the various processes shown below, there are cases where one specific example of the processing contents is explained using the specifications of the first gaming machine, but the processing contents of the various processes shown below are limited to this. not a thing

[6-1. Main processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 23, main processing (main operation processing) executed by main CPU 101 of main control circuit 100 will be described. Note that FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the main processing. FIG. 23 also shows power-on processing that is executed prior to the start of the main processing.

First, when power is supplied to the pachi-slot machine 1 (when the power is turned on), the main CPU 101 performs power-on processing (S1). In this process, various processes required when the power is turned on are performed. The details of the power-on processing will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing when one game ends (S2). In this process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 103 is cleared. The designated storage area here is, for example, a storage area such as a winning flag storage area or a prize-winning operation flag storage area that requires erasing of data for each unit game (game).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs medal acceptance/start check processing (S3). In this process, for example, the input states of the medal sensor 31S, the bet switch 6S, the start switch 7S, etc. are checked, and various processes necessary at the start of the game are performed. The details of the medal acceptance/start check process will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs random number acquisition processing (S4). In this process, random numbers for internal lottery (for example, the range of 0 to 65535) and random numbers for effects used in various lotteries related to game characteristics (other random numbers for lottery) (for example, the range of 0 to 65535, or 0 to 255 range), etc., and stores the various extracted random numbers in a random number storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103 . It should be noted that the manner in which various random numbers are obtained is not limited to the one described above. A necessary number of random numbers can be appropriately obtained from each predetermined numerical range (for example, the range of 0 to 65535, the range of 0 to 32767, the range of 0 to 255, or the range of 0 to 127). .

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs internal lottery processing (S5). In this process, various processes necessary for determining an internal winning combination are performed based on an internal lottery table and internal lottery random numbers corresponding to the current gaming state. Details of the internal lottery process will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a game start state control process (S6). In this processing, when a transition condition is satisfied (for example, based on a determined internal winning combination) at the start of a game, the game state is transitioned according to the satisfied transition condition. Alternatively, various processes necessary for managing the game period of the current game state are performed. The details of the game start state control process will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs start command generation and storage processing (S7). In this process, start command data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 is generated, and the generated data is stored in a communication data storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103 . The data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see S204 in FIG. 32), which will be described later. Also, the methods of generating, storing, and transmitting data for other commands are basically the same.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a game start main effect control process (S8). In this processing, when performing various effects under the control of the main control circuit 100 side (main side) when starting the game, various processes necessary for performing the effects are performed. For example, when a lock effect is performed at the start of a game, execution of the lock effect is controlled. Also, if this includes a pseudo-game, it controls the progress of the pseudo-game (or notification about the pseudo-game). Further, for example, in the AT state, when the information of the stop operation is notified by the instruction monitor, the notification mode is controlled. Although details are omitted, when a lock effect is performed, a lock command generation and storage process is performed in this process.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs reel stop initialization processing (S9). In this process, various information necessary for stop control such as the type of stop table used in the current game and the type of attraction priority table are set based on the internal winning combination, game state, and the like.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs reel rotation start processing (S10). This processing requests the start of rotation of all reels. When all the reels are requested to start rotating, the reel control process (see S203 in FIG. 32) to be described later controls the driving of the stepping motors 51L, 51C, and 51R, and the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotated. rotation is started. Each reel that has started to rotate is accelerated and controlled until its rotational speed reaches a constant speed, after which the constant speed is maintained. Although details are omitted, reel rotation start command generation and storage processing is performed in this processing.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs attraction priority storage processing (S11). In this process, the drawing priority is determined by referring to the set internal winning combination and the set drawing priority table for each symbol (symbol position) of the rotating reel (all reels in this case). The data shown is acquired and stored in an attraction priority data storage area (not shown). Although illustration is omitted, a pattern code storage process, which will be described later, is performed prior to this process.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs reel stop control processing (S12). In this process, the rotation of the relevant reel is stopped based on the determined internal winning combination (or information related to various stop controls set accordingly) and the stop operation mode of each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R. perform various processing necessary for Details of the reel stop control process will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs winning operation determination processing (S13). In this process, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbols displayed on the activated line is any combination of symbols defined in the symbol combination table. For example, it is determined whether or not there is a bit in which "1" is stored in the winning operation flag storage area. Although the details are omitted, in this process, a winning actuation command generating and storing process is performed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs medal payout/re-game operation processing (S14). In this process, if the combination of symbols determined in the above-described winning operation determination process is a combination of symbols related to a minor combination, the corresponding number of medals is paid out. Various processes necessary for activating a replay in a game are performed. It should be noted that, for example, if the combination of symbols determined in the above-described winning operation determination process is the combination of symbols related to the replay combination, the same value as the number of bets in the current game is set in the automatic insertion medal counter, which will be described later. process. Also, in this process, a medal payout signal corresponding to the number of medals to be paid out is output from the external centralized terminal board 55 .

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a game end state control process (S15). In this processing, when a transition condition is satisfied (for example, based on a combination of displayed symbols) at the end of a game, the game state is transitioned according to the satisfied transition condition. Alternatively, various processes necessary for managing the game period of the current game state are performed. The details of the state control process at the time of game end will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a main effect control process at the end of the game (S16). In this process, when various effects are performed under the control of the main control circuit 100 side (main side) when the game ends, various processes necessary for performing the effects are performed. For example, when the lock effect is performed at the end of the game, the execution of the lock effect is controlled. Also, if this includes a pseudo-game, it controls the progress of the pseudo-game (or notification about the pseudo-game). Although details are omitted, when a lock effect is performed, a lock command generation and storage process is performed in this process.

Thus, in the pachi-slot machine 1, one unit game is controlled by performing the processes of S2 to S16 described above, and progress of the game is controlled by repeating these processes. It should be noted that it is possible to configure so that processes other than these processes are appropriately performed as necessary, or it is possible to configure so that some of these processes are not performed. In other words, the various types of processing described above are merely examples.

(Processing at power-on)
Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the power-on processing performed in S1 of the main processing described above will be described. Note that FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the power-on process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process (not shown) when the power is turned on, and then performs a write test of the main RAM 103. As a result of the test, it is determined whether or not writing to the main RAM 103 was performed normally ( S21). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 103 .

When the main CPU 101 determines that writing to the main RAM 103 has been performed normally (YES in S21), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key-shaped switch 52 is in the ON state (S22). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting change is possible.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key-shaped switch 52 is in the ON state (YES in S22), the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing when changing the setting (S23). In this process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 103 is cleared. The designated storage area here is, for example, a storage area for carryover combinations, a game state flag storage area, a mode flag storage area, or the like, in which data must be erased when settings are changed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs initialization command generation and storage processing (S24). In this process, data of an initialization command to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 indicating that the setting change process has started is generated, and the generated data is stored in the communication data storage area.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs setting change processing (S25). In this process, after the main RAM 103 is initialized by accepting the above-described set value determination operation or set value confirmation operation, a new set value is set (stored) in a set value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103. be done. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key-shaped switch 52 is turned off (S26). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting changeable state has ended after the setting value is newly set.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key-shaped switch 52 is not in the OFF state (NO in S26), the main CPU 101 waits the processing until the setting key-shaped switch 52 is in the OFF state. On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key-type switch 52 is turned off (YES in S26), an initialization command generation and storage process is performed (S27). In this process, the data of the initialization command to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 indicating that the setting change process is completed is generated, and the generated data is stored in the communication data storage area. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the power-on process.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S22 that the setting key-shaped switch 52 is not in the ON state (NO in S22), it determines whether or not the backup data is normal (S28). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the various information backed up when the power supply to the pachi-slot machine 1 is interrupted (at the time of power failure) is normal.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the backup data is normal (YES in S28), the main CPU 101 performs game return processing (S29). In this process, the process of restoring the pachi-slot machine 1 to the state before the power interruption is performed. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the power-on process.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S21 that the writing to the main RAM 103 was not performed normally (S21 is NO), and if it determines in S28 that the backup data is not normal (S28 is NO), an error occurs when the power is turned on. Processing is performed (S30). An error generated by this power-on error processing is not resolved by the reset operation described above, but is resolved by setting a new set value. Therefore, after the power-on error processing, the main CPU 101 turns off the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 once, and thereafter, until the setting value is newly set (until the above-described processing of S22 to S26 is performed), the main CPU 101 operates normally. It does not move to the processing (from S2 in FIG. 23).

(Medal reception/start check processing)
Next, referring to FIG. 25, the medal acceptance/start check process performed in S3 of the main process described above will be described. Note that FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing an example of the medal reception/start check process procedure.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the automatically inserted medal counter is "0" (S41). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a replay combination has been won in the previous unit game (whether or not a replay has been activated).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the automatically inserted medal counter is not "0" (NO in S41), the main CPU 101 performs automatic inserted medal processing (S42). In this process, the same number of medals as the medals inserted in the previous unit game are automatically inserted. Also, although the details are omitted, when automatic insertion is performed, a medal insertion command generation and storage process is performed in this process. Also, in this process, a medal insertion signal is output from the external centralized terminal board 55 .

When the main CPU 101 determines in S41 that the value of the automatically inserted medal counter is "0" (YES in S41), and after the processing in S42, the main CPU 101 performs medal auxiliary storage switch check processing (S43). In this process, it is determined whether or not the auxiliary medal storage switch 33S is in the ON state (that is, whether or not a certain number or more of medals are stored in the auxiliary medal storage 33). If it is determined to be on, a medal auxiliary storage error is generated. In this case, the processing waits until the error is resolved. Also, if it is determined that the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S is not in the ON state, this processing is terminated.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs medal insertion state check processing (S44). In this process, the current number of bets and the number of credits are checked. A state in which acceptance is possible (a state in which betting operations can be accepted) is established (acceptance of medals is permitted). If a selector error has occurred, the process waits until the error is resolved.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not medals can be accepted (S45). When the main CPU 101 determines that medals can be accepted (YES in S45), the main CPU 101 performs medal insertion check processing (S46). In this process, the number of bets and the number of credits are updated based on the detection result of the medal sensor 31S and the detection result of the bet switch 6S. Further, although the details are omitted, when a bet operation is performed, a medal insertion command generation and storage process is performed in this process. Also, in this process, a medal insertion signal is output from the external centralized terminal board 55 .

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is possible to insert medals or credit (S47). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of bets is "3" and the number of credits is not "50". When the main CPU 101 determines that medal insertion or credit is not possible (that is, the number of bets is "3" and the number of credits is also "50") (NO in S49). , the reception of medals is prohibited (S48). That is, the main CPU 101 sets a state in which it is not possible to accept medals (a state in which it is not possible to accept betting operations).

If the main CPU 101 determines in S45 that medals cannot be accepted (NO in S45), if it determines in S47 that medals can be inserted or credited (YES in S47), and After the process of S48, it is determined whether or not the number of inserted coins is the game startable number (S49). In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, it is determined whether or not the current number of bets is "2" or "3".

When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of inserted coins is the game-startable number (YES in S49), it determines whether or not the start switch 7S is turned on (S50). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the player has performed a start operation.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the start switch 7S is turned on (YES in S50), it prohibits acceptance of medals (S51). After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the medal acceptance/start check process.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S49 that the inserted number is not the game startable number (NO in S49), and if it determines in S50 that the start switch 7S is not in the ON state (NO in S50), the main CPU 101 processes is returned to S44.

(Internal lottery process)
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the internal lottery process performed in S5 of the main process described above will be described. Note that FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the internal lottery process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs setting value/number of inserted medal check processing (S61). In this process, the set value and the number of bets in the current unit game are checked. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 sets an internal lottery table according to the set values, the number of bets, the game state, etc. (S62). Subsequently, the main CPU 101 acquires a random number for internal lottery from the random number storage area (S63). That is, the main CPU 101 acquires the internal lottery random number data acquired in S4 of the main processing described above. In this process, if it is determined that the set value is other than "1" to "6" or the number of bets is other than "1" to "3", the main CPU 101 determines that a serious error has occurred. Then, the above-described power-on error processing (see S30 in FIG. 24) is executed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs internal winning combination determination processing (S64). In this process, the acquired random number for internal lottery is sequentially updated (for example, updated by addition) using the lottery value of each internal winning combination specified in the set internal lottery table, and the update result becomes a predetermined result. (for example, overflow). When a predetermined result is obtained, the internal winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination of the current unit game. It should be noted that, if the predetermined result is not obtained even if all the internal winning combinations are determined, the result of the current unit game is "loss" ("loss" is determined as the internal winning combination).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not an internal winning combination has been determined (S65). When the main CPU 101 determines that the internal winning combination has not been determined (NO in S65), the process returns to S64. That is, the main CPU 101 sequentially updates the internal winning combinations to be determined (and also sequentially updates the random number for the internal lottery) until determination is made for all internal winning combinations (or until the internal winning combination is determined halfway through). The process of S64 is repeated until it is determined).

If the main CPU 101 determines that an internal winning combination has been determined (YES in S65), the main CPU 101 determines whether the determined internal winning combination is a non-carryover combination (i.e., not a bonus combination that is a carryover combination, but a small combination or a replay combination). (S66). When the main CPU 101 determines that the determined internal winning combination is the carryover non-target combination (YES in S66), it updates the winning flag storage area (S67). In this process, the data in the winning flag storage area is updated based on the internal winning combination determined in the process of S64. That is, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in the bit of the data corresponding to the combination of symbols allowed to be displayed corresponding to the determined internal winning combination in the winning flag storage area.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S66 that the determined internal winning combination is not the carryover non-target combination (NO in S66), and after the process of S67, determines whether the determined internal winning combination is the carryover target combination ( That is, it is determined whether or not it is a bonus combination that is a carryover combination (S68).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the determined internal winning combination is the carryover combination (YES in S68), it determines whether or not the data in the carryover combination storage area is "0" (S69). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not any bonus combination has been carried over. When the main CPU 101 determines that the data in the carryover combination storing area is "0" (YES in S69), the main CPU 101 updates the carryover combination storing area (S70). In this process, the data in the carryover combination storage area is updated based on the internal winning combination determined in the process of S64. That is, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in the bit of the data corresponding to the combination of symbols whose display is permitted corresponding to the determined internal winning combination in the carryover combination storing area.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S68 that the determined internal winning combination is not the carryover-target combination (NO in S68), or determines in S69 that the data in the carryover combination storing area is not "0" (NO in S69). ), and after the processing of S70, it is determined again whether or not the data in the carryover combination storing area is "0" (S71).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the data in the carryover combination storing area is not "0" (NO in S71), it updates the winning flag storing area (S72). In this process, the data stored in the carryover combination storing area is reflected in the data in the winning flag storing area. That is, when a bonus combination is carried over (or a win is made in the current unit game), the main CPU 101 stores data corresponding to the combination of symbols permitted to be displayed corresponding to the bonus combination in the winning flag storage area. store "1" in the bit.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S71 that the data in the carryover combination storing area is "0" (YES in S71), and after the processing in S72, the main CPU 101 performs sub-flag setting processing (S73). In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, a non-advantageous interval sub-flag and an advantageous interval-winning sub-flag are set based on the internal winning combination. In this process, for example, information corresponding to the stop operation information notified by the instruction monitor may be set in the AT state. After this process, the main CPU 101 terminates the internal lottery process.

(State control process at game start)
Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the game start state control process performed in S6 of the main process described above will be described. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the game start state control process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a game state transition condition satisfaction check process (S81). In this processing, when starting a game, it is checked whether or not a transition condition for shifting from one game state to another game state is established. For example, in the case of shifting to a flag state as a predetermined RT state based on winning of a predetermined bonus combination, whether or not a predetermined bonus combination has been won is checked in this process. In the case of the first gaming machine, the interval between flags is not configured as an RT state (that is, as a game state stored in the game state flag storage area), so checking here is unnecessary. Also, for example, if there is a specific RT state that starts or ends by playing a specific number of games after a specific transition condition is established, this specific number of games can be managed in this process.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a transition condition for transitioning to any game state is established (S82). When the main CPU 101 determines that the transition condition for shifting to any game state is established (YES in S82), it updates the game state flag storage area (S83). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the game state according to the established transition condition. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs setting processing according to the set game state (S84). In this process, it is necessary to set, for example, the game period of the game state, or set the lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process, in response to the transition of the game state. In this case, such setting processing is performed as appropriate.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S82 that the transition condition for transitioning to one of the game states is not established (NO in S82), and after the processing in S84, the current game section is a non-advantageous section. It is determined whether or not there is (S85). When the main CPU 101 determines that the current game section is a non-advantageous section (YES in S85), the main CPU 101 performs advantageous section start condition establishment check processing (S86). In this process, when starting a game, it is checked whether or not a transition condition (advantageous section start condition) for shifting from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section is established. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the above-described advantageous interval transition lottery is performed, and it is checked whether or not the lottery result is for starting the advantageous interval.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the condition for starting the advantageous section is satisfied (S87). When the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for starting the advantageous interval are not satisfied (NO in S87), the main CPU 101 ends the state control process at the start of the game. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the condition for starting the advantageous interval is satisfied (YES in S87), the main CPU 101 performs setting processing at the start of the advantageous interval (S88). That is, the main CPU 101 starts (sets) an advantageous section. In this process, in response to the start of the advantageous interval, for example, various counters (see FIG. 16) relating to various limit processes start counting (that is, start monitoring the game period of a series of advantageous intervals). is set as appropriate.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S89). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (game state) during the advantageous interval that has started. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this processing, for example, the transition destination mode determined according to the lottery result of the above-described advantageous zone transition lottery is set.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs setting processing according to the set mode (S90). In this process, depending on the set mode, the game period of the mode (including the number of ceiling games, etc.) is set, and the lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process is set. Such setting processing is appropriately performed when necessary. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this processing, for example, when shifting to the pseudo bonus according to the set destination mode, "55 games" is set as the game period, and the processing shifts to the end mode. In this case, "32 games" is set as the game period, and in the case of shifting to other modes, the number of ceiling games corresponding to each mode is set. In addition, lottery values (lottery table) in various lotteries (see FIGS. 7 and 8) are set. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the game start state control process.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S85 that the current game section is not a non-advantageous section (that is, it is an advantageous section) (NO in S85), the main CPU 101 performs a game start processing during an advantageous section (S91). The details of the processing at the start of the game during the advantageous interval will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs advantageous section end condition satisfaction check processing (S92). In this processing, when starting a game, it is checked whether or not a transition condition (advantageous section end condition) for shifting from an advantageous section to a non-advantageous section is established. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, if the operation conditions for various limit processes are satisfied based on the number of games in the advantageous section (see FIG. 16), or if the current mode is the end mode, , it is checked whether 32 games have passed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied (S93). When the main CPU 101 determines that the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied (YES in S93), the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process at the end of the advantageous section (S94). That is, the main CPU 101 ends the advantageous section and sets the non-advantageous section. In this process, depending on the end of the advantageous interval, for example, various counters (see FIG. 16) related to various limit processing, the mode (game state) during the advantageous interval, and the game period of the mode (the number of ceiling games, etc.) ) etc. (that is, information on the advantageous section) is cleared. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the game start state control process. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the condition for ending the advantageous section is not satisfied (NO in S93), the main CPU 101 ends the state control process at the start of the game.

(Processing at the start of the game during the advantageous section)
Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the process at the start of the game during the advantageous section, which is performed in S91 of the above-described state control process at the time of game start, will be described. Note that FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the process at the start of a game during an advantageous interval.

First, the main CPU 101 performs various counter updating processes (at the start of the game) (S101). In this process, for example, various counters (see FIG. 16) related to various limit processes based on the number of games played during the advantageous interval, various counters for managing the game period such as various modes (game states) during the advantageous interval, or other counters Various counters for managing the degree of advantage are updated according to predetermined update conditions (for example, decrement (add) 1 per game).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is in the specific mode (AT state) (S102). When the main CPU 101 determines that it is in the specific mode (YES in S102), the main CPU 101 performs AT period management processing (at the start of the game) (S103). In this process, for example, when the AT state game period can be extended (for example, the number of games to be extended, the number of sets to be added, etc.) at the start of the game, it is determined whether or not such an extension execution condition is established. or extend the game period based on this determination result (if the game period in the AT state can be shortened, the shortening process is performed). In addition, in this process, the AT state game period may be managed regardless of whether it is extended, or the AT state game period is managed in the process of S101 described above, and only the process related to extension is performed in this process. may be performed. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the above-described 1G consecutive lottery is performed based on the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section, the 1G consecutive lottery is performed, and the pseudo bonus is extended according to the lottery result. processing is performed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs navigation setting processing (S104). In this process, information corresponding to the stop operation information notified by the instruction monitor, information corresponding to the stop operation information to be included in the start command, and the like are set. In addition, in this process, it may be possible to determine whether to generate navigation. That is, when the notification target role is won in the AT state, there may be cases where navigation does not necessarily occur. occurrence probability).

If the main CPU 101 determines in S102 that the specific mode is not in progress (NO in S102), and after S104, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the mode transition condition is satisfied (S105). In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, it is determined whether or not the transition destination mode is determined according to the lottery result of the mode transition lottery described above based on the sub-flags at the time of winning the advantageous section.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition is satisfied (YES in S105), the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S106). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (game state) during the transferred advantageous section. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the transition destination mode determined according to the lottery result of the above-described mode transition lottery based on the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section is set.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs setting processing according to the set mode (S107). In this process, depending on the set mode, the game period of the mode (including the number of ceiling games, etc.) is set, and the lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process is set. Such setting processing is appropriately performed when necessary. In addition, in the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the same process as the above-described process of S90 is performed. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the game start process during the advantageous interval. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition is not satisfied (NO in S105), the main CPU 101 ends the processing at the time of starting the game during the advantageous interval.

27, the state control processing at the end of the game shown in FIG. 30, the processing at the start of the game during the advantageous interval shown in FIG. 28, and the processing at the end of the game during the advantageous interval shown in FIG. Basically, they have almost the same processing configuration. This process may be performed either when the game is started or when the game is finished (for example, a game state or mode transition, etc., which refers to a determined internal winning combination. As for the processing that should be reflected until the current game ends (or until the next game starts), it means that it can be performed on either side, and the same applies to both. It does not mean that the processing of is performed redundantly. Therefore, such processing may be performed either when the game is started or when the game is finished.

On the other hand, those that need to be processed when starting the game (for example, the above-mentioned navigation setting processing, etc.) are assumed to be executed when the game starts, and when the game ends. Those that need to be processed (for example, the process of referring to the combination of displayed symbols, etc.) may be executed when the game ends. Further, for example, a process that needs to be performed at a predetermined time after the start of the game but before the end of the game, or a process that should be performed (for example, a process that refers to the stop operation mode of the first stop operation, etc.) ) can be assumed to be performed at that time.

(reel stop control process)
Next, referring to FIG. 29, the reel stop control process performed in S12 of the main process described above will be described. Note that FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the reel stop control process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the rotational speeds of all the reels have reached a predetermined constant speed (for example, 80 rpm/1 minute) (that is, whether they are rotating at a constant speed) (S111). When the main CPU 101 determines that all the reels are not rotating at a constant speed (NO in S111), the main CPU 101 waits until all the reels are rotating at a constant speed. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the reels are rotating at a constant speed (YES in S111), each reel is permitted to stop (S112). That is, the main CPU 101 activates each stop button. Also, along with this, the operation stop button storage area is updated (in the case of the first game machine, for example, bits 4 to 6 of the operation stop button storage area are stored with "1").

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been operated (S113). When the main CPU 101 determines that a valid stop button has not been operated (NO in S113), the main CPU 101 waits for processing until a valid stop button is operated. In the case of performing automatic stop control, it is possible to measure this standby time and perform automatic stop control when the measurement result reaches a predetermined time.

When determining that a valid stop button has been operated (YES in S113), the main CPU 101 updates the operation stop button storage area and the pressing order storage area (S114). In the case of the first gaming machine, for example, when the first stop operation is performed on the reel 3L (when the stop button 8L is pressed), in this process, the operation stop button storage area bit "1" is stored in 0, and bit 4 is updated to "0". Also, bits 2 to 5 of the pressing order storage area are updated to "0".

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines the reel to be controlled from the operation stop button (S115). In this process, for example, when the stop button 8L is pressed, the reel 3L is determined as the reel to be controlled.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 stores the stop start position from the symbol counter (S116). The symbol counter is configured as a counter for grasping symbol position data (for example, "0" to "19"). In this process, for example, when the stop button 8L is pressed, the symbol position data of the middle area of the reel 3L when the stop button 8L is pressed is stored as the stop start position.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs the number of sliding symbols determination process (S117). In this process, for example, the number of sliding symbols specified in the above-mentioned stop table and the data in the above-mentioned attraction priority data storage area are referred to determine the most appropriate number of sliding symbols (symbol movement amount).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 stores the expected stop position from the stop start position and the number of sliding symbols (S118). In this process, the symbol position data of the position where the symbol finally stops is stored as the expected stop position based on the stop start position stored in the process of S116 described above and the number of sliding symbols determined in the process of S117 described above. .

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs reel stop command generation and storage processing (S119). In this process, reel stop command data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 is generated, and the generated data is stored in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103 . Note that the reel stop command can include parameters that can specify not only the expected stop position but also the stop start position and the number of sliding symbols.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs pattern code storage processing (S120). In this process, the symbol code storage area is updated while also referring to the symbol type (symbol code) of the expected stop position on the reel for which the expected stop position has already been determined. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a valid stop button (S121). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is still a spinning reel (whether or not all the reels have been stopped).

When the main CPU 101 determines that there is a valid stop button (YES in S121), the main CPU 101 performs control change processing (S122). In this process, according to the player's stop operation mode so far, for example, when it is necessary to change the stop table or the attraction priority table set in the above reel stop initial setting process, such a Reconfigure various information necessary for stop control.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs attraction priority storage processing (S123). In this process, each symbol (symbol position) on the rotating reel is set as a set internal winning combination while also referring to the type of symbol at the expected stop position on the reel whose expected stop position has already been determined. The attraction priority order table is referenced to obtain data indicating the attraction priority order, and the acquired data is stored in the attraction priority order data storage area. After this process, the main CPU 101 returns the process to S113. Further, when determining that there is no effective stop button (NO in S121), the main CPU 101 ends the reel stop control process.

(State control process at game end)
Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the state control process at the end of the game, which is performed in S15 of the main process described above, will be described. Note that FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the state control process at the end of the game.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a game state transition condition establishment check process (S131). In this processing, it is checked whether or not a transition condition for shifting from one game state to another game state is established when the game ends. For example, when shifting to a predetermined RT state or a predetermined bonus state based on the display of a predetermined combination of symbols, it is checked in this process whether or not the predetermined combination of symbols has been displayed. In addition, in the case of a predetermined RT state or a predetermined bonus state, it is checked in this process whether or not conditions for terminating these game states are established. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this processing, for example, it is checked whether or not a combination of 2BB or 3BB symbols is displayed. Further, for example, in the case of the 2BB state or the 3BB state, it is checked whether or not the end condition of these game states is established by paying out medals.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a transition condition for transitioning to any game state is established (S132). When the main CPU 101 determines that the transition condition for shifting to any game state is established (YES in S132), it updates the game state flag storage area (S133). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the game state according to the established transition condition. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, when a combination of symbols related to 2BB or 3BB is displayed, "1" is stored in bit 0 or bit 1 of the gaming state flag storage area, and 2BB is displayed. Set state or 3BB state. Further, for example, in the case of the 2BB state or the 3BB state, if the end conditions for these game states are met, bit 0 or bit 1 of the game state flag storage area is updated to "0".

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs setting processing according to the set game state (S134). In this process, it is necessary to set, for example, the game period of the game state, or set the lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process, in response to the transition of the game state. In this case, such setting processing is performed as appropriate. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, if the 2BB state is set, the number of payouts as the end condition is set to "1", and if the 3BB state is set, the number of payouts is set to "1". If so, "176" is set as the number of payouts as the termination condition.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S132 that the transition condition for transitioning to one of the game states is not established (NO in S132), and after the processing in S134, the current game section is a non-advantageous section. It is determined whether or not there is (S135). When the main CPU 101 determines that the current game section is a non-advantageous section (YES in S135), the main CPU 101 performs advantageous section start condition establishment check processing (S136). As described above, only the process referring to the determined internal winning combination is possible in the non-advantageous section, so this process is the same as the above-described process of S86 (game start state control process).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the conditions for starting the advantageous section are satisfied (S137). When the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for starting the advantageous interval are not satisfied (NO in S137), the main CPU 101 ends the state control process at the end of the game. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the condition for starting the advantageous interval is satisfied (YES in S137), the main CPU 101 performs setting processing at the start of the advantageous interval (S138). As described above, only the process referring to the determined internal winning combination is possible in the non-advantageous section, so this process is the same as the above-described process of S88 (game start state control process).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S139). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (game state) during the advantageous interval that has started. As described above, only the process referring to the determined internal winning combination is possible in the non-advantageous section, so this process is the same as the above-described process of S89 (game start state control process).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs setting processing according to the set mode (S140). In this process, depending on the set mode, the game period of the mode (including the number of ceiling games, etc.) is set, and the lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process is set. Such setting processing is appropriately performed when necessary. As described above, only the process referring to the determined internal winning combination is possible in the non-advantageous section, so this process is the same as the above-described process of S90 (game start state control process).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S135 that the current game section is not a non-advantageous section (that is, it is an advantageous section) (NO in S135), the main CPU 101 performs processing at the end of the game during the advantageous section (S141). The details of the processing at the end of the game during the advantageous section will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs advantageous section end condition satisfaction check processing (S142). In this process, when the game ends, it is checked whether or not a transition condition (advantageous section end condition) for shifting from an advantageous section to a non-advantageous section is established. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, if the operating conditions for various limit processes are satisfied based on the number of payouts in the advantageous section (see FIG. 16), or if the current mode is the end mode , it is checked whether 32 games have passed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied (S143). When the main CPU 101 determines that the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied (YES in S143), the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process at the end of the advantageous section (S144). That is, the main CPU 101 ends the advantageous section and sets the non-advantageous section. In this process, depending on the end of the advantageous interval, for example, various counters (see FIG. 16) related to various limit processing, the mode (game state) during the advantageous interval, and the game period of the mode (the number of ceiling games, etc.) ) etc. (that is, information on the advantageous section) is cleared. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the game end state control process. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the end condition of the advantageous section is not satisfied (NO in S143), the main CPU 101 ends the state control process at the end of the game.

(Processing at the end of the game during the advantageous section)
Next, referring to FIG. 31, the process at the end of the game during the advantageous interval performed at S141 of the above-described state control process at the time of game end will be described. Note that FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the process at the end of the game during the advantageous interval.

First, the main CPU 101 performs various counter updating processes (at the end of the game) (S151). In this process, for example, various counters (see FIG. 16) related to various limit processes based on the number of payouts during the advantageous interval, various counters for managing the game period such as various modes (game states) during the advantageous interval, or other Various counters for managing the degree of advantage are updated according to predetermined update conditions (for example, the number of payouts, the number of times a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed, the mode of stop operation, etc.).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is in the specific mode (AT state) (S152). When the main CPU 101 determines that it is in the specific mode (YES in S152), the main CPU 101 performs AT period management processing (at the end of the game) (S153). In this process, for example, when the game period in the AT state is allowed to be extended (for example, the number of games to be extended or the number of sets to be added) at the end of the game, it is determined whether or not such an extension execution condition is established. or extend the game period based on this determination result (if the game period in the AT state can be shortened, the shortening process is performed). In addition, in this process, the AT state game period may be managed regardless of whether it is extended, or the AT state game period is managed in the process of S151 described above, and only the process related to extension is performed in this process. may be performed. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the above-described 1G consecutive lottery is performed based on the sub-flag for winning the advantageous section, and the process for extending the pseudo bonus is performed according to the lottery result.

When the main CPU 101 determines that it is not in the specific mode (NO in S152), and after S153, it determines whether or not the mode transition condition is satisfied (S154). In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, it is determined whether or not the transition destination mode is determined according to the lottery result of the mode transition lottery described above based on the sub-flag at the time of advantageous zone winning.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition is satisfied (YES in S154), the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S155). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (game state) during the transferred advantageous section. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the transition destination mode determined according to the lottery result of the above-described mode transition lottery based on the advantageous zone winning sub-flag is set.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs setting processing according to the set mode (S156). In this process, depending on the set mode, the game period of the mode (including the number of ceiling games, etc.) is set, and the lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process is set. Such setting processing is appropriately performed when necessary. In addition, in the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the same process as the above-described process of S140 is performed. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the game end process during the advantageous interval. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition is not satisfied (NO in S154), the main CPU 101 ends the processing at the end of the game during the advantageous section.

[6-2. Periodical interrupt processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 32, the periodic interrupt processing executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 will be described. Note that FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the periodic interrupt process.

Here, in the present embodiment, the periodic interrupt process cycle (one interrupt time) is set to "1.1172 ms". However, the periodic interrupt processing cycle is not limited to this. For example, the periodic interrupt processing may be executed at a cycle different from this, or even if the same cycle is set as this, some or all of the processing may be interrupted by an actual processing. By setting the number of times of interruption to "2" or more, the periodical interruption process may be executed at a period different from this.

First, the main CPU 101 saves a register (S201). Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs input port check processing (S202). In this process, the input states (on state or off state) of various sensors and switches connected to the main control board 71 (including those connected via the main relay board 73) are checked. For example, the input state at the time of the previous interrupt is compared with the input state at the time of the current interrupt to check whether or not there has been a change in the input state. The change is stored in the port storage area 0 (not shown), and the input state not related to the change is stored in the input port storage area 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 as it is.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs reel control processing (S203). In this processing, the stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R are controlled to be driven, and the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are controlled to rotate and stop. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs communication data transmission processing (S204). In this process, each parameter of each command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 . In this process, if no command data is stored in the communication data storage area, the data stored in the input port storage areas 0 and 1 are sent to the sub control circuit 200 as an input state command.

In the present embodiment, after various command data are once stored in the communication data storage area, they are transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 in the periodic interrupt process. Alternatively, the data may be directly stored in a communication circuit (not shown) provided in the main control circuit 100 and transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 without being stored. Further, although detailed description is omitted in this embodiment, various command data are transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 by serial communication. may be configured to be transmitted to

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs 7-segment LED drive processing (S205). In this process, the display contents of, for example, the information display device 14 connected to the main control board 71 (including those connected via the main relay board 73) are controlled. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs timer update processing (S206). In this process, various timers managed by the main control circuit 100 are updated.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs error detection processing (S207). In this process, it is detected whether or not various error states have occurred based on the input state and the like checked in S202 described above. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs door open/close check processing (S208). In this process, for example, based on the input state of the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56, the opening/closing state of the lower door mechanism DD is checked. A security signal is output from the external centralized terminal board 55 when various error states occur and when the input state of the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is in the open state (off state).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs register restoration processing (S209). After this process, the main CPU 101 terminates the periodic interrupt process.

[7. Processing by sub control circuit]
Next, with reference to FIG. 33, an overview of the sub-side control processing executed by the sub-CPU 201 of the sub-control circuit 200 using each program will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an outline of sub-side control processing.

In the pachi-slot machine 1, various restrictions are placed on the main control circuit 100 side (including the main control board 71 and the main control board case) from the viewpoint of preventing fraudulent acts and unauthorized modifications. The 200 side (including the sub-control board 72 and the sub-control board case) is not so restricted. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 (and the sub-control circuit 200) can be used in various ways depending on the type and number of connected production devices, the type of production performed by the production device, and the manufacturing cost. configuration can be used. This is the reason why the term "outline" is used in FIG.

First, when the power is turned on, the sub CPU 201 performs the power-on processing similarly to the main CPU 101 (S301 and S302). In this process, it detects whether or not an abnormality has occurred when the power is turned on, initializes the data stored in the sub RAM 203, and performs various tasks necessary for performing various production execution control processes described later. is executed.

Further, when receiving a command transmitted from the main control circuit 100, the sub CPU 201 performs control processing for effect execution at the time of command reception (S303 and S304). In this processing, for example, when an initialization command is received, the parameter information of the received initialization command is referred to, and if the setting has been changed, the initialization processing is executed as appropriate on the sub side, and the setting has not been changed. If so, the sub-side also performs a process of returning to the state before the power interruption.

Also, for example, when a start command is received, the parameter information of the received start command is referred to, and if the non-AT state, the content of the effect that suggests or notifies the internal winning combination, game state, etc. (as necessary (by lottery), and controls various production devices so that the production of the decided content is executed. In addition, if it is in the AT state, it determines the content of the effect for notifying the advantageous stop operation mode, and controls various effect devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed.

In addition, for example, when a lock command is received, the parameter information of the received lock command is referred to, the content of the effect linked with the content of the lock effect is determined, and various effects are performed so that the effect of the determined content is executed. control the device. Also, for example, when a reel stop command is received, the parameter information of the received reel stop command is referred to, and the stop start position and the planned stop position (or simply what stop operation was performed, etc.). To determine the content of performance and control various performance devices so that the performance of the determined content is executed. Further, for example, when a winning operation command is received, the parameter information of the received winning operation command is referred to, and when a privilege is granted, the content of the effect linked with the privilege to be granted is determined, and the determined content Control various production devices so that the production of is executed.

Further, the sub CPU 201 is connected to the sub-control board 72 (including those connected via the sub-relay board 74), for example, when the production buttons 10a and 10b are operated, the production is executed when the production button is operated. Control processing is performed (S305 and S306). In this process, for example, when an effect button is operated in accordance with the effect during execution of the operation-linked effect, various effect devices are controlled so that the content of the operation-linked effect changes. Further, for example, when a presentation button is operated to call up a user menu, which will be described later, during a non-game, control is performed to display the user menu. Also, when a presentation button is operated for selection/decision operation while the user menu is being displayed, control is performed according to these operations.

In addition, the sub CPU 201 performs other effect execution control processing when a trigger other than the above-described trigger is established (S307). In this process, for example, when the non-operation period during which no game-related operation or user-menu-related operation is performed reaches a predetermined period (for example, about 30 seconds), the content of the effect related to the demonstration state notification is determined and determined. Various production devices are controlled so that the production of the content is executed.

[8. Other functions of the pachislot machine]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 has various functions for controlling games, various functions for controlling effects, and various configurations for realizing these functions. It can also have functions. An example of other functions on the player side and an example of other functions on the amusement arcade side will be described below.

[8-1. Player side]
For example, when a user menu is displayed by a player's performance operation, a desired menu is selected in the user menu, and further selection/decision operations are performed on the selected menu as appropriate, the player can obtain various information. , various settings can be made.

For example, when the "arrangement/payout table" is selected and determined, it is possible to confirm the game information indicating the arrangement of symbols in the pachislot machine 1, the specified combination of symbols, and the payout (details of benefits) at the time of winning. is displayed in the effect display section.

Also, for example, when "volume/light intensity adjustment" is selected/determined, the brightness of various display devices in the pachislot machine 1, the volume of sound output from the speaker group, or the light intensity of the lamp/LED group, etc. are set. A possible setting screen is displayed in the effect display section. In order to enable more detailed settings or to accept operations related to settings more easily at the time of such settings, various operation units for receiving the game operations of the player are can be used as a part of the operation unit that receives the operation related to (that is, the operation unit that receives the effect operation).

Further, for example, when "custom" is selected and determined, the performance mode in the pachislot machine 1 (for example, the type of character used for the performance (the type of the character (display mode) itself, the voice corresponding to the character or the type of costume or item (individual display mode) related to the character), the probability of occurrence of production (including the type of expectation at the time of occurrence of production, etc.), or the mode of suggestion or notification (performance execution timing etc.) is displayed in the effect display section. In order to enable more detailed settings or to accept operations related to settings more easily at the time of such settings, various operation units for receiving the game operations of the player are can be used as a part of the operation unit that receives the operation related to (that is, the operation unit that receives the effect operation).

Also, for example, when "Unimemo" is selected and determined, it is possible to receive information providing services using the player's portable terminal (for example, mobile phone, smart phone, etc.). In such an information providing service, for example, a player performs a login operation to start a game (the game may be started without a login operation), and when the game ends, a logout operation is performed to obtain game history information (for example, , how many games have been played in total, how many times an advantageous game state has occurred, how many cards have been obtained at maximum, etc.).

In addition, for example, the game history information includes information indicating the types of characters that can be displayed during the game and the types of music that can be output according to the result of the game (satisfaction of the release condition). It also includes information about accompanying benefits, such as information indicating the types of characters that can be displayed on the mobile terminal and the types of music that can be output.

It should be noted that various methods can be employed for the login/logout method in such an information providing service. For example, login/logout may be performed by using the player's terminal and having the player read a two-dimensional code displayed on the effect display unit, or the player may enter a password. or store the password (specifically, for example, when logging out at the end of the game, instead of the two-dimensional code, a character string of about 4 to 10 digits can be displayed as the password for the next input, and The password can be obtained by the player taking notes on paper or taking a picture with a mobile terminal, etc., and the password obtained in this way can be entered at the next login before the start of the game). - Logout may be performed. Further, it is also possible to perform login/logout by appropriately combining these methods.

[8-2. Amusement store side]
For example, a hall menu is displayed by a setting confirmation operation (setting change operation or other operation by the amusement hall manager) by the manager of the game parlor, and a desired menu is selected in the hall menu. Furthermore, when the selection/decision operation is appropriately performed for the selected menu, the manager of the game parlor can obtain various information and make various settings.

For example, when "time setting" is selected and determined, a setting screen is displayed on the effect display section, which enables setting of the date and time in the pachi-slot machine 1. FIG. Note that the date and time can be configured to be automatically updated, for example, in the sub-side power-on process (see S302 in FIG. 33).

Further, for example, when "total medal information" is selected/determined, history information indicating the number of inserted and the number of dispensed within a predetermined period (for example, each business day for seven business days) in the pachi-slot machine 1 is displayed. An information screen that can be confirmed is displayed in the effect display section. Note that such a menu can also be configured as a menu in the user menu.

Further, for example, when "setting change/confirmation history" is selected/determined, the number of setting change operations and setting confirmation operations within a predetermined period (for example, each business day for seven business days) in the pachislot machine 1 An information screen is displayed in the effect display section, in which history information indicating is recognizable. In addition, for example, when "error information history" is selected and determined, history information indicating the date and time of occurrence of an error in the pachislot machine 1 within a predetermined period (for example, each business day for 7 business days) and the content of the error. is displayed in the effect display section.

Further, for example, when "monitoring history" is selected and determined, the history information indicating the date and time when the door is opened within a predetermined period (for example, each business day for seven business days) in the pachi-slot machine 1 and the period thereof is displayed. An information screen that can be confirmed is displayed in the effect display section. Further, for example, when "warning setting" is selected and determined, a setting screen is displayed on the effect display section, which enables setting of various warning notification modes and frequencies in the pachi-slot machine 1 .

Further, for example, when the "power saving mode setting" is selected and determined, a setting screen is displayed on the effect display section to allow setting of whether or not to activate the power saving function of the pachi-slot machine 1, and the like. Note that such a menu can also be configured as a menu in the user menu. In addition, in order to enable more detailed settings at the time of such settings, or to enable reception of operations related to settings more easily, various operating units for receiving game operations of the player are can be used as a part of the operation unit that receives the operation related to (that is, the operation unit that receives the effect operation).

Further, for example, when "stop setting" is selected/determined, a setting screen is displayed on the effect display section to enable setting of whether or not to activate the stop function of the pachi-slot machine 1, and the like. It should be noted that the stop function is a function that, when a predetermined operating condition is met, disables the game until a cancellation operation (for example, a reset operation) is performed by the administrator of the game parlor. Further, the predetermined operating condition may be satisfied, for example, when the advantageous interval is forcibly terminated by execution of the limit processing described above, or may be established in a specific state (for example, a bonus state, an increase interval, or an advantageous condition). It may be established when the section (any of the sections (including the effect section)) ends. Further, when the stop function is set to ON state, an automatic settlement function, which will be described later, may be set to ON state in conjunction with this.

Further, for example, when "automatic settlement setting" is selected/determined, a setting screen is displayed in the effect display section to enable setting of whether or not to activate the automatic settlement function in the pachi-slot machine 1, and the like. Note that the automatic settlement function is a function of automatically settlement of credits (that is, all of the credited gaming value is automatically returned) when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied. Further, the predetermined operating condition may be satisfied, for example, when the advantageous interval is forcibly terminated by executing the limit process described above, or may be established in a specific state (for example, a bonus state, an increase interval, or an advantageous condition). It may be established when the section (any of the sections (including the effect section)) ends. Further, when the automatic settlement function is set to ON state, the stop function may also be set to ON state in conjunction with this.

In addition, when setting the stop function and automatic settlement function, in order to enable more detailed settings, or to enable reception of operations related to settings more easily, various operation units that accept game operations of the player can be used as part of the operation unit that receives the operation related to the setting (that is, the operation unit that receives the effect operation). However, in this case, it is not desirable to unnecessarily increase the number of operation units that can be accepted, so only a specific operation unit (for example, a stop button) should be used as part of the operation unit that accepts operations related to the setting. It is good to be able to do it.

[9. Extension example]
So far, the pachislot machine 1 has been described as an example of a gaming machine to which the invention according to the present embodiment can be applied, but the gaming machine to which the invention according to the present embodiment can be applied is not limited to this. For example, the present invention can be applied to gaming machines such as so-called "pachinko machines" and "slot machines", and similar effects can be obtained. That is, the invention according to the present embodiment can be applied to all gaming machines as long as they are capable of performing a game (performing game control) in accordance with a game action (operation) of a player. Also, the configuration and functions of the gaming machine including the pachi-slot machine 1 are not limited to those described above, and various modifications and extensions are possible. Although it is only an example, such an extension example will be described below.

(pachinko machine)
A pachinko machine includes, for example, a game board having a game area where game balls can roll and flow down, a glass door including protective glass that protects the game area while making it visible from the outside, and an effect display device provided in a predetermined area of the game area. (It may be provided outside the game area), a payout unit that pays out game balls, and a board unit including various control boards that perform various controls related to games and effects. (sometimes simply referred to as a “frame” or the like).

In addition, on the front side of the pachinko machine, for example, there are a shooting handle as one of the player's operation means, an upper tray capable of storing game balls to be played, and a lower tray capable of storing paid-out game balls. etc. are provided. It should be noted that many of them are provided with the above-described production buttons and movable production devices. In addition, the game area includes, for example, a starting area through which a game ball can pass (sometimes referred to as a "starting opening"), a specific area (sometimes referred to as a "V winning opening", etc.), A variable winning device (sometimes referred to as a "large winning opening") that can change between a state in which a game ball is easy to win and a state in which it is difficult to win, and identification information (referred to as "symbols" A variable display device that can variably display (including "special design" and "normal design") is provided.

In the pachinko machine, a player operates a shooting handle to shoot game balls into a game area to play a game. For example, when the launched game ball passes through the starting area, the variable display is started. Also, at this time, the current state (for example, whether the probability variation game state is relatively high hit probability) and the probability according to the type of the start region, etc., whether to transition the game state (for example, game It is determined whether or not to shift to a big hit game state or a small hit game state that is advantageous to the player (that is, it is determined by lottery (or determination) whether or not to shift the game state). After that, when a condition for stopping the variable display (for example, the end of the set variable time period) is established, the variable display is stopped in a stop mode according to the determination result. At this time, if the determination result is to shift the game state (hit), the stop mode to be stopped also becomes a display result corresponding to the hit, and when the display result is displayed, it corresponds to the hit. Move to the game state to play. On the other hand, if the determination result does not cause the game state to shift (loss), the stop mode to be stopped will also be a display result corresponding to the loss, and the game state will not shift. In addition, for example, when the launched game ball passes through a specific area (the specific area is usually placed in a state where it is difficult for the game ball to pass through), the game state is displayed regardless of the variable display device. It is decided to migrate.

That is, in the pachislot machine 1, the game is started when the player bets the required medals and the player performs a start operation, whereas in the pachinko machine, the player operates the handle to shoot the required game balls. For example, the game is started when the game ball passes through the starting area, but both are common in that the game is started by the player's game action. In addition, the pachislot machine 1 and the pachinko machine are common in that when the start opportunity is established, the stop mode (in other words, the content of the privilege to be given) that is finally permitted to be displayed is determined. .

In addition, in the pachislot machine 1, the variable display is basically stopped by the player's stop operation, whereas in the pachinko machine, the variable display is stopped when the stop condition is met (irrespective of the player's stop operation). Although they are different in that the variable display is stopped, they are common in that the variable display is stopped according to the result of determination made in advance, and a benefit is given according to the stopped mode. In addition, the pachislot machine 1 and the pachinko machine are common in that they can execute effects related to games. For example, the effect display device functions as the effect display section and the information display section described above. Also, in the pachinko machine, it is of course possible to provide an effect execution means such as the above-mentioned lamp, speaker, or other effect device, and to execute the effect by means of these means.

In many pachinko machines, decorative patterns (which may also be referred to as "identification information" or the like) are variably displayed in the effect display device. As described above, the original game result is displayed on the variable display device, but the variable display device is configured to be small, and the display result is also displayed by the lighting pattern of a plurality of LEDs. Therefore, in many cases, it is difficult for the player to recognize the game result. For this reason, in pachinko machines, it is the mainstream to play a game by variably displaying (and stopping) decorative symbols on the performance display device so as to interlock with the variable display of the variable display device. . In addition, such a variable display of decorative patterns may be performed after a certain period of delay when the start opportunity is met, or may be temporarily stopped before the stop condition is met. However, basically, similar to the above-mentioned variable table device, identification information is displayed variably or stopped according to the progress of the game (for example, in the case of winning, decorative patterns are displayed in a special stop mode (for example, ) is stopped and displayed, and in the case of a failure, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a non-special stop mode (for example, loose stitches)). It is also possible to apply the invention according to the embodiment.

That is, in the present embodiment, the various matters described as the configuration of the external structure or internal structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 have characteristics unique to the pachi-slot machine 1 (for example, medals are essential and cannot be replaced with game balls, etc.). ), it can be applied as the configuration of the external structure or the internal structure of the pachinko machine.

Also, in the pachinko machine, various controls related to the game are performed by a main control circuit as a game control unit mounted on the main control board (part of the control related to payout is (Although it may be performed by the payout control circuit mounted on the payout control board, including this), various controls related to the effect are performed by the sub control circuit as the effect control unit mounted on the sub control board. Various items described as the electrical configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 can be applied to the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine, except for items that are unique to the pachi-slot machine 1 (for example, items related to the stop operation, etc.).

In the pachi-slot machine 1, as described above, the bonus state, RT state, AT state, It is possible to provide an ART state or the like in which these are combined. For example, in the bonus state, by making the lottery mode of the minor winning combination more advantageous than in the non-bonus state, it is possible to continue the state in which medals are easily awarded (increase) for a certain period of time, and in the RT state, the replay winning combination is made possible. By making the lottery mode more advantageous than the non-RT state, it is possible to continue for a certain period of time a state in which it is difficult to lose (as a result, medals are difficult to decrease), and in the AT state, an advantageous stop operation mode By being notified, it is possible to continue the state in which medals are easily awarded (increase) for a certain period of time.

On the other hand, in a pachinko machine, it is possible to provide various game states having properties similar to these. For example, in a big win game state or a small win game state, the variable winning device is controlled differently than usual, so that the game ball can be changed to a state where it is easy to win, thereby giving the game ball. It is possible to continue the state of easy (increase) for a certain period of time. Also, for example, in a time-saving game state (sometimes referred to as an "electric sapo state"), normal symbols are controlled differently than usual, making it easier for game balls to pass through the starting area. This makes it possible to increase the lottery frequency of the variable display device and to maintain a state in which the number of game balls is difficult to decrease for a certain period of time. Also, for example, in the probability variable gaming state, the special symbol is controlled differently than usual, so that the winning probability by the variable display device is increased (as a result, the number of game balls tends to increase) The state is continued for a certain period of time. is possible.

That is, in the present embodiment, as the game characteristics of the pachi-slot machine 1, the various items described as the configuration of control relating to the transition (or transition) of the game state have characteristics unique to the pachi-slot machine 1 (for example, the It can be applied as a control configuration related to the transition (or transition) of the game state of the pachinko machine, excluding those accompanied by transition. In addition, the same applies to various other matters described as the game characteristics of the pachi-slot machine 1.

In addition, although it is a time-saving game state, even in pachinko machines, it is possible to shift to a time-saving game state when the number of games during a non-time-saving game state (normal game state) reaches a specified number of times. there is That is, even in a pachinko machine, if a disadvantageous state (for example, normal game state) continues for a predetermined period (for example, 900 games (rotation)) without shifting to a ceiling function (advantageous state (for example, jackpot game state)) Since it is possible to install a function that can shift to an advantageous state (for example, a time-saving gaming state) as a remedy for addiction, various items described as the configuration related to the ceiling function of the pachislot machine 1 are the configurations related to the ceiling function of the pachinko machine. can be applied as

In addition, although it is a time-saving game state, even in a pachinko machine, in a non-time-saving game state (normal game state), if the stop mode of the variable display device becomes a display result corresponding to a specific loss, this It is possible to shift to a time-saving game state with this as an opportunity. That is, even in the pachinko machine, it is possible to transition (transition) the game state (not triggered by the transition to the jackpot game state) by displaying a specific display result (combination of specific symbols). , Various items described as the configuration related to the transition (transition) of the RT state by displaying a specific combination of symbols of the pachinko machine 1 are the configurations related to the transition (transition) of the time-saving gaming state by displaying a specific display result of the pachinko machine can be applied.

(Medalless machine)
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the betting operation of the player (that is, the operation of inserting the medals on hand into the medal insertion slot 5 to bet, or the MAX bet button 6a or the 1 bet button of the credited medals) 6b to bet) is one of the start conditions, and if medals are to be paid out when the game is over, the hopper device 32 is driven to open the medal payout port 11. Although a form in which medals are paid out or credited is explained, the configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 is not limited to this.

For example, the game player bets the game value necessary for the game, the game is played based on the bet, and a privilege is given (for example, the game value is given) based on the result of the game. The invention according to is applicable. In other words, not only is medals physically thrown in and paid out by the action of the player, but also the gaming value possessed by the player is electromagnetically managed within the pachislot machine 1 ( Alternatively, even if it is not electromagnetic, at least it is managed in a manner that prevents the player from directly contacting the game value), and it can be applied to a game that can be played without medals. Here, such a pachi-slot machine 1 is referred to as a "medalless game machine". Note that the medal-less gaming machine is sometimes referred to as a "managed gaming machine" or an "enclosed gaming machine".

It should be noted that it may be the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71) itself that electromagnetically manages the gaming value held by the player, or it may be attached to the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71). It may be a (connected) game value management device (hereinafter, such a management device may be referred to as a "medal count control board"). An example in which this game value management device is provided will be described below.

The gaming value management device comprises at least ROM and RWM (or RAM), is provided in the pachi-slot machine 1, and is a communication device (hereinafter, when such a communication device is referred to as a "connection terminal board" ) to an external game value providing device (hereinafter, such a game value providing device may be referred to as a “communication dedicated unit”) so as to be capable of two-way communication. The gaming value management device carries out necessary communication with an external gaming value providing device to perform a gaming value lending operation (i.e., to provide the gaming value necessary for the player to bet on the gaming value). action to give the game value), action to give the game value (that is, action to provide the game value to the player in the case of winning the role (the win is established), etc.), and these It is possible to perform an operation of electromagnetically recording the game value provided by the operation of . Note that the game value providing device may be called a "game value (game medium) handling device", a "game value (game medium) lending device", or a "sandwich".

Also, the external game value providing device is connected to an external ball output management device (ball output management server). It is configured to be able to transmit the payout management information via the providing device. Here, the paid ball management information is composed of various kinds of information necessary for enabling an external paid ball management device to manage the paid balls. An example of the paid ball management information will be described later. Also, the external game value providing device and the external ball management device are connected via, for example, an internet line.

Here, the term "balls paid out" directly means the number of game media paid out. (for example, how much the player has become positive (how much the game store has become negative), or how much the player has become negative (how much the game store has become positive) ), the degree of continuation of advantageous states (for example, bonus state, AT state, or a series of advantageous sections, etc.), or the degree of gambling assumed by a combination of these.

Further, for example, a possessed game value number display device (not shown) for displaying the number of possessed game values is provided on the front side of the pachi-slot machine 1, and the game value management device controls the number of game values based on the management result of the number of game values. The game value number displayed on the possessed game value number display device of the lever may be managed. That is, the gaming value management device may not only record the total number of gaming values that a player can use for gaming by an electromagnetic method, but may also be configured to be able to control the display of the recording result. . In this case, the gaming value management device has the ability for the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded gaming values to the external gaming value providing device. It has the performance that the recorded game value cannot be reduced except when it is operated directly, and the signal indicating the recorded game value can be transmitted only through a communication device. is desirable.

It should be noted that the gaming value management device not only has the function of electromagnetically managing the gaming value of the player using an external gaming value providing device, but also the number of gaming values betted by the physical actions of the player and the number of gaming values of the pachislot machine 1. It may have a function of managing the number of game values paid out by the physical action of the player. That is, it may also be possible to manage the actual insertion and payout of medals in the conventional pachi-slot machine 1 . In this way, the pachi-slot machine 1 can be controlled by a conventional method, or by a method such as the above-mentioned medalless game machine, so that the pachi-slot machine 1 can be controlled with any specification. Even if there is, it can be set as a common configuration. Further, in this case, the game value management device may adopt a method of directly controlling the selector 31 and the hopper device 32, which are controlled by the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71), It is also possible to adopt a method of indirectly controlling by transmitting the control result.

In addition to the above, the pachi-slot machine 1 may be provided with various operation means necessary for the operation of the medalless game machine, such as a player-operable lending operation means and return (settlement) operation means. In addition, the game value providing device includes various devices such as an insertion slot for valuable values such as bills, an insertion slot for recording media (such as IC cards), and a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money etc. from a mobile terminal. In addition, various operation means necessary for the operation of the medalless game machine, such as a lending operation means and a return operation means that can be operated by the player, may be provided (none of them are shown). Note that the insertable recording medium includes not only non-member recording media issued on the day at the game parlor, but also member recording media owned by members of the amusement parlor. The game value recorded in the non-member recording medium is valid only on the day (and becomes invalid after the next day), but the game value recorded in the member recording medium is valid from the next day.

An example of the game flow in this case will be described. For example, first, the player deposits valuable value into the game value providing device by any method. The game value providing device subtracts a predetermined number of value values in response to the operation of any of the lending operation means by the player, and provides the pachi-slot machine 1 with the game value corresponding to the value value thus subtracted. Then, the player plays the game, and repeats the above operation when the game value is required. After that, the player operates one of the return operation means when ending the game after acquiring a predetermined number of game values according to the result of the game. The game value management device transmits the number of game values to the game value providing device according to the player's operation of any of the return operation means. The game value providing device ejects the recording medium recording the transmitted game value number. The game value management device clears the game value number stored by itself when the game value number is transmitted. The player can take the ejected recording medium to a prize exchange place or the like to exchange it for a prize, or the ejected recording medium can be sent to a game value providing device corresponding to another pachi-slot machine 1. By inserting it, the board can be moved and the game can be continued. Also, if the ejected recording medium is a member's recording medium, it is valid from the next day onwards, so the game can be stopped here.

In the above example, the game value management device transmits the total number of game values to the game value providing device in response to the player's return operation. Only the number of game values desired by the player may be transmitted. That is, the game value owned by the player may be divided. In addition, although the game value providing device records the transmitted game value number on a recording medium and discharges it, the above-mentioned non-contact communication antenna or the like is used to transfer the same value and value to the player's mobile terminal. For example, cash or cash equivalents may be dispensed as long as it provides something of equal value to the player.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 or the game value providing device is provided with lock operation means that can be operated by the player, and communication between the game value management device and the game value providing device is disabled according to the operation of the lock operation means. It may be possible to control the state (locked state). In this case, in the pachi-slot machine 1 or the gaming value providing device, for example, setting a personal identification number (and inputting the set personal identification number), issuing a one-time password (and inputting the issued one-time password), or biometric authentication and so on, and the locked state is released when the result of the authentication process is normal.

According to the medalless gaming machine described so far, compared to the case where the game medium is physically provided for the game, for example, a part of the external structure such as the medal insertion slot 5 and the medal payout opening 11, or the selector 31, etc. Since it is no longer necessary to provide some internal structures such as the hopper device 32, it is possible not only to reduce the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine, but also to reduce the power consumption of the game machine. In addition, since it becomes more difficult to access the inside of the gaming machine, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the gaming machine. Furthermore, since the player does not come into direct contact with the game medium, the game environment is improved and noise can be reduced. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

(Configuration example of a medalless game machine)
Next, with reference to FIG. 34, a configuration example when the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless game machine will be described. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a medalless gaming machine. In the following, a configuration example in which a medal count control board (game value management device) is provided will be mainly described.

As described above, the medal number control board is connected to the main control board 71 and manages the number of medals (game value number) owned by the player. Also, the medal number control board is connected to a dedicated communication unit (game value providing device) via a connection terminal board (communication device). Further, the medal number control board transmits the paid ball management information to the paid ball management device via the connection terminal board and the dedicated communication unit. A medal count control circuit (not shown) is mounted on the medal count control board. The medal number control circuit includes, for example, a medal number control CPU (not shown), a medal number control ROM (not shown), and a medal number control RWM (not shown).

The ball-out management device is, for example, a server for management of ball-out managed by (the information center of) an association to which the gaming machine maker joins, and the transmitted ball-out management information is accumulated in the ball-out management device. Thus, it is provided for the purpose of making it possible to monitor whether the gambling nature of each gaming machine is appropriate (ball output performance).

Therefore, from such a point of view, the medal count control board and the connection terminal board, like the main control board 71, carry out important functions in the pachi-slot machine 1, so that they are arranged in a manner that can prevent fraudulent acts and illegal modifications. It must be provided inside the pachi-slot machine 1. Configuration example 1 and configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 34 show an example of such a mode.

<Configuration example 1>
Configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 34 shows that the medal number control board and the connection terminal board are accommodated in the main control board case, like the main control board 71 . Here, the main control board case is usually subjected to various sealing processes to make it difficult to open (or remove) or to make it possible to recognize the traces of opening (or the number of times it has been opened). (for example, sealing by crimping, affixing a sealing seal, or affixing a crimping seal that describes a record of cutting the crimping, etc.).

Therefore, if the medal number control board and the connection terminal board are accommodated in the main control board case, the same security effect as that of the main control board 71 can be obtained, and fraudulent acts and illegal alterations can be properly prevented.

<Configuration example 2>
In configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 34, unlike configuration example 1 described above, the medal count control board and the connection terminal plate are accommodated in a medal count control board case provided separately from the main control board case. indicates that there is The medal count control board case is configured as a transparent (or substantially transparent) resin case similar to the main control board case. The plate shall be housed in a readily visible condition.

Here, in the medal number control board case of configuration example 2, the same sealing process as in the main control board case can be performed, or at least a part of the sealing process can be performed. can also For example, the medal number control board case may be sealed by caulking in the same manner as the main control board case, but no sealing seal is attached. Also, for example, in the main control board case, it is obligatory to use a predetermined crimped seal, but in the medal number control board case, any seal may be used as the crimped seal.

<Example of accumulated data>
The accumulated data example shown in FIG. 34 shows an example of various data accumulated in the paid-out ball management device. That is, it shows an example of the payout ball management information that the medal number control board transmits to the payout ball management device via the connection terminal board and the dedicated communication unit. It should be noted that this is only an example, and it is possible to adopt a configuration in which some of the various types of information shown in FIG. 34 are not transmitted, or a configuration in which information other than the various types of information shown in FIG. 34 is transmitted. can also

Also, the timing for the medal count control board to transmit information to the communication dedicated unit is arbitrary, and the timing for the communication dedicated unit to transmit information to the payout management device is also arbitrary. It may be transmitted at any timing as long as the ball payout management device can monitor the ball payout performance of each gaming machine for at least one unit (for example, one business day of the game parlor). . For example, the timing at which the medal count control board transmits information to the communication-dedicated unit and the timing at which the communication-dedicated unit transmits information to the ball management apparatus may be different timings. Also, for example, the timing at which the medal number control board transmits information to the communication dedicated unit may be different timing depending on the type of information.

The accumulated data “total number of inserted coins” is the accumulated number of inserted coins per unit after the power of each gaming machine is turned on. For example, the medal number control board sends information on the number of game values betted by the player's betting operation to the communication dedicated unit at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit game), excluding the bets made by the replay operation. The dedicated communication unit transmits the cumulative total of the information to the payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business hours of the amusement arcade).

The accumulated data "total number of payouts" is the cumulative number of payouts per unit since each gaming machine was powered on. For example, the number-of-medals control board sends the information on the number of game values given by the payout process of the gaming machine to the communication dedicated unit at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit game), excluding those given by the operation of replaying. The dedicated communication unit transmits the cumulative total of the information to the payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business hours of the amusement arcade).

Accumulated data "MY" is the maximum number of difference generated in one unit after the power of each gaming machine is turned on (in other words, the number of difference obtained during the period when the game value increased most in one unit. (referred to as "MY"). For example, the medal number control board calculates such a maximum number of difference number, and transmits the calculated information to the communication dedicated unit at a predetermined timing (for example, when the amusement arcade closes), and the communication dedicated unit receives the information is transmitted to the payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business hours of the amusement arcade).

The accumulated data "total payout number of accessories" is the cumulative number of payouts per unit after the power of each gaming machine is turned on, and the cumulative number of payouts paid out during the operation of various accessories. . For example, the medal number control board is dedicated to communication of information on the number of game values given by the payout process of the gaming machine during operation of various roles at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit game during operation of various roles). unit, and the communication-dedicated unit transmits the cumulative total of the information to the pay-out management device at a predetermined timing (for example, when the amusement arcade closes).

Accumulated data "total number of continuous bonuses paid out" is the cumulative number of payouts per unit since the power of each gaming machine was turned on, and continuous bonuses (RB, including RB during BB operation). It is the cumulative number of payouts paid out during the operation of. For example, the medal number control board is dedicated to communication of information on the number of game values given by the payout process of the gaming machine during operation of the continuous role at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit game during operation of the continuous role). unit, and the communication-dedicated unit transmits the cumulative total of the information to the pay-out management device at a predetermined timing (for example, when the amusement arcade closes).

In addition, the medal number control board transmits various information that can be displayed on the role ratio monitor device 54 to the communication dedicated unit at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of calculation by the role ratio monitor device 54), and the communication dedicated unit The information is transmitted to the ball management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of transmission from the medal count control board). Note that the accumulated data “Role Product Ratio” corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned role product ratio information, the accumulated data “Continuous Role Product Ratio” corresponds to, for example, the above-described continuous role product ratio information, and the accumulated data “Advantageous "Section ratio" corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned specific section ratio information, and the accumulated data "Instructed role product ratio" corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned role product ratio information that is subject to aggregation and calculation even during the AT state. , the accumulated data "ratio of state of accessories, etc." corresponds to the above-mentioned specific section ratio information, which is subject to aggregation and calculation even during operation of various accessories, for example.

The accumulated data “number of times played” is the accumulated number of times played per unit since each gaming machine was powered on. For example, the medal number control board transmits information on the number of games played at a predetermined timing (for example, each unit game) to the communication dedicated unit, and the communication dedicated unit calculates the cumulative total of the information at a predetermined timing ( For example, it is transmitted to the pay-out control device at the end of business hours of the amusement arcade.

The accumulated data "main control chip ID number" is the individual identification number (also called "CPUID", which is called "chip ID number") of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal number control board transmits various information to the communication dedicated unit, it transmits information including this individual identification number. Information including this individual identification number is transmitted.

The accumulated data "main control chip maker code" is a maker code recorded in the management area of the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal number control board transmits various information to the communication dedicated unit, it transmits information including this manufacturer code, and the communication dedicated unit transmits this transmitted information when transmitting various information to the ball management device. Send information including the manufacturer code.

The accumulated data "main control chip product code" is a product code recorded in the management area of the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal number control board transmits various information to the communication dedicated unit, it transmits information including this product code. Send information, including product codes.

The accumulated data “medal number control chip ID number” is the individual identification number of the medal number control circuit of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal number control board transmits various information to the communication dedicated unit, it transmits information including this individual identification number. Information including this individual identification number is transmitted. If the main control board 71 is configured to transmit various information to the communication dedicated unit without providing the medal number control board, the information becomes "0".

The accumulated data "medal number control chip maker code" is a maker code recorded in the management area of the medal number control ROM of the medal number control circuit of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal number control board transmits various information to the communication dedicated unit, it transmits information including this manufacturer code, and the communication dedicated unit transmits this transmitted information when transmitting various information to the ball management device. Send information including the manufacturer code. If the main control board 71 is configured to transmit various information to the communication dedicated unit without providing the medal number control board, the information becomes "0".

The accumulated data "medal number control chip product code" is a product code recorded in the management area of the medal number control ROM of the medal number control circuit of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal number control board transmits various information to the communication dedicated unit, it transmits information including this product code. Send information, including product codes. If the main control board 71 is configured to transmit various information to the communication dedicated unit without providing the medal number control board, the information becomes "0".

In this way, the paid-out ball management device can store various information (discharged-ball management information) transmitted from the gaming machine. The ball management information also includes a plurality of pieces of individual identification information (for example, the above-described “main control chip ID number” to “medal number control chip product code”) that can identify individual gaming machines. Therefore, the ball management device can identify the gaming machine that is the transmission source by these pieces of individual identification information. are different, it is possible to recognize the possibility that one of the control boards has been replaced (that is, the possibility of fraud or unauthorized modification).

In addition, the put-out ball management information includes a plurality of pieces of put-out ball information (for example, the above-described “total number of inserted balls” to “number of times played”) that can identify the performance of one unit of put-out balls. Therefore, the paid-out ball management device can recognize whether the gambling nature of the gaming machine of the transmission source is within an appropriate range based on the paid-out ball information. For example, if the "total number of payouts" or "instructed accessory ratio" becomes extremely high from a certain point, there is a possibility that fraudulent acts or unauthorized modifications have been made, or that there is some flaw in the specification design in the first place. It is possible to recognize the possibility that there was

Then, when the above-mentioned possibility is recognized by the paid-out ball management device, it can be expected that the result will be notified to the game parlor or the game machine maker, and appropriate countermeasures will be taken. That is, a plurality of management gaming machines, a game value providing device (communication dedicated unit) that transmits the payout management information transmitted from the management gaming machines to the payout management device, and based on the transmitted payout management information, each By constructing a management system including a payout management device that manages the payout performance of managed gaming machines, it is possible to appropriately manage all managed gaming machines.

<Modification 1>
As described above, the medalless gaming machine can be configured so that the number of game values possessed by the player is managed by the medal number control board. Therefore, the medal count control board may be provided with a medal count monitor device (not shown) so that the administrator of the game parlor can grasp such management status or other information.

The medal number monitor device is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED, and is provided inside the medal number control board case. The medal number monitor device displays various information (for example, part or all of the above-described ball output management information) regarding the number of game values aggregated and calculated by the medal number control CPU (or may be the main CPU 101). Display sequentially. If the display contents of the role ratio monitor device 54 are all displayed by the medal number monitor device, the role ratio monitor device 54 may not be provided. Alternatively, the role ratio monitor device 54 may also be used as the medal count monitor device.

Further, the medal count monitor device may be mounted on the medal count control board, or may be mounted on another board (for example, a connection terminal board) connected to the medal count control board. good too. Moreover, as long as it is inside the cabinet G, it may be provided in another place. For example, it may be provided on the medal count control board case. Also, a management switch may be provided in the cabinet G for starting the display on the medal number monitor device or for switching the content, and various information may be displayed when this switch is operated. Further, on the premise of using such a management switch, for example, the information display device 14 may also be used as a medal number monitor device.

The medal number monitor device may display the type of error state that has occurred when various error states related to itself have occurred. For example, when a communication error occurs with the main control board 71, when a communication error occurs with the connection terminal board, when a communication error occurs with the game value providing device, or when an abnormality occurs in the token number control RWM. In some cases, a numerical value corresponding to this may be displayed. In this case, in order to make it possible for the manager of the game parlor to easily recognize which error state the displayed numerical value corresponds to, the corresponding relationship is displayed in or near the medal number control board case. It is sufficient to provide a descriptive section (affixing a sticker, printing, etc.) to indicate.

<Modification 2>
As described above, in the medalless game machine, the medal number control board can be configured to transmit the ball output management information to the outside via the connection terminal board. Here, in this embodiment, an external collective terminal board 55 is additionally provided for transmitting information to the outside. Therefore, the connection terminal plate and the external collective terminal plate 55 can be configured, for example, as follows.

For example, the connection terminal board and the external collective terminal board 55 are configured as a common terminal board. As a result, not only can the number of parts be reduced, but also the number of wires directed to the outside can be reduced, so that the security effect can be enhanced.

Also, for example, the connection terminal plate and the external collective terminal plate 55 are configured as one unit. Also, for example, the connection terminal plate and the external collective terminal plate 55 are arranged at least in the cabinet G in close proximity. As a result, the work efficiency at the time of connection can be improved. Moreover, the length of the wiring can be made constant, and the wiring locations can be limited, so that the security effect can be enhanced.

<Modification 3>
As described above, the medalless gaming machine can be configured to transmit the paid ball management information to the paid ball management device. In addition, in the payout management device, it is possible to appropriately manage the payout performance of each medalless game machine based on the received payout management information. Therefore, on the premise that ball output performance can be appropriately managed in this manner, the above-described limiter may not be provided. That is, it may not have the function of forcibly ending the advantageous section based on the establishment of a certain regulation condition.

Alternatively, the medal number control board may be provided with a function to appropriately manage the ball payout performance, and on the premise that the ball payout performance can be appropriately managed in this manner, the above limiter may not be provided. . That is, it may not have the function of forcibly ending the advantageous section based on the establishment of a certain regulation condition.

For example, the medal count control board is configured to include a ball output monitoring RWM (which may be the medal count control RWM described above, or may be another RWM). The ball-out monitoring RWM is initialized, for example, when the setting is changed, but is not initialized at the end of the advantageous section to monitor the ball-out. Then, when the monitored ball output exceeds a certain threshold, for example, the advantage section itself is not forcibly terminated, but the navigation occurrence probability is lowered, the AT state is extended, the probability is lowered, Alternatively, it is assumed that the AT state itself can be terminated to reduce the performance of putting out balls. Even in this way, it is possible to appropriately manage the ball output performance. In this case, it may be possible to transmit such a control result to the paid ball management device as the paid ball management information. That is, both the medal count control board and the ball management device may be configured to manage the ball output performance of each medalless game machine.

(Configuration example of the main control board of a pachislot machine)
Next, a configuration example of the main control board 71 of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the main control board 71. As shown in FIG. In the following, a configuration example for reusing the main control board 71 will be mainly described.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, there are various restrictions on the specifications of the main control board 71, one of which is that the manufacturer's name and board control number must be printed on the main control board 71. It's becoming The manufacturer name is the name of the gaming machine manufacturer that manufactures the pachi-slot machine 1, and the control number is a number for identifying the model of the main control board 71. FIG.

<Configuration example 1>
Configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35 indicates that the manufacturer's name and the board control number are printed in characters on the main control board 71 in the conventional manner. Here, in configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35, first, it is assumed that BB Co., Ltd. manufactures the pachi-slot machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as "model A") on which the main control board 71 is mounted. At this time, only the name of the manufacturer "BB Co., Ltd." and the board management number "BB-00-11-22" in the lower row are initially printed. After that, when model A is removed from the amusement arcade, for example, when AA Co., Ltd. reuses the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as "model B"), the company AA deletes the printed manufacturer name and board control number in the lower row by laser engraving, and inserts the manufacturing number and board control number (for example, the upper manufacturer in the configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35) in a different space. The name “AA Co., Ltd.” and board control number “AA-00-11-22”) must be newly printed.

After that, model B was withdrawn from the amusement arcade, and, for example, BB Co., Ltd. attempted to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as "model C"). In this case, BB Co., Ltd. has to delete the printed manufacturer name and board control number by laser engraving, and newly print the manufacturing number and board control number related to the company in a different space. However, in the configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35, since there is no more empty space, the main control board 71 can be reused due to the restrictions described above, although the hardware can still be sufficiently reused. There was a problem that it may not be possible.

This is the same even when a plurality of manufacturer names and board control numbers are printed from the beginning. For example, even if the serial number and board control number for both AA Co., Ltd. and BB Co., Ltd. are printed in advance, the serial number and board control number for AA Co., Ltd. are laser-engraved at the time of manufacturing model A. This is because it will be deleted. Therefore, although there is a possibility that BB Co., Ltd. can reuse it, AA Co., Ltd. cannot reuse it. On the other hand, in Configuration Examples 2 and 3 described below, it can be expected that the problems described above can be resolved. That is, the reusability of a board used for game control, such as the main control board 71, can be enhanced.

<Configuration example 2>
Configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 35 indicates that a code including the manufacturer's name and board control number is printed. Note that in configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 35, a QR code (registered trademark), which is a two-dimensional code, is used as an example of a code containing a manufacturer name and a board management number. code can be used. That is, the code may be of any kind as long as it includes information that enables the confirmer to uniquely identify the manufacturer name and board control number by some means (e.g., mobile terminal, etc.). good too.

In configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 35, first, assuming that model A is manufactured by BB Corporation, the first code from the right is printed. The first code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board control number of BB Corporation. After that, when model A is withdrawn from the amusement arcade and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. intends to manufacture model B, the second code from the right is printed and the first code from the right is deleted by laser engraving. The second code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board control number of AA Co., Ltd.

After that, when the model B is withdrawn from the amusement arcade and, for example, BB Co., Ltd. tries to manufacture the model C, the third code from the right is printed and the second code from the right is deleted by laser engraving. The third code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board control number of BB Corporation. After that, even when model C was withdrawn from the amusement arcade and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. reused the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1, AA Co., Ltd. was the third from the right. The code of is deleted by laser engraving, the fourth code from the right is printed, and the fourth code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board control number related to AA Co., Ltd. If so, it becomes possible to reuse the main control board 71 in a new pachi-slot machine 1 .

That is, in the configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 35, by printing the code including the manufacturer name and the board control number, the manufacturer name and the board control number are printed (printed) per one on the surface of the main control board 71. ) Since the space can be saved, it is possible to improve the reusability as compared with the configuration example 1 shown in FIG.

<Configuration example 3>
Configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35 indicates that a code including a manufacturer name and a board control number is printed in the same manner as in configuration example 2 described above. Note that, in configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, a plurality of (for example, four) codes are printed from the beginning. For example, it is assumed that two each of AA Co., Ltd. and BB Co., Ltd. are printed. In addition, on the surface of the main control board 71 (or on the corresponding main control board case), the code is read by crimping a portion corresponding to each code with, for example, a belt-like member. It makes it possible to fix an impossible state. Further, for example, by cutting the belt-like member or the like, it is possible to release the fixation and make the code readable.

In configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, first, assuming that model A is manufactured by BB Co., Ltd., only the first code from the right is readable, and the second to fourth codes from the right are readable. is rendered unreadable. The first code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board control number of BB Corporation. After that, when model A was withdrawn from the amusement arcade and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. tried to manufacture model B, only the second code from the right was made readable, and the first, third and fourth codes from the right were made readable. The second code is rendered unreadable. The second code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board control number of AA Co., Ltd.

After that, when model B was withdrawn from the amusement arcade, for example, when BB Co., Ltd. tried to manufacture model C, only the third code from the right was made readable, and the first, second, and fourth codes from the right were made readable. The second code is rendered unreadable. The third code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board control number of BB Corporation. After that, even when model C was withdrawn from the amusement arcade and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. reused the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1, AA Co., Ltd. was the fourth from the right. can be read, and the first to third codes from the right cannot be read, the main control board 71 can be reused in a new pachi-slot machine 1.

Further, in the configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, at least one code can be read and other codes cannot be read. can be reused by game machine manufacturers. Also in the configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, only caulking holes may be provided, and a code may be printed at a location corresponding to the caulking holes each time the device is reused.

[10. Second gaming machine]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 36 to 43, another specific example of the specifications relating to the playability of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described as a "second game machine". 36 to 40, the x-axis and y-axis shown in the drawings will be used as appropriate. 36 to 40, the configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 that is not described in each of FIGS. 36 to 40 is applied to the embodiment described in each of FIGS. 1 to 35. FIG.

[10.1. Schematic configuration of speaker device]
The speaker device 400 used in the second gaming machine is a speaker device in which two speaker units (the first speaker unit 500 and the second speaker unit 600) that emit the same sound wave band are arranged coaxially. , the outline of the speaker device 400 will be described with reference to FIGS.

As shown in FIG. 36(a), the speaker device 400 is accommodated (mounted) in a housing ("cabinet G" in FIG. 1) 401 in which a circular opening 411 shown in FIG. 36(b) is formed. ), a first speaker unit 500 and a second speaker unit 600 are provided. The first speaker unit 500 and the second speaker unit 600 emit sound waves in the same band, and have the same structure to output waveforms of the same shape to the first speaker unit 500 and the second speaker unit 600. Use In the second gaming machine, the speaker device 400 is housed in the housing 401, but the speaker device 400 is placed in the front door ("upper door mechanism" in FIG. 1) having an opening corresponding to the opening 411. UD" or "lower door mechanism DD").

The first speaker unit 500 has the structure of a general dynamic speaker unit, and the outline of the first speaker unit 500 will be briefly described below with reference to FIG. 36(c).

The first speaker unit 500 has a yoke (yoke) 502 consisting of a disc-shaped portion 502a having the central axis 501 as its central axis and a cylindrical portion 502b having the central axis 501 as its central axis. In the first speaker unit 500, a cylindrical bobbin 504 around a central axis 501 is arranged around a portion 502b of a yoke 502. The bobbin 504 is wound with an electromagnetic coil (also referred to as a "voice coil") 503. A cylindrical magnet 505 , a cylindrical plate 506 , and a cylindrical ring 507 are arranged around the magnet 504 , each centered on the central axis 501 . Also, the first speaker unit 500 is provided with a damper 508 connected to the bobbin 504 and the ring 507 . Further, the first speaker unit 500 is provided with a frame 509 attached to the ring 507 , and the frame 509 is arranged so that the first speaker unit 500 is viewed from one direction of the central axis 501 in plan view. It has an annular shape with 501 as the central axis. Also, the first speaker unit 500 is provided with a cone paper (diaphragm) 510 attached to a bobbin 504 , and the cone paper (diaphragm) 510 moves the first speaker unit 500 to one side of the central axis 501 . It has an annular shape with a central axis 501 as a central axis in a plan view viewed from the direction. Further, the first speaker unit 500 is provided with a center cap 511 , and the center cap 511 is arranged so that the central axis 501 is the central axis when viewed from above in one direction of the central axis 501 of the first speaker unit 500 . It has a circular shape. Further, the first speaker unit 500 is provided with an edge 512 between the frame 509 and the cone paper (diaphragm) 510, and the edge 512 moves the first speaker unit 500 from one direction of the central axis 501. It has an annular shape with a central axis 501 as a central axis in plan view. In the first speaker unit 500 having the structure described above, when an electric current is applied to the electromagnetic coil 503, the cone paper (diaphragm) 510 vibrates to emit sound waves.

The second speaker unit 600 has the same general dynamic speaker unit structure as the first speaker unit 500 shown in FIG. 36(c).

As shown in FIG. 36(a), the housing 401 is provided with a case 402 comprising a cylindrical portion having a central axis 450 as a central axis and a conical portion having a central axis 450 as a central axis. there is The first speaker unit 500 is arranged on the central axis 450 so that the central axis 501 in FIG. 36(c) coincides with the central axis 450 of the circular opening 410 shown in FIGS. 36(a) and 36(b). and housed in the case 402 .

Further, the second speaker unit 600 is positioned so that the first speaker unit 500 exists in the direction in which sound waves are radiated, and the center axis 501 in FIG. It is arranged on the central axis 450 and accommodated in the housing 401 so as to coincide with the central axis 450 of the shaped opening 410 .

Although not shown in FIGS. 36A and 36B, the first speaker unit 500 has a housing 401 with a size that does not hinder the radiation of sound waves emitted by the second speaker unit 600. It is supported and fixed by multiple (2 to 6) frames. In addition, the first speaker unit 500 is fixed to the second speaker unit 600 with a plurality (2 to 6) of frames, and the first speaker unit 500 and the second speaker unit 600 are used as one speaker unit. may be accommodated in

The sound wave emitted by the first speaker unit 500 is output to the outside of the housing 401 from the circular first opening portion 412 having the central axis 450 shown in FIG. It has become so. In addition, the sound waves emitted by the second speaker unit 600 are transmitted to the outside of the housing 401 from the annular second opening portion 413 having the central axis 450 shown in FIG. It is designed to be output.

Since the tone color of the sound wave emitted by the second speaker unit 600 changes depending on the internal structure of the speaker device 400, the second amplifier 802 or the sub CPU 201 that outputs the audio signal or audio data to the second speaker unit 600 side To achieve consistency in tone color between sound waves radiated by the first speaker unit 500 and sound waves radiated by the second speaker unit by using an FIR (Finite Impulse Response) filter, an equalizer, or the like under control. is preferred.

[10.2. Directivity]
In the second game machine, the speaker device 400 controls the speaker unit that emits sound waves, out of the first speaker unit 500 and the second speaker unit 600, and the sound emission timing of the sound waves by the first speaker unit 500. 37(a) to 37(c) can be realized by controlling the output timing of the sound wave by the second speaker unit 600 and the sound emission timing of the sound wave. The directivity of FIG. 37(a) is described as "directivity of convergence", the directivity of FIG. 37(b) is described as "directivity of diffusion", and the directivity of FIG. normal directivity”.

Since the sub CPU 201 controls the sound output timing of the sound wave that enables each directivity and the control of the speaker unit that outputs the sound wave, the sub CPU 201 constitutes control means. Specifically, processing is performed based on control of sound control processing (not shown) of each effect control execution processing of S304, S306, and S307 in FIG. The same audio data is output to the two-speaker unit 600 .

In the following, for convenience of explanation, a plane cut model obtained by cutting the speaker device 400 along one plane (xy plane) including the central axis 450 will be explained. In addition, the portion corresponding to the circular first opening portion 412 in FIG. 36(b) in the plane cut model is described as the first opening portion 420, and corresponds to the annular second opening portion 413 in FIG. 36(b). One of the portions is described as an upper second opening portion 421 and the other is described as a lower second opening portion 422 . Further, in the description using the plane cut model, the first sound wave emitted by the first speaker unit 500 and output to the outside of the housing 401 from the first opening portion 420 is referred to as the first sound wave 550, and the second sound wave 550 is referred to as the second sound wave. The second sound wave emitted by the speaker unit 600 is referred to as a second sound wave 650, and the second sound wave 650 output from the upper second opening portion 421 to the outside of the housing 401 is referred to as an upper second sound wave 651. The second sound wave 650 output from the lower second opening portion 422 to the outside of the housing 401 is referred to as a lower second sound wave 652 .

In the description of the plane cut model, for convenience, the first sound wave 550 is positioned at a point P101 on the central axis 450 of the first opening portion 420, which is also the center of the tip portion of the first speaker unit 500 (hereinafter referred to as "first sound wave output point P101 (See FIGS. 39 and 40). Further, the upper second sound wave 651 is centered on the center point P102 in the y-axis direction of the upper second opening portion 421 (hereinafter referred to as "upper second sound wave output point P102"; see FIGS. 38 to 40). The lower second sound wave 652 spreads uniformly in a semicircular shape, and the lower second sound wave 652 reaches the center point P103 of the lower second opening portion 422 in the y-axis direction (hereinafter referred to as the “lower second sound wave output point P103”). 38 to 40) is assumed to spread uniformly in a semicircular shape. Actually, the first sound wave 550 spreads from the first opening portion 412 in a substantially spherical shape, and the second sound wave 650 spreads from the second opening portion 413 in a substantially donut shape. It is also assumed that the first sound wave 550 and the second sound wave 650 have the same wavelength (same frequency).

Further, since the speaker device 400 has a symmetrical structure with respect to the central axis 450, the timing at which the upper second sound wave 651 is output from the upper second opening portion 421 to the outside of the housing 401 and the timing at which the lower second sound wave 651 is output The timing at which the sound wave 652 is output to the outside of the housing 401 from the lower second opening portion 422 is the same. In the positive direction of the x-axis, the distance traveled by the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651 is the same as the distance traveled by the leading surface of the lower second sound wave 652 .

[10.2.1. Outline of directivity]
An outline of each directivity that can be realized by the speaker device 400 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 37(a) to (c). The tips of the arrows of the sound waves 550, 651, and 652 in FIGS. 37(a) to (c) schematically show the tips of the forward planes of the sound waves 550, 651, and 652 in the x-axis direction at a certain timing. there is

[10.2.1.1. Outline of directivity of convergence]
In the directivity of convergence in FIG. 37( a ), the leading plane of the upper second sound wave 651 and the leading plane of the lower second sound wave 652 are more than the leading plane of the first sound wave 550 in the positive direction of the x-axis. let it proceed. Furthermore, on the central axis 450 where the leading plane of the upper second sound wave 651 and the leading plane of the lower second sound wave 652 intersect, the leading plane of the first sound wave 550 is aligned with the leading plane of the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 651 . 2 so as to intersect with the advanced plane of the sound wave 652 .

In this way, the first sound wave 550 is in phase (synthesized) with the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 substantially on the central axis 450, and strengthens each other. Along with this, it travels in the positive direction of the x-axis on the approximate center axis 450 (see arrow 710 in FIG. 39(a)). In this case, the sound becomes loudest near the center axis 450 .

A line connecting the leading plane of the first sound wave 550, the leading plane of the upper second sound wave 651, and the leading plane of the lower second sound wave 652 becomes an inward directional wavefront 700 illustrated in FIG. 37(a).

[10.2.1.2. Diffusion directivity overview]
In the directivity of diffusion in FIG. 37( b ), the leading plane of the first sound wave 550 is greater than the leading plane of the upper second sound wave 651 and the leading plane of the lower second sound wave 652 in the positive direction of the x-axis. let it proceed. Furthermore, from the y-axis value of the upper second sound wave output point P102 (the center point in the y-axis direction of the upper second opening portion 421) in a plan view of the speaker device 400 viewed from one direction of the central axis 450, The leading plane of the first sound wave 550 intersects the leading plane of the upper second sound wave 651 at the point where the y-axis value is large. From the y-axis value of the lower second sound wave output point P103 (center point in the y-axis direction of the lower second opening portion 422) in a plan view of the speaker device 400 viewed from one direction of the central axis 450 The leading plane of the first sound wave 550 intersects the leading plane of the lower second sound wave 652 at the point where the y-axis value is small. The point at which the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 intersects the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651 and the point at which the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 intersects the leading surface of the lower second sound wave 652 are located on the central axis 450. It has a symmetrical positional relationship.

In this way, the first sound wave 550 and the upper second sound wave 651 are in phase (synthesized) at the point where the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 and the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651 intersect, and strengthen each other. The matching portion 700A advances in the direction in which the x-axis value increases and the y-axis value increases over time (see arrow 710A in FIG. 40(a)). The sound becomes loudest in the vicinity of this reinforcing portion 700A. In addition, the first sound wave 550 is in phase (synthesized) with the lower second sound wave 652 at the point where the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 and the leading surface of the lower second sound wave 652 intersect, and reinforces each other. The portion 700B progresses in the direction in which the x-axis value increases and the y-axis value decreases over time (see arrow 710B in FIG. 40(a)). The sound becomes loudest near this constructive portion 700B.

[10.2.1.3. Outline of normal directivity]
37(c), the first sound wave 550 is emitted from the first speaker unit 500, and the first sound wave 550 is output from the first opening 420 to the outside of the housing 401. do. On the other hand, the sound output of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600 is not performed, the upper second sound wave 651 is not output from the upper second opening portion 421 to the outside of the housing 401, and the lower second opening portion The output of the lower second sound wave 652 from 422 to the outside of the housing 401 is prevented.

By doing so, the first sound wave 550 spreads uniformly in a semicircular shape, similar to the directivity of sound waves by one dynamic speaker unit.

[10.2.2. directivity control]
Control for realizing each directivity shown in FIGS. 37(a) to 37(c) will be described below.

[10.2.2.1.2 Interference of waves (upper second sound wave, lower second sound wave)]
37(a) to 37(c), an upper second sound wave 651 output from the upper second opening portion 421 to the outside of the housing 401 and a lower second sound wave 651 output to the outside of the housing 401. Interference with the lower second sound wave 652 output from the opening 422 to the outside of the housing 401 will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 38, with regard to the second sound wave 650, the upper second sound wave 651, and the lower second sound wave 652, which are the compressional waves, solid lines indicate portions where the compressional waves are densely applied, and dotted lines indicate portions where the compressional waves are sparsely applied. ing.

A second sound wave 650 emitted by the second speaker unit 600 is output to the outside of the housing 401 through the upper second opening portion 421 and the lower second opening portion 422 . At the same timing, the phase of the second sound wave 650 (upper second sound wave 651) output from the upper second opening portion 421 to the outside of the housing 401 and the phase of the second sound wave 650 (upper second sound wave 651) output from the lower second opening portion 422 to the outside of the housing 401 the phase of the second sound wave 650 (lower second sound wave 652).

The upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 interfere with each other and strengthen or weaken each other. For example, when the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 overlap in phase, the combined wave of both sound waves 651 and 652 becomes the strongest, and the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 are in opposite phase. , the composite wave of both sound waves 651 and 652 is the weakest. At each point on the central axis 450, the distance from the upper second sound wave output point P102 of the upper second opening portion 421 and the distance from the lower second sound wave output point P103 of the lower second opening portion 422 are equal. Therefore, the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 overlap each other in the same phase, and the combined wave of both sound waves 651 and 652 is the strongest.

Regarding the interference fringes formed by the interference between the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652, the upper second The energy of the composite wave of the sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 increases (becomes an antinode of the waveform of the interference fringes). Also, at points P202a and P202b where the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 overlap with opposite phases, the energy of the composite wave becomes small (they become nodes of the waveform of the interference fringes). Also, the energy of the composite wave decreases from point P201 to point P202a, and the energy of the composite wave increases from point P202a to point P203a. Also, the energy of the composite wave decreases from point P201 to point P202b, and the energy of the composite wave increases from point P202b to point P203b. Also, since the sound waves are attenuated as they travel, the energy of the composite waves at points P203a and P203b is smaller than the energy of the composite wave at point P201.

The antinode of the interference fringes where the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 overlap in phase is given by Y=n×L×λ/d. However, (x, y) = ( 0, 0). Y is the antinode y-axis value. n is an integer. d is the distance between the upper second sound wave output point P102 and the lower second sound wave output point P103 (hereinafter referred to as "the distance between the second opening portions"). L is the distance in the positive direction of the x-axis from the first sound wave output point P101 of the interference fringes. λ is the wavelength of the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 . Assume that L is sufficiently larger than d. Note that the y-axis values Y of the points P201, P203a, and P203b are Y=0, L×λ/d, and −L×λ/d. Also, the smaller the distance d between the second openings, the larger the interval between two adjacent antinodes of the interference fringes.

[10.2.2.2. Directivity control of convergence]
The control related to the directivity of convergence in FIG. 37(a) will be described with reference to FIG. 39(a).

A leading surface of a second sound wave 650 (upper second sound wave 651) emitted by the second speaker unit 600 and output from the upper second opening 421 to the outside of the housing 401, and sound emitted by the second speaker unit 600 The leading surface of the second sound wave 650 (lower second sound wave 652 ) output from the lower second opening portion 422 to the outside of the housing 401 intersects on the central axis 450 . At each point on the central axis 450, the distance from the upper second sound wave output point P102 of the upper second opening portion 421 and the distance from the lower second sound wave output point P103 of the lower second opening portion 422 are equal. Therefore, the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 overlap each other in the same phase, and the combined wave of both sound waves 651 and 652 is the strongest.

The leading surface of the first sound wave 550 having the same waveform shape as the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 is aligned with the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651 and the leading surface of the lower second sound wave 652 along the central axis. 450 at the first wavefront synthesis point P301. In other words, the first sound wave 550 is superimposed on the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 at the first wavefront synthesis point P301 on the central axis 450 in the same phase. In this way, the combined wave of the first sound wave 550, the upper second sound wave 651, and the lower second sound wave 652 becomes strongest at the first wave front combining point P301 on the central axis 450. FIG.

Since the line connecting the forward plane of the first sound wave 550, the forward plane of the upper second sound wave 651, and the forward plane of the lower second sound wave 652 becomes the directional wave plane, the inward directivity shown in FIG. A wavefront 700 is obtained, and the directivity of convergence shown in FIG. 37(a) is realized.

In the control for realizing the directivity of convergence, the three sound waves of the first sound wave 550, the upper second sound wave 651, and the lower second sound wave 652 are made to have the same phase at the first wavefront synthesis point P301 on the central axis 450. In addition, at the first wavefront synthesis point P301 on the central axis 450, the leading plane of the first sound wave 550 intersects the leading plane of the upper second sound wave 651 and the leading plane of the lower second sound wave 652. In other words, The sub CPU 201 controls the first sound wave generated by the first speaker unit 500 so that the first sound wave 550 arrives at the first wavefront synthesis point P301 on the central axis 450 at the same time as the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 . Control is performed to delay the sound output timing of 550 from the sound output timing of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600 .

FIG. 39(b) shows a specific example of the delay time TA (ms) for delaying the sound output timing of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 from the sound output timing of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600. will be described with reference to Here, the distance between the first sound wave output point P101 and the second sound wave output point P104, which is the center of the tip portion of the second speaker unit 600 in the y-axis direction, is defined as E (mm). Let D (mm) be the distance between the first sound wave output point P101 and the upper second sound wave output point P102 and the distance between the first sound wave output point P101 and the lower second sound wave output point P103.

The point where the distance in the x-axis direction from the first sound wave output point P101 in the x-axis direction is F (mm) and the distance in the y-axis direction is 0 (mm) is set so that the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 is the upper second sound wave 651 and the leading plane of the lower second sound wave 652 are intersected at the first wavefront synthesis point P301 on the central axis 450 described above.

The distance traveled by the second sound wave 650 before it is output to the outside of the housing 401 (the distance between the second sound wave output point P104 and the upper second sound wave output point P102, the second sound wave output point P104 and the lower second sound wave The distance R (mm) from the output point P103 is R=(D ² +E ² ) ^1/2 .

The second sound wave 650 (upper second sound wave 651) travels from being output to the outside of the housing 401 until it reaches the first wave front synthesis point P301 (the second upper sound wave output point P102 and the first wave front synthesis point distance from P301) S (mm), and the distance (lower The distance S (mm) between the side second sound wave output point P103 and the first wave front combining point P301 is S=(D ² +F ² ) ^1/2 . The distance traveled by the first sound wave 550 from being output to the outside of the housing 401 to reaching the first wave-field synthesis point P301 (the distance between the first sound-wave output point P101 and the first wave-field synthesis point P301) T (mm ) becomes T=F. Therefore, outside the housing 401, the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 travel more than the first sound wave 550 by ST=(D ² +F ² ) ^1/2 -F. . Therefore, the distance Y (mm) by which the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651 and the leading surface of the lower second sound wave 652 travel in the positive direction of the x-axis from the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 is Y =(D ² +F ² ) ^1/2 -F.

In order for the leading plane of the first sound wave 550 to intersect the leading plane of the upper second sound wave 651 and the leading plane of the lower second sound wave 652 at the first wave plane synthesis point P301, the second sound wave 650 need to progress by R+Y=(D ² +E ² ) ^1/2 +((D ² +F ² ) ^1/2 −F) more than

Therefore, assuming that the speed of sound is v (mm/ms), a delay time TA for delaying the sound output timing of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 from the sound output timing of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600 is (ms) is TA=(R+Y)/v=((D ² +E ² ) ^1/2 +((D ² +F ² ) ^1/2 -F))/v. Note that v=340 (mm/ms).

In addition, in the control related to the directivity of convergence, at a certain wavelength, the leading plane of the first sound wave 550 is the leading plane of the upper second sound wave 651 and the leading plane of the lower second sound wave 652 at the first wave plane synthesis point P301. is TA, the leading plane of the first sound wave 550 at another wavelength is the same leading plane of the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave at the same first wave plane synthesis point P301. The above delay time to meet the leading plane of 652 results in the same TA. Therefore, the same delay time TA can be used for each wavelength in the bands of the first sound wave 550 and the second sound wave 650 .

Note that in FIG. 39A, the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 are in phase with each other and strengthen each other in the interference fringes of FIG. At the points P203a and P203b that overlap in phase, the first sound wave 550 has substantially the opposite phase to the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652. As shown in FIG. Therefore, when the first sound wave 550 is added to the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652, interference fringes formed by the interference between the first sound wave 550 and the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 are generated. Can widen the belly of the corrugation.

[10.2.2.3. Diffusion directivity control]
The control related to the diffusion directivity in FIG. 37(b) will be described with reference to FIG. 40(a).

The leading surface of the first sound wave 550 having the same waveform shape as the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 is the same as the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651 when the speaker device 400 is viewed from one direction of the central axis 450. In a plan view, they intersect at an upper second wavefront synthesis point P302A having a larger y-axis value than the y-axis value of the upper second sound wave output point P102. That is, the first sound wave 550 is made to overlap with the second upper sound wave 651 in the same phase at the upper second wavefront synthesis point P302A. In this way, the combined wave of the first sound wave 550 and the upper second sound wave 651 becomes strongest at the upper second wavefront combining point P302A. In FIG. 40(a), a dotted line 451 indicates a line passing through the upper second sound wave output point P102 and having a constant value on the y-axis.

When the leading plane of the first sound wave 550 intersects the leading plane of the upper second sound wave 651 at the upper second wave plane synthesis point P302A, the leading plane of the first sound wave 550 is aligned with the leading plane of the lower second sound wave 652. , the y They intersect at the lower second wavefront synthesis point P302B where the y-axis value is smaller than the axis value. In this case, the composite wave of the two waves of the first sound wave 550 and the lower second sound wave 652 is strongest at the lower second wavefront synthesis point P302B. In FIG. 40(a), a dotted line 452 indicates a line passing through the lower second sound wave output point P103 and having a constant y-axis value.

Note that, in the actual speaker device 400, the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 output from the first opening portion 412 to the outside of the housing 401 and the second sound wave 550 output from the second opening portion 413 to the outside of the housing 401 have a leading surface. The leading surface of the sound wave 650 is a plane view of the speaker device 400 viewed from one direction of the central axis 450, and is located above the intermediate line between the outer circumference and the inner circumference of the annular second opening portion 413. They intersect at the outer circular wavefront synthesis line (the radius of the circle formed by the wavefront synthesis line is larger than the radius of the circle formed by the intermediate line). In this case, the first sound wave 550 and the second sound wave 650 reinforce each other along the above-described wavefront synthesis line.

In the control for realizing the directivity of diffusion, two sound waves, the first sound wave 550 and the second upper sound wave 651, are made in phase at the upper second wave front synthesis point P302A, and the first sound wave is set at the lower second wave front synthesis point P302B. 550 and the lower second sound wave 652 have the same phase, the leading plane of the first sound wave 550 intersects the leading plane of the upper second sound wave 651 at the upper second wave plane synthesis point P302A, The sub CPU 201 controls the sound output timing of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 and the timing of the sound generation of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 so that the leading plane of the first sound wave 550 intersects the leading plane of the lower second sound wave 652 at the second wave front synthesis point P302B. Control for adjusting the output timing of the second sound wave 650 by the two-speaker unit 600 is performed. In other words, the first sound wave 550 arrives at the upper second wave front synthesis point P302A at the same time as the upper second sound wave 651, and the first sound wave 550 arrives at the lower second wave front synthesis point P302B at the same time as the lower second sound wave 652. Thus, the sub CPU 201 performs control for adjusting the sound output timing of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 and the sound output timing of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600 .

A specific example of adjusting the sound output timing of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 and the sound output timing of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600 will be described with reference to FIG. 40(b). In the description with reference to FIG. 40(b), the upper second sound wave 651 of the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 will be described. It holds. Here, the distance between the first sound wave output point P101 and the second sound wave output point P104 is E (mm), and the distance between the first sound wave output point P101 and the upper second sound wave output point P102 is D (mm). .

A point where the distance in the x-axis direction from the first sound wave output point P101 is G (mm) and the distance in the y-axis direction from the first sound wave output point P101 is H (mm) is defined as the first sound wave 550 is the above-mentioned upper second wave front synthesis point P302A at which the leading plane of the upper second sound wave 651 intersects the leading plane of .

The distance (the distance between the second sound wave output point P104 and the upper second sound wave output point P102) R (mm) that the second sound wave 650 travels until it is output to the outside of the housing 401 is R=(D ² +E ² ) becomes ^1/2 .

The second sound wave 650 (upper second sound wave 651) travels from being output to the outside of the housing 401 until it reaches the upper second wave front synthesis point P302A (the upper second sound wave output point P102 and the upper second wave front The distance U (mm) from the combined point P302A is U=(G ² +(HD) ² ) ^1/2 . W (mm) is W=(G ² +H ² ) ^1/2 . Therefore, outside the housing 401, the first sound wave 550 is W−U=((G ² +H ² ) ^1/2 −(G ² +(H−D) ² ) ¹ than the upper second sound wave 651. ^{/ 2} ) progress more minutes. Therefore, the distance Z (mm) by which the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 travels in the positive direction of the x-axis from the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651 is Z=(G ² +H ² ) ^1/2 −(G ² +(HD) ² ) ^1/2 .

In order for the leading plane of the first sound wave 550 to intersect the leading plane of the upper second sound wave 651 at the upper second wave plane synthesis point P302A, the first sound wave 550 is less than the second sound wave 650 when RZ<0. also needs to progress by Z−R=((G ² +H ² ) ^1/2 −(G ² +(HD) ² ) ^1/2 )−(D ² +E ² ) ^1/2 more. Therefore, assuming that the speed of sound is v (mm/ms), a delay time TB1 for delaying the output timing of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600 from the output timing of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 is (ms) is TB1=(Z−R)/v=(((G ² +H ² ) ^1/2 −(G ² +(H−D) ² ) ^1/2 )−(D ² +E ² ) ^{1 /2} )/v.

When R-Z>0, the second sound wave 650 is higher than the first sound wave 550 by R-Z=(D ² +E ² ) ^1/2 −((G ² +H ² ) ^1/2 −(G ² +(H -D) ² ) ^1/2 ) need to progress more. Therefore, the delay time TB2 (ms) for delaying the sound output timing of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 from the sound output timing of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600 is TB2=(R−Z )/v=((D ² +E ² ) ^1/2 -((G ² +H ² ) ^1/2 -(G ² +(HD) ² ) ^1/2 ))/v.

When RZ=0, the distance traveled by the first sound wave 550 and the distance traveled by the second sound wave 650 should be the same. Therefore, the sound output timing of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 and the sound output timing of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600 are set to be the same timing.

Note that in the above-described control related to the directivity of diffusion, the leading plane of the first sound wave 550 at a certain wavelength intersects the leading plane of the upper second sound wave 651 at the upper second wave plane synthesis point P302A. When the time difference between the output timing of the first sound wave 550 by the speaker unit 500 and the output timing of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600 is TB1 when RZ<0, and when RZ>0 is TB2, and 0 (no time difference) when RZ=0, then the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 at other wavelengths is the same at the upper second wave front synthesis point P302A, and the upper second sound wave The time difference for intersecting the leading surface of 651 is TB1 when RZ<0, TB2 when RZ>0, and 0 when RZ=0 (no time difference). become. Therefore, the same time difference can be used at each wavelength in the bands of the first sound wave 550 and the second sound wave 650 .

[10.2.2.4. Ordinary directivity control]
37(c), the sub CPU 201 causes the first speaker unit 500 to emit the first sound wave 550, but the second speaker unit 600 causes the second sound wave 650 to be emitted. Perform control to prevent sound from being output.

[10.2.3. Circuit example related to directivity control]
An example of a circuit related to control of each directivity shown in FIGS. 37(a) to (c) will be described below with reference to FIG. In the circuit example of FIG. 41, the second gaming machine has two speaker devices 400 of FIG. It is arranged for a player who plays a game on the machine. The first speaker unit 500 and the second speaker unit 600 of the speaker device 400 on the left side are referred to as the first speaker unit (left) 500L and the second speaker unit (left) 600L, and the first speaker of the speaker device 400 on the right side. Unit 500 and second speaker unit 600 are referred to as first speaker unit (right) 500R and second speaker unit (right) 600R.

In the second game machine, control is performed to set the directivity of the speaker device 400 to the convergent directivity of FIG. 37(b), the directivity of the speaker device 400 is changed to the diffusion directivity shown in FIG. control to normal directivity. The first effect is directed mainly to the player who is playing the game on the second gaming machine. Examples of the first effect are the effect suggesting the winning of the bonus combination and the effect of pushing order navigation in the AT state. etc. can be mentioned. The second effect is mainly directed to people other than the player who is near the second gaming machine. Notification effects for the purpose of appealing to other people by the game parlor, such as a notification effect of being in an AT state, and the like, can be mentioned. The third effect is directed to people around the second gaming machine, such as players playing games on the second gaming machine and people other than the players near the second gaming machine. Examples of the third effect include a notification effect that the payout of medals is in excellent condition, a notification effect that the bonus game state is in effect, and a notification effect that the AT state is reached. Although specific examples of the second effect and the third effect overlap, for example, directivity of diffusion is used for the notification effect that the payout of medals is in excellent condition, and the notification effect that the bonus game state is in effect. And normal directivity is used for the notification effect of being in the AT state.

In the circuit example shown in FIG. is the same as the time from when the second speaker unit 600 outputs the second sound wave 650.

[10.2.3.1. Directivity control of convergence]
In convergence directivity control, as described with reference to FIG. The sound output timing of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 is delayed by a delay time TA ( ms).

The sub CPU 201 outputs to the control line 900 a control signal related to the amplification degree set to the first amplifier 800 and a control signal related to the amplification degree set to the second amplifier 801 . Thereby, the amplification degrees are set for the first amplifier 800 and the second amplifier 801 . Specifically, based on the volume switch (not shown) provided in the sub-control circuit 200 or the volume selected by the player (five levels), the sub-CPU 201 adjusts the selected volume. It is output to the first amplifier 800 and the second amplifier 801 as the degree of amplification. Also, when the sub CPU 201 is activated (when the power is turned on), a predetermined amplification degree is output and set, and the audio data output by the sub CPU 201 to the data lines 901 and 904 includes the amplification degree and is transmitted. may

The sub CPU 201 generates second audio data (left) for the speaker device 400 on the left side as viewed from the front of the second gaming machine, and second audio data for the speaker device 400 on the right side when the second gaming machine is viewed from the front. data (right) is output to the data line 904 . The second audio data (left) output to the data line 904 is amplified by the second amplifier 801, and the second amplifier 801 transmits the second audio signal (left) obtained by amplification or the like from the channel ch0 to the signal line (speaker line). L) 905 , and the second speaker unit (left) 600 L outputs a second sound wave 650 from the second audio signal (left) output to the signal line 905 . The second audio data (right) output to the data line 904 is amplified by the second amplifier 801, and the second amplifier 801 transmits the second audio signal (right) obtained by amplification or the like from the channel ch1 to the signal line ( 906 , and the second speaker unit (right) 600 R outputs a second sound wave 650 from the second audio signal (right) output to the signal line 906 .

After outputting the second audio data (left) and the second audio data (right) to the data line 904, the sub CPU 201 outputs the delay time TA (ms) in the model explained in FIG. After the delay sample number SampleA has passed, the first audio data (left) for the left speaker device 400 when viewed from the front of the second gaming machine and the first audio data (left) for the right speaker device 400 when viewed from the front of the second gaming machine is output to the data line 901 . The first audio data (left) is the same audio data as the second audio data (left), and the first audio data (right) is the same audio data as the second audio data (right). Here, the delay sample number SampleA is SampleA=TA×Rate, where the sampling rate is Rate (sample/ms). Note that in a 48 kHz system, Rate=48 (sample/ms). The first audio data (left) output to the data line 901 is amplified by the first amplifier 800. The first amplifier 800 transmits the first audio signal (left) obtained by amplification or the like from the channel CH0 to the signal line (speaker line). L) 902 , and the first speaker unit (left) 500 L outputs the first sound wave 550 from the first audio signal (left) output to the signal line 902 . The first audio data (right) output to the data line 901 is amplified by the first amplifier 800, and the first amplifier 800 transmits the first audio signal (right) obtained by amplification or the like from the channel CH1 to the signal line ( 903 , and the first speaker unit (right) 500 R outputs a first sound wave 550 from the first audio signal (right) output to the signal line 903 .

With the above processing, the sound output of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit (left) 500L and the first speaker unit (right) 500R is changed by the second speaker unit (left) 600L and the second speaker unit (right) 600R. The output of the second sound wave 650 is delayed by the delay time TA.

[10.2.3.2. Diffusion directivity control]
In the diffusion directivity control, as described with reference to FIG. The first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 is generated so as to intersect the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651 at the upper second wave front synthesis point P302A, where the y-axis value is larger than the y-axis value of the two-sound wave output point P102. The sound output timing and the sound output timing of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600 are adjusted.

In the model described with reference to FIG. 40(b), the following is the case when RZ<0. The sub CPU 201 outputs the first audio data (left) and the first audio data (right) to the data line 901 . The first audio data (left) output to the data line 901 is amplified by the first amplifier 800, and the first amplifier 800 outputs the first audio signal (left) obtained by amplification or the like from the channel CH0 to the signal line 902. Then, the first speaker unit (left) 500L outputs the first sound wave 550 from the first audio signal (left) output to the signal line 902 . The first audio data (right) output to the data line 901 is amplified by the first amplifier 800, and the first audio signal (right) obtained by amplification or the like is transferred from the channel CH1 to the signal line 903. , and the first speaker unit (right) 500 R outputs a first sound wave 550 from the first audio signal (right) output to the signal line 903 .

After outputting the first audio data (left) and the first audio data (right) to the data line 901, the sub CPU 201 outputs the delay time TB1 (ms) in the model described in FIG. After the delay sample number SampleB1 has elapsed, the second audio data (left) and the second audio data (right) are output to the data line 904 . The second audio data (left) is the same audio data as the first audio data (left), and the second audio data (right) is the same audio data as the first audio data (right). Here, the delay sample number SampleB1 is SampleB1=TB1×Rate, where the sampling rate is Rate (sample/ms). The second audio data (left) output to the data line 904 is amplified by the second amplifier 801, and the second amplifier 801 outputs the second audio signal (left) obtained by amplification or the like from the channel ch0 to the signal line 905. Then, the second speaker unit (left) 600L outputs a second sound wave 650 from the second audio signal (left) output to the signal line 905 . The second audio data (right) output to the data line 904 is amplified by the second amplifier 801, and the second audio signal (right) obtained by amplification or the like is transferred from the channel ch1 to the signal line 906. , and the second speaker unit (right) 600 R outputs a second sound wave 650 from the second audio signal (right) output to the signal line 906 .

With the above processing, the sound output of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit (left) 600L and the second speaker unit (right) 600R is changed by the first speaker unit (left) 500L and the first speaker unit (right) 500R. The output of the first sound wave 550 is delayed by a delay time TB1.

In the model described with reference to FIG. 40(b), when RZ>0, the following is true. The sub CPU 201 outputs the second audio data (left) and the second audio data (right) to the data line 904 . The second audio data (left) output to the data line 904 is amplified by the second amplifier 801, and the second amplifier 801 outputs the second audio signal (left) obtained by amplification or the like from the channel ch0 to the signal line 905. Then, the second speaker unit (left) 600L outputs a second sound wave 650 from the second audio signal (left) output to the signal line 905 . The second audio data (right) output to the data line 904 is amplified by the second amplifier 801, and the second audio signal (right) obtained by amplification or the like is transferred from the channel ch1 to the signal line 906. , and the second speaker unit (right) 600 R outputs a second sound wave 650 from the second audio signal (right) output to the signal line 906 .

After outputting the second audio data (left) and the second audio data (right) to the data line 904, the sub CPU 201 outputs the delay time corresponding to the above delay time TB2 (ms) in the model described in FIG. 40(b). After the delay sample number SampleB2 has elapsed, the first audio data (left) and the first audio data (right) are output to the data line 901 . The first audio data (left) is the same audio data as the second audio data (left), and the first audio data (right) is the same audio data as the second audio data (right). Here, the delay sample number SampleB2 is SampleB2=TB2×Rate, where the sampling rate is Rate (sample/ms). The first audio data (left) output to the data line 901 is amplified by the first amplifier 800, and the first amplifier 800 outputs the first audio signal (left) obtained by amplification or the like from the channel CH0 to the signal line 902. Then, the first speaker unit (left) 500L outputs the first sound wave 550 from the first audio signal (left) output to the signal line 902 . The first audio data (right) output to the data line 901 is amplified by the first amplifier 800, and the first audio signal (right) obtained by amplification or the like is transferred from the channel CH1 to the signal line 903. , and the first speaker unit (right) 500 R outputs a first sound wave 550 from the first audio signal (right) output to the signal line 903 .

With the above processing, the sound output of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit (left) 500L and the first speaker unit (right) 500R is changed by the second speaker unit (left) 600L and the second speaker unit (right) 600R. The output of the second sound wave 650 is delayed by the delay time TB2.

In the model described using FIG. 40(b), the following is the case when RZ=0. The sub CPU 201 outputs the first audio data (left) and the first audio data (right) to the data line 901 . The first audio data (left) output to the data line 901 is amplified by the first amplifier 800, and the first amplifier 800 outputs the first audio signal (left) obtained by amplification or the like from the channel CH0 to the signal line 902. Then, the first speaker unit (left) 500L outputs the first sound wave 550 from the first audio signal (left) output to the signal line 902 . The first audio data (right) output to the data line 901 is amplified by the first amplifier 800, and the first audio signal (right) obtained by amplification or the like is transferred from the channel CH1 to the signal line 903. , and the first speaker unit (right) 500 R outputs a first sound wave 550 from the first audio signal (right) output to the signal line 903 .

The sub CPU 201 outputs the second audio data (left) and the second audio data (right) at the same timing as when the first audio data (left) and the first audio data (right) are output to the data line 904. Output to data line 904 . The second audio data (left) is the same audio data as the first audio data (left), and the second audio data (right) is the same audio data as the first audio data (right). The second audio data (left) output to the data line 904 is amplified by the second amplifier 801, and the second amplifier 801 outputs the second audio signal (left) obtained by amplification or the like from the channel ch0 to the signal line 905. Then, the second speaker unit (left) 600L outputs a second sound wave 650 from the second audio signal (left) output to the signal line 905 . The second audio data (right) output to the data line 904 is amplified by the second amplifier 801, and the second audio signal (right) obtained by amplification or the like is transferred from the channel ch1 to the signal line 906. , and the second speaker unit (right) 600 R outputs a second sound wave 650 from the second audio signal (right) output to the signal line 906 .

Through the above processing, the first sound wave 550 is emitted by the first speaker unit (left) 500L and the first speaker unit (right) 500R, and the sound is emitted by the second speaker unit (left) 600L and the second speaker unit (right) 600R. The second sound wave 650 is emitted at the same timing.

[10.2.3.3. Ordinary directivity control]
In normal directivity control, the second sound wave 650 is not emitted by the second speaker unit 600 and the first sound wave 550 is emitted by the first speaker unit 500 .

The sub CPU 201 outputs the first audio data (left) and the first audio data (right) to the data line 901 . The first audio data (left) output to the data line 901 is amplified by the first amplifier 800, and the first amplifier 800 outputs the first audio signal (left) obtained by amplification or the like from the channel CH0 to the signal line 902. Then, the first speaker unit (left) 500L outputs the first sound wave 550 from the first audio signal (left) output to the signal line 902 . The first audio data (right) output to the data line 901 is amplified by the first amplifier 800, and the first audio signal (right) obtained by amplification or the like is transferred from the channel CH1 to the signal line 903. , and the first speaker unit (right) 500 R outputs a first sound wave 550 from the first audio signal (right) output to the signal line 903 .

The second audio data (left) same as the first audio data (left) and the second audio data (right) same as the first audio data (right) are output to the data line 904 by the sub CPU 201. do not have. As a result, the second sound wave 650 is not emitted by the second speaker unit 600 .

[10.2.4. Modified Example 1 of Circuit Related to Directivity Control]
Modification 1 of the circuits related to control of each directivity shown in FIGS. 37A to 37C will be described below with reference to FIG. In Modification 1 of the circuit of FIG. 42, the second gaming machine has one speaker device 400 of FIG. ing.

In the circuit example of FIG. 42, the time from when the amplifier 810 outputs the audio signal to the signal line 912 until the first sound wave 550 is emitted by the first speaker unit 500, is the same as the time from when the second speaker unit 600 outputs the second sound wave 650.

[10.2.4.1. Directivity control of convergence]
The sub CPU 201 outputs a control signal related to the amplification degree set in the amplifier 810, a control signal related to the first delay sample number corresponding to the delay time for delaying the audio data output from the channel Ch0, and the audio data output from the channel Ch1. A control signal related to the second delay sample number corresponding to the delay time for delaying is output to the control line 910 . Thereby, the amplification degree, the number of first delay samples, and the number of second delay samples are set in the amplifier 810 .

In the convergence directivity control in the model explained using FIG. The first delay sample number and the second delay sample number are set in the amplifier 810 to be large. Here, the delay sample number SampleA is SampleA=TA×Rate, where the sampling rate is Rate (sample/ms).

The sub CPU 201 outputs audio data to the data line 911 . The audio data output to the data line 911 is input to the amplifier 810, and the amplifier 810 amplifies the input audio data.

The amplifier 810 delays the audio signal obtained by amplification or the like by the number of second delay samples, and outputs the audio signal to the signal line 913 from the channel Ch1. The second speaker unit 600 emits a second sound wave 650 from the audio signal output to the signal line 913 . Also, the amplifier 810 delays the audio signal obtained by amplification or the like by the number of first delay samples, and outputs the audio signal from the channel Ch0 to the signal line 912 . The output timing of the audio signal from the channel Ch0 to the signal line 912 is delayed from the output timing of the audio signal from the channel Ch1 to the signal line 913 by the delay sample number SampleA corresponding to the delay time TA. The first speaker unit 500 emits a first sound wave 550 from the audio signal output to the signal line 912 . As a result of this processing, the output of the first sound wave 550 from the first speaker unit 500 is delayed from the output of the second sound wave 650 from the second speaker unit 600 by the delay time TA.

[10.2.4.2. Diffusion directivity control]
Diffusion directivity control in the model described with reference to FIG. 40(b) is as follows when RZ<0. The sub CPU 201 outputs the first delay sample number and the second delay sample number to the amplifier 810 so that the second delay sample number is larger than the first delay sample number by the delay sample number SampleB1 corresponding to the delay time TB1. set. Here, the delay sample number SampleB1 is SampleB1=TB1×Rate, where the sampling rate is Rate (sample/ms).

The sub CPU 201 outputs audio data to the data line 911 . The audio data output to the data line 911 is input to the amplifier 810, and the amplifier 810 amplifies the input audio data.

The amplifier 810 delays the audio signal obtained by amplification or the like by the number of first delay samples, and outputs the delayed audio signal from the channel Ch0 to the signal line 912 . The first speaker unit 500 emits a first sound wave 550 from the audio signal output to the signal line 912 . Also, the amplifier 810 delays the audio signal obtained by amplification or the like by the number of second delay samples, and outputs the audio signal to the signal line 913 from the channel Ch1. The output timing of the audio signal from the channel Ch1 to the signal line 913 is delayed from the output timing of the audio signal from the channel Ch0 to the signal line 912 by the delay sample number SampleB1 corresponding to the delay time TB1. The second speaker unit 600 emits a second sound wave 650 from the audio signal output to the signal line 913 . As a result of this processing, the output of the second sound wave 650 from the second speaker unit 600 is delayed from the output of the first sound wave 550 from the first speaker unit 500 by the delay time TB1.

In the model described using FIG. 40(b), when RZ>0, the following is true. The sub CPU 201 outputs the first delay sample number and the second delay sample number to the amplifier 810 so that the first delay sample number is larger than the second delay sample number by the delay sample number SampleB2 corresponding to the delay time TB2. set. Here, the delay sample number SampleB2 is SampleB2=TB2×Rate, where the sampling rate is Rate (sample/ms).

The sub CPU 201 outputs audio data to the data line 911 . The audio data output to the data line 911 is input to the amplifier 810, and the amplifier 810 amplifies the input audio data.

The amplifier 810 delays the audio signal obtained by amplification or the like by the number of second delay samples, and outputs the audio signal to the signal line 913 from the channel Ch1. The second speaker unit 600 emits a second sound wave 650 from the audio signal output to the signal line 913 . Also, the amplifier 810 delays the audio signal obtained by amplification or the like by the number of first delay samples, and outputs the audio signal from the channel Ch0 to the signal line 912 . The output timing of the audio signal from the channel Ch0 to the signal line 912 is delayed from the output timing of the audio signal from the channel Ch1 to the signal line 913 by the delay sample number SampleB2 corresponding to the delay time TB2. The first speaker unit 500 emits a first sound wave 550 from the audio signal output to the signal line 912 . By this processing, the output of the first sound wave 550 from the first speaker unit 500 is delayed from the output of the second sound wave 650 from the second speaker unit 600 by the delay time TB2.

In the model explained using FIG. 40(b), when RZ=0, the following is obtained. The sub CPU 201 sets the same number of the first delay sample number and the second delay sample number in the amplifier 810 .

The sub CPU 201 outputs audio data to the data line 911 . The audio data output to the data line 911 is input to the amplifier 810, and the amplifier 810 amplifies the input audio data.

The amplifier 810 delays the audio signal obtained by amplification or the like by the number of first delay samples, and outputs the delayed audio signal from the channel Ch0 to the signal line 912 . The first speaker unit 500 emits a first sound wave 550 from the audio signal output to the signal line 912 . Also, the amplifier 810 delays the audio signal obtained by amplification or the like by the number of second delay samples, and outputs the audio signal to the signal line 913 from the channel Ch1. The output timing of the audio signal from the channel Ch1 to the signal line 913 is the same timing as the output timing of the audio signal from the channel Ch0 to the signal line 912 . The second speaker unit 600 emits a second sound wave 650 from the audio signal output to the signal line 913 . As a result of this process, the sound output of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 and the sound output of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600 are performed at the same timing.

[10.2.4.3. Ordinary directivity control]
In normal directivity control, the sub CPU 201 outputs audio data to the data line 911 . The audio data output to the data line 911 is input to the amplifier 810, the amplifier 810 amplifies the input audio data, and the amplifier 810 outputs the audio signal obtained by amplification or the like from the channel Ch0 to the signal line 912. . The first speaker unit 500 emits a first sound wave 550 from the audio signal output to the signal line 912 . The amplifier 810 does not output the audio signal obtained by amplification or the like from the channel Ch1 to the signal line 913, and the second sound wave 650 is not emitted by the second speaker unit 600. FIG.

[10.2.5. Modified Example 2 of Circuit Related to Directivity Control]
Modification 2 of the circuits related to control of each directivity shown in FIGS. 37A to 37C will be described below with reference to FIG. In the modification 2 of the circuit of FIG. 43, the second gaming machine has one speaker device 400 of FIG. ing.

In the circuit example of FIG. 43, the time from when the sub CPU 201 outputs the audio data to the data line 921 to when it is input to the first delay circuit 851 and the time after the sub CPU 201 outputs the audio data to the data line 921 is It is assumed that the time until input to the 2-delay circuit 852 is the same. Also, the time from when the first delay circuit 851 outputs the audio data to the data line 923 to when the first sound wave 550 is output by the first speaker unit 500, It is assumed that the time from when the data is output to when the second sound wave 650 is emitted by the second speaker unit 600 is the same.

[10.2.5.1. Directivity control of convergence]
The sub CPU 201 outputs a control signal related to the ON/OFF setting of the switch 830, a control signal related to the first delay sample number corresponding to the delay time for delaying the audio data in the first delay circuit 851, and the audio data to the second delay circuit. Controls the control signal related to the second delay sample number corresponding to the delay time to be delayed by 852, the control signal related to the amplification degree set in the first amplifier 821, and the control signal related to the amplification degree set in the second amplifier 822. Output on line 920 . As a result, the switch 830 is set to ON or OFF, the first delay sample number is set to the first delay circuit 851, the second delay sample number is set to the second delay circuit 852, and the amplification factor is set to the first amplifier 821. is set, and the amplification degree is set for the second amplifier 822 .

In the convergence directivity control in the model described using FIG. 39(b), the sub CPU 201 sets the switch 830 to ON. Further, the sub CPU 201 sets the first delay sample number in the first delay circuit 851 so that the first delay sample number is larger than the second delay sample number by the delay sample number SampleA corresponding to the delay time TA. and set the second delay sample number in the second delay circuit 852 . Here, the delay sample number SampleA is SampleA=TA×Rate, where the sampling rate is Rate (sample/ms).

The sub CPU 201 outputs audio data to the data line 921 . The audio data output to the data line 921 is input to the first delay circuit 851 and input to the second delay circuit 852 from the data line 922 via the switch 830 .

The second delay circuit 852 delays the input audio data by the number of second delay samples and outputs the delayed data to the data line 924 . The audio data output to the data line 924 is amplified by the second amplifier 822, the second amplifier 822 outputs the audio signal obtained by amplification or the like to the signal line 926, and the second speaker unit 600 outputs to the signal line 926. A second sound wave 650 is emitted from the generated audio signal. Also, the first delay circuit 851 delays the input audio data by the number of first delay samples and outputs the delayed data to the data line 923 . The output timing of the audio data from the first delay circuit 851 to the data line 923 is delayed from the output timing of the audio data from the second delay circuit 852 to the data line 924 by the delay sample number SampleA corresponding to the delay time TA. The audio data output to the data line 923 is amplified by the first amplifier 821, the first amplifier 821 outputs the audio signal obtained by amplification or the like to the signal line 925, and the first speaker unit 500 outputs to the signal line 925. A first sound wave 550 is emitted from the generated audio signal. As a result of this processing, the output of the first sound wave 550 from the first speaker unit 500 is delayed from the output of the second sound wave 650 from the second speaker unit 600 by the delay time TA.

[10.2.5.2. Diffusion directivity control]
Diffusion directivity control in the model described with reference to FIG. 40(b) is as follows when RZ<0. The sub CPU 201 turns on the switch 830 . Further, the sub CPU 201 sets the first delay sample number in the first delay circuit 851 so that the second delay sample number is larger than the first delay sample number by the delay sample number SampleB1 corresponding to the delay time TB1. and set the second delay sample number in the second delay circuit 852 . Here, the delay sample number SampleB1 is SampleB1=TB1×Rate, where the sampling rate is Rate (sample/ms).

The sub CPU 201 outputs audio data to the data line 921 . The audio data output to the data line 921 is input to the first delay circuit 851 and input to the second delay circuit 852 from the data line 922 via the switch 830 .

The first delay circuit 851 delays the input audio data by the number of first delay samples and outputs the delayed data to the data line 923 . The audio data output to the data line 923 is amplified by the first amplifier 821, the first amplifier 821 outputs the audio signal obtained by amplification or the like to the signal line 925, and the first speaker unit 500 outputs to the signal line 925. A first sound wave 550 is emitted from the generated audio signal. Also, the second delay circuit 852 delays the input audio data by the number of second delay samples and outputs the delayed data to the data line 924 . The output timing of the audio data from the second delay circuit 852 to the data line 924 is delayed from the output timing of the audio data from the first delay circuit 851 to the data line 923 by the delay sample number SampleB1 corresponding to the delay time TB1. The audio data output to the data line 924 is amplified by the second amplifier 822, the second amplifier 822 outputs the audio signal obtained by amplification or the like to the signal line 926, and the second speaker unit 600 outputs to the signal line 926. A second sound wave 650 is emitted from the generated audio signal. As a result of this processing, the output of the second sound wave 650 from the second speaker unit 600 is delayed from the output of the first sound wave 550 from the first speaker unit 500 by the delay time TB1.

In the model described using FIG. 40(b), when RZ>0, the following is true. The sub CPU 201 turns on the switch 830 . Further, the sub CPU 201 sets the first delay sample number in the first delay circuit 851 so that the first delay sample number is larger than the second delay sample number by the delay sample number SampleB2 corresponding to the delay time TB2, A second delay sample number is set in the second delay circuit 852 . Here, the delay sample number SampleB2 is SampleB2=TB2×Rate, where the sampling rate is Rate (sample/ms).

The sub CPU 201 outputs audio data to the data line 921 . The audio data output to the data line 921 is input to the first delay circuit 851 and input to the second delay circuit 852 from the data line 922 via the switch 830 .

The second delay circuit 852 delays the input audio data by the number of second delay samples and outputs the delayed data to the data line 924 . The audio data output to the data line 924 is amplified by the second amplifier 822, the second amplifier 822 outputs the audio signal obtained by amplification or the like to the signal line 926, and the second speaker unit 600 outputs to the signal line 926. A second sound wave 650 is emitted from the generated audio signal. Also, the first delay circuit 851 delays the input audio data by the number of first delay samples and outputs the delayed data to the data line 923 . The output timing of the audio data from the first delay circuit 851 to the data line 923 is delayed from the output timing of the audio data from the second delay circuit 852 to the data line 924 by the delay sample number SampleB2 corresponding to the delay time TB2. The audio data output to the data line 923 is amplified by the first amplifier 821, the first amplifier 821 outputs the audio signal obtained by amplification or the like to the signal line 925, and the first speaker unit 500 outputs to the signal line 925. A first sound wave 550 is emitted from the generated audio signal. By this processing, the output of the first sound wave 550 from the first speaker unit 500 is delayed from the output of the second sound wave 650 from the second speaker unit 600 by the delay time TB2.

In the model explained using FIG. 40(b), when RZ=0, the following is obtained. The sub CPU 201 turns on the switch 830 . Also, the sub CPU 201 sets the first delay sample number in the first delay circuit 851 and sets the second delay sample number equal to the first delay sample number in the second delay circuit 852 .

The sub CPU 201 outputs audio data to the data line 921 . The audio data output to the data line 921 is input to the first delay circuit 851 and input to the second delay circuit 852 from the data line 922 via the switch 830 .

The first delay circuit 851 delays the input audio data by the number of first delay samples and outputs the delayed data to the data line 923 . The audio data output to the data line 923 is amplified by the first amplifier 821, the first amplifier 821 outputs the audio signal obtained by amplification or the like to the signal line 925, and the first speaker unit 500 outputs to the signal line 925. A first sound wave 550 is emitted from the generated audio signal. Also, the second delay circuit 852 delays the input audio data by the number of second delay samples and outputs the delayed data to the data line 924 . The output timing of the audio data from the second delay circuit 852 to the data line 924 is the same timing as the output timing of the audio data from the first delay circuit 851 to the data line 923 . The audio data output to the data line 924 is amplified by the second amplifier 822, the second amplifier 822 outputs the audio signal obtained by amplification or the like to the signal line 926, and the second speaker unit 600 outputs to the signal line 926. A second sound wave 650 is emitted from the generated audio signal. As a result of this process, the sound output of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 and the sound output of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600 are performed at the same timing.

[10.2.5.3. Ordinary directivity control]
In normal directivity control, the sub CPU 201 sets the switch 830 to OFF. The sub CPU 201 outputs audio data to the data line 921 , and the audio data output to the data line 921 is input to the first delay circuit 851 . The first delay circuit 851 delays the input audio data and outputs it to the data line 923 . The audio data output to the data line 923 is amplified by the first amplifier 821, the first amplifier 821 outputs the audio signal obtained by amplification or the like to the signal line 925, and the first speaker unit 500 outputs to the signal line 925. A first sound wave 550 is emitted from the generated audio signal.

On the other hand, since the switch 830 is off, no audio data is input to the second delay circuit 852 . As a result, the second sound wave 650 is not emitted by the second speaker unit 600 .

[10.3. Effect of Second Gaming Machine]
According to the second gaming machine described above, the speaker device 400 having the structure in which the first speaker unit 500 and the second speaker unit 600 are arranged on the central axis 450 has a plurality of speaker units arranged in an array. Compared to the case where the second game machine is used, it is less likely to be restricted by the size in the horizontal direction or the size in the vertical direction. Using such a speaker device 400, the sound output timing of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 is adjusted so that the first sound wave 550 and the second sound wave 650 arrive simultaneously at the wavefront synthesis location outside the housing 401. A desired directivity can be achieved in the speaker device 400 by a simple control that only adjusts the sound output timing of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600 .

In particular, the output of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 is such that the first sound wave 550 and the second sound wave 650 simultaneously arrive at the first wave front synthesis point P301 on the central axis 450 of the circular opening 411. A converging directivity can be realized in the speaker device 400 by a simple control of delaying the sound timing from the sound output timing of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600 .

In addition, the first sound wave 550 and the second sound wave 650 are the inner circumference circle and the outer circumference of the second opening part 413 in plan view when the first opening part 412 and the second opening part 413 are viewed from one direction of the central axis 450 . At the same time, on a circular wavefront synthesis line (the upper second wavefront synthesis point P302A and the lower second wavefront synthesis point P302B are present on the wavefront synthesis line) outside the intermediate line between Diffusion in the speaker device 400 is achieved by a simple control of adjusting the sound output timing of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 and the sound output timing of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600. Directivity can be realized.

In addition, with a simple control such that the second sound wave 600 is not emitted by the second speaker unit 600 and the first sound wave 550 is emitted by the first speaker unit 500, the normal directivity of the speaker device 400 can be obtained. can achieve

In addition, the directivity of convergence in the execution of the first effect mainly for the player who is playing the game on the second gaming machine, such as the effect of suggesting winning of the bonus role, the effect of pushing order navigation in the AT state, etc. is used. As a result, the player can concentrate on the first performance, which the player wants to enjoy with concentration, without being disturbed by other people in the vicinity of the second gaming machine, such as being known and peeped. You can enjoy the first performance with

In addition, a notification effect that the payout of medals is excellent, a notification effect that the bonus game state, a notification effect that it is in the AT state, etc. The directivity of diffusion is used for the execution of the second effect, such as the effect aimed at appealing to people, mainly directed to other people other than the players near the second gaming machine. As a result, the game shop can effectively transmit the content of the second effect intended to appeal to other people other than the players near the second game machine. It can be expected to improve the operating rate of the game machine of 2.

In addition, the player who is playing the game with the second gaming machine and the second gaming machine are provided with a notification effect that the medal payout is excellent, a bonus game state notification effect, and an AT state notification effect. Ordinary directivity is used to implement the third effect directed to other people other than the player near the gaming machine. As a result, the content of the third effect can be transmitted to all persons including players near the second gaming machine.

[10.4. Modification of Second Game Machine]
In the second game machine described above with reference to FIGS. 36 to 43, the speaker device 400 has converging directivity in FIG. Although it has been described that the three directivity of diffusion in c) is realized, it is not limited to this. For example, in addition to realizing these three directivities, the speaker device 400 does not emit the first sound wave 550, but emits the second sound wave 650 to the outside of the housing 401 through the second opening 413. The directivity of the sound waves from the speaker device 400 that spreads in a substantially donut shape may be realized. Moreover, the speaker device 400 may realize some of these four directivities.

Further, in the convergence directivity control of FIG. 39(a), the first sound wave 550 arrives at the first wave-field synthesis point P301 at the same time as the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652. Although the sound output timing of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 is delayed from the sound output timing of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600, it is not limited to this. For example, the first sound wave by the first speaker unit 500 is adjusted so that the first sound wave 550 and the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 arrive at the first wave field synthesis point P301 within a first time difference other than at the same time. The sound output timing of 550 and the sound output timing of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600 may be adjusted. Note that the first time difference and the second time difference, which will be described later, are the maximum time difference at which the human sense of hearing does not recognize two sound waves as separate sounds.

40(a), the first sound wave 550 arrives at the upper second wave front synthesis point P302A at the same time as the upper second wave front synthesis point P302A, and the lower second wave front synthesis point P302B reaches the second upper wave front synthesis point P302B. In addition, the sound output timing of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 and the sound output timing of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600 are such that the first sound wave 550 arrives at the same time as the lower second sound wave 652. , but it is not limited to this. For example, the first sound wave 550 and the upper second sound wave 651 arrive at the upper second wave field synthesis point P302A within a second time difference other than at the same time, and the first sound wave 550 and the lower second sound wave 652 arrive at the lower second wave field synthesis point P302A. The sound output timing of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 and the sound output timing of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600 are adjusted so that they arrive at the wave field synthesis point P302B within a second time difference other than at the same time. You may make it

Also, when the second gaming machine has a plurality of speaker devices 400 of FIG. 36, the plurality of speaker devices 400 may be controlled to have different directivities during the same period. For example, when the second gaming machine has two speaker devices 400 of FIG. 36, one is controlled to converge directivity and the other is controlled to diverge directivity.

Also, when the second gaming machine has a plurality of speaker devices 400 of FIG. can be

[11. Third gaming machine]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 44 to 59, specifications regarding setting change and setting confirmation of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described as a "third game machine". 44 to 59, all of the configurations of the pachi-slot machine 1 that are not described in FIGS. 44 to 59 are applied to the embodiments described in FIGS.

[11-1. command]
Hereinafter, the initialization command (initialization command described in [4-9. Command] etc.) and the periodic command (also referred to as "no operation command") transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 There is.), [11. 3rd gaming machine] will be mainly described, and other parts will be described briefly or omitted. Note that the periodic command (no-operation command) is the above [6-2. Periodic Interrupt Processing], etc., it is described as an input status command.

[11-1-1. Configuration of commands]
Configurations of the initialization command and the periodic command (no-operation command) transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 will be described.

[11-1-1-1. Configuration of Initialization Command]
The configuration of the initialization command transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 44, the initialization command consists of a total of 8 bytes including bit groups D00 to D07 each having a data size of 1 byte (8 bits). The type of the bit group D00 is "ID" for identifying the command, and "initialization command ID (01h)" is set in the bit group D00. The type of the bit group D01 is "set value", and "set values" ("0" to "5") stored in the set value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 are set in the bit group D01. be. The type of the bit group D02 is "status" indicating the status of the initialization command. ' (change/end), '3 (03h)' (confirmation/start), and '4 (04h)' (confirmation/end)) are set. The type of the bit group D03 is "clear type" indicating the type of clearing, and the bit group D03 contains values indicating the type of clearing ("0 (00h)" (none), "1 (01h)" (when changed) , "2 (02h)" (RWM abnormal)) are set. The type of bit groups D04 and D05 is "unused", and a fixed value "00h" is set to bit groups D04 and D05. The type of the bit group D06 is "game state", and "game state" ("normal (01h)", "during BB (02h)", "replay (80h)", etc.) is set in the bit group D06. be. The type of bit group D07 is "sum", and "check code of bit groups D00 to D06" (addition result of bit groups D00 to D06) is set in bit group D07. In addition to the result of addition, the result of subtraction, exclusive OR, or other operation may be set.

In the following description, (1) an initialization command in which "initialization command ID (01h)" is set in bit group D00 and "1" (change/start) is set in bit group D02 is referred to as "initialization command ( (2) An initialization command in which bit group D00 is set to "initialization command ID (01h)" and bit group D02 is set to "2" (change/end) is described as " (3) Initialization command ID (01h) is set in bit group D00 and "3" (confirmation/start) is set in bit group D02. (4) "initialization command ID (01h)" is set in bit group D00, and "4" (confirmation/end) is set in bit group D02. The set initialization command is described as "initialization command (confirm/end)".

Also, (1) is called a second start command, (2) is called a second end command, (3) is called a first start command, and (4) is called a first end command.

Further, the bits D00 are common to the "initialization command ID (01h)", but there is also a method of classifying them by the bit group D00, for example. For example, in the case of "initialization command (change/start)", bit group D00 is "setting change/start (F1h)", and in the case of "initialization command (change/end)", bit group D00 is "setting change/start (F1h)". In the case of "end (F2h)" and "initialization command (confirmation/start)", set to bit group D00 "Confirm setting/end (F4h)" is sufficient.

[11-1-1-2. Configuration of periodic command (no-operation command)]
The configuration of the periodic command (no-operation command) transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 45(a), the periodic command (no-operation command) is composed of a total of 8 bytes including bit groups D10 to D17 each having a data size of 1 byte (8 bits). The type of the bit group D10 is "ID" for identifying the command, and "periodic command ID (80h)" is set in the bit group D10. The types of the bit groups D11 to D13 are "input port P1" to "input port P3", and values are set to the bit groups D11 to D13 according to the input port assignment table shown in FIG. 45(b). The type of bit groups D14 and D15 is "unused", and a fixed value "00h" is set to bit groups D14 and D15. The type of the bit group D16 is "game state", and "game state" ("normal", "during BB", "replay", etc.) is set in the bit group D16. The type of the bit group D17 is "sum", and the "check code of the bit groups D10 to D16" (addition result of the bit groups D10 to D16) is set in the bit group D17. In addition to the result of addition, the result of subtraction, exclusive OR, or other operation may be set.

The input port allocation table for the input port P0 is as shown in FIG. 45(b). The state of the start switch 7S (the ON state while the start lever 7 is being operated or the OFF state while the start lever 7 is not being operated) is set in the bit B7. Bits B6, B5, and B4 store the state (on state or off state) of stop switch SW3 corresponding to stop button 8R of stop switch 8S, and the state (on state or off state) of stop switch SW2 corresponding to stop button 8C. ), the state (ON state or OFF state) of the stop switch SW1 corresponding to the stop button 8L is set. Bits B3 and B2 contain the state of the MAX bet switch (on or off) corresponding to the MAX bet button 6a of the bet switches 6S, and the state of the 1 bet switch (on or off) corresponding to the 1 bet button 6b. ) is set. The state (on state or off state) of the settlement switch 9S is set in the bit B1. Bit B0 is an unused bit.

The input port allocation table for the input port P1 is as shown in FIG. 45(b). Bits B7 to B5 are set with reel index detection results (detection or non-detection) of the index sensors corresponding to the reels 3R, 3C, and 3L. Bits B4 and B3 are set with detection results (detection or non-detection) of medal passing sensors M1 and M2 (not shown), and bit B2 is the state (on state or off state) of the medal passing switch (not shown). is set. Bits B1-B0 are unused bits.

The input port allocation table for the input port P2 is as shown in FIG. 45(b). The state of the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 (ON state or OFF state) is set in bit B7. The state (on state or off state) of the setting key type switch 52 is set in bit B6. The state of the reset switch 53 (on state or off state) is set in bit B5. The state (on state or off state) of a payout passage switch (not shown) for detecting the payout of medals is set in bit B4. The state (on state or off state) of the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S is set in the bit B3. Bits B2-B0 are unused bits.

The input port allocation table of FIG. 45(b) becomes the bit allocation table of the input port storage areas 0 and 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 as it is.

The no-operation command data shown in FIG. 45 is created based on the contents stored in the input port storage areas 0 and 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 .

Input port storage areas 0 and 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 store the port states of the input ports P0 to P2 by the input port check process (S202) of the periodic interrupt process of FIG.

[11-1-2. Command transmission timing]
Transmission timing of commands transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 will be described with reference to FIG.

A communication circuit (not shown) built in the main control circuit 100 of FIG. requires. This transmission time T1 is determined by the number of bits of data in one command and the transmission baud rate (bps) of a communication circuit (not shown), and is, for example, 4.6464 msec (milliseconds).

A communication circuit (not shown) incorporated in the main control circuit 100 of FIG. 3 transmits command data to the sub control circuit 200 based on the transmission period T2. This transmission period T2 consists of the transmission time T1 and a periodical interrupt executed by the interrupt of FIG. For example, 7.8204 msec (milliseconds) or 8.9376 msec (milliseconds) or 8.9376 msec, which is the timing of once every 7 or 8 times of the periodic interrupt processing executed by the interrupt in FIG. milliseconds).

The main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 performs the communication data transmission processing (S204) of the periodic interrupt processing of FIG. In this state, the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 stores the data of commands related to the progress of the game, such as a medal insertion command and a start command corresponding to valid operations by the player or the staff of the game parlor, and the initial data. If none of the change command data is stored, the main control circuit of FIG. The main CPU 101 transmits the no-operation command data to the sub-control circuit 200 via the communication circuit (not shown) based on the transmission cycle T2.

Further, the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 is in the ready state of the communication circuit (not shown) incorporated in the main control circuit 100 of FIG. In this case, a communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 stores command data related to the progress of the game, such as a medal insertion command and a start command corresponding to valid operations by a player or game parlor staff, and initialization commands. If any of the data is stored (if data of a command other than the no-operation command is stored), the stored data of the command other than the no-operation command is built into the main control circuit 100 of FIG. The main CPU 101 transmits command data other than the no-operation command to the sub control circuit 200 via the communication circuit (not shown) based on the transmission cycle T2.

When the communication circuit (not shown) is in a busy state during communication, new command data is set in the communication circuit (not shown) built in the main control circuit 100 of FIG. no.

A communication circuit (not shown) built in the main control circuit 100 of FIG. 3 uses an asynchronous serial communication method as a communication method, but is not limited to this. Alternatively, a parallel communication method can be used.

Data such as an initialization command are once stored in a communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and then sent to the main control circuit of FIG. 100 is stored in a communication circuit (not shown) incorporated in the main RAM 100 and transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200. For example, data such as an initialization command is stored in a communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103. The data may be directly stored in a communication circuit (not shown) incorporated in the main control circuit 100 and transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 without being stored in the main control circuit 100 .

[11-2. State of key-shaped switch for setting (on state or off state)]
The state (off state or on state) of the setting key-shaped switch 52 will be described with reference to FIG.

In the example shown in FIG. 47(a), the staff of the amusement arcade or the like uses the setting key to turn on the setting key-type switch 52 at time TA1, and the setting key-type switch 52 is turned on at time TB1. turn off.

On the main control circuit 100 side, the main CPU 101 checks the state (on state or off state) of the setting key-type switch 52 in the input port check processing (S202) of the periodic interrupt processing in FIG. It is reflected in the input port storage areas 0 and 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 . The timing at which the ON state of the setting key-shaped switch 52 at time TA1 is reflected in the input port storage areas 0 and 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 is determined by the setting key-shaped switch 52 as shown in FIG. 52 is actually turned on, it is time TA2 at which the input port check process (S202) in the periodic interrupt process of FIG. There is a delay of the time from when it is turned on until the input port check process (S202) of the periodic interrupt process of FIG. 32 is performed. Also, the timing at which the OFF state of the setting key-shaped switch 52 at time TB1 is reflected in the input port storage areas 0 and 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 is determined by the setting key 52 as shown in FIG. 47(b). After the type switch 52 is actually turned off, it is time TB2 at which the input port check processing (S202) in the periodic interrupt processing of FIG. There is a delay of the time from when the switch is actually turned off to when the input port check process (S202) of the periodic interrupt process of FIG. 32 is performed. Note that the interrupt cycle T11 is set to 1.1172 msec (milliseconds). Periodic interrupt processing] can also be used.

In the communication data transmission process (S204) of the periodic interrupt process in FIG. 32, the communication data storage area ( (not shown) stores data of a command other than a no-operation command (initialization command, etc.), it is stored with priority over the data of the no-operation command, and the communication circuit (not shown) stores data other than the no-operation command. The command (initialization command, etc.) data is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 based on the transmission period T2. Also, in the communication data transmission process (S204) of the periodic interrupt process in FIG. If the area (not shown) does not store data of a command (initialization command, etc.) other than the no-operation command, the storage contents stored in the input port storage areas 0 and 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 are used. The data of the no-operation command including the state (on state or off state) of the setting key-type switch 52 is stored in the communication circuit (not shown) built in the main control circuit 100 of FIG. 3, and the communication circuit ( (not shown) transmits the data of the no-operation command to the sub-control circuit 200 based on the transmission period T2.

The sub CPU 201 of the sub-control circuit 200 changes the state of the setting key-shaped switch 52 based on the state (on state or off state) of the setting key-shaped switch 52 included in the no-operation command transmitted from the main control circuit 100. (on state or off state). The sub CPU 201 updates the ON state of the setting key-shaped switch 52 reflected in the input port storage areas 0 and 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 at time TA2, as shown in FIG. It is recognized at time TA3, which is delayed by T12 minutes. Further, the sub CPU 201 stores the OFF state of the setting key-shaped switch 52 reflected in the input port storage areas 0 and 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 at time TB2 as shown in FIG. It is recognized at time TB3, which is delayed by time T13. The times T12 and T13 are the time difference caused by the transmission cycle T2 (see FIG. 46) and the transmission time T1 (see FIG. 46), the transmission timing based on the transmission cycle T2 (see FIG. 46), and the periodic interrupt process of FIG. This is due to the time difference from the execution timing of the interrupt based on the interrupt period of .

[11-3. Processing related to setting change and setting confirmation]
Hereinafter, the processing related to setting change and setting confirmation executed by the main control circuit 100 will be described. Here, three patterns from the first pattern to the third pattern will be described as the processing related to setting change and setting confirmation.

In the input port check process (S202) of the periodical interrupt process in FIG. switch 52, reset switch 53, start switch 7S, door open/close monitoring switch 56, etc.). is compared with the input state at the time of interrupt, and it is checked whether or not there has been a change in the input state. The content of the state change is stored, and the input state is stored as it is in the input port storage area 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 . Therefore, by waiting for one periodic interrupt process of FIG. 32, various sensors and various switches (setting key-shaped switch 52, reset switch 53, start switch 7S, door opening/closing monitoring switch) can be controlled by the waiting one period interrupt process. 56) is reflected in the input port storage areas 0 and 1 (not shown). It should be noted that "waiting for one periodic interrupt process in FIG. 32" is replaced by [11. 3rd game machine], for the sake of simplification of description, it is stated that "1 interrupt Wait is performed".

[11-3-1. Processing related to setting change and setting confirmation: first pattern]
A first pattern of processing related to setting change and setting confirmation executed by the main control circuit 100 will be described. In the first pattern, a process related to setting change (setting change process) and a process related to setting confirmation (setting confirmation process) are executed by different programs. DD) is not required to be opened or closed.

[11-3-1-1. First pattern setting change process (setting change process (no door open/close condition))]
Setting change processing of the first pattern (setting change processing (no door open/close condition)) will be described with reference to FIG. The power-on processing in the third gaming machine is obtained by replacing steps S22 to S27 in the power-on processing of FIG. 24 with the setting change processing (no door open/close condition) of FIG. 48 (no door open/close condition) is called, and the setting change process (no door open/close condition) of FIG. 48 is executed. When the setting change process (no door opening/closing condition) of FIG. 48 is called in the power-on process, "setting change" is written in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and the setting change process (no door opening/closing condition) of FIG. 48 is terminated. Then, when returning to the calling source of the setting change processing (no door open/close condition) in FIG.

In the main control board 71, the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 refers to the contents stored in the input port storage area 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 to determine whether the setting key-shaped switch 52 is in the ON state. That is, it is determined whether or not the setting key-type switch 52 is in the ON state when the power is turned on (S501). If it is determined that the setting key-type switch 52 is not in the ON state, that is, if it is determined that the setting key-type switch 52 is in the OFF state when the power is turned on (NO in S501), the operation shown in FIG. setting change processing (no door open/close condition) and returns to the caller.

If it is determined that the setting key-shaped switch 52 is in the ON state, that is, the state of the setting key-shaped switch 52 when the power is turned on is determined to be in the ON state (YES in S501), the main The CPU 101 generates initialization command (change/start) data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 and indicates that the setting change process has started, and stores the generated initialization command (change/start) data in the main RAM 103. An initialization command (change/start) to be stored in a communication data storage area (not shown) is generated and stored (S502). The main CPU 101 converts the data of the initialization command (change/start) stored in the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 to the data of FIG. Stored in a communication circuit (not shown) built in the main control circuit 100, the communication circuit (not shown) transmits the data of the initialization command (change/start) to the sub control circuit 200 based on the transmission cycle do.

Following the process of step S502, the main CPU 101 performs set value acquisition processing for acquiring a set value from a set value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and sets the acquired set value to 7 corresponding to the lowest payout lamp. Setting value display processing is performed to display the setting values for display by converting them into display setting values to be displayed on the segment display (S503), and the process proceeds to step S504. In the process of converting the setting value acquired from the setting value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 into the setting value for display, if the acquired setting value is "0", the setting value for display is changed to "1". , if the acquired setting value is "1", set the display setting value to "2", ..., if the acquired setting value is "5", set the display setting value to "6" Convert. In the 7-segment LED driving process (S205) of the regular interrupt process in FIG. 32, the main CPU 101 lights the output port of each segment of the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest payout number lamp based on the setting value for display. The set value for display is displayed on the 7-segment display corresponding to the bottom of the number-of-payouts lamp. Note that the 7-segment displays other than the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest payout number lamp are turned off.

In addition, in the third gaming machine, it is assumed that a 7-segment display corresponding to the bottom of the payout number lamp is used to display the setting value for display, but the present invention is not limited to this. A 7-segment display corresponding to the lower level may be used.

The main CPU 101 performs one interrupt Wait (S504), and proceeds to the processing of step S505.

The main CPU 101 refers to the contents stored in the input port storage area 0 or 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 to determine whether the push-button reset switch 53 is in the on state (from the off state to the on state). status has changed) is determined (S505). If it is determined that the state of the reset switch 53 is not ON (has not changed from OFF to ON) (NO in S505), the process proceeds to step S508.

If it is determined that the reset switch 53 is in the ON state (changed from the OFF state to the ON state) (YES in S505), the main CPU 101 performs setting value update processing to update the setting value (S506). ). In the setting value update process, if the setting value is "0", the setting value is changed to "1", and if the setting value is "4", the setting value is changed to "5". In the case of "5", the set value is updated to "0". At this point, the setting values stored in the setting value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 are not updated.

Following the process of step S506, the main CPU 101 converts the set value updated in step S506 into a set value for display to be displayed on the 7-segment display corresponding to the bottom of the number-of-payouts lamp. Setting value display processing for displaying the setting value is performed (S507), and the process proceeds to step S508. In the process of converting the updated setting value to the display setting value, if the updated setting value is "0", the display setting value is changed to "1", and the updated setting value is changed to "1". If the setting value is "1", the setting value for display is set to "2", and if the setting value after updating is "5", the setting value for display is set to "6". Convert. In the 7-segment LED driving process (S205) of the regular interrupt process in FIG. 32, the main CPU 101 lights the output port of each segment of the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest payout number lamp based on the setting value for display. The set value for display is displayed on the 7-segment display corresponding to the bottom of the number-of-payouts lamp.

The main CPU 101 refers to the contents stored in the input port storage area 0 or 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 to determine whether or not the start switch 7S corresponding to the setting value confirmation operation is in the ON state. Determine (S508). If it is determined that the start switch 7S is not on (NO at S508), the process returns to step S504.

If it is determined that the start switch 7S is in the on state (YES in S508), the main CPU 101 updates the set value after the update (the start switch 7S is turned on without the reset switch 53 being turned on even once). If the state is set, a set value storage process is performed to store the set value obtained in step S503 in a set value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 (S509), and the process proceeds to step S510.

The main CPU 101 performs an initialization process (S510) at the time of setting change, which is the same as the initialization process (S23) at the time of setting change in the power-on process of FIG. 24, and proceeds to the process of step S511. The initialization process at the time of setting change clears the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 103, as described in the initialization process at the time of setting change (S23) in the power-on process of FIG. The designated storage area is, for example, a carryover combination storage area, a game state flag storage area, a mode flag storage area, or the like, which requires erasing of data when settings are changed.

If there is an abnormality in the data in the main RAM 103 in the power-on processing of FIG. Also, the entire initialization range of the main RAM 103 is cleared. For example, if the set value storage area (not shown) is address F000H of main RAM 103 and the specific storage area (not shown) is addresses F001H to F010H of main RAM 103, the range to be cleared is after address F011H of main RAM 103. becomes.

The main CPU 101 performs one interrupt Wait (S511), and proceeds to the process of step S512.

The main CPU 101 refers to the contents stored in the input port storage area 0 or 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and determines whether or not the setting key-shaped switch 52 is in the OFF state (S512). . If it is determined that the setting key-type switch 52 is not in the OFF state (NO in S512), the process returns to step S511.

If it is determined that the setting key-type switch 52 is in the OFF state (YES in S512), the main CPU 101 transmits an initialization command ( An initialization command (change/end) generation/storage process is performed to generate data of change/end) and store the generated data of the initialization command (change/end) in a communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103. (S513). The main CPU 101 converts the initialization command (change/end) data stored in the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 to the data of FIG. Stored in a communication circuit (not shown) built in the main control circuit 100, the communication circuit (not shown) transmits the data of the initialization command (change/end) to the sub control circuit 200 based on the transmission cycle do.

Following the process of step S513, the main CPU 101 performs payout number acquisition processing for acquiring the number of payouts from a payout number storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 that stores the number of medals paid out according to the game result. Then, a payout number display process for displaying the acquired payout number on the payout number lamp is performed (S514). In the 7-segment LED driving process (S205) of the periodic interrupt process in FIG. A value for extinguishing is set, thereby ending the display of the set value for display on the payout number lamp, and the payout number is displayed on the payout number lamp. After the process of step S514, the setting change process (no door open/close condition) of FIG. 48 is completed, and the process returns to the caller.

[11-3-1-2. First pattern setting confirmation process (setting confirmation process (no door open/close condition))]
The setting confirmation process of the first pattern (setting confirmation process (no door open/close condition)) will be described with reference to FIG. The setting confirmation process (no door opening/closing condition) in FIG. 49 is called after the end of one game and before the condition for pressing the start lever 7 is established (no bet, no replay win in the previous game, etc.). be. In the third game machine, the medal insertion check process (S46) of the medal acceptance/start check process (FIG. 25) calls the setting confirmation process (no door open/close condition) of FIG. Setting confirmation processing (no door open/close condition) is executed. When the setting confirmation process (no door opening/closing condition) of FIG. 49 is called in the medal insertion check process (S46) of the medal reception/start check process, "setting confirmation" is written in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and the setting of FIG. When the confirmation process (no door opening/closing condition) is terminated and the process returns to the calling source of the setting confirmation process (no door opening/closing condition) of FIG.

In the main control board 71, the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 refers to the contents stored in the input port storage area 0 (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and changes the state of the setting key-shaped switch 52 from the off state to the on state. It is determined whether the state of the setting key-shaped switch 52 has changed to the ON state after the power is turned on (S551). Here, the change from the OFF state to the ON state of the setting key-shaped switch 52 means that the state of the setting key-shaped switch 52 in the periodic interrupt processing of FIG. means that the state of the setting key-shaped switch 52 in the interrupt of the periodical interrupt processing is in the ON state, and that the input state of the input port corresponding to the setting key-shaped switch 52 is the setting key-shaped switch 52. It means that an edge that changes from the off state to the on state has been detected. As described above, in the input port check processing (S202) of the periodic interrupt processing in FIG. The content of the change in the input state is stored in the port storage area 0 (not shown), and the input state is stored as it is in the input port storage area 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103. ) stores a change from the OFF state to the ON state corresponding to the setting key-shaped switch 52, the state of the setting key-shaped switch 52 is changed from the OFF state to the ON state in the determination step of step S551. determined to have changed.

If it is determined that the state of the setting key-type switch 52 has not changed from the off state to the on state, that is, if it is determined that the state of the setting key-type switch 52 has not changed to the on state after the power is turned on (S551 is NO), the setting confirmation processing (no door open/close condition) in FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the state of the setting key-shaped switch 52 has changed from the off state to the on state, that is, if it is determined that the state of the setting key-shaped switch 52 has changed to the on state after the power is turned on (YES in S551). ), the main CPU 101 generates data of an initialization command (confirm/start) indicating that the setting confirmation process has been started, and transmits the data of the generated initialization command (confirm/start) to the sub-control circuit 200. An initialization command (confirm/start) generation and storage process to be stored in a communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 is performed (S552). The main CPU 101 converts the initialization command (confirm/start) data stored in the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 to the data of FIG. Stored in the communication circuit (not shown) built in the main control circuit 100, the communication circuit (not shown) transmits the data of the initialization command (confirm/start) to the sub control circuit 200 based on the transmission cycle do.

Following the process of step S552, the main CPU 101 acquires a setting value from a setting value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103, which is the same as the setting value acquisition process and the setting value display process of step S503. Acquisition processing and setting value display processing for converting the acquired setting value to the setting value for display to be displayed on the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest payout number lamp and displaying the setting value for display ( S553), the process proceeds to step S554. In the 7-segment LED driving process (S205) of the regular interrupt process in FIG. 32, the main CPU 101 lights the output port of each segment of the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest payout number lamp based on the setting value for display. The set value for display is displayed on the 7-segment display corresponding to the bottom of the number-of-payouts lamp.

The main CPU 101 performs one interrupt Wait (S554), and proceeds to the process of step S555.

The main CPU 101 refers to the contents stored in the input port storage area 0 or 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and determines whether or not the setting key-type switch 52 is in the OFF state (S555). . If it is determined that the setting key-shaped switch 52 is not in the OFF state (NO at S555), the process returns to step S554.

If it is determined that the setting key-shaped switch 52 is in the OFF state (YES in S555), the main CPU 101 transmits an initialization command ( An initialization command (confirmation/end) generation/storage process is performed to generate data of confirmation/end) and store the generated initialization command (confirmation/end) data in a communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103. (S556). In the communication data transmission processing (S204) of the periodic interrupt processing in FIG. Stored in the communication circuit (not shown) built in the main control circuit 100, the communication circuit (not shown) transmits the data of the initialization command (confirm/end) to the sub control circuit 200 based on the transmission cycle do.

Following the process of step S556, the main CPU 101 performs a payout number acquisition process for acquiring the payout number from a payout number storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and displays the payout number by displaying the acquired payout number on the payout number lamp. Payout number display processing is performed for the purpose (S557). In the 7-segment LED driving process (S205) of the periodic interrupt process in FIG. A value for extinguishing is set, thereby ending the display of the set value for display on the payout number lamp, and the payout number is displayed on the payout number lamp. After the processing of step S557, the setting confirmation processing (no door open/close condition) of FIG. 49 is completed, and the caller is returned to.

[11-3-2. Processing related to setting change and setting confirmation: second pattern]
A second pattern of processing related to setting change and setting confirmation executed by the main control circuit 100 will be described. In the second pattern, a process related to setting change (setting change process) and a process related to setting confirmation (setting confirmation process) are executed by different programs. DD) is opened and closed.

[11-3-2-1. Second pattern setting change processing (setting change processing (with door open/close condition))]
The second pattern setting change process (setting change process (with door open/close condition)) will be described with reference to FIG. The power-on processing in the third game machine is obtained by replacing steps S22 to S27 in the power-on processing of FIG. 24 with the setting change processing (with door opening/closing condition) of FIG. 50 is called (with door opening/closing condition), and the setting change processing (with door opening/closing condition) of FIG. 50 is executed. When the setting change process (with door opening/closing condition) of FIG. 50 is called in the power-on process, "setting change" is written in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and the setting change process (with door opening/closing condition) of FIG. 50 ends. Then, when returning to the calling source of the setting change processing (with door open/close condition) in FIG.

In the main control board 71, the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 refers to the contents stored in the input port storage area 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and determines whether the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is in the ON state (open state). It is determined whether or not there is (S601). If it is determined that the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is not in the ON state (open state) (NO in S601), the setting change processing (with door opening/closing condition) of FIG. 50 is terminated and the caller is returned to.

When it is determined that the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is in the ON state (open state) (YES in S601), the main CPU 101 refers to the contents stored in the input port storage area 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103. , whether or not the setting key-type switch 52 is in the ON state, that is, whether or not the setting key-type switch 52 is in the ON state when the power is turned on (S602). If it is determined that the setting key-type switch 52 is not in the ON state, that is, if it is determined that the setting key-type switch 52 is in the OFF state when the power is turned on (NO in S602), the operation shown in FIG. setting change processing (with door open/close condition) and returns to the caller.

If it is determined that the setting key-type switch 52 is in the ON state, that is, if it is determined that the setting key-type switch 52 is in the ON state when the power is turned on (YES in S602), the main The CPU 101 generates initialization command (change/start) data and stores the generated initialization command (change/start) data in a communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 . Start) Create and store processing is performed (S603). The main CPU 101 converts the data of the initialization command (change/start) stored in the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 to the data of FIG. Stored in a communication circuit (not shown) built in the main control circuit 100, the communication circuit (not shown) transmits the data of the initialization command (change/start) to the sub control circuit 200 based on the transmission cycle do.

Following the process of step S603, the main CPU 101 acquires a setting value from a setting value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103, which is the same as the setting value acquisition process and the setting value display process of step S503. Acquisition processing and setting value display processing for converting the acquired setting value to the setting value for display to be displayed on the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest payout number lamp and displaying the setting value for display ( S604), the process proceeds to step S605. In the 7-segment LED driving process (S205) of the regular interrupt process in FIG. 32, the main CPU 101 lights the output port of each segment of the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest payout number lamp based on the setting value for display. The set value for display is displayed on the 7-segment display corresponding to the bottom of the number-of-payouts lamp.

The main CPU 101 performs one interrupt Wait (S605), and proceeds to the processing of step S606.

The main CPU 101 refers to the contents stored in the input port storage area 0 or 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 and determines whether or not the reset switch 53 is on (S606). If it is determined that the reset switch 53 is not on (NO in S606), the process proceeds to step S609.

If it is determined that the reset switch 53 is on (YES in S606), the main CPU 101 performs set value update processing for updating the set values, which is the same as the set value update processing in step S506 described above. (S607), and the process proceeds to step S608. At this point, the setting values stored in the setting value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 are not updated.

The main CPU 101 converts the set value updated in step S607 into the display set value displayed on the 7-segment display corresponding to the bottom of the payout number lamp, which is the same as the set value display processing in step S507. A set value display process is performed to display the converted set values for display (S608), and the process proceeds to step S609. In the 7-segment LED driving process (S205) of the regular interrupt process in FIG. 32, the main CPU 101 lights the output port of each segment of the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest payout number lamp based on the setting value for display. The set value for display is displayed on the 7-segment display corresponding to the bottom of the number-of-payouts lamp.

The main CPU 101 refers to the contents stored in the input port storage area 0 or 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 and determines whether or not the start switch 7S is on (S609). If it is determined that the start switch 7S is not on (NO in S609), the process returns to step S605.

If it is determined that the start switch 7S is on (YES in S609), the main CPU 101 updates the set value after the update (the reset switch 53 is never turned on and the start switch 7S is turned on). If so, the setting value storage process is performed to store the setting value obtained in step S604 in the setting value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 (S610), and the process proceeds to step S611.

The main CPU 101 performs the same initialization processing at the time of setting change (S510) as the initialization processing at the time of setting change (no door open/close condition) in FIG. move on.

The main CPU 101 performs one interrupt Wait (S612), and proceeds to the process of step S613.

The main CPU 101 refers to the contents stored in the input port storage area 0 or 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and determines whether or not the setting key-type switch 52 is in the OFF state (S613). . If it is determined that the setting key-type switch 52 is not in the OFF state (NO in S613), the process returns to step S612.

If it is determined that the setting key-shaped switch 52 is in the OFF state (YES in S613), the main CPU 101 generates initialization command (change/end) data, and executes the generated initialization command ( An initialization command (change/end) generation/storage process for storing data of change/end) in a communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 is performed (S614). The main CPU 101 converts the initialization command (change/end) data stored in the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 to the data of FIG. Stored in a communication circuit (not shown) built in the main control circuit 100, the communication circuit (not shown) transmits the data of the initialization command (change/end) to the sub control circuit 200 based on the transmission cycle do.

Following the process of step S614, the main CPU 101 performs a payout number acquisition process for acquiring the payout number from a payout number storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and a payout number acquisition process for displaying the acquired payout number on the payout number lamp. Display processing is performed (S615). In the 7-segment LED driving process (S205) of the periodic interrupt process in FIG. A value for extinguishing is set, thereby ending the display of the set value for display on the payout number lamp, and the payout number is displayed on the payout number lamp. After the process of step S615,
The setting change processing (with door open/close condition) of FIG. 50 is terminated and the caller is returned to.

[11-3-2-2. Second pattern setting confirmation process (setting confirmation process (with door open/close condition))]
The setting confirmation process of the second pattern (setting confirmation process (with door open/close condition)) will be described with reference to FIG. The setting confirmation process (with door opening/closing condition) in FIG. 51 is called after the end of one game and before the conditions for pressing the start lever 7 are satisfied (no bet, no replay win in the previous game, etc.). be. In the third gaming machine, the medal insertion check process (S46) of the medal acceptance/start check process (FIG. 25) calls the setting confirmation process (with door open/close condition) of FIG. 51 as a subroutine. Setting confirmation processing (with door opening/closing condition) is executed. When the setting confirmation process (with door opening/closing condition) of FIG. 51 is called in the medal insertion check process (S46) of the medal acceptance/start check process, "setting confirmation" is written in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and the setting of FIG. When the confirmation process (with door opening/closing condition) is terminated and the process returns to the calling source of the setting confirmation process (with door opening/closing condition) in FIG.

In the main control board 71, the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 refers to the contents stored in the input port storage area 0 (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and changes the state of the setting key-shaped switch 52 from the off state to the on state. It is determined whether the state of the setting key-type switch 52 has changed to the ON state after the power is turned on (S651). The determination processing method of step S651 is the same as the determination processing method of step S551 of the setting confirmation processing (no door open/close condition) of FIG.

If it is determined that the state of the setting key-shaped switch 52 has not changed from the off state to the on state, that is, if it is determined that the state of the setting key-shaped switch 52 has not changed to the on state after the power is turned on (S651 is NO), the setting confirmation process (with door open/close condition) in FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the state of the setting key-shaped switch 52 has changed from the off state to the on state, that is, if it is determined that the state of the setting key-shaped switch 52 has changed to the on state after the power is turned on (YES in S651). ), the main CPU 101 refers to the contents stored in the input port storage area 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and determines whether or not the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is in the ON state (open state) (S652). ). If it is determined that the door open/close monitoring switch 56 is not in the on state (open state) (NO at S652), the setting confirmation process (with door open/close condition) of FIG. 51 is terminated and the caller is returned to.

If it is determined that the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is in the ON state (open state) (YES in S652), the main CPU 101 generates initialization command (confirm/start) data, and An initialization command (confirmation/start) generation/storage process for storing (confirmation/start) data in a communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 is performed (S653). The main CPU 101 converts the initialization command (confirm/start) data stored in the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 to the data of FIG. Stored in the communication circuit (not shown) built in the main control circuit 100, the communication circuit (not shown) transmits the data of the initialization command (confirm/start) to the sub control circuit 200 based on the transmission cycle do.

Following the process of step S653, the main CPU 101 acquires a setting value from a setting value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103, which is the same as the setting value acquisition process and the setting value display process of step S503. Acquisition processing and setting value display processing for converting the acquired setting value to the setting value for display to be displayed on the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest payout number lamp and displaying the setting value for display ( S654), the process proceeds to step S655. In the 7-segment LED driving process (S205) of the regular interrupt process in FIG. 32, the main CPU 101 lights the output port of each segment of the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest payout number lamp based on the setting value for display. The set value for display is displayed on the 7-segment display corresponding to the bottom of the number-of-payouts lamp.

The main CPU 101 performs one interrupt Wait (S655), and proceeds to the process of step S656.

The main CPU 101 refers to the contents stored in the input port storage area 0 or 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and determines whether or not the setting key-shaped switch 52 is in the OFF state (S656). . If it is determined that the setting key-shaped switch 52 is not in the OFF state (NO in S656), the process returns to step S655.

If it is determined that the setting key-shaped switch 52 is in the OFF state (YES in S656), the main CPU 101 generates initialization command (confirm/end) data, and executes the generated initialization command ( An initialization command (confirmation/end) generation/storage process for storing data of confirmation/end) in a communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 is performed (S657). In the communication data transmission processing (S204) of the periodic interrupt processing in FIG. Stored in the communication circuit (not shown) built in the main control circuit 100, the communication circuit (not shown) transmits the data of the initialization command (confirm/end) to the sub control circuit 200 based on the transmission cycle do.

Following the process of step S657, the main CPU 101 performs a payout number acquisition process for acquiring the payout number from a payout number storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and displays the payout number for displaying the acquired payout number on the payout number lamp. A payout number display process is performed for the purpose of doing so (S658). In the 7-segment LED driving process (S205) of the periodic interrupt process in FIG. A value for extinguishing is set, thereby ending the display of the set value for display on the payout number lamp, and the payout number is displayed on the payout number lamp. After the processing of step S658, the setting confirmation processing (with door open/close condition) of FIG. 51 is ended and the caller is returned to.

[11-3-3. Processing related to setting change and setting confirmation: third pattern]
A third pattern of processing related to setting change and setting confirmation executed by the main control circuit 100 will be described. In the third pattern, a common program executes a process related to setting change (setting change process) and a process related to setting confirmation (setting confirmation process). It is conditional on the opening and closing of the mechanism DD).

[11-3-3-1. Third pattern setting change/confirmation process (setting change/confirmation process (with door open/close condition))]
The setting change/confirmation process of the third pattern (setting change/confirmation process (with door open/close condition)) will be described with reference to FIG.

The power-on processing in the third gaming machine is obtained by replacing steps S22 to S27 in the power-on processing of FIG. The setting change/confirmation process (with door opening/closing condition) of FIG. 52 is called, and thereby the setting change/confirmation process (with door opening/closing condition) of FIG. 52 is executed. When calling the setting change/confirmation process (with door open/close condition) of FIG. 52) and returns to the calling source of the setting change/confirmation process (with door open/close condition) in FIG.

Also, the setting/change confirmation process (with door opening/closing condition) in FIG. is called. In the third gaming machine, the medal insertion check process (S46) of the medal acceptance/start check process (FIG. 25) calls the setting change/confirmation process (with door opening/closing condition) of FIG. 52 as a subroutine. 52 setting change/confirmation processing (with door opening/closing condition) is executed. When calling the setting change/confirmation process (with door open/close condition) in FIG. When the setting change/confirmation processing (with door opening/closing condition) of FIG. .

In the main control board 71, the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 refers to the contents stored in the input port storage area 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and determines whether the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is in the ON state (open state). It is determined whether or not there is (S701). If it is determined that the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is not in the on state (open state) (NO in S701), the setting change/confirmation process (with door opening/closing condition) in FIG. 52 is terminated and the caller is returned.

If it is determined that the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is in the ON state (open state) (YES in S701), the main CPU 101 refers to the contents stored in the input port storage area 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103. , and determines whether or not the setting key-type switch 52 is in the ON state (S702). When the setting change/confirmation process (with door open/close condition) of FIG. 52 is called in the power-on process, in step S702, it is determined whether or not the setting key-type switch 52 is in the ON state when the power is turned on. will be judged. 52 is called in the medal insertion check process (S46) of the medal reception/start check process (FIG. 25), the setting change/confirmation process (with door opening/closing condition) is called in step S702 after the power is turned on. It is determined whether or not the state of the type switch 52 has changed from the off state to the on state.

The state of the setting key-shaped switch 52 is not on (the state of the setting key-shaped switch 52 is not on when the power is turned on, or the state of the setting key-shaped switch 52 has changed from the off state to the on state after the power is turned on). not) (NO in S702), the setting change/confirmation process (with door opening/closing condition) in FIG.

The state of the setting key-shaped switch 52 is ON (the state of the setting key-shaped switch 52 at power-on is the ON state, and the state of the setting key-shaped switch 52 after power-on changes from the OFF state to the ON state. (YES in S702), the main CPU 101, when the caller is power-on processing (when "setting change" is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103), Data of the initialization command (change/start) is generated, the data of the generated initialization command (change/start) is stored in the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and the caller receives medals and checks the start. When it is the medal insertion check process (S46) of the process (FIG. 25) (when "setting confirmation" is stored in the predetermined area of the main RAM 103), the initialization command (confirm/start) data is generated and generated. An initialization command (change/start/confirmation/start) generation/storage process for storing data of the initialized command (confirmation/start) in a communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 is performed (S703). The main CPU 101, in the communication data transmission process (S204) of the periodic interrupt process of FIG. (confirm/start) data is stored in a communication circuit (not shown) built in the main control circuit 100 of FIG. The data of the initialization command (confirm/start) is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 based on the transmission cycle.

Following the process of step S703, the main CPU 101 acquires a setting value from a setting value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103, which is the same as the setting value acquisition process and the setting value display process of step S503. Acquisition processing and setting value display processing for converting the acquired setting value to the setting value for display to be displayed on the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest payout number lamp and displaying the setting value for display ( S704), the process proceeds to step S705. In the 7-segment LED driving process (S205) of the regular interrupt process in FIG. 32, the main CPU 101 lights the output port of each segment of the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest payout number lamp based on the setting value for display. The set value for display is displayed on the 7-segment display corresponding to the bottom of the number-of-payouts lamp.

The main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting change/confirmation process (with door opening/closing condition) in FIG. (S705). It is determined that the process is not related to the setting change (the calling source is the medal insertion check process (S46) of the medal acceptance/start check process (FIG. 25) ("setting confirmation" is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103)). If so (NO in S705), the process proceeds to step S713.

If it is determined that the process is related to setting change (the calling source is the power-on process ("setting change" is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103)) (YES in S705), step S706 is executed. Proceed to processing.

The main CPU 101 performs one interrupt Wait (S706), and proceeds to the processing of step S707.

The main CPU 101 refers to the contents stored in the input port storage area 0 or 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 and determines whether or not the reset switch 53 is in the ON state (S707). If it is determined that the reset switch 53 is not on (NO at S707), the process proceeds to step S710.

If it is determined that the reset switch 53 is on (YES in S707), the main CPU 101 performs set value update processing for updating the set values, which is the same as the set value update processing in step S506 described above. (S708), and the process proceeds to step S709. At this point, the setting values stored in the setting value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 are not updated.

The main CPU 101 converts the set value updated in step S708 into the display set value displayed on the 7-segment display corresponding to the bottom of the payout number lamp, which is the same as the set value display processing in step S507. A set value display process is performed to display the converted set values for display (S709), and the process proceeds to step S710. In the 7-segment LED driving process (S205) of the regular interrupt process in FIG. 32, the main CPU 101 lights the output port of each segment of the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest payout number lamp based on the setting value for display. The set value for display is displayed on the 7-segment display corresponding to the bottom of the number-of-payouts lamp.

The main CPU 101 refers to the contents stored in the input port storage area 0 or 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 and determines whether or not the start switch 7S is on (S710). If it is determined that the start switch 7S is not on (NO at S710), the process returns to step S706.

If it is determined that the start switch 7S is in the on state (YES in S710), the main CPU 101 updates the set value after the update (the start switch 7S is turned on without the reset switch 53 being turned on even once). If the state is set, a set value storage process is performed to store the set value obtained in step S704 in a set value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 (S711), and the process proceeds to step S712.

The main CPU 101 performs the same initialization processing (S510) at the time of setting change in the setting change processing (no door opening/closing condition) of FIG. move on.

The main CPU 101 performs one interrupt Wait (S713), and proceeds to the process of step S714.

The main CPU 101 refers to the contents stored in the input port storage area 0 or 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and determines whether or not the setting key-type switch 52 is in the OFF state (S714). . If it is determined that the setting key-type switch 52 is not in the OFF state (NO in S714), the process returns to step S713.

If it is determined that the setting key-shaped switch 52 is in the OFF state (YES in S714), the main CPU 101 stores "setting change is stored), the data of the initialization command (change/end) is generated, and the generated data of the initialization command (change/end) is stored in the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103. , when the caller is the medal insertion check process (S46) of the medal reception/start check process (FIG. 25) (when "setting confirmation" is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103), the initialization command (confirmation/ initialization command (change/end/confirmation/end) generation and storage processing for generating data of the end) and storing the generated data of the initialization command (confirmation/end) in the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 (S715). The main CPU 101, in the communication data transmission process (S204) of the periodic interrupt process of FIG. (confirmation/end) data is stored in a communication circuit (not shown) built in the main control circuit 100 of FIG. The data of the initialization command (confirm/end) is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 based on the transmission cycle.

Following the process of step S715, the main CPU 101 performs a payout number acquisition process for acquiring the payout number from a payout number storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and a payout number acquisition process for displaying the acquired payout number on the payout number lamp. Display processing is performed (S716). In the 7-segment LED driving process (S205) of the periodic interrupt process in FIG. A value for extinguishing is set, thereby ending the display of the set value for display on the payout number lamp, and the payout number is displayed on the payout number lamp. After the processing of step S716, the setting change/confirmation processing (with door open/close condition) of FIG. 52 is ended and the caller is returned to.

It should be noted that a common program executes a process related to setting change (setting change process) and a process related to setting confirmation (setting confirmation process). The setting change/confirmation process (without the door opening/closing condition) may be performed without the opening/closing of the door as a condition. process flow can be used.

In addition, in the third game machine, in the input check port processing (S202) of the periodic interrupt processing of FIG. , 1 (not shown), and in FIGS. 48 to 52, the storage contents of the input port storage areas 0, 1 (not shown) are referenced to confirm the states of various sensors and switches. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, a mechanism may be used in which the states of various sensors and switches are confirmed by directly referring to the states of the input ports corresponding to the various sensors and switches in FIGS. 48 to 52. . In this case, the 1-interrupt Wait of FIGS. 48 to 52 need not be performed.

50 to 52, the case where the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is a switch that turns on when the door (lower door mechanism DD) is open and turns off when the door is closed has been described, but the present invention is limited to this. It is also possible to target a switch that is turned on when the door (lower door mechanism DD) is closed and turned off when the door is opened. In the portion relating to the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56, "on state" should be replaced with "off state", and "on state" should be replaced with "off state".

[11-4. Processing related to maintenance]
The maintenance-related processing executed by the sub-control circuit 200 will be described below. Here, two patterns, a first pattern and a second pattern, will be described as processing related to maintenance. The maintenance-related process is a process that enables the staff at the amusement arcade to confirm the contents of one or more items and to set the contents of one or more items. The "maintenance menu" in the third game machine is [8-2. It corresponds to the hall menu of the amusement store side].

The sub-RAM 203 is configured to include a volatile memory (DRAM, etc.) and a non-volatile memory (SRAM, FRAM (registered trademark), etc.).

[11-4-1. Maintenance-related processing: first pattern (maintenance processing (no door open/close condition)]
A first pattern (maintenance processing (no door opening/closing condition)) of maintenance-related processing executed by the sub-control circuit 200 will be described with reference to FIG. The sub-side control processing (outline) of FIG. 33 calls the maintenance processing (no door opening/closing condition) of FIG. 53 as a subroutine, whereby the maintenance processing (no door opening/closing condition) of FIG. 53 is executed. there is

The non-volatile memory of the sub-RAM 203 stores a state maintenance flag for maintaining the execution state of maintenance processing (no door opening/closing condition). maintenance of the execution state of The non-volatile memory of the sub-RAM 203 indicates whether the maintenance process (no door opening/closing condition) in FIG. A maintenance type flag is stored.

The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the state maintenance flag stored in the sub RAM 203 is set to the ON state (S801). If it is determined that the state maintenance flag is set to the ON state (YES in S801), the process proceeds to step S804. "YES" in the judgment step of step S801 is because the power is turned off while the ON state is set in the state maintenance flag, and the maintenance processing (with door opening/closing condition) in FIG. 53 is restarted after the power is turned on, if the maintenance process is not finished immediately.

When it is determined that the ON state of the state maintenance flag is not set (NO in S801), the sub CPU 201 receives either the initialization command (change/start) or the initialization command (confirm/start). It is determined whether or not (S802). When it is determined that neither the initialization command (change/start) nor the initialization command (confirmation/start) has been received (NO in S802), the maintenance process (no door open/close condition) in FIG. 53 ends. and return to the caller.

If it is determined that either the initialization command (change/start) or the initialization command (confirm/start) is received (YES in S802), the sub CPU 201 changes the state stored in the sub RAM 203. The maintenance flag is set to "ON state", and when the initialization command (change/start) is received in the maintenance type stored in the sub-RAM 203, "setting change" is set, and the initialization command (confirmation/start) is set. ) has been received, "setting confirmation" is set (S803), and the process proceeds to step S804.

The sub CPU 201 displays the maintenance menu screen (maintenance menu top screen shown in FIG. 55(a) in the third gaming machine) on the sub display device 220 (S804), and proceeds to the process of step S805.

The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the ON state of the start switch 7S is set to the bit B7 (see FIG. 45) of the bit group D11 (input port P0) in the no-operation command received from the main control circuit 100 (S805). ). If it is determined that the ON state of the start switch 7S is set in the bit B7 of the bit group D11 (input port P0) (YES in S805), the process proceeds to step S807. If it is determined that the ON state of the start switch 7S is not set in the bit B7 of the input port P0) (NO in S805), the process proceeds to step S806.

The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the maintenance type flag stored in the sub RAM 203 is set to "confirm setting" (S806). If it is determined that the maintenance type flag is set to "confirm setting" (YES in S806), the process proceeds to step S807. If it is determined that "setting change" is set (NO in S806), the process proceeds to step S808.

The sub CPU 201 sets the state maintenance flag stored in the sub RAM 203 to the OFF state (S807), and proceeds to the processing of step S808. It should be noted that step S805 is YES, and step S807 is the maintenance process (no door open/close condition) of FIG. The operation (the start switch 7S being turned on) is one of the conditions for "YES" in step S812. Further, NO in step S805, YES in step S806, and step S807 in the maintenance process (no door open/close condition) of FIG. Since the operation of the start lever 7 is not a condition in the processing related to the confirmation of the setting in step S812, the fact that the start lever 7 has been operated (that the start switch 7S has been turned on) is determined as "YES" in step S812. It is intended not to be one of the conditions.

The sub CPU 201 displays a maintenance menu screen (such as the maintenance menu top screen shown in FIG. 55(a)), and screens for confirming the contents corresponding to items on the maintenance menu screen (total screens shown in FIGS. 55(b) to (d)). Medal information screen, setting change/confirmation history screen, error information history screen, etc.) and screens for content setting (screen for time setting, etc.) (hereinafter referred to as "item screen" as appropriate) It is determined whether or not the attendant has operated the screen displayed on the sub display device 220 using the touch panel constituting the sub effect display section 22 (S808). If it is determined that the staff has not operated (NO in S808), the process proceeds to step S811.

In the third game machine, the touch panel is used for the operation of maintenance menu screens and item screens by attendants, but the present invention is not limited to this. button, CHANCE button, or stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R may be used.

If it is determined that an operation has been performed by the attendant (YES in S808), the sub CPU 201 performs operation specifying processing to specify the details of the operation performed by the attendant (S809), and displays a screen corresponding to the specified operation details of the attendant. Operation-specific screen display processing to be displayed on the sub-display device 220 is performed (S810), and the process proceeds to step S811.

The sub CPU 201 determines whether it has received either an initialization command (change/end) or an initialization command (confirmation/end) (S811). If it is determined that either the initialization command (change/end) or the initialization command (confirmation/end) has been received (YES in S811), the process proceeds to step S813.

If it is determined that neither the initialization command (change/end) nor the initialization command (confirmation/end) has been received (NO in S811), the sub CPU 201 maintains the state stored in the sub RAM 203. The OFF state is set in the flag, and the OFF state of the key type switch 52 for setting is set in the bit B6 (see FIG. 45) of the bit group D13 (input port P2) in the no-operation command received from the main control circuit 100. It is determined whether or not it is set (S812). It should be noted that the condition of step S812 is that a predetermined event occurs in the third gaming machine that the main control circuit 100 side of the third gaming machine may have completed the processing related to the setting change or the processing related to the setting confirmation. It is conditioned that it has occurred.

If it is determined that the state maintenance flag is set to the OFF state and that the setting key-shaped switch 52 is set to the OFF state to the bit B6 of the bit group D13 (YES in S812), the process proceeds to step S813. Proceed to processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the state maintenance flag is not set to the OFF state, or that the OFF state of the setting key-type switch 52 is not set to the bit B6 of the bit group D13 (NO in S812). , the process returns to step S805. If it is determined that the state maintenance flag is not set to the OFF state, or that the setting key-type switch 52 is not set to the OFF state in the bit B6 of the bit group D13 (NO in S812), You may make it return to the process of step S804.

The sub CPU 201 initializes the maintenance type stored in the sub RAM 203, terminates the display of the maintenance menu screen and the item screen currently displayed on the sub display device 220, and displays the maintenance menu screen and the item screen. Maintenance termination processing is performed to prevent display on the sub-display device 220 (S813), the maintenance processing (no door opening/closing condition) in FIG. 53 is terminated, and the process returns to the caller.

YES in step S811 and step S813 indicate that the main control circuit 100 receives an initialization command (change/end) or an initialization command (confirmation/end) transmitted at the end of the process related to setting change or the process related to setting confirmation. This is normal maintenance end processing that is performed.

Further, NO in step S811, YES in step S812, and step S813 correspond to an initialization command (change/end) or an initialization command (change/end) transmitted at the end of processing related to setting change or processing related to setting confirmation on the main control circuit 100 side. communication error, etc., performed when the third game machine is in a state where the main control circuit 100 may have completed the processing related to the setting change or the processing related to the setting confirmation, although the confirmation/end) has not been received. This is a maintenance termination process for countermeasures against an abnormality when it is assumed that an initialization command (change/end) or an initialization command (confirmation/end) could not be received due to the occurrence of some abnormality.

Note that if the main CPU 101 side is performing processing related to setting confirmation, and if it is determined in the determination step of step S811 that the initialization command (confirm/end) has not been received (NO in S811), step In the judgment step of S812, since the operation of the start lever 7 is irrelevant in the processing related to the setting confirmation on the main CPU 101 side, the sub CPU 201 checks the bit group D13 (input port P2) in the no-operation command received from the main control circuit 100. At B6 (see FIG. 45), it is determined whether or not the setting key-type switch 52 is set to the OFF state, and if it is determined that the OFF state is set (YES at S812), the process of step S813 is performed. , and if it is determined that the OFF state is not set (YES in S812), the process may return to step S805.

[11-4-2. Processing related to maintenance: second pattern (maintenance processing (with door opening/closing condition)]
A second pattern of maintenance-related processing (maintenance processing (with door opening/closing condition)) executed by the sub-control circuit 200 will be described with reference to FIG. The sub-side control processing (summary) in FIG. 33 calls the maintenance processing (with door opening/closing condition) in FIG. 54 as a subroutine, whereby the maintenance processing (with door opening/closing condition) in FIG. there is

The sub CPU 201 determines whether it has received either the initialization command (change/start) or the initialization command (confirmation/start) (S851). If it is determined that neither the initialization command (change/start) nor the initialization command (confirmation/start) has been received (NO in S851), the maintenance process (with door open/close condition) of FIG. 54 ends. and return to the caller.

When it is determined that either the initialization command (change/start) or the initialization command (confirmation/start) is received (S851 is YES), the sub CPU 201 displays the maintenance menu screen (third game 55A) is displayed on the sub-display device 220 (S852), and the process proceeds to step S853.

The sub CPU 201 sets the OFF state (closed state) of the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 to the bit B7 (see FIG. 45) of the bit group D13 (input port P2) in the no-operation command received from the main control circuit 100. In addition, it is determined whether or not the OFF state of the setting key-type switch 52 is set in the bit B6 (see FIG. 45) of the bit group D13 (input port P2) in the no-operation command received from the main control circuit 100 ( S853). It should be noted that the condition of step S853 is that a predetermined event occurs in the third gaming machine such that the main control circuit 100 side of the third gaming machine may have completed the processing related to the setting change or the processing related to the setting confirmation. It is conditioned that it has occurred.

Although the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 connected to the main control board 71 via the main relay board 73 is used to determine whether the door (lower door mechanism DD) is open or closed, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the 24h door monitoring unit 61 connected to the sub-control board 72 via the sub-relay board 74 may be used.

The OFF state (closed state) of the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is set to the bit B7 of the bit group D13, and the OFF state of the setting key-type switch 52 is set to the bit B6 of the bit group D13. If it is determined that (S853 is YES), the process returns to step S852. Note that if step S853 is YES, the processing of steps S852 and S853 is repeated, step S853 does not become NO, and the maintenance menu top screen does not transition to the item screen. On the other hand, the OFF state (closed state) of the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is not set to the bit B7 of the bit group D13, or the OFF state of the setting key-type switch 52 is set to the bit B6 of the bit group D13. If it is determined not (NO in S853), the process proceeds to step S854.

The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the attendant has operated the screen displayed on the sub display device 220 out of the maintenance menu screen and the item screen using the touch panel that constitutes the sub effect display section 22 ( S854). If it is determined that no operation has been performed (NO in S854), the process proceeds to step S857.

If it is determined that an operation has been performed by the attendant (YES in S854), the sub CPU 201 performs operation specifying processing to specify the details of the operation performed by the attendant (S855), and displays a screen corresponding to the specified operation details of the attendant. Operation-specific screen display processing to be displayed on the sub-display device 220 is performed (S856), and the process proceeds to step S857.

The sub CPU 201 determines whether it has received either the initialization command (change/end) or the initialization command (confirmation/end) (S857). If it is determined that neither the initialization command (change/end) nor the initialization command (confirmation/end) has been received (NO in S857), the process returns to step S853.

If it is determined that either the initialization command (change/end) or the initialization command (confirmation/end) has been received (YES in S857), the sub CPU 201 selects the sub of the maintenance menu screen and the item screen. Maintenance end processing is performed to end the display of the screen being displayed on the display device 220 so that neither the maintenance menu screen nor the item screen is displayed on the sub display device 220 (S858), and the maintenance processing (door (with open/close conditions) and returns to the caller.

YES in step S857 and step S858 indicate that the main control circuit 100 has received an initialization command (change/end) or an initialization command (confirmation/end) transmitted at the end of the process related to setting change or the process related to setting confirmation. This is normal maintenance end processing that is performed.

Also, YES in step S853 and step S852 indicate whether the initialization command (change/end) or the initialization command (confirmation/end) transmitted at the end of the process related to setting change or the process related to setting confirmation on the main control circuit 100 side is executed. Occurrence of some abnormality such as communication abnormality, which is performed when the third game machine is in a state where there is a possibility that the main control circuit 100 has completed the processing related to setting change or the processing related to setting confirmation although it has not been received. This is a process for dealing with anomalies when it is assumed that an initialization command (change/end) or an initialization command (confirmation/end) could not be received due to an error.

[11-4-3. Display screen during maintenance processing]
Displayed on the sub-display device 220 in steps S804 and steps S808 to S10 during the maintenance process (no door opening/closing condition) in FIG. 53 and in steps S852 and S854 to S856 during the maintenance process (with door opening/closing condition) in FIG. The maintenance menu screen and item screen will be described with reference to FIG.

A setting change operation (an operation to turn on the setting key-shaped switch 52 while the power is on) or a setting confirmation operation (an operation to turn on the setting key-shaped switch 52 while the power is on) is performed. In other words, when the sub-control circuit 200 receives an initialization command (change/start) or an initialization command (confirmation/start), step S804 in the maintenance process (no door opening/closing condition) in FIG. 53 or In step S852 during maintenance processing (with door opening/closing condition), the maintenance menu top screen of FIG. 55(a) is displayed.

The maintenance menu screen including the maintenance menu top screen shown in FIG. 55(a) includes items related to maintenance (items for which the staff at the amusement center can confirm the contents, items for which the staff at the amusement center can set the contents, etc.). ) is displayed. The items whose contents can be checked by the staff at the amusement center include "total medal information", "setting change/confirmation history", "error information history", and "monitoring history". Items that can be set by the staff at the amusement arcade include "time setting", "warning setting", "power saving mode setting", "stop setting", and "automatic settlement setting".

As shown in FIG. 55(a), the maintenance menu top screen displays current date/time information A11 indicating the current "year/month/day/(day of the week) hour: minute". The current date and time information A11 is called and displayed outside of maintenance processing (no door opening/closing condition/with door opening/closing condition) so that the maintenance processing (no door opening/closing condition/with door opening/closing condition) is in progress. is displayed in a display color (eg, red) different from the display color (eg, white, black) of . 56 to 58, which will be described later, when error information is set in the error status flag, the current date/time information A11 is set to It may be displayed in a display color different from the others.

On the maintenance menu top screen, as shown in FIG. 55(a), "time setting" A12, which is an item that can be set by the clerk of the amusement arcade, is displayed, and the clerk of the amusement arcade confirms the content. 'total medal information' A13, 'setting change/confirmation history' A14, 'error information history' A15, and 'monitoring history' A16 are displayed, and 'next' A17 is displayed. When the clerk touches "time setting" A12 on the touch panel, a time setting screen (not shown) for time setting is displayed, and when "total medal information" A13 is touched, the total medal information screen of FIG. 55(b) is displayed. 55(c) is displayed when "setting change/confirmation history" A14 is touched, and the error information history screen of FIG. 55(d) is displayed when "error information history" A15 is touched. , "monitoring history" A16, a monitoring history screen (not shown) is displayed. Also, when the attendant touches "next" A17 on the touch panel, other items for which the game store attendant can set the contents and other items for which the game store attendant can confirm the contents are displayed. A maintenance menu screen (not shown) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 55(b), the total medal information screen displays "total medals" including "total number of games", "total number of inserts", "total number of payouts", "difference" and "percentage of balls played". Information" A21 is displayed. The total number of games, the total number of inserted coins, and the total number of paid coins stored in the sub-RAM 203 are displayed in the "total number of games", "total number of inserted coins", and "total number of paid coins" included in the "total medal information" A21. , The "difference number" and "payout rate" included in the "total medal information" A21 are calculated using the total number of inserted and total number of payout stored in the sub-RAM 203 when the total medal information screen is displayed. The difference number and the payout rate are displayed. The total number of games, the total number of inserted cards, and the total number of paid cards are stored in the non-volatile memory of the sub-RAM 203 so that they can be saved even after the power is turned off.

When a unit game is started (when the start lever 7 is operated), for example, when a start command is received from the main control circuit 100, the total number of games is calculated and stored in the sub-RAM 203. When betting on a unit game, for example, when receiving a medal insertion command (including a parameter that can specify the number of bets, etc.) from the main control circuit 100, the total number of insertions is calculated and stored in the sub-RAM203. The total number of payouts is determined at the end of a unit game, for example, when a winning operation command (including parameters that can specify the type of display combination and the content of benefits to be given) is received from the main control circuit 100. The number of sheets is calculated and stored in the sub RAM 203 .

As shown in FIG. 55(b), "return" A22 is displayed on the total medal information screen, and when the attendant touches "return" A22 on the touch panel, the maintenance menu top screen of FIG. Return to display.

On the total medal information screen, as shown in FIG. 55(b), "DATA CLEAR" A23 is displayed. number, the total inserted number, and the total paid-out number are cleared (deleted).

Instead of calculating the difference number and the payout rate when displaying the total medal information screen, for example, the difference number and the payout number may be calculated from the total inserted number and the total payout number stored in the sub-RAM 203 at the end of the unit game. The difference in the number of balls and the ball-out rate calculated by calculating the ball rate are stored in the sub-RAM 203, and stored in the sub-RAM 203 as the "number-of-differences" and the "ball-out rate" included in the "total medal information" A21. The difference number and the payout rate may be displayed. In this case, the difference number and ball payout rate are stored in the non-volatile memory of the sub-RAM 203 so that they can be saved even after the power is turned off, and are stored in the sub-RAM 203 when the "clear data" A23 is touched by the attendant. To clear (delete) the difference number of sheets and the payout rate.

As shown in FIG. 55(c), the setting change/confirmation history screen displays "setting change/confirmation history" A31 including "No", "setting change/confirmation date and time", "operation" and "setting". be done. “Setting change/confirmation history” A31 displays five cases of setting change/confirmation information (including setting change/confirmation date and time, operation details, and setting values) stored in the sub-RAM 203 . "Setting change/confirmation date/time", "Operation" and "Setting" of "Setting change/confirmation history" A31 display the setting change/confirmation date/time, operation details, and setting values included in the setting change/confirmation information. . The setting change/confirmation information (including setting change/confirmation date and time, operation details, and set values) is stored in the non-volatile memory of the sub RAM 203 so that it can be saved even after the power is turned off. The maximum number of setting change/confirmation information stored in the sub-RAM 203 is determined according to the data size of the setting change/confirmation information and the capacity of the area for storing the setting change/confirmation information in the sub-RAM 203, and is 150, for example.

The setting change/confirmation date and time included in the setting change/confirmation information is the time when the initialization command (change/end) or the initialization command (confirmation/end) was received (the date and time obtained from the RTC (real time clock) at the time of reception (year Month, day, hour, minute, second: yyyy/mm/dd hh/mm/ss)).

The setting values included in the setting change/confirmation information are the setting values (“0” to “5”) set in the bit group D01 of the initialization command (change/end) or the initialization command (confirmation/end). . When the setting value included in the setting change/confirmation information is "0", "1" is displayed in "Setting" of "Setting change/confirmation history" A31, and "1" is displayed when the setting value is "1". 2" is displayed, and if it is "5", then "6" is displayed. In this way, the setting value displayed in the "setting" of the "setting change/confirmation history" A31 is aligned with the setting value displayed on the payout number lamp on the main control circuit 100 side.

The operation content included in the setting change/confirmation information is one of "change", "confirmation", and "view". "Change" means that a process related to a setting change is performed, and a no-operation command in which the start switch 7S is set to the ON state in bit B7 of bit group D11 is executed before the start lever 7 is operated in the process related to the setting change. ), the reset switch 53 is turned on at least once (at least once when a no-operation command in which the reset switch 53 is set to the on state in the bit B5 of the bit group D13 is received) ) is stored. "Browsing" means that a process related to setting change is performed, and the no-operation command in which the start switch 7S is set to bit B7 of bit group D11 until the start lever 7 is operated in the process related to the setting change. ), if the reset switch 53 has not been turned on once (a no-operation command in which the reset switch 53 is set to the ON state in bit B5 of bit group D13 has not been received) case) is stored. "Confirmation" is stored when processing related to setting change is performed.

On the setting change/confirmation history screen, as shown in FIG. 55(c), "Previous page" A32 and "Next page" A33 are displayed. The five items of setting change/confirmation information preceding the displayed setting change/confirmation information are displayed in the "setting change/confirmation history" A31, and when the staff touches the "next page" A33 on the touch panel, the current display is displayed. The setting change/confirmation information for the next five items of the setting change/confirmation information that is stored is displayed in the "setting change/confirmation history" A31.

As shown in FIG. 55(c), "return" A34 is displayed on the setting change/confirmation history screen. When the staff touches "return" A34 on the touch panel, the maintenance menu top of FIG. Return to screen display.

As shown in FIG. 55(c), "DATA CLEAR" A35 is displayed on the setting change/confirmation history screen. Setting change/confirmation information (including setting change/confirmation date and time, operation details, and setting values) is cleared (erased).

As shown in FIG. 55(d), the error information history screen displays "error information history" A41 including "No", "error content", "date and time of occurrence", and "date and time of release". "Error information history" A41 displays five cases of error information (error details, date and time of occurrence, and date and time of cancellation) stored in the sub-RAM 203. FIG. The error contents, the date and time of occurrence, and the date and time of cancellation included in the error information are displayed in the "error content", "date and time of occurrence", and "date and time of cancellation" of the "error information history" A41. The error information (error content, date and time of occurrence, and date and time of cancellation) is stored in the non-volatile memory of the sub-RAM 203 so that it can be saved even after the power is turned off. The maximum number of error information stored in the sub-RAM 203 is determined according to the data size of the error information and the capacity of the area for storing the error information in the sub-RAM 203, and is 150, for example.

The error content included in the error information is the error code assigned to the error that occurred.

The date and time of occurrence and the date and time of cancellation included in the error information are the following dates and times in the case of an error on the main control board 71 side. When an error occurs on the main control board 71 side, an error command that can identify the error contents is sent from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 . Even when the error is cleared, an error command is sent from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200, and multiple errors do not occur simultaneously on the main control board 71 side, and the sub-CPU 201 recognizes the occurring error. Therefore, it is possible to know which error has been cleared. The date and time of occurrence and the date and time of cancellation included in the error information are the time when the error command related to the occurrence of the error was received (date and time obtained from the RTC at the time of reception (year, month, day, hour, minute, second: yyyy/mm/dd hh/mm/ss) ) and the time when an error command related to error cancellation was received (date and time obtained from the RTC at the time of reception (year, month, day, hour, minute, second: yyyy/mm/dd hh/mm/ss)). In addition, the date and time of occurrence and the date and time of cancellation included in the error information are the errors on the sub-control board 72 side, for example, in the case of errors detected in FIGS. (date and time obtained from RTC at the time of start (year/month/day hour/minute/second: yyyy/mm/dd hh/mm/ss)) and error release time (date and time obtained from RTC at the time of release (year Month, day, hour, minute, second: yyyy/mm/dd hh/mm/ss)).

On the error information history screen, as shown in FIG. 55(d), "previous page" A42 and "next page" A43 are displayed. The five error information items preceding the currently displayed error information are displayed in "Error information history" A41, and when the staff touches "Next page" A43 on the touch panel, the next five error information items that are currently displayed are displayed. is displayed in the "error information history" A41.

As shown in FIG. 55(d), "return" A44 is displayed on the error information history screen, and when the staff member touches "return" A44 on the touch panel, the maintenance menu top screen of FIG. Return to display.

On the error information history screen, as shown in FIG. 55(d), "DATA CLEAR" A45 is displayed. (including error details, date and time of occurrence, and date and time of cancellation) are cleared (erased).

[11-5. Error detection processing related to setting change and confirmation]
Error detection processing related to setting change and confirmation executed by the sub-control circuit 200 will be described below.

[11-5-1. Setting change/confirmation error detection process]
The setting change/confirmation error detection process executed by the sub-control circuit 200 will be described with reference to FIG. The setting change/confirmation error detection process is read by interrupt processing at a constant cycle (for example, one cycle is any time between 2 msec (milliseconds) and 10 msec (milliseconds)) and is related to setting change and confirmation. This is a process that constantly detects errors.

The sub CPU 201 performs setting key information generation processing, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 57 (S901), and proceeds to the processing of step S902.

The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the ON state of the setting key-type switch 52 is set in the bit B6 (see FIG. 45) of the bit group D13 (input port P2) in the no-operation command received from the main control circuit 100. (S902). If it is determined that the ON state of the setting key-shaped switch 52 is not set in bit B6 of the bit group 13 (NO in S902), the setting change/confirmation error detection process of FIG. 56 is terminated and called. Return to the original. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ON state of the setting key-type switch 52 is set to the bit B6 of the bit group 13 (YES in S902), the process proceeds to step S903.

The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the ON edge flag stored in the sub RAM 203 is set to the ON state (S903). The ON state of the ON edge flag indicates that the ON edge of the setting key-shaped switch 52 was detected in the setting key information creation process (S901) of the current setting change/confirmation error detection process (FIG. 56). It indicates that it was detected that the key-shaped switch 52 was in the ON state, or that the setting key-shaped switch 52 was changed from the OFF state to the ON state after the power was turned on. Note that the ON edge flag is stored in the non-volatile memory of the sub RAM 203, for example.

If it is determined that the ON edge flag is set to the ON state (YES in S903), an error regarding the setting key (related to the setting key-type switch 52) is confirmed and the error information of the confirmed error is set. Then, the process proceeds to step S905. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ON edge flag is not set to the ON state (NO in S903), the error information set in S905 to S913 where the previous step S903 was "YES" is notified. Therefore, the process proceeds to step S904.

In step S904, the sub CPU 201 performs setting error notification processing, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 58 (S904), terminates the setting change/confirmation error detection processing of FIG.

In step S905, the sub CPU 201 clears the error status flag stored in the sub RAM 203 (sets the error unregistered status) (S905), and proceeds to the process of step S906. Note that the error status flag is stored in the non-volatile memory of the sub-RAM 203, for example.

The sub CPU 201 determines whether the off state (closed state) of the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is set in the bit B7 (see FIG. 45) of the bit group D13 (input port P2) in the no-operation command received from the main control circuit 100. (S906).

Although the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 connected to the main control board 71 via the main relay board 73 is used to determine whether the door (lower door mechanism DD) is open or closed, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the 24h door monitoring unit 61 connected to the sub-control board 72 via the sub-relay board 74 may be used.

If it is determined that the door open/close monitoring switch 56 is set to the OFF state (closed state) in the bit B7 of the bit group D13 (YES in S906), the process proceeds to step S907. On the other hand, if it is determined that the OFF state (closed state) of the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is not set in the bit B7 of the bit group D13 (NO in S906), the process proceeds to step S910.

In step S907, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting key operation flag stored in the sub RAM 203 is set to "change operation" (step S907). Note that the setting key operation flag is stored in the non-volatile memory of the sub-RAM 203, for example.

If it is determined that the setting key operation flag is set to "change operation" (YES in S907), the setting key switch 52 is turned on when the power is turned on with the door (lower door mechanism DD) closed. Since an error related to the operation of the setting key to detect the state is detected, the sub CPU 201 sets the error state flag stored in the sub RAM 203 to "setting change operation error" that can identify the error (S908). , the process proceeds to step S914.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the "change operation" is not set in the setting key operation flag, that is, if it is determined that the "confirmation operation" is set (NO in S907), the door (lower door mechanism DD) is closed. The sub CPU 201 detects an error related to the operation of the setting key, that is, detecting a change to the ON state of the setting key-shaped switch 52 after the power is turned on. A "setting key error" that can identify the error is set (S909), and the process proceeds to step S914.

In step S910, it is determined whether or not neither the initialization command (change/start) nor the initialization command (confirmation/start) has been received (S910). If it is determined that either the initialization command (change/start) or the initialization command (confirm/start) has been received (NO in S910), the process proceeds to step S914.

If it is determined that neither the initialization command (change/start) nor the initialization command (confirm/start) has been received (YES in S910), the sub CPU 201 uses the setting keys stored in the sub RAM 203. It is determined whether or not the operation flag is set to "change operation" (step S911).

If it is determined that the "change operation" is set in the setting key operation flag (YES in S911), the setting key type at power-on without receiving the initialization command (change/start). Since an error related to the operation of the setting key is detected by detecting the ON state of the switch 52, the sub CPU 201 sets the error status flag stored in the sub RAM 203 to "current setting change impossible error" which can identify the error. set (S912), and the process proceeds to step S914.

On the other hand, if it is determined that "change operation" is not set in the setting key operation flag, that is, if it is determined that "confirmation operation" is set (NO in S911), an initialization command (change/start) is issued. Since an error related to the operation of the setting key was detected by detecting the change to the ON state of the setting key-shaped switch 52 after the power was turned on in the state in which no signal was received,
The sub CPU 201 sets the error status flag stored in the sub RAM 203 to "setting confirmation error" that can identify the error (S913), and proceeds to the process of step S914.

In step S914, the sub CPU 201 sets the ON edge flag to OFF (S914), terminates the setting change/confirmation error detection process in FIG. 56, and returns to the caller.

[11-5-1-1. Setting key information creation process]
The setting key information creation process (S901) in the setting change/confirmation error detection process of FIG. 56 will be described with reference to FIG.

The sub CPU 201 receives the no-operation command transmitted from the main control circuit 100 for the first time after the power is turned on, and sets the bit B6 (see FIG. 45) of the bit group D13 (input port P2) in the no-operation command received for the first time. It is determined whether or not the key-type switch 52 is turned on (S951).

A no-operation command transmitted from the main control circuit 100 after power-on is received for the first time, and the setting key switch 52 is set to bit B6 (see FIG. 45) of bit group D13 (input port P2) in the no-operation command received for the first time. is set (YES in S951), the process proceeds to step S953. On the other hand, the no-operation command transmitted from the main control circuit 100 after power-on is received for the first time, and the setting key type is set to bit B6 (see FIG. 45) of the bit group D13 (input port P2) in the no-operation command received for the first time. If it is not determined that the switch 52 is turned on (NO in S951), the process proceeds to step S952.

In step S952, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting key to bit B6 (see FIG. 45) of bit group D13 (input port P2) in the previously received no-operation command in the pair of two consecutively received no-operation commands. Whether or not the OFF state of the key type switch 52 is set, and the ON state of the setting key type switch 52 is set in the bit B6 (see FIG. 45) of the bit group D13 (input port P2) in the no-operation command received later. It is determined (whether or not the state of the setting key-type switch 52 has changed from the off state to the on state) (S952).

If it is determined that the state of the setting key-shaped switch 52 has changed from the OFF state to the ON state (S952 is YES), the process proceeds to step S953. On the other hand, if it is determined that the state of the setting key-type switch 52 has not changed from the OFF state to the ON state (NO in S952), the setting key information creation processing of FIG. 57 is terminated, and the setting change of FIG. - Return to confirmation error detection processing.

In step S953, the sub CPU 201 sets the ON edge flag stored in the sub RAM 203 to the ON state (S953), and proceeds to the process of step S954.

The sub CPU 201 receives the no-operation command transmitted from the main control circuit 100 for the first time after the power is turned on, and sets the bit B6 (see FIG. 45) of the bit group D13 (input port P2) in the no-operation command received for the first time. It is determined whether or not the key-type switch 52 is turned on (S954).

A no-operation command transmitted from the main control circuit 100 after power-on is received for the first time, and the setting key switch 52 is set to bit B6 (see FIG. 45) of bit group D13 (input port P2) in the no-operation command received for the first time. is set (YES in S954), the process proceeds to step S955. On the other hand, the no-operation command transmitted from the main control circuit 100 after power-on is received for the first time, and the setting key type is set to bit B6 (see FIG. 45) of the bit group D13 (input port P2) in the no-operation command received for the first time. If it is not determined that the switch 52 is turned on (NO in S954), the process proceeds to step S956.

In step S955, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting key operation flag stored in the sub RAM 203 to "change operation" (S955), terminates the setting key information creation process of FIG. Return to error detection processing.

In step S956, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting key type to bit B6 (see FIG. 45) of bit group D13 (input port P2) in the previously received no-operation command for the two consecutively received no-operation commands. Whether or not the OFF state of the switch 52 is set and the ON state of the setting key-type switch 52 is set in the bit B6 (see FIG. 45) of the bit group D13 (input port P2) in the no-operation command received later ( (S956).

If it is determined that the state of the setting key-shaped switch 52 has changed from the OFF state to the ON state (S956 is YES), the process proceeds to step S957. On the other hand, if it is determined that the state of the setting key-type switch 52 has not changed from the off state to the on state (NO at S956), the setting key information creation processing of FIG. 57 is terminated, and the setting change of FIG. - Return to confirmation error detection processing.

In step S957, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting key operation flag stored in the sub RAM 203 to "confirmation operation" (S957), terminates the setting key information creation processing in FIG. Return to error detection processing.

[11-5-1-2. Setting error notification process]
The setting error notification process (S904) in the setting change/confirmation error detection process of FIG. 56 will be described with reference to FIG.

The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a predetermined time (in the third game machine, two seconds, but not limited to this) has elapsed with the setting key-type switch 52 turned on. (S971). Regarding the setting change, the ON state of the setting key-shaped switch 52 is set in bit B6 (see FIG. 45) of bit group D13 (input port P2) in the first no-operation command received after the power is turned on. In addition, bit B6 (see FIG. 45) of bit group D13 (input port P2) in each no-operation command received during a period of 2 seconds or longer after the first no-operation command is received after the power is turned on. When the setting key-shaped switch 52 is set to the ON state, it is determined that two seconds or more have passed while the setting key-shaped switch 52 has been in the ON state. As for the setting change, the bit group D13 ( When the ON state of the setting key-shaped switch 52 is set in the bit B6 (see FIG. 45) of the input port P2), it is determined that two seconds or more have passed while the setting key-shaped switch 52 has been in the ON state. be. For the measurement of time longer than 2 seconds, measurement based on the number of receptions of no-operation commands sent at a constant cycle, measurement by the soft timer of the sub CPU 201, setting change/confirmation error detection processing performed at a constant cycle (Fig. 56) can be used.

If it is determined that two seconds or more have not passed while the setting key-shaped switch 52 is in the ON state (NO in S971), the setting error notification process of FIG. 58 is terminated, and the setting change/confirmation of FIG. Return to error detection processing.

If it is determined that two seconds or more have passed while the setting key-shaped switch 52 is in the ON state (YES in S971), the sub CPU 201 stores error information ("setting change operation error", "setting key error", "current setting change impossible error", and "setting confirmation error") is set (S972). If it is determined that the error information is not set in the error status flag (NO at S972), the setting error notification process of FIG. 58 is ended and the setting change/confirmation error detection process of FIG. 56 is returned to.

If it is determined that the error information is set in the error status flag (YES in S972), the sub CPU 201 displays the setting operation abnormality shown in FIG. is displayed on the sub display device 220 (S973), and the process proceeds to step S974.

As shown in FIG. 59, on the setting operation error error screen, "Please call the person in charge." A51 and "Contents of error status flag" A52 are displayed. The error information set in the error status flag ("setting change operation error", "setting key error", "current setting change impossible error", and "setting confirmation error") is displayed in "Contents of error status flag". be.

Note that the setting operation error error screen is an error notification (warning) screen dedicated to setting operation errors, and is different from the abnormality notification (warning) screen for normal errors. In the case of a normal error, not only is the display on the sub-control board 72 side, but also on the main control board 71 side, a code indicating the occurrence of the error and the error during occurrence is displayed. A code is displayed on the payout number lamp (information display device 14), the effect lamps and LEDs (upper lamp 23, etc.) on the sub-control board 72 side emit light in a light emission pattern that means that an error is occurring, and the speaker 35a, An error sound for generating an error is emitted from 35b. On the other hand, there is no display on the main control board 71 side, such as the display of the number of payout lamps, on the error screen for the setting operation abnormality, and the lamps and LEDs (upper lamp 23, etc.) for effect on the sub control board 72 side. There is no light emission or sound output from the speakers 35a and 35b. It should be noted that the sub-control board 72 side may cause the lamps and LEDs for effect (upper lamp 23, etc.) to emit light in the same light emission pattern as the normal error, and the same error sound may be emitted from the speakers 35a and 35b. , the lamps and LEDs (upper lamp 23, etc.) for presentation may emit light in a dedicated light emission pattern, and a dedicated error sound may be output from the speakers 35a and 35b.

The sub CPU 201 stores the error information set in the error status flag and the corresponding The display start time of the error information (date and time acquired from the RTC at the start (year, month, day, hour, minute, second: yyyy/mm/dd hh/mm/ss)) is associated and registered (S974), and the setting error in FIG. The notification process is terminated, and the process returns to the setting change/confirmation error detection process of FIG.

54 and 56, the case where the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is a switch that is turned on when the door (lower door mechanism DD) is open and turned off when the door is closed has been described, but the present invention is limited to this. It is also possible to target a switch that is turned on when the door (lower door mechanism DD) is closed and turned off when the door is opened. In the portion relating to the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56, "on state" should be replaced with "off state", and "on state" should be replaced with "off state".

[11-6. effect]
[11-6-1. Effects of maintenance processing (with door opening/closing conditions)]
According to the maintenance process (with door open/close condition) of FIG. The sub CPU 201 side of the sub control circuit 200 ends the maintenance processing (with the door opening/closing condition) by not displaying either the menu screen or the item screen on the display unit. Unauthorized browsing of the contents of the item screen and unauthorized setting of the contents of the item screen can be prevented after the end.

By the way, if the sub CPU 201 cannot receive the initialization command (change/end) or the initialization command (confirmation/end) transmitted from the main control board 71 side due to the occurrence of some kind of abnormality such as a communication error, no countermeasures are taken. If not, the sub CPU 210 cannot end the maintenance process without displaying either the menu screen or the item screen on the display unit. In this way, even after the main CPU 101 has completed the processing related to setting confirmation and the processing related to setting change, it is possible to illegally browse the contents of the item screen and illegally set the contents of the item screen. Occur. In the maintenance process (with door opening/closing condition) of FIG. 54, a predetermined event (in the third game machine, the third ) is defined as a situation in which the door open/close monitoring switch 56 is in the off state (closed state) and the setting key-type switch 52 is in the off state. 56 is in the off state (closed state) and the state of the setting key-type switch 52 is in the off state (S852), and the state of the door open/close monitoring switch 56 is in the off state (closed state). state) and the state of the setting key-type switch 52 is OFF (YES at S853), the maintenance menu top screen is displayed (S852), and steps S852, S853, and S853 are "YES "repeat. As a result, the operation on the maintenance menu top screen is not accepted (the operation is invalidated), and the sub CPU 201 receives an initialization command (change/end) or Even if the initialization command (confirm/end) cannot be received, it is possible to avoid unauthorized viewing of the contents of the item screen or unauthorized setting of the contents of the item screen when some kind of abnormality such as a communication error occurs. .

It should be noted that the predetermined event is that if the third game machine is in a state in which there is a possibility that the main control circuit 100 side has completed processing related to setting change or processing related to setting confirmation, the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is in the OFF state (closed state) and the state of the setting key-type switch 52 is in the OFF state.

Further, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is in the OFF state (closed state) and whether the setting key-type switch 52 is in the OFF state (S852). If it is determined that the monitoring switch 56 is in the OFF state (closed state) and the setting key-shaped switch 52 is in the OFF state (YES in S853), the maintenance menu top screen is displayed (S852), Simple processing and control of repeating "YES" in steps S852, S853, and S853 can prevent unauthorized viewing of the contents of the item screen and unauthorized setting of the contents of the item screen.

The sub CPU 201 detects the open/closed state of the door (lower door mechanism DD), and the main CPU 101 detects the open/closed state of the door (lower door mechanism DD). By using the switch 56, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of parts due to the maintenance processing (with door opening/closing condition) of FIG.

Also, a no-operation command (see FIG. 45) including the state (ON state or sub-state) of the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 connected to the main control board 71 is transmitted from the main control board 71 side to the sub-control board 72 side. With a simple mechanism, the sub CPU 201 can recognize the state (ON state or sub state) of the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 connected to the main control board 71 .

In addition, instead of using the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 connected to the main control board 71 to detect the opening/closing state of the door (lower door mechanism DD), the sub CPU 201 detects the opening/closing state of the door (lower door mechanism DD). A monitoring unit 61 may be used. In this case, even if there is an abnormality in communication with other control units such as the main CPU 101 in order for the sub CPU 201 to acquire the open/closed state of the door (lower door mechanism DD), the door ( The open/close state of the lower door mechanism DD) can be obtained.

Also, a no-operation command (see FIG. 45) including the state (ON state or sub-state) of the setting key-shaped switch 52 connected to the main control board 71 is transmitted from the main control board 71 side to the sub-control board 72 side. With this simple mechanism, the sub CPU 201 can recognize the state (off state or on state) of the setting key-type switch 52 connected to the main control board 71 .

[11-6-2. Effect of maintenance processing (no door opening/closing condition)]
According to the maintenance processing (no door opening/closing condition) of FIG. The sub CPU 201 side of the sub control circuit 200 ends the maintenance processing (with the door opening/closing condition) by not displaying either the menu screen or the item screen on the display unit. Unauthorized browsing of the contents of the item screen and unauthorized setting of the contents of the item screen can be prevented after the end.

By the way, if the sub CPU 201 cannot receive the initialization command (change/end) or the initialization command (confirmation/end) transmitted from the main control board 71 side due to the occurrence of some kind of abnormality such as a communication error, no countermeasures are taken. If not, the sub CPU 210 cannot end the maintenance process without displaying either the menu screen or the item screen on the display unit. In this way, even after the main CPU 101 has completed the processing related to setting confirmation and the processing related to setting change, it is possible to illegally browse the contents of the item screen and illegally set the contents of the item screen. Occur. In the maintenance process (no door opening/closing condition) of FIG. 53, a predetermined event (in the third game machine, the third is in the state of the gaming machine) is a state in which the state maintenance flag is off and the state of the setting key-type switch 52 is in the off state, and the state maintenance flag is in the off state and the setting It is determined whether or not the key-shaped switch 52 for setting is in the OFF state (S812). YES), neither the menu screen nor the item screen is displayed on the display unit, and the maintenance process (no door open/close condition) of FIG. 53 is terminated (S813). As a result, even if the sub CPU 201 cannot receive an initialization command (change/end) or an initialization command (confirmation/end) from the main control board 71 side due to the occurrence of some kind of abnormality such as communication abnormality, It is possible to avoid unauthorized browsing of the contents of the item screen and unauthorized setting of the contents of the item screen when an abnormality occurs.

The predetermined event is that if the third game machine is in a state where the main control circuit 100 side may have completed the processing related to the setting change or the processing related to the setting confirmation, the state maintenance flag is turned off. state, and the state of the setting key-type switch 52 may be an OFF state.

Further, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the state maintenance flag is set to the off state and the setting key-type switch 52 is in the off state (S812), and the state maintenance flag is set to the off state. If it is set and it is determined that the setting key-shaped switch 52 is in the OFF state (YES in S812), the maintenance menu screen and the item screen are not displayed on the sub-display unit 220 for maintenance. The simple processing and control of ending the processing (no door open/close condition) (S813) can prevent unauthorized viewing of the item screen content and unauthorized setting of the item screen content.

In addition, a simple operation of transmitting a no-operation command (see FIG. 45) including the state (ON state or sub state) of the start switch 7S connected to the main control board 71 from the main control board 71 side to the sub control board 72 side. With this mechanism, the sub CPU 201 can recognize the state (OFF state or ON state) of the start switch 7S connected to the main control board 71 .

Also, a no-operation command (see FIG. 45) including the state (ON state or sub-state) of the setting key-shaped switch 52 connected to the main control board 71 is transmitted from the main control board 71 side to the sub-control board 72 side. With this simple mechanism, the sub CPU 201 can recognize the state (off state or on state) of the setting key-type switch 52 connected to the main control board 71 .

Further, by using the state maintenance flag, the predetermined event occurrence determination processing corresponding to the setting value confirmation processing and the predetermined event occurrence determination processing corresponding to the setting value change processing can be performed in common. In addition, when it is determined that a predetermined event corresponding to the process related to the change of the set value has occurred, a predetermined event corresponding to the process related to the confirmation of the set value, including that the state of the start switch 7S is turned on. It is possible not to include that the state of the start switch 7S is turned on in the determination that a has occurred.

Further, by using the state maintenance flag, it becomes possible to perform maintenance processing (without door opening/closing conditions) that was interrupted when the power was turned off, after the power is turned on.

[11-7. Note]
[11-7-1. Appendix 1]
In the conventional game machine, when the setting change process is started by turning on the power after the clerk turns on the setting key type switch using the setting key on the main control board side, or the clerk turns on the power. When the setting confirmation process is started by turning on the key type switch for setting using the setting key in the state where the There is a game machine where a menu screen is displayed, and an error information history screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display by the attendant operating the operation keys and selecting the "error information history" item displayed on the menu screen. (For example, see the patent document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-30542 (eg, paragraph 0124, FIGS. 82, 83, etc.)).

However, even after the setting change process or setting confirmation process is completed on the main control board side, it is possible to continue browsing the contents of the item screen corresponding to the items included in the menu screen on the sub control board side. , is undesirable from the point of view of fraud.

The game machine according to Supplementary Note 1 is made in view of such a point, and after the set value display process or the set value change process is completed on the game control unit side, the item corresponding to the item included in the menu screen To provide a game machine capable of preventing unauthorized viewing of screen contents.

The gaming machine (a1) according to Supplementary Note 1 is
A game control unit (71) that controls the progress of the game, an effect control unit (72) that controls the effect according to the progress of the game control unit, and a first switch (72) connected to the game control unit. 52), a second switch (53) connected to the game control unit, a display unit (220) connected to the performance control unit, and an operation unit (22) connected to the performance control unit In a game machine equipped with
The game control unit is
A setting value storage unit (103) for storing a setting value indicating the degree of the player's advantage in the game,
Setting value display processing for displaying the setting values stored in the setting value storage section on condition that the state of the first switch is changed after the power is turned on (FIGS. 51, 52, S205) and,
Changing the set value stored in the set value storage unit on condition that the first switch is in a state capable of changing the set value stored in the set value storage unit when power is turned on is performed based on the change in the state of the second switch (FIGS. 50, 52, S205);
The game control unit is
In the setting value display process,
When starting the display related to the setting value, a first start command is transmitted to the effect control unit (S653, S703, S204),
When ending the display related to the set value, a first end command is transmitted to the effect control unit (S657, S715, S204),
In the setting value change process,
When starting the display related to the set value performed in the set value change process, a second start command is transmitted to the effect control unit (S603, S703, S204),
When ending the display related to the set value, a second end command is transmitted to the effect control unit (S614, S715, S204),
The effect control unit displays a menu screen including a plurality of items selectable using the operation unit on the display unit, and among the item screens provided corresponding to the plurality of items, the menu screen performing screen display processing for displaying on the display unit the item screen corresponding to the item selected using the operation unit (FIG. 54);
The production control unit is
In the screen display process,
Triggered by the reception of the first start command or the second start command, the display of the menu screen is started (S852),
By receiving the first end command or the second end command, neither the menu screen nor the item screen is displayed on the display unit (S858).
It is characterized by

According to this, when the set value display processing and the set value change processing on the game control unit side are completed, neither the menu screen nor the item screen is displayed on the display unit on the performance control unit side. Unauthorized browsing of the contents of the item screen can be prevented after the display process and the setting value change process are completed.

The gaming machine (a2) is the gaming machine (a1) described above,
In the screen display process, the effect control unit controls the item screen so that the item screen is not displayed on the display unit due to the occurrence of a predetermined event different from the reception of the first end command or the second end command. (S853, S853 is YES, S852)
may be

By the way, when the effect control unit cannot receive the first end command or the second end command transmitted from the game control unit due to the occurrence of some kind of abnormality such as a communication error, the effect control unit can end the screen display process. Therefore, even after the set value display process or the set value change process on the game control unit side is completed, the contents of the item screen can be viewed illegally.

According to the game machine (a2), the effect control unit restricts the display of the item screen so that the item screen is not displayed on the display unit due to the occurrence of a predetermined event. Even if the first end command or the second end command transmitted from the game control unit cannot be received due to the occurrence of, it is possible to avoid unauthorized viewing of the contents of the item screen when some abnormality such as communication abnormality occurs. can.

The gaming machine (a3) is the gaming machine (a2) described above,
In the display restriction process, the effect control unit displays the menu screen on the display unit when the predetermined event occurs, and causes the effect control unit to display the item on the menu screen using the operation unit. Control to a state in which selection operation is not accepted (S853, S853 is YES, S852)
may be

According to this, unauthorized viewing of the contents of the item screen can be prevented with simple processing and control.

The gaming machine (a4) is the gaming machine (a2) or (a3) above,
The effect control unit detects the open state or closed state of the front door (DD) attached to the main body of the game machine (G) to detect the opening or closing detection sensor (56, 61) based on the detection result of the predetermined Determine whether or not an event has occurred (S853)
may be

According to this, the effect control unit restricts the display of the item screen so that the item screen is not displayed on the display unit due to the occurrence of a predetermined event related to the opening/closing state of the front door. To avoid illegal viewing of the contents of an item screen when some abnormality such as communication abnormality occurs even if a first end command or a second end command transmitted from a game control part cannot be received due to the occurrence of the abnormality. can be done.

The gaming machine (a5) is the gaming machine (a4) described above,
The opening/closing detection sensor (56) may be connected to the game control unit.

According to this, the effect control unit detects the opening/closing state of the front door, and the game control unit uses the opening/closing detection sensor connected to the game control unit to detect the opening/closing state of the front door. It is possible to suppress the increase in

The gaming machine (a6) is the gaming machine (a5) described above,
The game control unit may transmit an input state command including front door open/close information indicating the open state or closed state of the front door detected by the open/close detection sensor (56) to the effect control unit.

According to this, with a simple mechanism of transmitting an input state command including front door opening/closing information from the game control unit to the effect control unit, the effect control unit is detected by the opening/closing detection sensor connected to the game control unit. It becomes possible to recognize the state of the door (open state or closed state).

The gaming machine (a7) is the gaming machine (a4) described above,
The opening/closing detection sensor (61) may be connected to the effect control section.

According to this, the effect control unit uses the opening and closing detection sensor connected to the effect control unit to detect the open/closed state of the front door, so that an abnormality occurs in communication with other control units such as the game control unit. can also acquire the open/closed state of the front door.

The game machine (a8) is any one of the above game machines (a2) to (a7),
The effect control unit determines whether or not the predetermined event has occurred based on the state of the first switch (S853).
may be

According to this, the effect control unit restricts the display of the item screen so that the item screen is not displayed on the display unit due to the occurrence of a predetermined event related to the state of the first switch. To avoid illegal viewing of the contents of an item screen when some abnormality such as communication abnormality occurs even if a first end command or a second end command transmitted from a game control part cannot be received due to the occurrence of the abnormality. can be done.

The gaming machine (a9) is the gaming machine (a8) subordinate to the gaming machine (a6),
The game control unit may transmit the input state command including first switch state information indicating the state of the first switch to the effect control unit.

According to this, with a simple mechanism of transmitting an input state command including the first switch state information from the game control unit to the effect control unit, the effect control unit recognizes the state of the first switch connected to the game control unit. be possible.

The gaming machine (a10) is the gaming machine (a6), the gaming machine (a8) subordinate to the gaming machine (a6), or the gaming machine (a9),
The game control unit may periodically transmit the input state command.

According to this, the production control section can acquire information included in the input state command periodically.

According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing unauthorized viewing of the history of setting value confirmation and setting value change by a person other than a person having viewing authority, such as a hall clerk.

[11-7-2. Appendix 2]
In the conventional game machine, when the setting change process is started by turning on the power after the clerk turns on the setting key type switch using the setting key on the main control board side, or the clerk turns on the power. When the setting confirmation process is started by turning on the key type switch for setting using the setting key in the state where the There is a game machine where a menu screen is displayed, and an error information history screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display by the attendant operating the operation keys and selecting the "error information history" item displayed on the menu screen. (For example, see the patent document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-30542 (eg, paragraph 0124, FIGS. 82, 83, etc.)).

However, even after the setting change process or setting confirmation process is completed on the main control board side, it is possible to continue browsing the contents of the item screen corresponding to the items included in the menu screen on the sub control board side. , is undesirable from the point of view of fraud.

The game machine according to Supplementary Note 2 is made in view of such a point, and after the set value display process or the set value change process is completed on the game control unit side, the item corresponding to the item included in the menu screen To provide a game machine capable of preventing unauthorized viewing of screen contents.

The gaming machine (b1) according to the present embodiment is
A game control unit (71) that controls the progress of the game, an effect control unit (72) that controls the effect according to the progress of the game control unit, and a first switch (72) connected to the game control unit. 52), a second switch (53) connected to the game control unit, a display unit (220) connected to the performance control unit, and an operation unit (22) connected to the performance control unit In a game machine equipped with
The game control unit is
A setting value storage unit (103) for storing a setting value indicating the degree of the player's advantage in the game,
setting value display processing (FIG. 49, S205) for displaying the setting values stored in the setting value storage section on condition that the state of the first switch is changed after the power is turned on;
Changing the set value stored in the set value storage unit on condition that the first switch is in a state capable of changing the set value stored in the set value storage unit when power is turned on is performed based on the change in the state of the second switch (FIG. 48, S205);
The game control unit is
In the setting value display process,
When starting the display related to the set value, a first start command is transmitted to the effect control unit (S552, S204),
When ending the display related to the set value, a first end command is transmitted to the effect control unit (S556, S204),
In the setting value change process,
When starting the display related to the set value performed in the set value change process, a second start command is transmitted to the effect control unit (S503, S204),
When ending the display related to the set value, a second end command is transmitted to the effect control unit (S513, S204),
The effect control unit displays a menu screen including a plurality of items selectable using the operation unit on the display unit, and among the item screens provided corresponding to the plurality of items, the menu screen performs screen display processing for displaying the item screen corresponding to the item selected using the operation unit on the display unit (FIG. 53);
The production control unit is
In the screen display process,
Triggered by the reception of the first start command or the second start command, the display of the menu screen is started (S804),
By receiving the first end command or the second end command, neither the menu screen nor the item screen is displayed on the display unit (S813).
It is characterized by

According to this, when the set value display processing and the set value change processing on the game control unit side are completed, neither the menu screen nor the item screen is displayed on the display unit on the performance control unit side. Unauthorized browsing of the contents of the item screen can be prevented after the display process and the setting value change process are completed.

The gaming machine (b2) is the gaming machine (b1) described above,
In the screen display process, the effect control unit controls the item screen so that the item screen is not displayed on the display unit due to the occurrence of a predetermined event different from the reception of the first end command or the second end command. (S812, S812 is YES, S813)
may be

By the way, when the effect control unit cannot receive the first end command or the second end command transmitted from the game control unit due to the occurrence of some kind of abnormality such as a communication error, the effect control unit can end the screen display process. Therefore, even after the set value display process or the set value change process on the game control unit side is completed, the contents of the item screen can be viewed illegally.

According to the game machine (b2), the effect control unit restricts the display of the item screen so that the item screen is not displayed on the display unit due to the occurrence of a predetermined event. Even if the first end command or the second end command transmitted from the game control unit cannot be received due to the occurrence of, it is possible to avoid unauthorized viewing of the contents of the item screen when some abnormality such as communication abnormality occurs. can.

The gaming machine (b3) is the gaming machine (b2) described above,
In the display restriction processing, the effect control unit causes neither the menu screen nor the item screen to be displayed on the display unit due to the occurrence of the predetermined event, and terminates the screen display processing (S813).
may be

According to this, unauthorized viewing of the contents of the item screen can be prevented with simple processing and control.

The game machine (b4) is connected to the game control unit in the display control process in the screen display process upon reception of the second start command in the game machine (b2) or (b3), Based on the state of the start switch (7S) that detects the operation of the start lever (7) that accepts the start of the operation, it is determined whether the predetermined event has occurred (S811).
may be

According to this, the production control unit restricts the display of the item screen so that the item screen is not displayed on the display unit due to the occurrence of a predetermined event related to the operating state of the start lever. Even if a second end command transmitted from a game control part cannot be received due to the occurrence of an abnormality, it is possible to avoid illegal browsing of the contents of an item screen when some abnormality such as communication abnormality occurs.

The gaming machine (b5) is the gaming machine (b4) described above,
The game control unit may transmit an input state command including start switch information indicating the state of the start switch to the effect control unit.

According to this, with a simple mechanism of transmitting an input state command including start switch information from the game control unit to the effect control unit, the effect control unit can recognize the state of the start switch connected to the game control unit. .

The game machine (b6) is any one of the above game machines (b2) to (b5),
The effect control unit determines whether or not the predetermined event has occurred based on the state of the first switch (S853).
may be

According to this, the effect control unit restricts the display of the item screen so that the item screen is not displayed on the display unit due to the occurrence of a predetermined event related to the state of the first switch. To avoid illegal viewing of the contents of an item screen when some abnormality such as communication abnormality occurs even if a first end command or a second end command transmitted from a game control part cannot be received due to the occurrence of the abnormality. can be done.

The gaming machine (b7) is the gaming machine (b6) subordinate to the gaming machine (b5),
The game control unit may transmit the input state command including first switch state information indicating the state of the first switch to the effect control unit.

According to this, with a simple mechanism of transmitting an input state command including the first switch state information from the game control unit to the effect control unit, the effect control unit recognizes the state of the first switch connected to the game control unit. be possible.

The gaming machine (a8) is the gaming machine (b5), the gaming machine (b6) subordinate to the gaming machine (b5), or the gaming machine (b7),
The game control unit may periodically transmit the input state command.

According to this, the production control section can acquire information included in the input state command periodically.

The game machine (b9) is any one of the above game machines (b4) to (b8),
The effect control unit includes a first information storage unit (203) that stores first information and a second information storage unit (203) that stores second information,
The effect control unit, in the screen display process,
determining whether the first start command or the second start command has been received (S802);
When it is determined that the first start command has been received, the first information stored in the first information storage unit is set to maintain the screen display process, and the screen display processing stored in the second information storage unit is set. setting the setting value display information related to the setting value display process to the second information (YES in S802, YES in S802 and S803, S803);
When it is determined that the second start command has been received, the first information stored in the first information storage unit is set to maintain the screen display process, and the screen display processing stored in the second information storage unit is set. setting the setting value change information related to the setting value change process to the second information (YES in S802, YES in S802 and S803, S803);
When the state of the start switch reaches the state of detecting the operation of the start lever, the first information stored in the first information storage unit is set not to maintain the screen display processing (S805, YES in S805). , S807),
If the set value display process is set in the second information stored in the second information storage section, the screen display process is not maintained in the first information stored in the first information storage section. (S806, S806 is YES, S807),
The first information stored in the first information storage unit is used to determine whether the predetermined event has occurred based on the state of the start switch (S812).
may be

According to this, while the determination processing of occurrence of the predetermined event corresponding to the set value display processing and the determination processing of occurrence of the predetermined event corresponding to the set value change processing are common, Including that the state of the start switch has detected the operation to the start lever in the determination that the event has occurred It is possible not to include the fact that the operation was detected.

The gaming machine (b10) is the gaming machine (b9) described above,
The first information storage means is composed of a non-volatile memory,
The effect control unit, in the screen display process,
Before determining whether or not the first start command or the second start command has been received, whether the first information stored in the first information storage means is set to maintain the screen display process determine whether or not (S801),
When it is determined that the first information stored in the first information storage means is set to maintain the screen display processing, the display of the menu screen is started (YES in S801, S804).
may be

According to this, it is possible to restart the screen display process that was interrupted when the power was turned off after the power was turned on.

According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 2, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a person other than a hall clerk or other person having viewing authority from illegally viewing the history of setting value confirmation and setting value change.

[11-8. Game machine of modification 1 of the third game machine]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 60 to 72, a modified example of the specifications for changing and confirming settings of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be referred to as "a game machine of the third modified example 1" (hereafter simply referred to as , and may also be described as “the game machine of Modification 1”). 1 to 35 are applied to all configurations of the pachi-slot machine 1 that are not described in FIGS. 60 to 72. FIG.

[11-8-1. Configuration of Gaming Machine of Modified Example 1]
Hereinafter, the configuration of the gaming machine of Modification 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

The first game machine is provided with a door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 used for monitoring the opening/closing state of the lower door mechanism DD, but is not provided with a switch used for monitoring the opening/closing state of the upper door mechanism UD ( See Figure 3). On the other hand, in the game machine of Modification 1, as shown in FIG. 60(a), a lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d used for monitoring the opening/closing state of the lower door mechanism DD is provided. An upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u used for monitoring the opening/closing state of the door mechanism UD is provided. 71 are electrically connected.

The lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d is provided, for example, on the opening/closing side (right side) of the lower door mechanism DD. In addition, it may be configured to be provided on the back side of the lower door mechanism DD, or may be configured to be provided on the cabinet G side. The lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d is turned on when the lower door mechanism DD is opened (opened), and turned off when the lower door mechanism DD is closed (closed). monitor the open/close status of When the lower door open/close monitoring switch 56d is turned on, a lower door open error occurs. In this case, the error state is canceled when the lower door mechanism DD is closed. As described above, the setting key-shaped switch 52 and the reset switch 53 are configured to be provided on the main control board 71 (more specifically, on the main control board case). A main control board 71 is accommodated in the lower space on the rear side.

The upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u is provided, for example, on the opening/closing side (right side) of the upper door mechanism UD. In addition, it may be configured to be provided on the back side of the upper door mechanism UD, or may be configured to be provided on the cabinet G side. The upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u is turned on when the upper door mechanism UD is opened (opened), and turned off when the upper door mechanism UD is closed (closed). monitor the open/close status of An upper door opening error occurs when the upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u is turned on. In this case, the error state is canceled when the upper door mechanism UD is closed.

In the gaming machine of Modification 1, as a combination of the open/close state of the upper door mechanism UD and the open/close state of the lower door mechanism DD,
(Door opening/closing combination 1) The upper door mechanism UD is in an open state (open state) and the lower door mechanism DD is in an open state (open state),
(Door opening/closing combination 2) The upper door mechanism UD is in a closed state (closed state) and the lower door mechanism DD is in an open state (open state), and
(Door opening/closing combination 3) The upper door mechanism UD is closed (closed state) and the lower door mechanism DD is closed (closed state).
It is configured to be three types. Note that when the lower door mechanism DD is in the open state (open state), the operation of the setting key-type switch 52 and the reset switch 53 is enabled.

The first game machine is provided with a group of speakers such as speakers 35a and 35b (see FIG. 3). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 60(a), the gaming machine of Modification 1 includes speakers 35a, 35b, 35c, 35d, etc., which constitute sound output means capable of effecting effects by outputting sound. are provided, and the speaker groups such as the speakers 35 a , 35 b , 35 c , 35 d are electrically connected to the sub control board 72 via the sub relay board 74 .

As shown in FIG. 60(a), the gaming machine of Modification 1 includes a group of selection buttons such as selection buttons 40l and 40r that are not provided in the first gaming machine. , 40r are electrically connected to the sub-control board 72 via the sub-relay board 74 . The selection buttons 40l and 40r are used, for example, together with the effect button 10a for operations on screens shown in FIGS. 66 to 72, which will be described later. is shown in FIG. 60(b). The details of the operation of the selection buttons 40l and 40r and the effect button 10a on the screens of FIGS. 66 to 72 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 60(a), the gaming machine of Modification 1 includes a movable accessory 41 that is not provided in the first gaming machine. The movable accessory 41 is electrically connected to the sub-control board 72 via the sub-relay board 74, and its movement is controlled by the sub-CPU 201 of the sub-control board 72. For example, a performance suggesting bonus winning is performed. used for

[11-8-2. command]
Hereinafter, the initialization command (initialization command described in [4-9. Command] etc.) and the periodic command (also referred to as "no operation command") transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 There is.), [11-8. Game machine of modified example 1 of third game machine] will be mainly described, and other parts will be described simply or omitted. Note that the periodic command (no-operation command) is the above [6-2. Periodic Interrupt Processing], etc., it is described as an input status command.

The initialization command is an ID for identifying a command, and includes an initialization command ID assigned to the initialization command, setting values stored in a setting value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and initialization It includes the command status and the like, and the statuses include "change/start", "change/end", "confirm/start", and "confirm/end". In the following description, (1) a command whose ID is set to "initialization command ID" and whose status is set to "change/start" is referred to as "initialization command (change/start)", and (2) A command whose ID is set to "initialization command ID" and whose status is set to "change/end" is described as "initialization command (change/end)", and (3) ID is set to "initialization command ID". is set and the status is set to "confirm/start" is described as "initialization command (confirm/start)". (4) ID is set to "initialization command ID" and the status is "confirm・The command in which “end” is set is described as “initialization command (confirm/end)”.

A periodic command (no-operation command) is an ID for identifying a command. (Setting key type switch 52, reset switch 53, start switch 7S, lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d, upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u, etc.) input state (detection or non-detection, ON state or OFF state), and game The game state includes "normal", "during BB", "replay", and the like.

The input port storage areas 0 and 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 store the port states of the input ports P0 to P2 (various sensors and various switches (setting key type switch 52, reset switch 53, start switch 7S, lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d, upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u, etc.) are stored. The periodic command (no-operation command) is the port status of the input ports P0 to P2 (various sensors and switches (setting key switch 52, The reset switch 53, the start switch 7S, the lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d, the upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u, etc.) are created based on the input state (detection or non-detection, ON state or OFF state).

A communication circuit (not shown) incorporated in the main control circuit 100 of FIG. 60(a) transmits command data to the sub control circuit 200 based on the transmission cycle.

The main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 communicates with a communication circuit (not shown) incorporated in the main control circuit 100 of FIG. In the ready state, the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 stores commands related to the progress of the game, such as medal insertion commands and start commands, which correspond to valid operations by the player or game parlor staff. If neither the data nor the data of the initialization command is stored, the data of the no-operation command is changed based on the contents stored in the input port storage areas 0 and 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 as shown in FIG. a) is stored in the communication circuit (not shown) built in the main control circuit 100, and the main CPU 101 transmits the data of the no-operation command to the sub control circuit via the communication circuit (not shown) based on the transmission cycle. 200.

In addition, the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 sets the communication circuit (not shown) built in the main control circuit 100 of FIG. In this state, the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 stores the data of commands related to the progress of the game, such as a medal insertion command and a start command corresponding to valid operations by the player or the staff of the game parlor, and the initial data. If any data of the change command is stored (if data of a command other than the no-operation command is stored), the stored data of the command other than the no-operation command is stored as the main data of FIG. 60(a). The main CPU 101 sends command data other than the no-operation command to the sub-control circuit 200 through the communication circuit (not shown) based on the transmission cycle. Send to

When the communication circuit (not shown) is in a busy state during communication, new command data is set in the communication circuit (not shown) built in the main control circuit 100 of FIG. 60(a). will not be

Data such as the initialization command is temporarily stored in a communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and then, in the communication data transmission processing (S204) of the periodic interrupt processing of FIG. Although it is configured to be stored in a communication circuit (not shown) built in the circuit 100 and transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200, for example, data such as an initialization command is stored in a communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103. ), the data may be directly stored in a communication circuit (not shown) incorporated in the main control circuit 100 and transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 .

[11-8-3. Processing related to setting change and setting confirmation]
Hereinafter, the processing related to setting change and setting confirmation executed by the main control circuit 100 will be described. The gaming machine of Modification 1 executes a process related to setting change (setting change process) and a process related to setting confirmation (setting confirmation process) using different programs. The condition is the open/closed state of the lower door mechanism DD and the upper door mechanism UD).

In the input port check process (S202) of the periodical interrupt process in FIG. switch 52, reset switch 53, start switch 7S, lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d, upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u, etc.). , for example, compare the input state at the time of the previous interrupt with the input state at the time of the current interrupt, and check if there was a change in the input state. The content of the change in the input state is stored in the input port storage area 0 (not shown) of the RAM 103, and the input state is stored as it is in the input port storage area 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103. FIG. Therefore, by waiting for one periodic interrupt process of FIG. 32, various sensors and various switches (setting key switch 52, reset switch 53, start switch 7S, lower door opening/closing monitoring) can be controlled by the waiting one period interrupt process. The input state (detection or non-detection, ON state or OFF state) of the input port corresponding to the switch 56d, the upper door open/close monitoring switch 56u, etc.) is reflected in the input port storage areas 0 and 1 (not shown). It should be noted that "waiting for one periodic interrupt process in FIG. 32" is replaced by [11-8. In the description of Modification 1 of the third game machine], for the sake of simplification of the description, it is stated that "1 interrupt Wait is performed".

[11-8-3-1. Setting change process]
A process (setting change process) related to the setting change of Modification 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 61 . The power-on process in Modification 1 is obtained by replacing steps S22 to S27 in the power-on process of FIG. 24 with the setting change process of FIG. 61, and calls the setting change process of FIG. The setting change process of FIG. 61 is executed.

Combinations of the open/closed state of the upper door mechanism UD and the open/closed state of the lower door mechanism DD in the game machine of Modification 1 are the above-described three combinations (door open/close combination 1) to (door open/close combination 3). In the main control board 71, the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 refers to the contents stored in the input port storage area 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and (1) the state of the upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u is turned off ( (2) the state of the upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u is ON (upper door is open) and the lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d is ON (upper door is open); is in the on state (lower door open) (S1001). (1) The state of the upper door open/close monitoring switch 56u is off (upper door closed) and the state of the lower door open/close monitoring switch 56d is on (lower door open), and (2) the state of the upper door open/close monitoring switch 56u. is ON (upper door open) and the state of the lower door open/close monitoring switch 56d is neither ON (lower door open) (NO in S1001), the setting change process of FIG. 61 is completed. and return to the caller. On the other hand, (1) the state of the upper door open/close monitoring switch 56u is off (upper door closed) and the state of the lower door open/close monitoring switch 56d is on (lower door open), and (2) the upper door open/close monitoring switch 56u. is ON (upper door open) and the state of the lower door open/close monitoring switch 56d is ON (lower door open) (YES in S1001), the process proceeds to step S1002. move on. It should be noted that "YES in step S1001" is due to combinations of the open/close states that the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD can take (the above-described (door open/close combination 1) to (door open/close combination 3)). In the case of a combination ((Door opening/closing combination 1) to (Door opening/closing combination 2) described above) other than the combination in which the upper door mechanism UD is in the closed state and the lower door mechanism DD is in the closed state ((Door opening/closing combination 3) described above) is. Here, the reason why the setting change process proceeds in the case of combinations other than the above-described (door open/close combination 3) is that the setting change is performed while both doors (upper door mechanism UD and lower door mechanism DD) are closed. A state in which the setting key-type switch 52 is operated while the door key originally possessed by the store is not being used is conceivable. This is because there is a possibility that 52 will be manipulated, and such acts are to be prevented.

In the gaming machine of Modification 1, there are three combinations of the open/closed state of the upper door mechanism UD and the open/closed state of the lower door mechanism DD (door opening/closing combination 1) to (door opening/closing combination 3). For this reason, the main CPU 101 refers to the contents stored in the input port storage area 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 so that the state of the lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d is turned on (lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d). open), and if it is determined that the state of the lower door open/close monitoring switch 56d is in the off state (lower door closed), the setting change processing in FIG. If it is determined that the state of the lower door open/close monitoring switch 56d is ON (lower door open), the process can be replaced by proceeding to the process of step S1002.

The main CPU 101 refers to the contents stored in the input port storage area 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 to determine whether the setting key-shaped switch 52 is in the ON state, that is, when the power is turned on. It is determined whether or not the setting key-shaped switch 52 is in the ON state (S1002). If it is determined that the setting key-type switch 52 is not in the ON state, that is, if it is determined that the setting key-type switch 52 is in the OFF state when the power is turned on (NO in S1002), the operation shown in FIG. , and return to the caller. It should be noted that the fact that the setting key-shaped switch 52 is in the ON state corresponds to "being in a state in which the change of the set value is permitted".

If it is determined that the setting key-shaped switch 52 is in the ON state, that is, if it is determined that the setting key-shaped switch 52 is in the ON state when the power is turned on (YES in S1002), the main The CPU 101 generates initialization command (change/start) data and stores the generated initialization command (change/start) data in a communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 . Start) Create and store processing is performed (S1003). In the communication data transmission processing (S204) of the periodic interrupt processing in FIG. a) is stored in the communication circuit (not shown) built in the main control circuit 100, and the communication circuit (not shown) transmits the initialization command (change/start) data based on the transmission cycle to the sub control circuit 200.

Further, when step S1002 is determined to be YES, the main CPU 101 controls light emission of light emitting means (for example, LED) arranged corresponding to the bet button (for example, MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b). , except for the state from step S1002 becoming YES to step S1014 becoming YES and the state from step S1051 becoming YES to step S1056 becoming YES, etc., when the player presses the MAX bet button 6a Alternatively, a light emission control different from the light emission control of the light emission means in a state (playable state) in which the player can play a game by receiving an operation of the 1 bet button 6b or an operation of the start lever is used, and a bet is made under the different light emission control. Light-emitting means arranged corresponding to the button is made to emit light. For example, light is emitted in a color (for example, red) that does not emit light under light emission control in a playable state.

Following the processing of step S1003, the main CPU 101 performs set value acquisition processing for acquiring a set value from a set value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and sets the acquired set value to the 7 corresponding to the lowest payout lamp. Setting value display processing is performed to display the setting values for display after conversion into display setting values to be displayed on the segment display (S1004), and the process proceeds to step S1005. In the process of converting the setting value acquired from the setting value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 into the setting value for display, if the acquired setting value is "0", the setting value for display is changed to "1". , if the acquired setting value is "1", set the display setting value to "2", ..., if the acquired setting value is "5", set the display setting value to "6" Convert. In the 7-segment LED driving process (S205) of the regular interrupt process in FIG. 32, the main CPU 101 lights the output port of each segment of the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest payout number lamp based on the setting value for display. The set value for display is displayed on the 7-segment display corresponding to the bottom of the number-of-payouts lamp. Note that the 7-segment displays other than the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest payout number lamp are turned off.

The main CPU 101 performs one interrupt Wait (S1005), and proceeds to the processing of step S1006.

The main CPU 101 refers to the contents stored in the input port storage area 0 or 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 and determines whether or not the reset switch 53 is on (S1006). If it is determined that the reset switch 53 is not on (NO in S1006), the process proceeds to step S1009.

If it is determined that the reset switch 53 is on (YES in S1006), the main CPU 101 performs set value update processing to update the set value (S1007), and proceeds to step S1008. In the setting value update process, if the setting value is "0", the setting value is changed to "1", and if the setting value is "4", the setting value is changed to "5". In the case of "5", the set value is updated to "0". At this point, the setting values stored in the setting value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 are not updated.

The main CPU 101 converts the set value updated in step S1007 into a display set value to be displayed on the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest payout number lamp, and sets the display set value to be displayed. Value display processing is performed (S1008), and the process proceeds to step S1009. In the process of converting the updated setting value to the display setting value, if the updated setting value is "0", the display setting value is changed to "1", and the updated setting value is changed to "1". If the setting value is "1", the setting value for display is set to "2", and if the setting value after updating is "5", the setting value for display is set to "6". Convert. In the 7-segment LED driving process (S205) of the regular interrupt process in FIG. 32, the main CPU 101 lights the output port of each segment of the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest payout number lamp based on the setting value for display. The set value for display is displayed on the 7-segment display corresponding to the bottom of the number-of-payouts lamp.

The main CPU 101 refers to the contents stored in the input port storage area 0 or 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 and determines whether or not the start switch 7S is on (S1009). If it is determined that the start switch 7S is not on (NO in S1009), the process returns to step S1005.

When it is determined that the start switch 7S is on (YES in S1009), the main CPU 101 updates the set value after the update (the reset switch 53 is never turned on and the start switch 7S is turned on). If the state is set, a setting value storage process is performed to store the setting value acquired in step S1004 in a setting value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 (S1010), and the process proceeds to step S1011.

The main CPU 101 performs an initialization process (S1011) at the time of setting change, which is the same as the initialization process (S23) at the time of setting change in the power-on process in FIG. 24, and proceeds to step S1012.

The main CPU 101 performs one interrupt Wait (S1012), and proceeds to the process of step S1013.

The main CPU 101 refers to the contents stored in the input port storage area 0 or 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and determines whether or not the setting key-type switch 52 is in the OFF state (S1013). . If it is determined that the setting key-type switch 52 is not in the OFF state (NO in S1013), the process returns to step S1012.

If it is determined that the setting key-shaped switch 52 is in the OFF state (YES in S1013), the main CPU 101 generates initialization command (change/end) data, and executes the generated initialization command ( Initialization command (change/end) generation/storage processing for storing data of change/end) in a communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 is performed (S1014). In the communication data transmission processing (S204) of the periodic interrupt processing in FIG. a) is stored in the communication circuit (not shown) built in the main control circuit 100, and the communication circuit (not shown) transmits the data of the initialization command (change/end) based on the transmission cycle to the sub control circuit 200.

Further, when step S1013 is determined to be YES, the main CPU 101 uses the light emission control of the light emission means in the game ready state as the light emission control of the light emission means corresponding to the bet button. A light-emitting means arranged corresponding to the bet button is made to emit light.

Following the process of step S1015, the main CPU 101 performs a payout number acquisition process for acquiring the payout number from a payout number storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and a payout number acquisition process for displaying the acquired payout number on the payout number lamp. Display processing is performed (S1015). In the 7-segment LED driving process (S205) of the periodic interrupt process in FIG. A value for extinguishing is set, thereby ending the display of the set value for display on the payout number lamp, and the payout number is displayed on the payout number lamp. After the process of step S1015, the setting change process of FIG. 61 is terminated and the process returns to the calling source.

[11-8-3-2. Setting confirmation process]
A process (setting confirmation process) related to setting confirmation in Modification 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 62 . The setting confirmation process in FIG. 62 is called after the end of one game and before the conditions for pressing the start lever 7 are established (no bet, no replay win in the previous game, etc.). In the gaming machine of Modified Example 1, the medal insertion check process (S46) of the medal acceptance/start check process (FIG. 25) calls the setting confirmation process of FIG. 62 as a subroutine, thereby executing the setting confirmation process of FIG. It is designed to be

In the main control board 71, the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 refers to the contents stored in the input port storage area 0 (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and changes the state of the setting key-shaped switch 52 from the off state to the on state. It is determined whether the state of the setting key-type switch 52 has changed to the ON state after the power is turned on (S1051). As described above, in the input port check processing (S202) of the periodic interrupt processing in FIG. The content of the change in the input state is stored in the port storage area 0 (not shown), and the input state is stored as it is in the input port storage area 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103. ) stores a change from the OFF state to the ON state corresponding to the setting key-shaped switch 52, the state of the setting key-shaped switch 52 is changed from the OFF state to the ON state in the determination step of step S1051. determined to have changed. When the state of the setting key-shaped switch 52 changes from the OFF state to the ON state, it means that the state of the setting key-shaped switch 52 (setting key switch) indicates the set value on other display means (payout number lamp). change to a state that allows

If it is determined that the state of the setting key-shaped switch 52 has not changed from the off state to the on state, that is, if it is determined that the state of the setting key-shaped switch 52 has not changed to the on state after the power is turned on (S1051 is NO), the setting confirmation process of FIG. 62 is terminated and the process returns to the calling source. On the other hand, if it is determined that the state of the setting key-type switch 52 has changed from the off state to the on state, that is, if it is determined that the state of the setting key-type switch 52 has changed to the on state after the power is turned on (YES in S1051). ), the process proceeds to step S1052.

Combinations of the open/closed state of the upper door mechanism UD and the open/closed state of the lower door mechanism DD in the game machine of Modification 1 are the above-described three combinations (door open/close combination 1) to (door open/close combination 3). The main CPU 101 refers to the contents stored in the input port storage area 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 to determine whether (1) the upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u is in the OFF state (upper door closed) and the lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d (2) the upper door open/close monitoring switch 56u is on (upper door open) and the lower door open/close monitoring switch 56d is on (lower door open). It is determined whether it is any (S1052). (1) The state of the upper door open/close monitoring switch 56u is off (upper door closed) and the state of the lower door open/close monitoring switch 56d is on (lower door open), and (2) the state of the upper door open/close monitoring switch 56u. is ON (upper door open) and the state of the lower door open/close monitoring switch 56d is neither ON (lower door open) (NO in S1052), the setting confirmation process of FIG. 62 ends. and return to the caller. On the other hand, (1) the state of the upper door open/close monitoring switch 56u is off (upper door closed) and the state of the lower door open/close monitoring switch 56d is on (lower door open), and (2) the upper door open/close monitoring switch 56u. is ON (upper door open) and the state of the lower door open/close monitoring switch 56d is ON (lower door open) (YES in S1052), the process proceeds to step S1053. move on. It should be noted that "YES in step S1052" is due to combinations of the open/close states that the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD can take (the above-described (door open/close combination 1) to (door open/close combination 3)). In the case of a combination ((Door opening/closing combination 1) to (Door opening/closing combination 2) described above) other than the combination in which the upper door mechanism UD is in the closed state and the lower door mechanism DD is in the closed state ((Door opening/closing combination 3) described above) is.

In the gaming machine of Modification 1, there are three combinations of the open/closed state of the upper door mechanism UD and the open/closed state of the lower door mechanism DD (door opening/closing combination 1) to (door opening/closing combination 3). For this reason, the main CPU 101 refers to the contents stored in the input port storage area 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 so that the lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d is turned on (lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d). open), and if it is determined that the state of the lower door open/close monitoring switch 56d is in the off state (lower door closed), the setting confirmation processing in FIG. It is possible to replace the processing with proceeding to the processing of step S1053 when it is determined that the state of the lower door open/close monitoring switch 56d is in the on state (lower door open).

The main CPU 101 generates initialization command (confirmation/start) data and stores the generated initialization command (confirmation/start) data in a communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 .・Start) Create and store processing is performed (S1053). In the communication data transmission processing (S204) of the periodic interrupt processing in FIG. a) is stored in the communication circuit (not shown) built in the main control circuit 100, and the communication circuit (not shown) transmits the data of the initialization command (confirm/start) based on the transmission cycle to the sub control circuit 200.

Further, when step S1052 is determined to be YES, the main CPU 101 uses, as light emission control of the light emission means corresponding to the bet button, light emission control different from the above-described light emission control of the light emission means in the playable state, The light emission means arranged corresponding to the bet button is caused to emit light by the different light emission control. For example, light is emitted in a color (for example, red) that does not emit light under light emission control in a playable state.

Following the processing of step S1053, the main CPU 101 performs set value acquisition processing for acquiring a set value from a set value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and sets the acquired set value to the number corresponding to the lowest payout lamp. A set value display process is performed to display the set values for display after conversion into set values for display on the segment display (S1054), and the process proceeds to step S1055. In the process of converting the setting value acquired from the setting value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 into the setting value for display, if the acquired setting value is "0", the setting value for display is changed to "1". , if the acquired setting value is "1", set the display setting value to "2", ..., if the acquired setting value is "5", set the display setting value to "6" Convert. In the 7-segment LED driving process (S205) of the regular interrupt process in FIG. 32, the main CPU 101 lights the output port of each segment of the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest payout number lamp based on the setting value for display. The set value for display is displayed on the 7-segment display corresponding to the bottom of the number-of-payouts lamp. Note that the 7-segment displays other than the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest payout number lamp are turned off.

The main CPU 101 performs one interrupt Wait (S1055), and proceeds to the process of step S1056.

The main CPU 101 refers to the contents stored in the input port storage area 0 or 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and determines whether or not the setting key-shaped switch 52 is in the OFF state (S1056). . If it is determined that the setting key-type switch 52 is not in the OFF state (NO in S1056), the process returns to step S1055.

If it is determined that the setting key-shaped switch 52 is in the OFF state (YES in S1056), the main CPU 101 generates initialization command (confirm/end) data, and executes the generated initialization command ( An initialization command (confirmation/end) generation/storage process for storing data of confirmation/end) in a communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 is performed (S1057). In the communication data transmission processing (S204) of the periodic interrupt processing in FIG. a) is stored in the communication circuit (not shown) built in the main control circuit 100, and the communication circuit (not shown) transmits the data of the initialization command (confirm/end) based on the transmission cycle to the sub control circuit 200.

Further, if step S1056 is determined to be YES, the main CPU 101 uses the light emission control of the light emission means in the game ready state as the light emission control of the light emission means corresponding to the bet button. A light-emitting means arranged corresponding to the bet button is made to emit light.

Following the process of step S1057, the main CPU 101 performs a payout number acquisition process for acquiring the payout number from a payout number storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and displays the payout number by displaying the acquired payout number on the payout number lamp. Payout number display processing is performed for the purpose of doing so (S1058). In the 7-segment LED driving process (S205) of the periodic interrupt process in FIG. A value for extinguishing is set, thereby ending the display of the set value for display on the payout number lamp, and the payout number is displayed on the payout number lamp. After the process of step S1058, the setting confirmation process of FIG. 62 is terminated and the process returns to the calling source.

In addition, in the game machine of Modification 1, in the input check port processing (S202) of the periodic interrupt processing of FIG. 0 and 1 (not shown), and referring to the contents stored in the input port storage areas 0 and 1 (not shown) in FIGS. , but not limited to this, for example, as a mechanism for checking the states of various sensors and switches by directly referring to the states of the input ports corresponding to the various sensors and switches in FIGS. good. In this case, the 1-interrupt Wait of FIGS. 61 and 62 need not be performed.

[11-8-4. Processing related to maintenance]
The maintenance-related processing executed by the sub-control circuit 200 will be described below. The gaming machine of Modified Example 1 executes a process related to maintenance performed during setting change (maintenance process during setting change) and a maintenance process performed during setting confirmation (maintenance process during setting confirmation) using different programs. . The maintenance-related process is a process that enables the staff at the amusement arcade to confirm the contents of one or more items, set the contents of one or more items, and the like. The “maintenance menu” in the game machine of Modification 1 is [8-2. It corresponds to the hall menu of the amusement store side].

[11-8-4-1. Maintenance process during setting change]
The setting change maintenance process (predetermined maintenance process) executed by the sub control circuit 200 will be described with reference to FIG. The sub-side control process (outline) of FIG. 33 calls the maintenance process during setting change of FIG. 63 as a subroutine, and thereby the maintenance process during setting change of FIG. 63 is executed.

The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not an initialization command (change/start) has been received (S1101). If it is determined that the initialization command (change/start) has not been received (NO in S1101), the maintenance process during setting change in FIG. 63 is terminated and the process returns to the caller. On the other hand, if it is determined that an initialization command (change/start) has been received (YES in S1101), the process proceeds to step S1102. Here, the initialization command (change/start) is received when (a) the setting key-type switch 52 is in the ON state when the power is turned on, and (b) the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD (the above-described (door opening/closing combination 1) to (door opening/closing combination 3)), the upper door mechanism UD is closed and the lower door mechanism DD is closed. It is a combination (the above-described (door opening/closing combination 1) to (door opening/closing combination 2)) other than the combination ((door opening/closing combination 3) described above).

The sub CPU 201 displays on the main display device 210 a setting changing screen (a setting changing screen displaying characters "setting changing" 210a, a specific example of which is shown in FIG. 65) for notifying that the setting is being changed. is displayed (S1102), and the process proceeds to step S1103.

The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not an initialization command (change/end) has been received (S1103). If it is determined that the initialization command (change/end) has not been received (NO in S1103), the process proceeds to step S1105. On the other hand, if it is determined that an initialization command (change/end) has been received (YES in S1103), the sub CPU 201 terminates the display of the setting changing screen and displays the setting changing screen in the first step S1102. is displayed on the main display device 210 (S1104), the maintenance process during setting change in FIG.

Combinations of the open/closed state of the upper door mechanism UD and the open/closed state of the lower door mechanism DD in the game machine of Modification 1 are the above-described three combinations (door open/close combination 1) to (door open/close combination 3). The sub CPU 201 sets the state (ON state, OFF state) of the lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d included in the no-operation command received from the main control circuit 100 (hereinafter referred to as "lower door opening/closing monitoring switch state set bit"). ) and a bit for setting the state (on state, off state) of the upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u (hereinafter referred to as ``upper door opening/closing monitoring switch state setting bit'' as appropriate). ) to determine whether the upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u is in the OFF state (upper door closed) and the lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d is in the OFF state (lower door closed). is determined (S1105). If it is not determined that the upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u is in the OFF state (upper door closed) and the lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d is not in the OFF state (lower door closed) (NO in S1105), step Return to the processing of S1103. On the other hand, if it is determined that the upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u is in the OFF state (upper door closed) and the lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d is in the OFF state (lower door closed) (YES in S1105), The process proceeds to step S1106.

In the gaming machine of Modification 1, there are three combinations of the open/closed state of the upper door mechanism UD and the open/closed state of the lower door mechanism DD (door opening/closing combination 1) to (door opening/closing combination 3). For this reason, the sub CPU 201 refers to the set contents of the lower door open/close monitoring switch state setting bit included in the no-operation command received from the main control circuit 100, and performs the determination process in step S1105. It is determined whether or not the switch 56d is in the off state (lower door closed). Returning to the process, if it is determined that the state of the lower door open/close monitoring switch 56d is OFF (lower door closed), the process can be replaced with the process of proceeding to step S1106.

In step S<b>1106 , the sub CPU 201 selects maintenance that is set to be performed during a setting change (predetermined maintenance: hereinafter referred to as “maintenance during setting change”) among the maintenances that can be performed in the gaming machine of Modification 1. ) corresponding to the maintenance menu screen (predetermined maintenance menu screen: a maintenance menu screen whose specific example is shown in FIG. 66(a): hereinafter referred to as "maintenance menu screen during setting change" as appropriate). The image is displayed on the main display device 210 (S1106), and the process proceeds to step S1107. The display of the setting change maintenance menu screen (FIG. 66(a)) indicates that the state of the lower door mechanism DD changes from the open state (open state) to the closed state (closed state) after receiving the initialization command (change/start). is started when

The sub CPU 201 selects the maintenance menu screen during setting change displayed on the main display device 210 from among the maintenance menu screen during setting change (FIGS. 66(a) to 66(d) in the gaming machine of Modification 1). It is determined whether or not the attendant has operated using any of the selection buttons 40l and 40r and the effect button 10a (S1107). If it is determined that any one of the selection buttons 40l and 40r and the presentation button 10a has not been operated (NO in S1107), the process proceeds to step S1110. On the other hand, if it is determined that an operation using one of the selection buttons 40l and 40r and the effect button 10a has been performed (YES in S1107), the sub CPU 201 performs operation identification processing to identify the operation content of the attendant. (S1108), maintenance (setting changing) processing corresponding to the operation content specified by the staff member is performed (S1109), and the process proceeds to step S1110. Details of the processing of steps S1106 to S1109 will be described later using FIG.

Combinations of the open/closed state of the upper door mechanism UD and the open/closed state of the lower door mechanism DD in the game machine of Modification 1 are the above-described three combinations (door open/close combination 1) to (door open/close combination 3). The sub CPU 201 refers to the set contents of the lower door opening/closing monitoring switch state setting bit and the set contents of the upper door opening/closing monitoring switch state setting bit included in the no-operation command received from the main control circuit 100, and ( 1) The state of the upper door open/close monitoring switch 56u is off (upper door closed) and the state of the lower door open/close monitoring switch 56d is on (lower door open), and (2) the state of the upper door open/close monitoring switch 56u is It is determined whether the state of the ON state (upper door open) and the state of the lower door open/close monitoring switch 56d is ON state (lower door open) (S1110). (1) The state of the upper door open/close monitoring switch 56u is off (upper door closed) and the state of the lower door open/close monitoring switch 56d is on (lower door open), and (2) the state of the upper door open/close monitoring switch 56u. is ON (upper door open) and the state of the lower door open/close monitoring switch 56d is neither ON (lower door open) (NO in S1110), the process proceeds to step S1111. On the other hand, (1) the state of the upper door open/close monitoring switch 56u is off (upper door closed) and the state of the lower door open/close monitoring switch 56d is on (lower door open), and (2) the upper door open/close monitoring switch 56u. is ON (upper door open) and the state of the lower door open/close monitoring switch 56d is ON (lower door open) (S1110: YES), the process proceeds to step S1102. move on. It should be noted that "YES in step S1110" is due to combinations of the open/close states that the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD can take (the above-described (door open/close combination 1) to (door open/close combination 3)). In the case of a combination ((Door opening/closing combination 1) to (Door opening/closing combination 2) described above) other than the combination in which the upper door mechanism UD is in the closed state and the lower door mechanism DD is in the closed state ((Door opening/closing combination 3) described above) is.

When the setting change maintenance menu screen (FIGS. 66A to 66D) is displayed on the main display device 210, when the lower door mechanism DD changes from the closed state (closed state) to the released state (open state). , the display contents of the main display device 210 are switched from the setting changing maintenance menu screen (FIGS. 66A to 66D) to the setting changing screen (FIG. 65).

In the gaming machine of Modification 1, there are three combinations of the open/closed state of the upper door mechanism UD and the open/closed state of the lower door mechanism DD (door opening/closing combination 1) to (door opening/closing combination 3). For this reason, the sub CPU 201 refers to the set contents of the lower door open/close monitoring switch state setting bit included in the no-operation command received from the main control circuit 100, and performs the determination process of step S1110. It is determined whether or not the switch 56d is in the on state (lower door open). If it is determined that the lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d is not in the on state (lower door open), the process proceeds to step S1111. If it is determined that the state of the lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d is ON (lower door open), the process can be replaced by returning to the process of step S1102.

The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not an initialization command (change/end) has been received (S1111). If it is determined that the initialization command (change/end) has not been received (NO in S1111), the process returns to step S1107. On the other hand, if it is determined that the initialization command (change/end) has been received (YES in S1111), the sub CPU 201 displays the setting change maintenance menu screen (FIGS. 66A to 66D). After finishing the display of the setting changing maintenance menu screen being displayed on the main display device 210, the normal screen before the setting changing screen (FIG. 65) is displayed is displayed on the main display device 210 in the first step S1102. (S1112), the maintenance processing during setting change in FIG. 63 is ended, and the process returns to the caller.

[11-8-4-2. Checking settings maintenance process]
The maintenance processing during setting confirmation (specific maintenance processing) executed by the sub control circuit 200 will be described with reference to FIG. The sub-side control processing (outline) of FIG. 33 calls the maintenance processing during setting confirmation of FIG. 64 as a subroutine, whereby the maintenance processing during setting confirmation of FIG. 64 is executed.

The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not an initialization command (confirm/start) has been received (S1151). If it is determined that the initialization command (confirmation/start) has not been received (NO in S1151), the maintenance process during setting confirmation in FIG. 64 is terminated and the process returns to the caller. On the other hand, if it is determined that the initialization command (confirm/start) has been received (YES in S1151), the process proceeds to step S1152. Here, the initialization command (confirm/start) is received when (a) the state of the setting key-shaped switch 52 changes from the off state to the on state after the power is turned on, and (b) the above Among the possible combinations of open/close states of the door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD (the above-mentioned (door open/close combination 1) to (door open/close combination 3)), the upper door mechanism UD is closed and the lower door mechanism DD is closed. This is when the combination (the above-described (door opening/closing combination 1) to (door opening/closing combination 2)) other than the combination (the above-described (door opening/closing combination 3)).

The sub CPU 201 selects maintenance that is set to be performed during setting confirmation among the maintenance that can be performed in the gaming machine of Modification 1 (specific maintenance: hereinafter referred to as “maintenance during setting confirmation” as appropriate. ) corresponding to the main display device 210 (a specific maintenance menu screen: a maintenance menu screen whose specific example is shown in FIG. is displayed (S1152), and the process proceeds to step S1153. Here, the display of the maintenance menu screen during setting confirmation (FIG. 67(a)) by the processing of step S1152 is subject to a change in the opening/closing state of the lower door mechanism DD upon receipt of the initialization command (confirm/start). is started without

The sub CPU 201 displays a maintenance menu screen during setting confirmation (each (a) in FIGS. 67 to 71) and a screen for performing or confirming maintenance that can be performed during setting confirmation (each (b) to (c) in FIG. 67). , (b) to (d) of FIG. 68, and (b) of FIGS. 69 to 71 : hereinafter referred to as "maintenance screen during setting confirmation"). It is determined whether or not the attendant has operated the screen displayed on the display device 210 using any of the selection buttons 40l and 40r and the effect button 10a (S1153). If it is determined that any one of the selection buttons 40l and 40r and the effect button 10a has not been operated (NO in S1153), the process proceeds to step S1156. On the other hand, if it is determined that an operation using one of the selection buttons 40l and 40r and the effect button 10a has been performed (YES in S1153), the sub CPU 201 performs operation identification processing to identify the operation content of the attendant. is performed (S1154), maintenance (setting confirmation) processing corresponding to the operation content specified by the staff member is performed (S1155), and the process proceeds to step S1156. Details of the processing of steps S1152 to S1155 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 67 to 71. FIG.

The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not an initialization command (confirm/end) has been received (S1156). If it is determined that the initialization command (confirm/end) has not been received (NO in S1156), the process returns to step S1153. On the other hand, if it is determined that the initialization command (confirmation/end) has been received (YES in S1156), the sub CPU 201 displays the setting confirmation maintenance menu screen (each (a) in FIGS. 67 to 71) and the setting 67 (b) to (c), FIG. 68 (b) to (d), FIGS. 69 to 71 (b)) displayed on the main display device 210 67(a)) is displayed on the main display device 210 in step S1152. (S1157), the maintenance process during setting confirmation in FIG. 64 is terminated, and the process returns to the caller.

[11-8-4-3. Concrete example of maintenance processing during setting change]
A specific example of the maintenance process during setting change in FIG. 63 will be described below with reference to FIG. The main contents to be explained here are the contents of operations performed by the staff in steps S1106 to S1109 in the maintenance process during setting change in FIG. 63 and the contents of processing by the sub CPU 201 corresponding to the contents of operations. Image data for displaying each screen shown in FIGS. 65 to 66 on the main display device 210 is stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 202, and the sub CPU 201 uses the image data stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 202. screen display on the main display device 210 is performed. In the following description, the selection button 40l will be referred to as the "left selection button 40l" and the selection button 40r will be referred to as the "right selection button 40r".

In the maintenance process during setting change in FIG. 63, when the sub CPU 201 receives the initialization command (change/start) (S1101, S1101: YES), the sub CPU 201 displays the characters "setting change in progress" 210a shown in FIG. The changing screen is displayed on the main display device 210 (S1102). In addition, the same background image as that used when an error occurs is used as the background image for the "setting being changed" 210a. It should be noted that it is not necessary to use the same background image as when an error occurs, and a separate background image dedicated to the "changing settings" 210a may be used.

65 is displayed on the main display device 210, and if the upper door mechanism UD is closed and the lower door mechanism DD is closed (YES in S1105 and S1105), The sub CPU 201 switches the display contents of the main display device 210 from the screen during setting change shown in FIG. 65 to the maintenance menu screen during setting change shown in FIG. 66A (S1106).

On each setting-changing maintenance menu screen shown in FIG. 66(a) and FIGS. 66(b) to 66(d) to be described later, the characters "setting-changing maintenance menu" for notifying that the setting-changing maintenance menu screen is displayed 210b is displayed, and selectable items related to maintenance during setting change are ``speaker confirmation ON'' 210b1 (first predetermined maintenance), ``speaker confirmation OFF'' 210b2, and ``effect button confirmation'' 210b3 (second 2 predetermined maintenance), and "Movable accessory confirmation" 210b4 is included.

On the maintenance menu screen during setting change shown in FIG. 66A, which is switched from the screen during setting change shown in FIG. 65, "speaker confirmation ON" 210b1 is being selected and highlighted (enlarged). Note that the highlighted display is not limited to enlarged display, and may be reversed display, for example.

On the setting changing maintenance menu screen (FIG. 66(a)) in which "speaker confirmation ON" 210b1 is being selected, the attendant performs a decision operation using the effect button 10a. In this case, the sub CPU 201 detects the operation of the presentation button 10a (S1107-S1108), and performs maintenance (setting change in progress) processing (S1109) to determine whether sound is normally output from the speakers 35a-35d. Perform speaker output confirmation processing for confirmation. In the speaker output confirmation process, for example, (1) sound is output from the speaker 35a for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), and then the sound output is stopped, and (2) sound is output from the speaker 35b for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). (3) Output the sound from the speaker 35c for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) and then stop outputting the sound; (4) Sound from the speaker 35d for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). and then stop outputting sound, and (5) repeatedly output music for a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) from both the speaker 35c and the speaker 35d. Even if the left selection button 40l or the right selection button 40r is operated by the attendant to move the selected item during the audio output from the speakers 35a to 35d in the speaker output confirmation process, the audio output from the speakers 35a to 35d is performed. is continued.

The staff member operates the right selection button 40r on the setting change maintenance menu screen (FIG. 66(a)) in which the "speaker confirmation ON" 210b1 is being selected. In this case, the sub CPU 201 detects the operation of the right selection button 40r (S1107-S1108), performs maintenance (change setting) processing (S1109), determines that "speaker confirmation OFF" 210b2 is being selected, and displays the cursor (selection target ) is moved to “speaker confirmation OFF” 210b2 to display on the main display device 210 the enlarged maintenance menu screen during setting change shown in FIG. 66(b). Further, when the clerk operates the left selection button 40l on the setting change maintenance menu screen (FIG. 66(a)) in which the "speaker confirmation ON" 210b1 is being selected, the processing of the sub CPU 201 causes the "movable accessory confirmation" 210b4. is being selected, and the main display device 210 displays a maintenance menu screen during setting change shown in FIG.

On the setting changing maintenance menu screen (FIG. 66(b)) in which "speaker confirmation OFF" 210b2 is being selected, the attendant performs a decision operation using the effect button 10a. In this case, the sub CPU 201 detects the operation of the effect button 10a (S1107-S1108), and performs the process of terminating the above-described speaker output confirmation process as the maintenance (setting changing) process (S1109). As a result, the audio output for confirming the output from the speakers 35a to 35d ends. Note that the speaker output confirmation process ends at the timing when the effect button 10a is operated during any of the processes (1) to (5).

The staff member operates the right selection button 40r on the maintenance menu screen during setting change (FIG. 66(b)) in which "speaker confirmation OFF" 210b2 is being selected. In this case, the sub CPU 201 detects the operation of the right selection button 40r (S1107-S1108), and as maintenance (setting change in progress) processing (S1109), selects "confirm effect button" 210b3 and moves the cursor to " 66(c) is displayed on the main display device 210. Then, the main display device 210 moves to the button confirmation for effect" 210b3 and displays the enlarged maintenance menu screen during setting change shown in FIG. 66(c). When the staff member operates the left selection button 40l on the setting change maintenance menu screen (FIG. 66(b)) in which "speaker confirmation OFF" 210b2 is being selected, the sub CPU 201 processes "speaker confirmation ON". 210b1 is selected, and the maintenance menu screen during setting change shown in FIG.

On the setting changing maintenance menu screen (FIG. 66(c)) in which "confirm effect button" 210b3 is being selected, the attendant performs a decision operation using the effect button 10a. In this case, the sub CPU 201 detects the operation of the effect button 10a (S1107-S1108), and as a maintenance (setting changing) process (S1109), determines whether the vibration function of the effect button 10a operates normally. In order to confirm, button vibration activation processing is performed to vibrate the effect button 10a for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds). The vibration function is a function of vibrating the effect button 10a in small increments. For example, during a bonus win suggesting effect, the effect button 10a is vibrated to notify the player that the player is likely to win the bonus. This is a function for notifying before bonus determination notification. Note that the button vibration activation process can be executed even during the speaker output confirmation process. For example, when the effect button 10a is operated while the "confirm button for effect" 210b3 is being selected while the sound is being output from the speakers 35a to 35d, the sound output from the speakers 35a to 35d continues. button 10a is vibrated.

The clerk operates the right selection button 40r on the maintenance menu screen during setting change (FIG. 66(c)) in which "confirm button for effect" 210b3 is being selected. In this case, the sub CPU 201 detects the operation of the right selection button 40r (S1107-S1108), performs maintenance (change setting) processing (S1109), selects "check movable accessory" 210b4, and moves the cursor to " The main display device 210 displays the maintenance menu screen during setting change shown in FIG. In addition, when the staff member operates the left selection button 40l on the setting change maintenance menu screen (Fig. 66(c)) in which the "confirm button for effect" 210b3 is being selected, the processing of the sub CPU 201 "Speaker confirmation OFF" 210b2 is selected, and the main display device 210 displays the setting change maintenance menu screen shown in FIG.

The clerk performs a decision operation using the production button 10a on the setting change maintenance menu screen (FIG. 66(d)) in which the "movable accessory confirmation" 210b4 is being selected. In this case, the sub CPU 201 detects the operation of the effect button 10a (S1107-S1108), and performs maintenance (setting changing) processing (S1109) to check whether the movable accessory 41 operates normally. Movable accessory test operation processing is performed. When the power is turned on, the movable accessory 41 operates according to a predetermined sequence. In the movable accessory test activation process, for example, the movable accessory 41 is operated based on the predetermined sequence. The movable accessory 41 is an accessory used for game effects. For example, by activating the movable accessory at a predetermined timing during the effect suggesting the winning of a bonus, there is a high possibility that the player wins the bonus. This is notified before bonus determination notification. The movable accessory test activation process can be executed even during the speaker output confirmation process. For example, when the production button 10a is operated while the "movable role object confirmation" 210b4 is being selected during audio output from the speakers 35a to 35d, the audio output from the speakers 35a to 35d continues and the movable The accessory 41 is made to operate.

When the clerk operates the left selection button 40l on the setting change maintenance menu screen (Fig. 66(d)) in which the ``confirm movable accessory'' 210b4 is being selected, the sub CPU 201 processes the ``confirm button for effect'' 210b3. is being selected, the setting change maintenance menu screen shown in FIG. 210b1 is selected, and the maintenance menu screen during setting change shown in FIG.

It should be noted that the sub CPU 201, while the maintenance menu screen during setting change (FIGS. 66A to 66D) is displayed, allows the combination of the possible open/closed states of the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD ((door Door opening/closing combination 2 (upper door mechanism UD is closed and lower door mechanism DD is open) or door opening/closing combination 1 (upper door mechanism UD is open) When the lower door mechanism DD is in the open state), the content displayed on the main display device 210 changes from the setting changing maintenance menu screen (FIGS. 66A to 66D) to the setting changing screen (FIG. 65). (S1110, S1102). Therefore, during the setting change, unless the door opening/closing combination 3 (the upper door mechanism UD is closed and the lower door mechanism DD is closed), the setting change maintenance menu screen is not displayed, and the setting change maintenance menu screen is displayed. Maintenance cannot be performed while the settings are being changed.

[11-8-4-4. Concrete example of maintenance processing during setting confirmation]
A specific example of the maintenance process during setting confirmation in FIG. 64 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 67 to 71. FIG. The main contents to be explained here are the contents of operations performed by the staff in steps S1152 to S1155 in the maintenance process during setting confirmation in FIG. Image data for displaying each screen shown in FIGS. 67 to 71 on the main display device 210 is stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 202, and the sub CPU 201 uses the image data stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 202. screen display on the main display device 210 is performed.

In the setting-confirming maintenance process in FIG. 64, when the sub CPU 201 receives an initialization command (confirm/start) (YES in S1501 and S1501), the sub-CPU 201 displays the setting-confirming maintenance menu screen shown in FIG. 67(a). is displayed on the main display device 210 (S1152).

On each setting-confirming maintenance menu screen shown in FIG. 67(a) and each of FIGS. Menu" 210c is displayed, and selectable items related to setting confirmation maintenance are "maximum/standard volume setting" 210c1, "time setting" 210c2, "eco mode setting" 210c3, "error history" 210c4, and "setting change history” 210c5.

On the maintenance menu screen during setting confirmation shown in FIG. 67(a) displayed upon receipt of the initialization command (confirm/start), the "maximum/standard volume setting" 210c1 is being selected, and the "maximum/standard volume setting" is displayed. The "maximum/standard volume setting" 210c1 is highlighted (enlarged) to notify that the 210c1 is being selected. Note that the highlighted display is not limited to enlarged display, and may be reversed display, for example.

On the setting confirmation maintenance menu screen (FIG. 67(a)) in which the "maximum/standard volume setting" 210c1 is being selected, the attendant performs a decision operation using the production button 10a. In this case, the sub CPU 201 detects the operation of the effect button 10a (S1153 to S1154), and displays the display contents of the main display device 210 as shown in FIG. The setting confirmation maintenance menu screen is switched to the maximum/standard volume setting screen (one of the setting confirmation maintenance screens) shown in FIG. 67(b).

In each maximum/standard volume setting screen shown in FIG. 67(b) and FIG. 67(c) described later, it is notified that it is a screen for setting the maximum volume and standard volume of the speakers 35a, 35b, 35c, and 35d. The characters "maximum/standard volume setting" 210c1a for setting the maximum volume are displayed, and the area of "maximum volume setting" 210c1b (first specific maintenance) for setting the maximum volume and " 210c1c (second specific maintenance) area is included. The area of "maximum volume setting" 210c1b is an area for setting the maximum volume that the user (player) can set from volume level 1 to volume level 6 on the volume setting screen of FIG. , and the higher the value of the volume level, the higher the volume. In the area of "maximum volume setting" 210c1b, the value in the square ("1" to "6") is the value of the volume level, and the volume level of the maximum volume to be set is Specifically, the squares corresponding to volume levels below the set volume level are shaded, and the squares corresponding to volume levels above the set volume level are not shaded. Is displayed. For example, when the volume level to be set is volume level 3, as shown in FIG. It is displayed so that the inside of the corresponding square is without diagonal lines. In the area of "standard volume setting" 210c1c, the volume (hereinafter referred to as "standard volume") set when the game is not played for a certain period of time or when the setting is changed is set from volume level 1 to volume level 6. This is an area for setting, and the higher the value of the volume level, the louder the volume. In the area of "standard volume setting" 210c1c, the value in the square ("1" to "6") is the value of the volume level, and the volume level of the standard volume to be set is the value without the diagonal line in the square below it or Specifically, the squares corresponding to volume levels below the set volume level are shaded, and the squares corresponding to volume levels above the set volume level are not shaded. Is displayed. For example, when the volume level to be set is volume level 2, as shown in FIG. It is displayed so that the inside of the corresponding square is without diagonal lines. Note that the volume levels of the maximum volume and the standard volume may be other than volume level 1 to volume level 6, respectively.

On the maximum/standard volume setting screen of FIG. 67(b), which is switched from the setting confirmation maintenance menu screen of FIG. displayed). Note that the highlighted display is not limited to enlarged and thick frame display, and may be, for example, enlarged display. The volume level of the maximum volume displayed in the "maximum volume setting" 210c1b is the volume level stored in the maximum volume storage area (not shown) of the sub-RAM 203 when the screen is switched (in the example of FIG. 67(b), volume level 3), and the volume level of the standard volume displayed in the "standard volume setting" 210c1c is the volume level stored in the standard volume storage area (not shown) of the sub-RAM 203 (not shown in FIG. 67(b)) at the time of switching. An example is volume level 2).

The clerk operates the left selection button 40l on the maximum/standard volume setting screen (FIG. 67(b)) in which the "maximum volume setting" 210c1b is being selected. In this case, the sub CPU 201 detects the operation of the left selection button 40l (S1153 to S1154), and as maintenance (setting confirmation) processing (S1155), lowers the volume level of the maximum volume by one level to volume level 2, The main display device 210 displays the maximum/standard volume setting screen in which the volume level display in the area of the “maximum volume setting” 210c1b is volume level 2. FIG. Further, the clerk operates the right selection button 40r on the maximum/standard volume setting screen (FIG. 67(b)) in which the "maximum volume setting" 210c1b is being selected. In this case, the sub CPU 201 detects the operation of the right selection button 40r (S1153 to S1154), raises the volume level of the maximum volume by one level to volume level 4, and performs maintenance (setting confirmation) processing (S1155). The main display device 210 displays the maximum/standard volume setting screen in which the volume level display in the area of the “maximum volume setting” 210c1b is volume level 4. FIG.

On the maximum/standard volume setting screen (FIG. 67(b)) in which the "maximum volume setting" 210c1b is being selected, the attendant performs a decision operation using the effect button 10a. In this case, the sub CPU 201 detects the operation of the effect button 10a (S1153 to S1154), and stores it in the maximum volume storage area (not shown) of the sub RAM 203 as maintenance (setting confirmation) processing (S1155). The volume level of the maximum volume is the volume level of the maximum volume selected using the left selection button 40l and the right selection button 40r (without the staff operating the left selection button 40l and the right selection button 40r). When the production button 10a is operated, the maximum volume level stored in the maximum volume storage area (not shown) of the sub-RAM 203 before switching from the setting confirmation maintenance menu screen to the maximum/standard volume setting screen). Update. Further, the sub CPU 201 selects the "standard volume setting" 210c1c as the maintenance (setting confirmation) process (S1155), and sets the "standard volume setting" 210c1c to the maximum volume shown in FIG. - Display the standard volume setting screen on the main display device 210 . In addition, before the clerk performs the decision operation using the production button 10a, it is confirmed whether the initialization command (confirm/end) has been received, and the clerk uses the production button 10a to perform the decision operation. If an initialization command (confirmation/end) is received before the maintenance (setting change) process is completed without updating the maximum volume level.

The clerk operates the left selection button 40l on the maximum/standard volume setting screen (FIG. 67(c)) in which the "standard volume setting" 210c1c is being selected. In this case, the sub CPU 201 detects the operation of the left selection button 40l (S1153-S1154), and as a maintenance (setting confirmation) process (S1155), lowers the volume level of the standard volume by one level to volume level 1, The main display device 210 displays the maximum/standard volume setting screen in which the volume level display in the area of the “standard volume setting” 210 c 1 c is volume level 1 . Further, the clerk operates the right selection button 40r on the maximum/standard volume setting screen (FIG. 67(c)) in which the "standard volume setting" 210c1c is being selected. In this case, the sub CPU 201 detects the operation of the right selection button 40r (S1153 to S1154), raises the volume level of the standard volume by one level to volume level 3, and performs maintenance (setting confirmation) processing (S1155). The main display device 210 displays the maximum/standard volume setting screen in which the volume level display in the area of the “standard volume setting” 210 c 1 c is volume level 3 .

On the maximum/standard volume setting screen (FIG. 67(c)) in which the "standard volume setting" 210c1c is being selected, the attendant performs a decision operation using the effect button 10a. In this case, the sub CPU 201 detects the operation of the effect button 10a (S1153-S1154), and stores it in the standard volume storage area (not shown) of the sub RAM 203 as a maintenance (setting confirmation) process (S1155). The volume level of the standard volume is the volume level of the standard volume selected using the left selection button 40l and the right selection button 40r (without the operation of the left selection button 40l and the right selection button 40r by the staff). When the production button 10a is operated, the volume level of the standard volume stored in the standard volume storage area (not shown) of the sub-RAM 203 before switching from the setting confirmation maintenance menu screen to the maximum/standard volume setting screen). Update. In addition, the sub CPU 201 changes the display contents of the main display device 210 from the maximum/standard volume setting screen shown in FIG. 67(c) to the setting confirmation shown in FIG. Switch to the middle maintenance menu screen.

The staff member operates the right selection button 40r on the setting confirmation maintenance menu screen (FIG. 67(a)) in which the "maximum/standard volume setting" 210c1 is being selected. In this case, the sub CPU 201 detects the operation of the right selection button 40r (S1153 to S1154), and as a maintenance (setting confirmation) process (S1155), selects "time setting" 210c2 and moves the cursor to "time setting". 210c2 to display, on the main display device 210, the enlarged display of the setting-confirming maintenance menu screen shown in FIG. In addition, when the staff member operates the left selection button 40l on the setting confirmation maintenance menu screen (FIG. 67(a)) in which the "maximum/standard volume setting" 210c1 is being selected, the processing of the sub CPU 201 displays the "setting change history". 210c5 is selected, and the main display device 210 displays a maintenance menu screen during setting confirmation shown in FIG.

On the setting confirmation maintenance menu screen (FIG. 68(a)) in which the "time setting" 210c2 is selected, the attendant performs a decision operation using the effect button 10a. In this case, the sub CPU 201 detects the operation of the effect button 10a (S1153-S1154), and displays the display contents of the main display device 210 as shown in FIG. The setting-confirming maintenance menu screen is switched to the time setting screen (one of the setting-confirming maintenance screens) shown in FIG. 68(b).

On each time setting screen shown in FIG. 68(b) and FIGS. 68(c) to (d) to be described later, characters "time setting" 210c2a are displayed to notify that the screen is for time setting. In addition, an area of "time setting" 210c2b for setting the time of the clock of the gaming machine of the modified example 1, "determine" 210c2c operated when setting the time of the clock, and canceling the setting of the time of the clock. "Cancel" 210c2d is included which is operated when In the area of "time setting" 210c2b, "year (lower two digits of the Christian calendar)", "month", "day", "hour" and "minute" can be set as the set time of the clock.

In the time setting screen of FIG. 68(b), which is switched from the setting confirmation maintenance menu screen of FIG. The last two digits of the Christian era) are being selected and surrounded by a square. Immediately after this screen is switched, the left and right selection buttons 40l and 40r can be used to select the year (lower two digits of the Christian era), 'enter' 210c2c, and 'cancel' 210c2d in the area of 'time setting' 210c2b. You can select items such as

On the time setting screen of FIG. 68(b) in which "Year (lower two digits of the Christian era)" is being selected and items are being selected, the attendant performs a decision operation using the effect button 10a. In this case, the sub CPU 201 detects the operation of the effect button 10a (S1153-S1154), and performs the maintenance (setting confirmation) process (S1155) to change the value of the selected "year (lower two digits of the Christian era)". Set to the state to be set. On the time setting screen of FIG. 68(b) in which the "year (lower two digits of the Christian era)" is to be set, the attendant operates the left selection button 40l or the right selection button 40r, and the sub CPU 201 causes the left selection. button 40l or right selection button 40r (S1153-S1154), and as maintenance (setting confirmation) processing (S1155), if the left selection button 40l is "year (lower two digits of the Christian era)" is decremented by 1, and if the right selection button 40r is selected, the value of "year (lower two digits of the Christian era)" is incremented by 1. On the time setting screen of FIG. 68(b) in which the "year (lower two digits of the Christian era)" is set, the attendant operates the effect button 10a, and the sub CPU 201 detects the operation of the effect button 10a. (S1153-S1154), and as maintenance (setting confirmation) processing (S1155), the item is returned to the state of selecting the item, and the item being selected at this time is "Year (lower two digits of the Christian era)".

On the time setting screen of FIG. 68(b) in which "Year (lower two digits of the Christian era)" is being selected and an item is being selected, the staff operates the right selection button 40r. In this case, the sub CPU 201 detects the operation of the right selection button 40r (S1153-S1154), and as maintenance (setting confirmation) processing (S1155), selects "month" in the area of "time setting" 210c2b. 68(c) is displayed on the main display device 210 by moving the cursor to "month" and encircling it with a square frame. Also, the staff operates the left selection button 40l on the time setting screen of FIG. In this case, the sub CPU 201 detects the operation of the left selection button 40l (S1153 to S1154), and as maintenance (setting confirmation) processing (S1155), selects "cancel" 210c2d and moves the cursor to "cancel" 210c2d. , and the highlighted (enlarged) time setting screen is displayed on the main display device 210 . Note that the highlighted display is not limited to enlarged display, and may be reversed display, for example.

Time setting screen of FIG. 68(c) with "month" selected, time setting screen of FIG. 68(c) with "day" selected, time setting screen with "hour" selected, "minute" selected The processing contents of the sub CPU 201 in response to the operation of the production button 10a and the left/right selection production buttons 0l and 40r on the time setting screen in the middle are the production buttons 10a, It corresponds to the processing contents of the sub CPU 201 for the operation of the left/right selection production buttons 0l and 40r. When the left selection button 40l is operated on the time setting screen of FIG. 68(c) in which the "month" is selected and an item is to be selected, the "year (lower two digits of the Christian era)" is displayed. It becomes a selection target, and when the right selection button 40r is operated, "day" becomes a selection target. Further, when the left selection button 40l is operated on the time setting screen in which the "day" is being selected and an item is being selected, the "month" is selected, and the right selection button 40r is operated. In this case, "time" is selected. When the left selection button 40l is operated on the time setting screen in which "hour" is being selected and an item is being selected, "day" is selected, and the right selection button 40r is operated. In this case, "minute" is selected. Further, when the left selection button 40l is operated on the time setting screen in which the "minute" is being selected and an item is being selected, the "hour" is selected, and the right selection button 40r is operated. In this case, "determine" 210c2c is selected and displayed in an enlarged manner (see FIG. 68(d)).

On the time setting screen (Fig. 68(d)) where "determine" 210c2c is being selected, the attendant performs a determination operation using the effect button 10a. In this case, the sub CPU 201 detects the operation of the effect button 10a (S1153 to S1154), and performs maintenance (setting confirmation) processing (S1155). 68(d) to the maintenance menu during setting confirmation shown in FIG. 68(a).

The staff member operates the right selection button 40r on the time setting screen (FIG. 68(d)) in which "determine" 210c2c is being selected. In this case, the sub CPU 201 determines that "cancel" 210c2d is being selected, moves the cursor to "cancel" 210c2d, and displays the enlarged time setting screen on the main display device 210. FIG. In addition, when the staff member operates the left selection button 40l on the time setting screen (Fig. 68(d)) where "OK" 210c2c is being selected, the "minute" in the area of "time setting" 210c2b is selected. .

On the time setting screen where "cancel" 210c2d is being selected, the attendant performs a decision operation using the effect button 10a. In this case, the sub CPU 201 detects the operation of the effect button 10a (S1153 to S1154), and performs maintenance (setting confirmation) processing (S1155). The display contents of the main display device 210 are switched from the time setting screen to the maintenance menu during setting confirmation shown in FIG.

When the left selection button 40l is operated by the staff on the time setting screen (FIG. 68(d)) in which "Cancel" 210c2d is being selected, "Confirm" 210c2c becomes the selection target (see FIG. 68(d)), and the staff When the right selection button 40r is operated, the "year (lower two digits of the Christian era)" in the area of "time setting" 210c2b is selected (see FIG. 68(b)).

The staff member operates the right selection button 40r on the setting confirmation maintenance menu screen (FIG. 68(a)) in which the "time setting" 210c2 is being selected. In this case, the sub CPU 201 detects the operation of the right selection button 40r (S1153 to S1154), performs maintenance (setting confirmation) processing (S1155), selects "eco mode setting" 210c3, and moves the cursor to "eco mode setting" 210c3. Mode setting” 210c3, and the main display device 210 displays the enlarged setting confirmation maintenance menu screen shown in FIG. 69(a). Further, when the staff member operates the left selection button 40l on the setting confirmation maintenance menu screen (Fig. 68(a)) in which the "time setting" 210c2 is being selected, the processing of the sub CPU 201 causes the "maximum/standard volume setting" 210c1. is being selected, and the main display device 210 displays the setting confirmation maintenance menu screen shown in FIG. 67(a).

On the setting confirmation maintenance menu screen (FIG. 69(a)) in which the "eco mode setting" 210c3 is being selected, the attendant uses the production button 10a to perform a decision operation. In this case, the sub CPU 201 detects the operation of the effect button 10a (S1153 to S1154), and as maintenance (setting confirmation) processing (S1155), displays the content displayed on the main display device 210 from the maintenance menu screen during setting confirmation. Switch to the eco mode setting screen (one of the maintenance screens during setting confirmation) shown in FIG. 69(b).

The eco mode setting screen shown in FIG. 69(b) includes text "set eco mode" 210c3a for notifying that the screen is for setting the eco mode, and text asking about the content of processing (for example, "turn on eco mode"). Do you want to turn it on?" 210c3b) is displayed, and "ON" 210c3c and "OFF" 210c3d for setting the eco mode are included.

The eco mode is a function of reducing the power consumption of the gaming machine of Modification 1. When the eco mode is set to ON, if a predetermined condition is met during a game or during standby, for example, the main display device 210, the reels, etc. Lamps, lower panel lighting, etc. are turned off or dimmed. The game machine of Modification 1 enters the eco mode when the storage content of the eco mode storage area (not shown) is "ON", and does not enter the eco mode (is a mode in which power consumption is not reduced) when it is "OFF". ).

On the eco mode setting screen of FIG. 69(b), which is switched from the maintenance menu screen during setting confirmation of FIG. Do you want to turn on eco mode?" 210c3b is displayed, and "OFF" 210c3d is being selected and highlighted (enlarged). When the content stored in the eco mode storage area (not shown) of the sub-RAM 203 is "ON", the message "Do you want to turn off the eco mode?" (enlarged display). Note that the highlighted display is not limited to enlarged display, and may be reversed display, for example.

The staff member operates either the left or right selection button 40l or 40r on the eco mode setting screen (FIG. 69(b)) in which "OFF" 210c3d is being selected. In this case, the sub CPU 201 detects the operation of either the left or right selection button 40l or 40r (S1153 to S1154), and selects "ON" 210c3c as the maintenance (setting confirmation) process (S1155). The cursor is moved to "ON" 210c3c to enlarge the display, and the eco mode setting screen displaying "Do you want to turn off the eco mode?" is displayed on the main display device 210.

The staff member operates either the left or right selection button 40l or 40r on the eco mode setting screen in which "ON" 210c3c is being selected. In this case, the sub CPU 201 detects that one of the left and right selection buttons 40l and 40r has been operated (S1153-S1154), and selects "OFF" 210c3d as a maintenance (setting confirmation) process (S1155). The cursor is moved to "OFF" 210c3d to enlarge the display, and the eco mode setting screen (FIG. 69(b)) displaying "Do you want to turn eco mode ON?"

On the eco mode setting screen (FIG. 69(b)) in which "OFF" 210c3d is being selected, the attendant uses the effect button 10a to perform a decision operation. In this case, the sub CPU 201 detects the operation of the effect button 10a (S1153 to S1154), and performs maintenance (setting confirmation) processing (S1155) by changing the storage contents of the eco mode storage area (not shown) of the sub RAM 203 to " OFF", and the display contents of the main display device 210 are switched from the eco mode setting screen shown in FIG. 69(b) to the maintenance menu screen during setting confirmation shown in FIG. 69(a).

On the eco mode setting screen in which "ON" 210c3c is being selected, the attendant uses the production button 10a to perform a decision operation. In this case, the sub CPU 201 detects the operation of the effect button 10a (S1153 to S1154), and performs maintenance (setting confirmation) processing (S1155) by changing the storage contents of the eco mode storage area (not shown) of the sub RAM 203 to " ON", and the display content of the main display device 210 is switched from the eco mode setting screen to the maintenance menu screen during setting confirmation shown in FIG. 69(a).

The staff member operates the right selection button 40r on the setting confirmation maintenance menu screen (FIG. 69(a)) in which the "eco mode setting" 210c3 is being selected. In this case, the sub CPU 201 detects the operation of the right selection button 40r (S1153 to S1154), performs maintenance (setting confirmation) processing (S1155), selects "error history" 210c4, and moves the cursor to "error history 210c4 to display on the main display device 210 the maintenance menu screen during setting confirmation shown in FIG. Further, when the staff member operates the left selection button 40l on the setting confirmation maintenance menu screen (FIG. 69(a)) in which the "eco mode setting" 210c3 is selected, the "time setting" 210c2 is selected by the processing of the sub CPU 201. 68(a), the main display device 210 displays the maintenance menu screen during setting confirmation shown in FIG. 68(a).

On the setting confirmation maintenance menu screen (FIG. 70(a)) in which the "error history" 210c4 is selected, the attendant performs a determination operation using the effect button 10a. In this case, the sub CPU 201 detects the operation of the effect button 10a (S1153 to S1154), and displays the display contents of the main display device 210 as shown in FIG. The setting-confirming maintenance menu screen is switched to the error history screen (one of the setting-confirming maintenance screens) shown in FIG. 70(b).

The error history screen shown in FIG. 70(b) displays characters "error history" 210c4a for notifying that the screen is for error history confirmation, and includes an error history display area 210c4b. . The error history display area 210c4b displays six error information (error code, error name, error date and time). Although the error information for six times is displayed, more error information may be displayed.

On the error history screen of FIG. 70B, which is switched from the setting-confirming maintenance menu screen of FIG. The information is stored in the error history display area 210c4b. When receiving an error command including error information from the main CPU 101 , the sub CPU 201 stores the error information included in the error command in an error storage area (not shown) of the sub RAM 203 . When the left selection button 40l is operated, error information for six times before the displayed error information is displayed, and when the right selection button 40r is operated, the error information for six times after the displayed error information is displayed. The error information for each time is read from the error storage area (not shown) of the sub-RAM 203 and displayed in the error history display area 210c4b. Further, the error storage area (not shown) of the sub-RAM 203 can store error information for a maximum of 150 times, and the maximum number of times that can be stored may be other than 150 times.

On the error history screen shown in FIG. 70(b), the attendant uses the production button 10a to perform a decision operation. In this case, the sub CPU 201 detects the operation of the effect button 10a (S1153 to S1154), and displays the display contents of the main display device 210 as shown in FIG. The error history screen is switched to the setting confirmation maintenance menu screen shown in FIG. 70(a).

The staff member operates the right selection button 40r on the setting confirmation maintenance menu screen (FIG. 70(a)) in which the "error history" 210c4 is being selected. In this case, the sub CPU 201 detects the operation of the right selection button 40r (S1153 to S1154), performs maintenance (setting confirmation) processing (S1155), selects "setting change history" 210c5, and moves the cursor to "set Change History” 210c5, and the main display device 210 displays the enlarged setting confirmation maintenance menu screen shown in FIG. 71(a). Further, when the staff member operates the left selection button 40l on the setting confirmation maintenance menu screen (Fig. 70(a)) in which the "error history" 210c4 is selected, the "eco mode" 210c3 is being selected by the processing of the sub CPU 201. Then, the maintenance menu screen during setting confirmation shown in FIG.

On the setting confirmation maintenance menu screen (FIG. 71(a)) in which the "setting change history" 210c5 is being selected, the attendant performs a decision operation using the effect button 10a. In this case, the sub CPU 201 detects the operation of the effect button 10a (S1153 to S1154), and displays the display contents of the main display device 210 as shown in FIG. The setting confirmation maintenance menu screen is switched to the setting change history screen (one of the setting confirmation maintenance screens) shown in FIG. 71(b).

On the setting change history screen shown in FIG. 71(b), characters "setting change history" 210c5a are displayed to notify that the screen is for confirmation of the setting change history, and a setting change history display area 210c5b is displayed. It is included. The setting change history display area 210c5b displays setting change information for six times (setting values after change, date and time of change). In addition, although setting change information for six times is displayed, more error information may be displayed.

On the setting change history screen of FIG. 71B, which is switched from the setting confirmation maintenance menu screen of FIG. is stored in the setting change history display area 210c5b. When the sub CPU 201 receives an initialization command (change/end) from the main CPU 101, the setting value included in the initialization command (change/end) is set as the changed setting value, and the initialization command (change/end) is changed. • Stores the date and time of receiving the "end" in the setting change storage area (not shown) of the sub-RAM 203 as the change date and time. When the left selection button 40l is operated, the setting change information for six times before the setting change information being displayed is selected, and when the right selection button 40r is operated, the setting change information being displayed is selected. The setting change information for the last six times is read from the setting change history display area 210c5b of the sub-RAM 203 and displayed in the setting change history display area 210c5b. A setting change storage area (not shown) of the sub-RAM 203 can store setting change information for a maximum of 30 times, and the maximum number of times that can be stored may be other than 30.

On the setting change history screen (FIG. 71(b)), the clerk performs a decision operation using the effect button 10a. In this case, the sub CPU 201 detects the operation of the effect button 10a (S1153 to S1154), and displays the display contents of the main display device 210 as shown in FIG. The setting change history screen is switched to the setting confirmation maintenance menu screen shown in FIG. 71(b).

When the clerk operates the left selection button 40l on the setting confirmation maintenance menu screen (FIG. 71(a)) with the "setting change history" 210c5 being selected, the "error history" 210c4 is being selected by the processing of the sub CPU 201. 70(c) is displayed on the main display device 210, and when the clerk operates the right selection button 40r, the sub CPU 201 processes "maximum/standard volume setting". 210c1 is selected, and the main display device 210 displays the setting-confirming maintenance menu screen shown in FIG.

[11-8-5. Specific examples of user menus, etc.]
A specific example of the user menu screen and the volume adjustment screen transitioned from the user menu in the gaming machine of Modification 1 will be described below with reference to FIG.

For example, the player operates the production button 10a after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed since the player finished playing the game. The sub CPU 201 detects the operation of the effect button 10a, and switches the display contents of the main display device 210 from the normal screen to the user menu screen shown in FIG. 72(a) including items such as confirmation or setting by the user.

On the user menu screen shown in FIG. 72(a), characters "user menu" 210d for notifying that it is the user menu screen are displayed, and symbol arrays 210d1 of the respective reels 3L, 3C, and 3R and game history are displayed. 210d2 is displayed, and includes an item "volume adjustment" 210d3 operated by the user when adjusting the volume and an item "end" 210d4 used when the user switches from the user menu screen to the normal screen.

As shown in FIG. 72(a), the symbol array 210d1 is displayed on the left side of the screen of the main display device 210, and a predetermined number (for example, 20) of symbols are displayed on each of the left reel 3L, middle reel 3C, and right reel 3R. Is displayed. The game history 210d2 is displayed in the center of the screen of the main display device 210, and the display contents of the game history include, for example, the number of games played, the number of big wins (number of bonuses), the probability of big wins (bonus probability), and the like. be. Below the game history display area of the main display device 210, "volume adjustment" 210d3 and "end" 210d4 are displayed side by side.

In the user menu screen of FIG. 72(a), which is switched from the normal screen, "volume adjustment" 210d3 is being selected and highlighted (enlarged). Note that the highlighted display is not limited to enlarged display, and may be reversed display, for example.

On the user menu screen (Fig. 72(a)) in which "volume adjustment" 210d3 is being selected, the player performs a determination operation using the effect button 10a. In this case, the sub CPU 201 detects the operation of the effect button 10a, and switches the display contents of the main display device 210 from the user menu screen shown in FIG. 72(a) to the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 72(b).

The volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 72(b) is a screen on which the user can adjust the volume of sounds output from the speakers 35a, 35b, 35c, and 35d. The text "volume adjustment" 210d3a for notifying that the screen is for setting the volume is displayed, and an area for "output volume setting" 210d3b for setting the output volume is included. " 210d3b area above the maximum/standard volume setting screen (Fig. 67(b)) marker 210d3c indicating the maximum volume set on the "output volume setting" 210d3b area below the maximum/standard volume setting screen ( A marker 210d3d pointing to the standard volume set in FIG. 67(b)) is displayed. The area of "output volume setting" 210d3b allows the player to adjust the output volume of the speakers 35a, 35b, 35c, and 35d from volume level 1 to the maximum/standard volume setting screen (FIG. 67(b)). This is an area for setting from the level, and the higher the value of the volume level, the louder the volume. In the area of "output volume setting" 210d3b, the value in the square ("1" to "6") is the value of the volume level, and the volume level of the output volume to be set is either Specifically, the squares corresponding to volume levels below the set volume level are shaded, and the squares corresponding to volume levels above the set volume level are not shaded. Is displayed. For example, when the volume level to be set is volume level 3, as shown in FIG. It is displayed so that the inside of the corresponding square is without diagonal lines.

In the volume adjustment of FIG. 72(b), which is switched from the user menu screen of FIG. 72(a), the volume level of the output volume displayed in the "output volume setting" 210c1b is changed to the output volume storage area of the sub RAM 203 when the screen is switched. (not shown) (volume level 3 in the example of FIG. 72(b)), and the maximum volume level indicated by the marker 210d3c is the maximum volume storage area ( 72(b)), and the volume level of the standard volume indicated by the marker 210d3d is the standard volume storage area (not shown) of the sub-RAM 203 when the screen is switched. 72(b) (volume level 3 in the example of FIG. 72(b)).

The player operates the left selection button 40l on the volume adjustment screen (FIG. 72(b)) where the volume level of the output volume is volume level 3. In this case, the sub CPU 201 detects the operation of the left selection button 40l, lowers the volume level of the output volume by one level to volume level 2, and the volume level display in the area of "output volume setting" 210d3b changes to volume level 2. is displayed on the main display device 210 . Note that when the sub CPU 201 detects the operation of the left selection button 40l by the player on the volume adjustment screen where the volume level of the output volume is volume level 1, the volume level of the output volume is reduced to level 1 without lowering the volume level of the output volume by one level. leave.

When the sub CPU 201 detects the operation of the right selection button 40r by the player on the volume adjustment screen in which the volume level of the output volume is less than the volume level of the maximum volume, the volume level of the output volume is increased by one step, and "output volume setting ' 210d3b, the volume adjustment screen is displayed on the main display device 210 with the volume level being raised by one step. Further, the player operates the right selection button 40r on the volume adjustment screen (FIG. 72(b)) where the volume level of the output volume is volume level 3, which is the maximum volume. In this case, if the sub CPU 201 detects the operation of the right selection button 40r and raises the volume level of the output volume by one step, the volume level of the output volume will exceed the maximum volume level 3, so the volume level of the output volume should be raised by one step. Leave the volume level at 3.

The player performs a decision operation using the effect button 10a on the volume adjustment screen (FIG. 72(b)). In this case, the sub CPU 201 detects the operation of the effect button 10a and changes the volume level of the output volume stored in the output volume storage area (not shown) of the sub RAM 203 to the left selection button 40l or the right selection button. Volume level of the output volume selected using 40r (if the effect button 10a is operated without the player operating the left selection button 40l or the right selection button 40r, the volume adjustment screen is displayed from the user menu (volume level of the output volume stored in the output volume storage area (not shown) of the sub-RAM 203 before switching to ). Further, the sub CPU 201 changes the display contents of the main display device 210 to the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. ) to switch to the user menu screen.

The player operates the left selection button 40l or the right selection button 40r on the user menu screen (Fig. 72(a)) in which "volume adjustment" 210d3 is being selected. In this case, the sub CPU 201 detects the operation of the left selection button 40l or the right selection button 40r, determines that "end" 210d4 is being selected, moves the cursor to "end" 210d4, and displays the enlarged user menu screen. It is displayed on the main display device 210 .

On the user menu screen in which "End" 210d4 is being selected, the player performs a determination operation using the effect button 10a. In this case, the sub CPU 201 detects the operation of the effect button 10a and switches the display content of the main display device 210 from the user menu screen to the normal screen. It should be noted that the user menu screen may be switched to the normal screen when the effect button 10a or the like is not operated for a specific period of time (for example, 30 seconds) on the user menu screen. Alternatively, the screen may be switched to the demo screen instead.

The user menu screen can be displayed after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed since the end of the game and until the next game start operation is performed. can be displayed later. It can also be displayed in a state waiting for the start of the next game (replay game) after winning the replay combination. It should be noted that when there is an operation to start the next game, the screen is forcibly switched to the normal screen even if the user does not perform an operation to switch to the normal screen.

Here, control of the volume level of the output volume of the speakers 35a to 35d by the sub CPU 201 will be described. The volume level of the output volume of the speakers 35 a to 35 d controlled by the sub CPU 201 is the volume level of the output volume stored in the output volume storage area (not shown) of the sub RAM 203 .

When the player adjusts the output sound volume using the sound volume adjustment screen of FIG. By adjusting the output volume using the adjustment screen, the output volume is controlled to the volume level (volume level set by the player) stored in the output volume storage area (not shown) of the sub RAM 203 .

Further, when the game has not been played for a certain period of time, the sub CPU 201 changes the volume level of the output volume stored in the output volume storage area (not shown) of the sub RAM 203 to the maximum/standard volume setting of FIG. 67(c). By setting the standard volume using the screen, the volume level of the standard volume stored in the standard volume storage area (not shown) of the sub RAM 203 is updated, and the volume level of the output volume of the speakers 35a to 35d is updated. Control is performed to the volume level of the output volume stored in the output volume storage area (not shown) (the volume level of the standard volume set by the staff).

Further, when the sub CPU 201 receives an initialization command (change/start) when the power is turned on (on the main control board 71 side, step S1001 becomes YES in the setting change processing of FIG. 61 performed when the power is turned on, and step S1002 becomes YES, and a change in the state of the reset switch 53 is accepted and the setting value can be changed (setting change state)), the output stored in the output volume storage area (not shown) of the sub RAM 203 The volume level of the volume is updated to the volume level of the standard volume stored in the standard volume storage area (not shown) of the sub RAM 203 by setting the standard volume using the maximum/standard volume setting screen of FIG. The volume level of the output volume of the speakers 35a to 35d is controlled to the volume level of the updated output volume stored in the output volume storage area (not shown) of the sub RAM 203 (the volume level of the standard volume set by the staff).

Further, when the sub CPU 201 does not receive an initialization command (change/start) when the power is turned on (on the main control board 71 side, step S1001 is NO in the setting change process of FIG. 61 performed when the power is turned on, and If step S1002 is either NO and the setting change state in which the state change of the reset switch 53 is received and the setting value can be changed), the output volume storage area (not shown) of the sub RAM 203 The volume level of the output volume is maintained without being updated to the volume level of the standard volume stored in the standard volume storage area (not shown) of the sub RAM 203 . In this case, the volume level of the output volume of the speakers 35a to 35d after the power is turned on is the same as the volume level of the output volume of the speakers 35a to 35d before the power is turned off.

[11-8-6. effect]
According to the gaming machine of Modification 1 above, the staff changes the setting value by performing the operation of opening the lower door mechanism DD and the operation of turning on the setting key-type switch 52 and then turning on the power. Furthermore, when the door mechanisms (lower door mechanism DD, upper door mechanism UD) are closed, the maintenance menu screen during setting change is displayed and maintenance during setting change can be performed. It is possible to continuously perform the value change and the maintenance during the setting change, thereby improving the work efficiency.

Also, the staff member can check the setting values by opening the lower door mechanism DD and turning on the setting key-type switch 52 after the power is turned on, and can perform maintenance during setting confirmation. To improve the work efficiency by displaying a menu screen and performing maintenance during setting confirmation, so that a staff member can continuously perform confirmation of setting values and maintenance during setting confirmation. can be done.

An initialization command (change/start) is received as a condition for displaying on the main display device 210 the maintenance menu screen during setting change corresponding to maintenance during setting change among the maintenances that can be performed on the gaming machine of Modification 1. It includes a reception condition of Based on the establishment of the reception condition, the main display device 210 displays, as a maintenance menu screen, a setting-changing maintenance menu screen corresponding to setting-changing maintenance, which is a part of a plurality of types of maintenance that can be performed in the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the displayed information and make the maintenance menu screen easier to see.

Also, even if the main CPU 101 recognizes that the setting key-shaped switch 52 is in the ON state due to some trouble or fraud, the upper door mechanism UD is closed and the lower door mechanism DD is closed. If so, the main control circuit 71 does not transmit the initialization command (change/start) to the sub-control circuit 72, and the sub CPU 201 determines that it has received the initialization command (change/start). For this reason, the main CPU 101 recognizes that the setting key-type switch 52 is in the ON state when the power is turned on due to some trouble or some kind of fraud, and the sub CPU 201 displays the maintenance menu screen during setting change. can be prevented from being displayed on the main display device 210 .

In addition to the conditions for displaying the setting change maintenance menu screen on the main display device 210, in addition to the reception condition of receiving an initialization command (change/start), the door mechanisms (upper door mechanism UD, lower door mechanism DD ) is the closed state. Therefore, even if the sub CPU 201 recognizes that it has received the initialization command (change/start) due to some trouble or fraud, the combination of the upper door mechanism UD in the closed state and the lower door mechanism DD in the closed state will not occur. If it is recognized that it is other than that, it is possible to prevent the maintenance menu screen during setting change from being displayed on the main display device 210 .

In addition, the initialization command (confirmation/start) is set as a condition for displaying the setting change maintenance menu screen corresponding to the setting confirmation maintenance among the maintenances that can be performed on the gaming machine of the modified example 1 on the main display device 210. It includes a receive condition to receive. Based on the establishment of the reception condition, a maintenance menu screen is displayed on the main display device 210, and a setting corresponding to maintenance during setting confirmation, which is a part of a plurality of types of maintenance that can be performed in the game machine and is different from maintenance during setting change. Since the confirmation maintenance menu screen is displayed, it is possible to reduce the displayed information and make the maintenance menu screen easier to see.

Also, even if the main CPU 101 recognizes that the setting key-type switch 52 has changed from the OFF state to the ON state after the power is turned on due to some trouble or some kind of fraud, the upper door mechanism UD is closed and the lower door mechanism DD is closed. If the state is recognized, the initialization command (confirm/start) is not transmitted from the main control circuit 71 to the sub-control circuit 72, and it is determined that the sub CPU 201 has received the initialization command (confirm/start). For this reason, the main CPU 101 recognizes that the setting key-type switch 52 has changed from the off state to the on state after the power is turned on due to some kind of malfunction or some kind of fraud. It is possible to prevent the menu screen from being displayed on the main display device 210 .

In addition, the reception condition of receiving the initialization command (confirmation/start) is included in the display condition of the maintenance menu screen during setting confirmation on the main display device 210, but the door after the initialization command (confirmation/start) is received Changes in the open/close state of the mechanisms (upper door mechanism UD, lower door mechanism DD) are not included. Therefore, by making the display conditions of the maintenance menu screens different between a predetermined maintenance menu screen and a specific maintenance menu screen, it is possible to easily understand which maintenance menu screen is being used for maintenance. can.

In addition, by preparing a setting changing maintenance menu screen based on the reception of the initialization command (change/start) and a setting confirmation maintenance menu screen based on the reception of the initialization command (confirmation/start), one maintenance menu can be configured. It is possible to reduce the number of maintenance items displayed on the screen (maintenance menu screen during setting change, maintenance menu screen during setting confirmation). Maintenance (maintenance during setting change, maintenance during setting confirmation) can be easily performed.

In addition, when the setting is changed while both the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are closed, the key type switch 52 for setting is opened when the door key originally possessed by the store is not used. It is conceivable that the setting key-type switch 52 is operated by opening a hole in the cabinet of the game machine and operating the setting key-type switch 52. Even if it recognizes that the mold switch 52 is in the ON state, it recognizes that both the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are in the closed state. can be prevented from changing.

In addition, it recognizes that the state of the setting key-type switch 52 has changed from the off state to the on state after the power is turned on due to the act of opening a hole in the cabinet of the game machine and operating the setting key switch as described above. Even if it is closed, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being displayed (the setting value is confirmed) by tampering by recognizing that both the upper door mechanism DD and the lower door mechanism UD are in the closed state.

Also, by checking the light emission state of the light emitting means (for example, LED) arranged corresponding to the bet button (for example, MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b), the attendant can confirm that the gaming machine is in the setting change state (power supply Step S1001 becomes YES in the setting change processing of FIG. 61 performed at the time of power-on, step S1002 becomes YES, and step S1014 becomes YES after a state change of the reset switch 53 is accepted and the setting value can be changed. It can be grasped that it is in the state until

According to this, maintenance related to speaker output confirmation (speaker confirmation) and maintenance related to operation confirmation of the effect button 10a (effect button confirmation) are performed in parallel, thereby shortening the work time for maintenance during setting change by the staff. can do.

In addition, by setting the maximum sound volume that can be set by the player, it is possible to prevent the problem of sound volume that may occur between players. In the setting change processing of FIG. 61, which is performed when the power is turned on, step S1001 becomes YES and step S1002 becomes YES, and the state change of the reset switch 53 is accepted and the set value can be changed. By setting the standard volume that can be set, the standard volume desired by the store can be automatically set after these cases occur.

Further, on the main control board 71 side, either step S1001 becomes NO or step S1002 becomes NO in the setting change processing of FIG. If it is not possible to change the settings, the standard volume will not be set. It is possible to prevent the player from having to perform troublesome work such as resetting the volume.

[11-8-7. Modification of gaming machine of modification 1 of third gaming machine]
The gaming machine of Modification 1 described above may be modified, for example, as shown in (A) to (E) below.

(A) During setting change maintenance processing, step S1110 is deleted from the during setting change maintenance processing of FIG. It may be set to step S1111. In the modified setting-changing maintenance process, unlike the setting-changing maintenance process of FIG. 63, once the setting-changing maintenance screen (FIG. 66) is displayed, the setting-changing maintenance screen is displayed until the setting-changing maintenance process ends. (FIG. 66) is continued. As a result, the state of the game machine in which maintenance can be performed during the setting change is increased, and it is possible to provide convenience to the attendant regarding the implementation of the maintenance.

(B) In the gaming machine of Modified Example 1, there are three combinations of the above-mentioned (door opening/closing combination 1) to (door opening/closing combination 3) as combinations of the open/close state of the upper door mechanism UD and the open/close state of the lower door mechanism DD. However, it is not limited to this, and for example, the above-described (door opening/closing combination 1) to (door opening/closing combination 3) and (door opening/closing combination 4) the upper door mechanism UD in the open state (open state) and the lower door mechanism DD may be in a closed state (closed state) in four ways. In this case, the processes of FIGS. 61 to 64 may be, for example, the following (B-1) and (B-2).

(B-1) In the setting change process of FIG. 61, the determination process in step S1001 is performed by determining that the upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u is in the OFF state (upper door closed) and the lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d is in the OFF state (lower door closed). It is not determined that the upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u is off (upper door is closed) and the lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d is off (lower door is closed). If it is determined that the upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u is off (upper door closed) and the lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d is off (lower door closed), the setting change process is executed. It may terminate and return to the caller. Also, in the setting confirmation processing of FIG. 62, the determination processing in step S1052 is performed by determining whether the upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u is in the OFF state (upper door closed) and the lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d is in the OFF state (lower door closed). If it is not determined that the upper door open/close monitoring switch 56u is off (upper door is closed) and the lower door open/close monitoring switch 56d is off (lower door is closed), step The process proceeds to S1053, and if it is determined that the upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u is off (upper door closed) and the lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d is off (lower door closed), the setting confirmation process is terminated. It may be arranged to return to the caller. Also, in the setting change maintenance process of FIG. If it is not determined that the upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u is off (upper door is closed) and the lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d is off (lower door is closed). When it is determined that the upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u is off (upper door closed) and the lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d is off (lower door closed), the process proceeds to step S1111. You may proceed. Note that in the maintenance process during setting change in FIG. 63, the determination process in step S1105 may not be changed.

(B-2) Details of determination processing in step S1001 of setting change processing in FIG. 61, details of determination processing in step S1052 of setting confirmation processing in FIG. 62, determination processing in step S1105 of maintenance processing during setting change in FIG. The setting change process in FIG. 61, the setting confirmation process in FIG. 62, and the maintenance process during setting change in FIG. 63 may be used as they are without changing the contents of the determination process in step S1110.

(C) In FIGS. 61 to 63, the lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d is turned on when the lower door mechanism DD is open and turned off when the lower door mechanism DD is closed. Although the switch is turned on when the lower door mechanism DD is open and turned off when it is closed, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to target a switch that is turned on when the upper door mechanism UD is closed and turned off when the upper door mechanism UD is opened. In this case, in FIGS. In the portion relating to the monitoring switch 56d and the portion relating to the upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u, "on state" should be replaced with "off state", and "on state" should be replaced with "off state".

(D) When the sub CPU 201 displays a setting changing screen for notifying that the setting is being changed on the main display device 210, the sub CPU 201 simultaneously displays a message such as "When the door is closed, the maintenance menu will be displayed." You may make it display. Further, it may be possible to notify that the maintenance menu will be displayed when the door is closed by voice output from the speakers 35a to 35d.

(E) During setting confirmation maintenance The maintenance during setting confirmation that can be performed in the processing is not limited to the above, and may include, for example, (E-1) light intensity setting. For example, in the light intensity setting, the maximum light intensity setting that sets the maximum light intensity that the player can set, and the standard light intensity that is set when the game is not played for a certain period of time or when the setting is changed are set, similar to the "maximum/standard volume setting". A standard amount of light to be used may be provided.

(E-2) Maintenance During Setting Confirmation As maintenance during setting confirmation that can be performed in the processing during confirmation, a setting for disabling sound volume switching may be provided so that the player cannot set the sound volume. When the player cannot set the volume by setting the volume switch disabled, it is preferable not to display the item "volume setting" 210d3 on the user menu screen.

[11-8-8. Note]
In a conventional game machine, an attendant uses a setting key to turn on a setting key-type switch (setting key switch) and then turns on the power, or an attendant uses the setting key while the power is turned on. There is a game machine in which a maintenance menu screen related to maintenance that can be performed in the game machine is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in conjunction with turning on a setting key-type switch (setting key switch). (For example, see JP-A-2018-183205 (eg, paragraphs 0997 to 1059, FIGS. 132 to 137, etc.)).

By the way, there is a wide variety of maintenance that can be performed in a game machine, and considering the efficiency of maintenance, there is room for improvement in the current processing control of maintenance.

The gaming machine described in the appendix has been made in view of these points, and aims to provide a gaming machine with improved processing control of maintenance that can be performed in the gaming machine.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine according to the appendix, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

The game machine (1) according to the supplementary note is
display means (210);
maintenance processing means ( 201 ) for performing maintenance processing related to maintenance that can be performed in the game machine;
In the maintenance processing, the maintenance processing means displays a maintenance menu screen on the display means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and performs predetermined maintenance, which is a part of a plurality of types of maintenance that can be performed on the gaming machine. Carry out a predetermined maintenance process for displaying a corresponding predetermined maintenance menu screen (Fig. 63 or Fig . 64 )
It is characterized by

According to this, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a predetermined maintenance menu screen corresponding to predetermined maintenance, which is a part of a plurality of types of maintenance that can be performed in the gaming machine, is displayed on the display means as a maintenance menu screen. Since it is displayed, it is possible to reduce the displayed information and make the maintenance menu screen easier to see.

The gaming machine (2) is the gaming machine (1) described above,
In the maintenance processing, the maintenance processing means is a part of a plurality of types of maintenance that can be performed in the game machine as the maintenance menu screen on the display means based on the establishment of a specific condition, and the predetermined maintenance processing is performed. perform specific maintenance processing for displaying a specific maintenance menu screen corresponding to specific maintenance different from the maintenance of (Fig. 64 or Fig. 63)
may be

According to this, based on the establishment of a specific condition, a maintenance menu screen is displayed on the display means, which is a part of a plurality of types of maintenance that can be performed in the game machine, and corresponds to specific maintenance different from the predetermined maintenance. Since a specific maintenance menu screen is displayed, it is possible to reduce the displayed information and make the maintenance menu screen easier to see. Further, a predetermined maintenance menu screen corresponding to predetermined maintenance displayed based on establishment of predetermined conditions and a specific maintenance menu screen corresponding to specific maintenance displayed based on establishment of specific conditions are prepared. By doing so, the number of maintenance items displayed on one maintenance menu screen (predetermined maintenance menu screen, specific maintenance menu screen) can be reduced, and the staff can use the predetermined maintenance menu screen or the specific maintenance menu screen. You can easily perform the maintenance you want to perform.

The game machine (3) is the above game machine (1) or the above game machine (2),
a door mechanism (DD) attached to the main body of the game machine so that it can be opened and closed;
and open/close detection means (56d) for detecting the open/closed state of the door mechanism,
The maintenance processing means, in the predetermined maintenance processing,
Even if the predetermined condition is satisfied, if the detection result by the opening/closing detection means indicates that the door mechanism is open, the predetermined maintenance menu screen is not displayed on the display means (S1101, S1101 is YES, S1105, S1105 is NO),
When the predetermined condition is satisfied and the detection result by the opening/closing detection means indicates that the door mechanism is closed, the predetermined maintenance menu screen is displayed on the display means (S1101, S1101 is YES, S1105, S1105 is YES, S1106)
may be

According to this, even if the maintenance processing means recognizes that the predetermined condition is established due to some trouble or fraud, if it recognizes that the door mechanism is in the open state, the predetermined maintenance menu screen is displayed. can be prevented from being displayed on the display means.

The gaming machine (4) is the gaming machine (3) subordinate to the gaming machine (2),
In the specific maintenance process, if the specific condition is satisfied, the maintenance processing means displays the specific maintenance menu screen on the display means without using a change in the open/closed state of the door mechanism as a condition. Display (S1151, S1151 is YES, S1152)
may be

According to this, by making the display condition of the maintenance menu screen different between the predetermined maintenance screen and the specific maintenance screen, it is possible to easily understand which maintenance is being performed.

The gaming machine (5) is the gaming machine (3) or the gaming machine (4),
Another door mechanism (UD) attached to the game machine main body so as to be freely opened and closed,
another opening/closing detection means (56u) for detecting the opening/closing state of the other door mechanism;
a setting value storage unit (103) for storing a setting value indicating the degree of the player's advantage in a game;
setting value changing means (101) for performing setting value change processing (FIG. 61) related to changing the setting values stored in the setting value storage unit;
a setting key switch (52);
A set value change switch (53) and
The predetermined condition is that the state of the setting key switch is in a state that permits the change of the set value when the power is turned on, and that the door mechanism and the other door mechanism are in a combination of open/closed states that can be taken. a combination other than a combination in which the detection result by the opening/closing detection means is the closed state of the door mechanism and the detection result by the other opening/closing detection means is the closed state of the other door mechanism;
The setting value changing means, in the setting value changing process,
The set value is changed based on the state change of the set value change switch (S1001, S1001: YES, S1002, S1002: YES, S1004 to 1010),
If the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the set value is not changed based on the state change of the set value change switch (NO in S1001 and S1001, NO in S1002 and S1002).
may be

The state in which the setting is changed while both the door mechanism and other door mechanisms are closed is considered to be the state in which the setting key switch is operated while the door key originally possessed by the store is not being used. It is conceivable that there is a possibility that a hole is made in the cabinet of the game machine and the setting key switch is operated. Even if it recognizes that the state of is a state in which the change of the set value is permitted, by recognizing that both the door mechanism and other door mechanisms are in the closed state, the change of the set value due to the act of goto is prevented. can be prevented.

The gaming machine (6) is the gaming machine (3) subordinate to the gaming machine (2) or the gaming machine (4),
other display means (14);
Another door mechanism (UD) attached to the game machine main body so as to be freely opened and closed,
another opening/closing detection means (56u) for detecting the opening/closing state of the other door mechanism;
a setting value storage unit (103) for storing a setting value indicating the degree of the player's advantage in a game;
setting value display means (101) for performing setting value display processing (FIG. 61) relating to display of the setting values stored in the setting value storage unit on the other display means;
Equipped with a setting key switch and
The specific condition is that the state of the setting key switch changes to a state that permits display of the set value on the other display means after the power is turned on, and the door mechanism and the other door mechanism. of the combinations of open/closed states that can be taken by said open/close detecting means, a combination other than the combination in which the detection result by said open/close detection means is the closed state of said door mechanism and the detection result by said other open/close detection means is said other door mechanism is in the closed state. is to be
The setting value display means, in the setting value display process,
displaying on the other display means related to the set value when the specific condition is satisfied (YES in S1051 and S1051, YES in S1052 and S1052, S1054);
When the specific condition is not satisfied, the setting value is not displayed on the other display means (NO in S1051 and S1051, NO in S1052 and S1052).
may be

According to this, the state of the setting key switch allows the setting value to be displayed on other display means after the power is turned on by the act of opening the hole in the cabinet of the game machine and operating the setting key switch as described above. By recognizing that both the door mechanism and the other door mechanisms are in the closed state even if it is recognized that the state has changed, it is possible to prevent the display of the set value due to the tampering.

The game machine (7) is any one of the game machine (1) to the game machine (6) above,
a bet button (6a or 6b) used by the player to set the number of bets in the game;
a light emitting means corresponding to the bet button;
further comprising light emission control means (101) for controlling light emission of the light emission means,
The light emission control means may use light emission control of the light emission means that is different from light emission control of the light emission means in a playable state based on the establishment of the predetermined condition.

According to this, by confirming the light emitting state of the light emitting means corresponding to the bet button, the attendant can grasp that the gaming machine is in a state where the predetermined condition is satisfied.

The game machine (8) is any one of the game machine (1) to the game machine (7),
speakers (35a to 35d);
further comprising a production button (10a) for receiving a player's production operation,
The predetermined maintenance includes at least a first predetermined maintenance (210b1) regarding confirmation of the output of the speaker and a second predetermined maintenance (210b3) regarding operation confirmation of the production button,
The maintenance processing means may be capable of performing the second predetermined maintenance while the first predetermined maintenance is being performed.

According to this, the work time for the predetermined maintenance by the clerk can be shortened by performing the first predetermined maintenance regarding the confirmation of the output of the speaker and the second predetermined maintenance regarding the operation confirmation of the effect button in parallel. can be done.

The gaming machine (9) is the gaming machine (2), or the gaming machine (3) subordinate to the gaming machine (2), the gaming machine (4), or the gaming machine ( 6),
Further comprising speakers (35a to 35d),
The specific maintenance includes a first specific maintenance (210c1b) relating to the setting of the maximum volume of the speaker that can be set by the player, and the setting of the standard volume used as the output volume of the speaker upon establishment of a special condition. and a second specific maintenance (210c1c) relating to

According to this, by setting the maximum sound volume that can be set by the player, it is possible to prevent the sound volume problem that may occur between the players, and the standard sound volume that can be set when a special condition is satisfied. By setting, when a special condition is satisfied, the volume desired by the store can be automatically set.

The gaming machine (10) is the gaming machine (9) described above,
Further comprising output volume setting means (201) for setting the volume output from the speaker,
The output volume setting means newly sets the output of the speaker to the standard volume if the predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, and the predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. If not, the output of the speaker may not be newly set to the standard volume.

According to this, if the predetermined conditions are not satisfied when the power is turned on, the standard volume will not be set, so in the event that it is necessary to turn off the power once in order to handle a power failure or error, the player can , it is possible to prevent the player from having to perform troublesome work such as resetting the set sound volume to the one before the power failure occurred.

According to the gaming machine according to the supplementary note, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with improved processing control of maintenance that can be performed in the gaming machine.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention.

For example, in each of the above-described embodiments, slot machines have been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and can be applied to other gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Also, the contents of the above embodiment and the above modifications can be combined as appropriate.

The present embodiment can be widely applied to game machines installed in game arcades such as game shops.

52 ... Setting key switch (setting key switch)
53 ... reset switch (set value change switch)
56u: upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d: lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 71: main control board 100: main control circuit 101: main CPU
103 Main RAM
72 ... sub-control board 200 ... sub-control circuit 201 ... sub-CPU
203 Sub-RAM

Claims (1)

In gaming machines,
display means;
A door mechanism attached to the main body of the game machine so that it can be opened and closed,
open/close detection means for detecting an open/closed state of the door mechanism;
a setting key switch,
an operation means provided in the door mechanism and operable from the front side of the game machine;
maintenance processing means for performing maintenance processing related to maintenance that can be performed in the game machine;
a speaker;
a production button for receiving a player's production operation;
with
The maintenance processing means
In the maintenance process, a maintenance menu screen is displayed on the display means in the amusement machine based on the establishment of a predetermined condition that the door mechanism is in an open state and the setting key-type switch is on when the power is turned on. Predetermined maintenance that is part of a plurality of types of maintenance that can be performed and that includes at least a first predetermined maintenance regarding confirmation of the output of the speaker and a second predetermined maintenance regarding confirmation of the operation of the production button. performing a predetermined maintenance process for displaying a predetermined maintenance menu screen corresponding to maintenance,
In the maintenance process, the maintenance menu screen is displayed on the display means based on the establishment of a specific condition that the setting key-type switch is changed from off to on after the power is turned on and the door mechanism is in an open state. as a part of a plurality of types of maintenance that can be performed in the game machine, and performing specific maintenance processing including processing for displaying a specific maintenance menu screen corresponding to specific maintenance different from the predetermined maintenance , terminating the specific maintenance process when a condition is satisfied that the setting key-shaped switch is turned off during execution of the specific maintenance process;
In the change in the opening/closing state of the door mechanism, there is no change in the process from the display of the specific maintenance menu screen to the end of the specific maintenance process in the specific maintenance process,
There is no overlapping maintenance between the predetermined maintenance menu screen and the specific maintenance menu screen,
In the predetermined maintenance process, even if the predetermined condition is satisfied, after the predetermined condition is satisfied, the detection result by the opening/closing detection means does not indicate the closed state of the door mechanism, and the door mechanism is opened. if it remains in the state, the predetermined maintenance menu screen is not displayed on the display means;
In the predetermined maintenance process, the predetermined condition is satisfied, and after the predetermined condition is satisfied, the detection result by the opening/closing detection means indicates that the door mechanism is closed while the setting key-type switch is kept on. When it becomes , the predetermined maintenance menu screen is displayed on the display means,
When the predetermined maintenance menu screen is displayed, the predetermined maintenance can be executed according to an operation on the operation means,
The gaming machine, wherein the maintenance processing means is capable of executing the second predetermined maintenance during execution of the first predetermined maintenance.

Images